Full text of "Undergraduate catalog"

See other formats

Digitized by the Internet Archive

in 2009 with funding from

Lyrasis IVIembers and Sloan Foundation

http://www.archive.org/details/undergraduatecat1976indi

"^d hoT CiiicmJ^t^^

\am

SQEIQ

lUP

THIS BULLETIN CONTAINS ANNOUNCEMENTS OF COURSES FOR THE ACADEMIC YEARS
1976-78. lUP RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REPEAL, CHANGE, OR AMEND THE RULES, REGU-
LATIONS AND COURSES CONTAINED IN THIS BULLETIN AT ANY TIME. TUITION AND FEES
ARE ALSO SUBJECT TO CHANGE.

INDIANA UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA IS ACCREDITED BY THE NATIONAL COUNCIL
FOR ACCREDITATION OF TEACHER EDUCATION AND THE MIDDLE STATES ASSOCIATION OF
COLLEGES AND SECONDARY SCHOOLS.

INDIANA UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA IS COMMITTED TO AFFIRMATIVE ACTION AND
PROVIDES EQUAL EDUCATION AND EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITIES UNDER TITLE IX.

Indiana University of Pennsylvania Bulletin
1976-1978 Undergraduate Catalog

INDIANA UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA
INDIANA, PENNSYLVANIA 15701

VER BY; KATHY BUSER 77 TELEPHONE; (412) 357-2100

2 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Table of Contents

UNIVERSITY CALENDAR

THE UNIVERSITY

ADMISSION AND REGISTRATION

FINANCES

ACADEMIC POLICIES

STUDENT LIFE AND SERVICES

REQUIREMENTS FOR GRADUATION

THE SCHOOL OF ARTS AND SCIENCES

THE SCHOOL OF BUSINESS

161

THE SCHOOL OF CONTINUING EDUCATION

175

THE SCHOOL OF EDUCATION

183

THE SCHOOLOF FINE ARTS

205

THE GRADUATE SCHOOL

218

THE SCHOOL OF HEALTH SERVICES

219

THE SCHOOL OF HOME ECONOMICS

239

MILITARY SCIENCE

252

DIRECTORY

256

r^0.30. /

University Calendar — 3

University Calendar

FALL SEMESTER -1976

Registration Wed.-Fri. Sept. 8-10

Classes begin Sat. Sept. 1 1

Thanksgiving recess begins

at close of classes Wed. Nov. 24

Classes resume at 8:00 a.m Mon. Nov. 29

Final Examinations Fri.— Wed. Dec. 17—22

FALL SEMESTER - 1977

Registration Tues.— Thur.

Classes begin Fri.

Thanksgiving recess begins

at close of classes Wed.

Classes resume at 8:00 a.m Mon.

Final Examinations Sat.— Thur.

Sept. 6

-8

Sept

Nov.

Dec. 17-

SPRING SEMESTER - 1977

Registration Wed.-Fri. Jan. 19-21

Classes begin Sat. Jan. 22

Spring-Easter vacation begins

at close of classes Sat. Mar. 26

Classes resume at 8:00 a.m Mon. Apr. 1 1

Final Examinations Sat.— Fri. May 14—20

Graduation Sun. May 22

SPRING SEMESTER - 1978

Registration Wed.-Fri. Jan. 18-20

Classes begin Sat. Jan. 21

Spring-Easter vacation begins

at close of classes Mon. Mar. 20

Classes resume at 8:00 a.m Mon. Apr. 3

Final Examinations Sat.— Fri. May 13—19

Graduation Sun. May 21

The University — 5

PURPOSES OF THE UNIVERSITY

As a multipurpose institution, Indiana University of Pennsyl-
vania encompasses the Schools of Arts and Sciences, Busi-
ness, Continuing and Non-Resident Education, Education,
Health Services, Home Economics, Fine Arts and the Gradu-
ate School. Indiana University of Pennsylvania endeavors to
fulfill the primary purposes of education as stated by Alfred
North Whitehead, namely, "To stimulate and guide student
self-development" so the student learns how to make a living
and how to live.

As Emerson noted in his Journal over a hundred years ago,
"The things taught in schools and colleges are not an
education but the means of education." At Indiana Univer-
sity of Pennsylvania, these "means of education" comprise a
variety of factors. First, there is a pervasive, intellectual
climate designed to stimulate the student's imagination,
stretch his mind, and extend his tolerance as he rubs minds
with new ideas, teachers, and associates in the classroom,
laboratory, and library. These intellectual contacts also tend
to develop critical independent judgments, mental discipline,
and the ability to make mature decisions.

The various curricula provide the student with a broad
perspective enabling him to appreciate his cultural heritage
and affording him the opportunity to pursue in considerable
depth his particular sphere of interest. Such a comprehensive
program inevitably includes some knowledge that is worth
having, not for any material gain, but simply because it
enriches one's existence.

The University

Undergirding the entire academic program is the philosophy
that in the final analysis there is no education except
self-education. Consequently, the faculty strive to whet
intellectual appetites and to inculcate the problem-solving
approach, so that the student will acquire both the desire
and the ability to teach himself. In this way. Commence-
ment truly will become the beginning of "life-long learning."

In addition to enabling students to acquire professional skills
and enrich their cultural existence, the University endeavors
to instill in each student a social consciousness, which will
make him a contributive and substantive member of society,
for as de Tocqueville emphasized, we cannot have a strong
democratic society without a good quality of citizenship.
This attribute of good citizenship accrues partly from aca-
demic study and partly as a result of the social mores and
associations which one encounters and experiences in college.

Intertwined with the goal to increase the student's social
awareness and consideration for his fellow men is the
development of moral fibre. General Omar N. Bradley is
duly disturbed by the fact that "ours is a world of nuclear
giants and ethical infants." Indiana University of Pennsyl-
vania firmly believes that no education, regardless of its
academic excellence, can fulfill its true potential unless
students are inspired and guided by spiritual values and
moral considerations.

Admittedly the University cannot succeed in realizing all of
these goals; however, even this is part of the dynamic

6 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

educational process of becoming rather than attaining.
This University welcomes qualified students, faculty, and
staff from all racial, religious, ethnic, and socio-economic
backgrounds.

HISTORY OF THE UNIVERSITY

Throughout the entire history of the University at Indiana,
great emphasis has been placed on maintaining high academic
standards and providing adequate facilities conducive to
individual and group growth. The present record and reputa-
tion enjoyed by the University have evolved during a
century's history. Growing out of the need for a teacher
training institution in Western Pennsylvania, the General
Assembly passed an act in the legislative session of 1871
granting aid for the establishment of a Normal School in the
Ninth District, at Indiana.

The first building, named John Sutton Hall in honor of the
first president of the Board of Trustees, was completed and
opened for students on May 17, 1875.

The steady growth of the institution has caused a continuous
expansion in its building program and many new buildings
have followed John Sutton Hall. The size and natural beauty
of the University campus offer ample opportunity for recrea-
tion in an environment conducive to personal enjoyment.
The main campus of the University, originally consisting of 12
acres with one building, is now composed of a total of 106
acres on which are located 59 principal halls, 20 other build-

ings, and seven athletic fields. The University Lodge, located a
few miles from Indiana and surrounded by 280 acres of
wooded hillside, offers opportunity for nature study and
numerous University activities.

In April, 1920, control and ownership of the school passed
to the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania. In May, 1927, by
authority of the General Assembly, the State Normal School
became a college, with the right to grant degrees. The name
was then changed to the State Teachers College at Indiana,
Pennsylvania. In 1950 the ROTC Program was established.
The name of the institution was changed again, in 1960, to
Indiana State College, setting the stage for a liberal arts
program which graduated its first students in January, 1964.

In December, 1965, Indiana was redesignated the Indiana
University of Pennsylvania and given the right to expand its
curricula offerings and to grant degrees at the master's level,
as well as in a number of additional areas at the doctoral
level.

Since the founding of the University in 1875, Indiana has
graduated over 40,000 students, and since the University
became a degree-conferring institution in 1927, 30,000 degrees
have been granted. Many of the graduates are organized into a
strong Alumni Association, with units active in many sections
of Pennsylvania, as well as in New York, Michigan, and the
District of Columbia. The Alumni Association cooperates with
the University in many projects designed to better the institu-
tion and for the welfare of the students.

The University - 7

ACCREDITATION

The Indiana University of Pennsylvania is a state-owned and
state-controlled institution for higher education. It is a
multi-purpose institution, composed of eight schools.
The University is an approved and fully accredited member of
the Middle States Association of Colleges and Secondary
Schools, the National Council for the Accreditation of Teacher
Education and the American Chemical Society. The fact that
this University is a member of these organizations is of
immediate personal importance to the individual student in
two ways: first, the student may transfer college credits from
one approved institution to another without loss in case he
finds it necessary to change colleges; and second, the student
who is a graduate of an approved institution is eligible for a
better position.

LOCATION

Located in Indiana Borough, Indiana County seat, in the
foothills of the Alleghenies at an elevation of about 1,300
feet, the Indiana University of Pennsylvania is ideally situ-
ated for cleanliness and beauty. The University is easily
accessible by automobile over excellent state highway routes
coming from all sections of the state. These leading routes
are Route 422 east and west. Route 286 northeast and
southwest, and Route 119 north and south. Bus passenger
services operate on frequent schedules to and from Indiana
and all nearby cities and towns, including Pittsburgh,
Altoona, Johnstown, Butler, Punxsutawney, Kittanning,

DuBois, Ridgway, New Castle and others. Indiana is also
served by bus connections with the main line of the
Pennsylvania Railroad at Johnstown and Pittsburgh.

BUILDINGS AND GROUNDS

The campus at Indiana is frequently described as one of the
most beautiful in the state. Located in the borough of
Indiana, the main campus contains a total of 106 acres and
includes 79 major buildings. In the center of the campus
is the historic Oak Grove, about which are grouped many of
the main buildings, forming three sides of a quadrangle.

COMPUTER CENTER

The Computer Center, established in July, 1963, is located on
the ground floor of Stright Hall. The Center provides
computational support for undergraduate and graduate
courses, faculty and student research, and the administrative
requirements of the University. The computing capacity of the
Center is provided by a large-scale disk oriented central
processor which supports both time-sharing and batch pro-
cessing services for the university community. Typewriter
terminals, located both in the Computer Center and in various
departments on campus, permit the use of the computer on a
time-sharing basis. Terminal facilities and a full complement of
tabulating equipment are available in the Computer Center for
student use. Additional terminal facilities are also available in
many departments on campus. Aid in the use of the computer
and facilities may be obtained from user assistants on duty at

8 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

the Computer Center, and fronn the Center's professional staff.

Indiana's Computer Center plays an active part in the daily
functioning of the University. It is the principle laboratory
facility for computer-oriented courses and is used as a
teaching aid in many classes involving statistical and numeri-
cal analyses and computer simulations. The staff at the
Center is actively involved in continuing work aimed at
making computers a more effective and readily accessible
tool for both the academic and administrative segments of
the university community.

STABLEY LIBRARY

The Rhodes R. Stabley Library was completed in the spring of
1961. The three story, air-conditioned building provides study
room for about 550 students. Together with annex facilities in
other campus buildings, it houses 400,000 volumes.

An instructional program in the use of library tools and
reference books is presented by the staff to develop skills in
library use. The well-organized general holding is enhanced by
the reference collection, 2630 current magazines, extensive
files of bound magazines, 760,000 units of microforms, 7160
filmstrips and 4000 recordings.

INSTRUCTIONAL RESOURCES SERVICES

The University support service dealing with instructional
systems technology has been developed to assist in the
teaching/learning process by making available sensory or
non-book materials for instruction and actively assisting
faculty in the process of instructional development.

The services consist of the research and development of
instructional systems such as dial access, student response, FM
radio, closed-circuit as well as community Cable TV, and
personal self-instructional materials. In addition, the services
provide photographic, sound recording and reproduction,
design and production of conventional instructional materials;
procurement, inventory, and maintenance of University multi-
media equipment and materials; developing and maintaining a
16mm film library; and assisting in technical consultative
services dealing with sensory materials to the administration,
instructional staff, students, and community.

Although the media equipment and materials are primarily
located in the academic departments, the service center with
the exception of maintenance, is housed in the lower floor of
Davis Hall. It is estimated that the University media inventory
is worth well over a half million dollars.

Most materials are available by the "open stack" system which
encourages the habit of using books freely.

Admission and Registration — 9

Admission and Registration

ADMISSIONS POLICY

Any graduate of an accredited four-year high school or
holder of GED equivalency diploma is qualified to apply for
admission to I UP. Prospective students who have completed
the third year of high school may file an application
beginning the following July 1. Applications filed before
completion of the junior year will be returned to the sender.

Requests for application papers and catalogs should be
addressed to:

The Admissions Office

Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Indiana, Pennsylvania 15701

Applicants are approved on the basis of an examination of
high school records, recommendations of high school princi-
pals and guidance counselors and scores made on the College
Board Aptitude tests or the American College Testing Pro-
gram. A University Admissions Committee establishes policy
and approves or rejects applications.

Although the University does not require a specific number
of high school credits in certain subject matter fields, it does
strongly urge all applicants to take the usual college prepara-
tory program in high school. Applicants should also take all
available work offered in the field in which they plan to
major.

10 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Applicants are expected to name their major field upon
application, but a change in major can be made during the
freshman year without loss of credit. A change of major
after the freshman year usually entails a loss of credit and
results in a program of more than 4 years to satisfy
graduation requirements.

APPLICATION FEE

A CHECK or MONEY ORDER (cash will not be accepted)
for $10.00, payable to the Indiana University of Pennsyl-
vania must accompany each application. This fee is non-
refundable and will be used to meet the cost of filing and
processing applications.

The application form, the $10 application fee and the high
school transcript must be mailed to: The Business Office,
Indiana University of Pennsylvania, Indiana, Pennsylvania
15701.

FRESHMAN APPLICANTS

The Scholastic Aptitude Test

All persons expecting to apply for admission as a freshman
student should plan to take the Scholastic Aptitude Test
("College Boards") on or before the November test date of
the senior year of high school. The Admissions Committee
recommends that the applicant first take the test in the
spring of the junior year because the application, if com-

plete, may receive early consideration in the fall of the
senior year. If applicant has an excellent high school record
and strong College Boards scores, the application for admis-
sion may be approved by November 1 of the senior year.
Whether or not the applicant takes the College Boards in the
junior year, it is recommended that the College Boards also be
taken no later than the November testing date of the senior
year. The Admissions Committee gives the applicant the
benefit of the highest total Board scores from all test dates. It
is, therefore, in many instances, to the applicant's advantage to
take the Boards in the senior year. However, the Committee
will use the Boards completed in the junior year if the senior
Boards are not available at the time Admissions decisions are
being made.

The applicant should arrange to take the College Boards
through the high school principal or guidance counselor, or, by
writing to the College Entrance Examination Board, Box 592,
Princeton, New Jersey 08540 for an information pamphlet and
test application. lUP will accept the test battery of the
American College Testing Program (ACT) in lieu of College
Boards (SAT).

When the applicant receives the information and test applica-
tion, he/she should fill out the test application and designate
Indiana University of Pennsylvania as one of the schools
he/she desires to receive a copy of the test scores. The test
application is to be returned to the Princeton, New Jersey,
address.

Freshman application deadline for Indiana Campus is Dec. 1;
deadlines for the Branch Campuses varies from year to year.

Admission and Registration — 1 1

The Admission Application

Applications for admission will be available after June 1
following the student's junior year of high school.

The applicant may fill out and submit the application and
accompanying forms to the guidance counselor after July 1
of the summer following completion of the junior year. The
deadline for applications for early consideration is October

1. The final freshman application deadline for the Indiana
Campus is December 1. The freshman application deadline for
the branch campuses varies from year to year. These deadlines
apply for both semesters of the subsequent year. Limited
housing and classroom facilities make the above closure date
necessary.

The applicant should give the completed application form
and the $10 application fee to his/her high school principal
or guidance counselor for completion of the high school
record portion of the application. The principal or counselor
must then mail the complete packet of admissions materials
to the Business Office, Indiana University of Pennsylvania,
Indiana, Pennsylvania 15701.

The student's application is complete when the Admissions
Committee receives the Junior College Board and/or Senior
College Board or ACT test results, the high school record,
the completed application form, and the application fee. In
some cases the Committee may request additional informa-
tion, such as a list of senior year subjects or a senior grade
report.

Processing the Application

(1) The Admissions Committee reviews, with care and
understanding, each of the several thousand applications that
are submitted each year.

(2) Those persons who, in the Committee's judgment, satisfy
the standards for early admission will receive notification by
November 1 of their senior year. Decisions on most applica-
tions are deferred until later in the year. Final action on a
completed application takes from 8 to 16 weeks, depending
on the number of applications that must be processed. This
delay is necessary if each application is to be examined
carefully. Applicants who are not given early admission can
expect a decision by January 15 of their senior year.

(3) The applicant who is admitted to an entering class is
required to visit the campus on an appointed date to discuss
his/her academic and career plans with the School Dean and
other advisors. Choosing a major and possible career is an
important problem for young men and women. It is hoped
that early consultation with knowledgeable advisors will help
the applicant make these crucial decisions. The date of this
appointment for the orientation interview accompanies the
notice of acceptance.

(4) A medical examination form is mailed to every applicant
after the student is admitted. This form must be completed by
the student. A set of instructions is mailed with the form.

(5) Attendance at the orientation interview and payment of
the $15 orientation fee signifies the applicant's interest, but

12 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

NOT commitment, to attend Indiana University of Pennsyl-
vania.

(6) Around April 1 a $100 advance payment is required of
all incoming Freshmen. This advance payment will be credited
to the applicant's housing charges and basic fees. Fifty percent
of the $100 is refundable if applicant cancels admission before
July 1. Exceptions to refund policy may be made by
application to Admissions Committee in cases of unusual
circumstances.

TRANSFER STUDENTS

A student who has been attending a community college or
equivalent, college or university and wishes to transfer to lUP
must submit an official transcript of all post-secondary
educational work and a statement from his/her Dean certifying
that he/she is in good academic standing and entitled to
honorable separation from that institution. High School
transcripts and college boards and/or ACT scores should also
be submitted. All of these items should be mailed to the Dean
of Admissions, Room 21 6E, Pratt Hall. A student who has
been dismissed from another institution for other than
academic reasons may petition the Dean of Admissions for
acceptance to the University. The application deadlines for
transfer students is January 15 for the Fall Semester and
September 15 for the Spring Semester.

In evaluating transcripts for the transfer credits, considerable
latitude is allowed to the dean of each individual school. The
student must satisfy, however, all of the degree requirements

falling into the categories of 1) university requirements; 2)
school requirements; 3) department requirements.

University requirements — Since all students are obliged to
fulfill a basic program in General Education consisting of 52
semester credit hours and there is a reasonable degree of
flexibility in the General Education requirements, the deans
will look to this area first for applicable credits for transfer-
ence. Most introductory courses are generally equivalent,
although at times reference must be made to the catalogues of
other institutions in order to get a direct comparison with
courses. It has been the policy of the University, that only
grades with a C or higher letter will transfer to this Institution.

The residency requirements of the University require that the
last 30 credits in a student's curriculum must be earned by
enrollment in courses at lUP. It should also be noted that for
two year post-secondary educational institution or community
college or equivalent graduates, a maximum of 60 credit hours
are transferable to this institution for the purposes of fulfilling
a specific program of study. The excess of credits, if any, may
be transferred but cannot be used for fulfilling the minimum
requirements for the degree.

The articulation policy as adopted by the Board of State
College and University Directors on September 20, 1973, and
transmitted by memorandum by Commissioner Ziegler on
December 7, 1973, to the State College and University
Presidents, and whereby the "D" grade obtained by two-year
Associate Degree graduates of state-owned community colleges

Admission and Registration — 13

should be treated by the senior institution in the same manner
as the senior institution treats the "Ds" of its indigenous
students is applicable.

PART-TIME STUDY

Any high school graduate is eligible for part-time study.

Students who plan to participate in the part-time study must
obtain an application from the Admissions Office.

Applications and official transcripts from high school and
other institutions attended must be submitted to the Admis-
sions Office by August 15 for the Fall Semester and December
15 for the Spring Semester.

At the end of 15 credit hours of course worl< taken at lUP,
a part-time student must have a 1.8 cumulative quality point
to continue. At the end of 30 credit hours taken at I UP, a
part-time student must have a cumulative quality point
average of 2.0 to continue.

A part-time student MAY apply for degree candidacy after the
completion of 15 credit hours of "C" work or better in
academic subjects and maintenance of a cumulative quality
point average of 2.0 or better. A part-time student MUST
apply and be approved for degree candidacy by the time he
has earned 30 credit hours. STUDENTS WHO HAVE NOT
BEEN APPROVED FOR DEGREE CANDIDACY AT THE
END OF 30 CREDIT HOURS OF PART-TIME WILL NOT BE

PERMITTED TO CONTINUE AT THE UNIVERSITY.

Students who are degree candidates, who are in attendance
and who plan to continue as part-time students, must file a
part-time application with their School Dean each semester
prior to the application deadline.

PROGRAM FOR HIGH SCHOOL JUNIORS

Honor students who have completed the junior year of high
school with at least a B average in all college entrance
subjects taken in the sophomore and junior years may
preview University life and earn regular college credit by
enrolling in 2 or 3 lower division courses. Students seeking
admission to this program should write to the Registrar for
further details.

CERTIFICATION STUDENTS

(Students who graduated with other than B.S. in Education
degree)

A student who wishes to be admitted to complete require-
ments for an Instructional I certificate must submit an
application and official transcript of college work showing
degree attained. One semester on campus is a prerequisite to
Student Teaching.

14 - Indiana University of Pennsylvania

READMISSIOIM POLICY FOR

STUDENTS WHO WITHDRAW

FROM THE UNIVERSITY VOLUNTARILY

A student who withdrew from the University on a voluntary
basis for reasons of health, financial difficulty, etc., and who
wishes to reenter, must notify, in writing, the Dean of the
School in which the student was enrolled at the time of his
withdrawal AND the Office of the Dean of Students before
April 1, if requesting readmission for that year's summer
sessions or for the Fall semester (starting in September).
Written requests must be made to the above-mentioned
offices before November 1, if requesting readmission for the
Spring semester starting in January.

PRE-SCHEDULING AND REGISTRATION

Students who are in full-time enrollment status are given the
opportunity to pre-schedule for the next semester of attend-
ance. Regularly enrolled students will pre-schedule and pre-
register during the middle of the first semester for the
second semester, and during the middle of the second
semester for the following first semester, and in May for
Pre-Summer session.

Prospective freshmen will prepare a program of studies with
departmental advisors during interview dates preceding the
semester of entrance.

All students will be billed and pay fees by mail for the first
and second semesters of each year.

THE SUMMER SESSIONS

The Summer School is an integral part of the year's work.
Students from other colleges, teachers in service, and stu-
dents in regular attendance can secure, in the summer
session, credits toward any certificate or toward graduation
in any curriculum. The courses are planned primarily for
those who are accelerating their work. An effort is made to
meet all reasonable requests of teachers who are working
toward higher certification or toward graduation.

All courses given in the summer session require the same
amount of time and are granted the same credit as if taken
during a regular semester. The Summer Bulletin will be
mailed to anyone desiring more complete information regard-
ing the courses to be offered.

Three sessions, two of 3 weeks and one of 6 weeks, are
generally offered during the summer. The pre-session opens
the first week of June. Main session begins the last of June
and continues into the first of August. The post-session
opens in early August and usually closes a week prior to the
end of the month. It is thus possible for a student to secure
three to twelve credits by attending summer school.

Address the Registrar for the Summer Sessions Bulletin
indicating courses and activities of the Summer Session.
Normally, Summer Sessions Bulletins are available after
March 1.

Finances —15

Finances

BASIC FEES

The basic fee for all full-time in-state students is $400.00 per
semester. This fee covers registration and the keeping of
student records, use of the library, student welfare, health
services (other than extra nurse and quarantine), and labora-
tory facilities. An additional $33.00 per credit will be charged
for credits scheduled in excess of 18.

Oui-of-state full-time students pay a basic fee of $750.00 per
semester. An additional $60.00 per credit will be charged for
credits in excess of 18.

The basic fee for part-time in-state students is S33.00 per
semester hour. A part-time student is one taking 11 or fewer
semester hours. See the sections of Admission and Registration
and on University Policies for further information concerning
part-time students.

The basic fee for part-time out-of-state students is $60.00 per
semester hour.

An in-state student is defined as one who is a bona fide
resident of and domiciled within the State of Pennsylvania for
a reasonable period, not less than one year, immediately
preceding his or her registration for a term or semester in any
State-supported college or university in the State of Pennsyl-
vania. A minor will generally be presumed to be a resident of
the place of his parents' or guardian's domicile.

J6 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

The establishment of domicile is primarily a matter of
continued residence and intention. Generally, Pennsylvania
domicile is considered to be established upon the completion
of at least 12 months of continuous residence within the
State at the time of registration for courses. For special
cases, the University has a committee to review this matter.
The University reserves the right to change its charges without

notice.

OTHER FEES

ADVANCE REGISTRATION FEE - A non-refundable con-
firmation fee of $15 must be paid by each student accepted
for enrollment. This confirmation fee will be used to cover
the cost incurred by the University on the students' behalf
during Freshman Orientation Day on campus and Fall Fresh-
man Orientation.

HOUSING FEE — The housing fee for students living in
commonwealth residence halls is $261.00 per semester and the
meal fee is $210.00 per semester; thus students who reside in a
commonwealth residence hall and have their meals in one of
the University dining halls pay a total of $471.00 per semester.
This includes room, meals in one of the University dining halls,
and laundry of sheets and pillow cases. This applies only to
full-time students, as part-time students are not permitted to
live in University dormitories or residences.

See the section on Housing for details concerning housing
policies at the University.

STUDENT ACTIVITY FEE - An activity fee is collected
from all students and administered through the Student
Cooperative Association under regulations approved by the
Board of Trustees. This fee, of $30.00 per semester, covers
the cost of student activities in athletics, lectures, entertain-
ment, student publications, etc., and is payable in one sum
for the semester at the time of registration. The Student
Activity Fee is $11.00 for part-time students.

'LATE REGISTRATION FEE - Each student registering after
the date officially set for registration is required to pay $5.00
for the first day and $2.00 each day thereafter to a maximum
of $25.00 (except when permission for late registration has
been secured in advance from the President because of illness
or other unavoidable causes). The same regulation shall apply
to approved intersemester payments.

"BAD CHECK CHARGE - Students making checks payable to
"Indiana University of Pennsylvania" which are not acceptable
to the bank because of insufficient funds will be charged $5.00
for each bad check in the amount of $.01 to $9.99 and $10.00
for bad checks written for $10.00 or more.

MILITARY FEE - An Activity Fee of $3.00 is required of
ROTC Cadets to cover the cost of Cadet Corps functions. A
uniform deposit fee of $10.00, which is refundable, is
required of all cadets. These tees are payable directly to the
Military Science Department.

•Effective 9/1/76

Finances —17

MEDTECH STUDENTS - During the clinical year a fee may
be levied and collected by the participating hospital. The only
other cost to these students shall be an administrative fee of
not more than $100 to be collected by the University. The
total fees charged by the hospital and the University shall not
exceed the basic fee costs paid by other students for that same
academic year. Room and board shall be the responsibility of
the student. (Effective 1974—75 academic year.)

FINANCIAL DELINQUENCY POLICY - Registration is not
in fact complete until a student pays his fee for such
registration and the University reserves for itself the right to
bar such a student from classes. When it has been determined
during the course of a semester that a student's account has
become delinquent from accrued charges, the Registrar's office
will be notified of this delinquency and advised to refrain from
reporting the student's grades and from issuance of any
transcripts for that student's work until the delinquent
account has been satisfied. Faculty members will continue to
submit a grade for the financially delinquent student, however,
only after the student has cleared his account will requests
from and official reports to students be honored by the
Registrar's office.

ART — In some art studio courses, fees are assessed each
semester to defray the costs of special materials or to
compensate a model.

MUSIC - A maintenance fee is assessed each student using
University-owned instruments in the class instruments courses.

MUSIC — For each Applied Music course, the fee is $50.00 per
half-hour of instruction. This charge is in addition to credit
hour costs.

In-State

Out

:-of-State

Basic Fee

$ 400.00

750.00

Housing Fee

261.00

Meal Fee

210.00

Student Activity

Fee

30.00

Books and SuppI

ies (

est

imated)

100.00

Total

$1,001.00

1,351.00

Miscellaneous and travel expenses would be in addition to the
above.

ESTIMATED EXPENSES PER SEMESTER

In-State

Out-of-State

Basic Fee

$400.00

$750.00

Housing Fee

231.00

Meal Fee

210.00

Student Activity Fee

30.00

Books and Supplies (estimated)

100.00

Total

$971.00

$1321.00

Miscellaneous and travel expenses would be in addition to the
above.

18 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

SUMMER SESSIONS FEES

BASIC FEE — The basic fee for students enrolled for any of
the regular summer sessions is $33.00 per semester hour.

The basic fee for undergraduate students who are not residents
of Pennsylvania is $60.00 per semester hour.

HOUSING FEE — Summer session rates will be calculated
based upon the number of weeks within the session. Weekly
summer rates are $15.00 per week for residence hall room
(includes laundry of sheets and pillow cases), and $15.00 per
week for meals in one of the University dining halls.

See the section on Housing for housing-policy details at the
University.

STUDENT ACTIVITY FEE - For the Main Summer Ses-
sion, this fee is $10.50, and for the Pre- and Post-Sessions,
$5.25, payable at time of registration.

SPECIAL FEES

INFIRMARY FEE - After three days in the University
Infirmary, the University shall charge students who regularly
eat in a University dining room an additional $1.00 for each
day. Students who room at the University but do not eat in
a University dining room shall pay $3.00 per day after the
third day. Commuter students admitted to the infirmary

shall pay board at the rate of $3.00 per day from the first
day of admission. Service at the infirmary includes the
regular nurse and regular medical service but does not
include special nurse or special medical service.

*DEGREE FEE - A fee of $20.00 to cover the costs of a
diploma and processing a graduate must be paid by each
candidate for a degree.

TRANSCRIPT FEES - Applications for official transcripts
must be made ONLY IN WRITING to the Registrar, either
by U. S. Mail, or on forms available at the Transcript
Window in Clark Hall. Such requests MUST include:

(1) Your full name and social security number as of your
graduation or termination of enrollment at lUP. (Please note
any name changes since graduation);

(2) Your present address;

(3) Whether you are requesting a transcript of your under-
graduate and/or graduate work;

(4) Whether you graduated or if not, when you were
enrolled;

(5) The full and clearly stated name(s) and address(es) of
person(s) to whom you wish the transcript(s) sent;

*(6) There is a $1.00 charge for the first transcript and a $2.00
charge for each subsequent copy requested. (Checks or money
•Effective 9/1/76

Finances —19

orders should be made out to Indiana University of Pennsyl-
vania).

Any requests which are not accompanied by the proper fees
or Information will be returned to the senders for inclusion
of them. No transcript requests will be processed without
the payment of transcript fees.

DAMAGE FEE — Students are responsible for damages,
breakage, loss, or delayed return of University property.

BILLING AND PAYMENTS

All bills, including basic fee and housing fee, are payable as
specified on the bill for at least the first nine weeks. Checks
or money orders, in the exact amount of the account,
should be made payable to the account designated on the
bill. Book Store purchases are on a cash basis.

It is desired that payments for the entire semester be made
in August for the first semester and in December for the
second semester; however, the half-payment option may be
exercised, if necessary.

Delinquent Accounts

Students will not be permitted to enroll for any semester nor
to graduate, until all bills previously incurred have been paid;
nor will credit be certified to any other institution or to the
Department of Education until all overdue accounts have been
paid. * A late payment fee of $5.00 for the first day and $2.00
•Effective 9/1/76

for each day thereafter will be assessed for delinquent
accounts up to a maximum of $25.00.

Undergraduate students desiring to leave school before the
close of a semester must report to the Vice President of
Student Affairs, and to the Business Office to settle all
unpaid accounts. Graduate students report to the Graduate
School Dean.

UNIVERSITY REFUND POLICY

The University must engage its faculty, assign Residence Hall
space and arrange for meal contracts in advance of each term
in accordance with the number of students who expressed
their intent to be enrolled. When students withdraw from
the University, they create vacancies which cannot be filled
and financial commitments for salaries and services by the
University must be honored. The refund policy at Indiana
University of Pennsylvania applies to all students enrolled in
credit producing programs at the University either full-time
or part-time.

WITHDRAWALS FROM THE UNIVERSITY

Undergraduate students withdrawing from the University
must process such withdrawal through the Student Affairs
Office, Pratt Hall. The official withdrawal date will be
established by the Student Affairs Office.

Students totally withdrawing from courses. Residence Halls
and/or meal contracts upon receiving approval from the

20 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Student Affairs Office will forfeit a portion of the semester
charges in accordance with the following schedule:

Fronn the first day of regis-
tration to and including the
fourteenth (14th) day fol-
lowing the opening of regis-
tration.

Forfeit one-quarter (%) of
the student's total semester
charges or $50.00 whichever
is greater.

From the 15th day following Forfeit one-half (Va) of the
student's total semester
charges or $100.00 which-
ever is greater.

No refund will be granted
and all semester fees for-
feited.

the opening of registration
to the end of the sixth week
of classes.

After the end of the sixth
week of classes.

REFUNDS

Refunds for students receiving financial assistance from
scholarships and/or grants will be returned to the source of
aid in an appropriate proportion, except in those cases in
which a full refund to the source is required.

• No refunds will be made for summer session fees.

• No refunds will be granted unless formal withdrawal
procedure has been initiated by the student or his
family within 60 days of the date of withdrawal.

• No refund will be made for reduced credit loads.

• No refunds will be granted for students suspended or
expelled by the University.

• Students who withdraw from the University Students
Services (Residence Hall, meal contracts, etc.), but do
not totally withdraw from the University will not be
granted a refund.

The Student Affairs Office may make exceptions to these
policies and grant pro-rated refunds when circumstances
justify it. (Example: death, medical reasons, military obliga-
tion.)

FINANCIAL AID

The Financial Aid Office, located at 308 Pratt Hall, offers
financial information and counseling to all students attending
lUP. The types of financial assistance offered by the Finan-
cial Aid Office include student employment, loans, grants,
and scholarships. In most cases, a Parents' Confidential
Statement is used to determine eligibility for these programs.
EMPLOYMENT provides an opportunity for the student to
earn money to help finance his educational expenses. Stu-
dents may be employed on campus for up to twenty (20)
hours per week. The University encourages students to
participate in the on-campus student employment program
since studies have demonstrated that part-time employment
provides a positive stimulus to students in their adjustment
to campus life and the maintenance of their academic
averages. All campus employment is administered by the
Financial Aid Office.

Finances -21

ROTC — Students participating in the Advanced ROTC Pro-
gram, junior and senior years, are given a subsistence allowance
of $100 per month for up to ten months per academic year.
Additionally, the student will earn approximately $500 plus
room and board, travel expense and medical and dental care
for six weeks summer camp between the junior and senior
years. This is approximately $2,400 for the two years.

LOANS are a form of aid for which repayment must begin
upon termination of the student's University education.
Interest rates normally range to 7%.

GRANTS are funds which carry no obligation for repay-
ment. These funds are awarded to the student on the basis
of financial need.

SCHOLARSHIPS are funds which carry no obligation for
repayment. They are gifts awarded to the student on the
basis of ability.

Federal aid administered through the University is available
for both the regular academic year and the summer sessions.
The application deadline for upperclassmen for these federal
aid programs is normally March 15 for the following aca-
demic year. Freshmen may apply for aid upon acceptance to
the University. For the summer sessions, the application
deadline is May 1.

A brochure containing specific information about financial
aid may be obtained at the Financial Aid Office. In addition,
the director and assistant director of Financial Aid are
available for student consultation from 1;00 to 4:00 p.m.

Monday through Friday. The F.A. Office recommends that
students with questions contact the office at 412 357-2218.

EMPLOYMENT

Campus part-time employment for students is available in
the academic offices, residence halls, library, administrative
offices, student co-op, and dining halls.

The University operates two student employment programs
under which students may be employed:

FEDERAL — To be employed under the federal College
Work-Study Program (CWSP), a student must show
"financial need" as determined by the Parents' Confi-
dential Statement. Application for this program is made
in the Financial Aid Office. A student employed under
the federal College Work-Study Program may work up to
a maximum of twenty (20) hours per week when classes
are in session and forty (40) hours per week when classes
are not in session.

STATE — The State University Employment Program (UE)

employs students. Under this program, a student may work

up to fifteen (15) hours per week when classes are in

session and twenty-five (25) hours per week when classes

are not in session. No application is necessary for this

program.

The Financial Aid Office offers placement assistance to

students. When an employment opening is located, the

potential employer indicates his intention of employing the

student by giving him an employment assignment card. The

22 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Student takes this card to the Financial Aid Office and is then
placed on the appropriate student payroll. There is no
provision to have employment earnings deducted from student
accounts. Students are paid directly by check every two
weeks.

LOANS

Government-Sponsored Loan Programs

NATIONAL DIRECT STUDENT LOAN PROGRAM - The
application for the National Direct Student Loan Program is
the University financial aid application. This application is
forwarded to freshmen along with their Admissions accept-
ance letter from the University. Currently enrolled students
may secure an application for this program in the Financial
Aid Office. The loan is awarded to students on the basis of
financial need, as determined by the Parents' Confidential
Statement. It is interest-free and nonrepayable until nine
months after termination of education, at which time it
becomes repayable at 3% interest with a minimum $30
payment per month and up to ten years to repay.

GUARANTY STUDENT LOAN PROGRAM - Applications
for the Guaranty Student Loan are obtainable from lending
institutions. These include banks, savings and loan associa-
tions, credit unions, etc. Through this program, undergraduate
students may borrow up to $2000 per academic year (S2500
graduate). The loan is interest-free to eligible students until
nine months after termination of education, and is then
repayable directly to the lending institution at 7% simple
interest.

University-Sponsored Loan Programs

The Financial Aid Office administers various loan funds in
behalf of the University. Applications for and additional
information on these programs are available to students in
the Financial Aid Office. These loans are generally not
available to students until after they are enrolled in and
taking classes at the University. Listed below are various loan
programs sponsored through the Financial Aid Office at
Indiana University of Pennsylvania:

JENNIE E. ACKERMAN LOAN FUND - By action of the
Executive Committee of lUP's Alumni Association, the Jen-
nie E. Ackerman Loan Fund was established in 1962, by
contributions from alumni and friends, in memory of Jennie
E. Ackerman, who served as Supervisor of Student Teachers
at I UP for many years. Loans are available to sophomores,
juniors, and seniors who are maintaining satisfactory aca-
demic records at the University. The maximum outstanding
amount extended to any one student cannot exceed $200.
Interest is at the rate of 2% payable at maturity of the loan.
Notes extended beyond that time will carry a 6% interest
charge.

ELLA C. BENDIX LOAN FUND - This fund was estab-
lished by students and faculty of the School of Home
Economics in memory of Ella C. Bendix, who served as dean
of the School of Home Economics. Worthy students with
financial need enrolled in the School of Home Economics
are eligible to receive a $250 loan for each year of a
two-year period. Interest is 2% payable at maturity of the
loan. Notes extended beyond that time carry a 6% interest

Finances - 23

charge. Loan applications are available from the School of
Home Economics.

COLETTE CROMER GERSHMAN LOAN FUND - Family
and friends of Colette Cromer Gershman have established
this fund in memory of Colette Cromer Gershman, a home
economics education graduate. Students enrolled in the
School of Home Economics are eligible for the loan. Interest
is at the rate of 2%, payable at maturity of the loan. Notes
extended beyond that time will carry a 6% interest charge.
Apply to the Financial Aid Office.

SUZANNE MARSHALL HARTMAN LOAN FUND - A
loan fund has been established at lUP by family and friends
in memory of Suzanne M. Hartman, a graduate of Indiana in
home economics. This fund is used to grant loans to
deserving students in their sophomore, junior, and senior
years. Interest is at the rate of 2%, payable at the maturity
of the loan. Notes extended beyond that time will carry a
6% interest charge.

OLIVER W. HELMRICH MEMORIAL SCHOLARSHIP
LOAN FUND - This fund has been established at lUP by
the Helmrich family and friends in memory of Mr. Helmrich,
a member of the Indiana faculty at the time of his death. In
an effort to continue his desire to help young people in
education, loans of up to S250 are available, according to
need, to full-time seniors and graduate students enrolled in
the School of Education. Notes are interest-free for one
year, and carry a 6% interest charge if repayment is
extended.

WILLIAM HENZELMANN MEMORIAL FUND - This loan
is available to junior and senior students majoring in the
department of German and Russian languages. The maximum
loan is $250. Notes will be interest-free foi one year, after
which they will carry a 3% interest charge. The total
repayment period for the loan will not exceed twenty-four
months. This loan has been established in memory of
William Henzelmann, a faculty member of the German/Russian
languages department at lUP.

MACK LOAN AND SCHOLARSHIP FUND - A loan and
scholarship fund has been established by members of the
Mack family to be used for making loan and scholarship
grants to worthy students with financial need. Preference is"
given to freshmen and sophomores who can give evidence of
academic excellence, financial need, and promise as a future
member of the teaching profession. At the present time, the
maximum loan available is S200 per year. Interest is at the
rate of 2%, payable at maturity of the loan. Notes extending
beyond that time will carry a 6% interest charge.

ETHYL V. OXLEY - HELEN C. MERRIMAN LOAN FUND
— Interest from money bequeathed to the School of Home
Economics by these former faculty is available for student
loans. Worthy students with financial need enrolled in the
School of Home Economics are eligible to receive a S250 loan
for each year of a two-year period. Interest is 2% payable at
maturity of the loan. Notes extended beyond that time carry a
6% interest charge. Loan applications are available from the
School of Home Economics.

24 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

RUSTY PREISENDEFER MEMORIAL LOAN FUND - This
fund was established as a gift from Mrs. Suzanne Preisende-
fer Brickner in memory of her husband, who was killed in
action in South Viet Nam. Preference in granting loans from
this fund shall be given to members of the advanced ROTC
and upperclassmen. Loans will be made up to a maximum of
S400 per individual, with the first note carrying a 2%
interest charge. Notes extending beyond that time will carry
a 6% interest charge.

FLOSSIE WAGNER SANFORD STUDENT LOAN FUND -
The Pennsylvania Federation of Women's Clubs has estab-
lished a student loan fund in honor of Flossie Wagner
Sanford, an alumna and former member of the faculty of
Indiana. Loans from this fund are made by the Faculty Loan
and Scholarship Committee to students who need financial
assistance. Interest is at the rate of 2%, payable at the
maturity of the loan. Notes extended beyond that time will
carry a 6% interest charge.

GRANTS

BASIC EDUCATIONAL OPPORTUNITY GRANTS (BEOG)
are available for eligible students. Applications for and
information on deadlines for this program are available from
the Financial Aid Office or high school counselors. All
students are urged to apply for this grant.

PENNSYLVANIA HIGHER EDUCATION ASSISTANCE
AGENCY GRANTS (PHEAA) are available for both the
regular academic year and the summer sessions. Contact the

Financial Aid Office to determine the application deadlines
for the PHEAA Grant Program.

SUPPLEMENTAL EDUCATIONAL OPPORTUNITY
GRANTS (SEOG) are available to eligible students who
demonstrate financial need, as based on the Parents' Confi-
dential Statement. The University financial aid application is
used for this federally sponsored program.

SCHOLARSHIPS

The Financial Aid Office administers various scholarship
programs in behalf of the University. These scholarships have
been established by alumni and friends of the University to
recognize outstanding students and assist them in financing
their educational expenses. Listed below are the University
scholarships which are administered through the Financial
Aid Office:

AETNA LIFE AND CASUALTY SCHOLARSHIP - A $100
award is presented each semester to a Safety Management
Major under this scholarship established by the Aetna Life and
Casualty Insurance Company. The award is to be given for
academic excellence with strong consideration for women and
minority students. Applications should be made to the Chair-
man, Safety Sciences Department.

JEMIMA S. BOYD SCHOLARSHIP - The Jemima S. Boyd
Scholarship Fund was established for an American born
female student who intends to teach in Pennsylvania. The
amount of this annual scholarship will be determined by the
yearly interest from the savings account of the late Grace

Finances — 25

Noble Lacock's estate. It is to be awarded at the discretion
of the Financial Aid Connmittee in the amount felt to be
necessary for the student.

BOARD OF TRUSTEES ACADEMIC SCHOLARSHIP -
Awarded to the top students of each incoming freshman
class, this is a full tuition scholarship for four years, without
regard to financial need. Scholastic achievement is estab-
lished by the computation of high school rank and College
Entrance Examination Board scores.

BRAMAN MUSIC SCHOLARSHIP FUND - Interest, up to an
amount of SlOO, will be granted as a single scholarship to an
eligible prospective freshman music major, whose performing
area is one of the following: violin, viola, cello or double bass.
Selection of grantee is made by the string area music
department faculty and awarded for the second semester.
Applications and information are available from the music
department.

M. VASHTI BURR MEMORIAL AWARD - The sum of
Si 25 is awarded annually to that student of I UP who is
deemed by the faculty to be most deserving, having in mind
his or her economic need and the excellence of his or her
industry and scholarship. This award is given through the
generosity of Mr. William V. Whittington, Washington, D.C.

HOWARD B. BUTERBAUGH SCHOLARSHIP FUND - This
scholarship money was a gift to the University from Dr.
Howard Buterbaugh's estate. The scholarship is to be given to
an Indiana County student.

CLARK SCHOLARSHIP - The Lieutenant Alpheus Bell
Clark Memorial Scholarship was established by Mr. and Mrs.
Steele Clark, Cherry Tree, Indiana County, in memory of
their son. The sum of $100 is awarded each semester to that
young man or woman, a senior in the University and a
resident of Indiana County, who in the opinion of a
committee chosen by the President, best qualifies for the
honor in terms of academic ability, leadership, and service to
the University, with preference going to a veteran, or a son
or a daughter of a veteran.

JACK CROSSAN MEMORIAL SCHOLARSHIP FUND -
Established in Jack Crossan's honor by fellow athletes,
classmates and friends, this scholarship shall be awarded at the
discretion and good judgment of the head basketball coach to
a basketball player of good character and sound academic
standing.

CHARLES DAVIS SCHOLARSHIP - This scholarship is
awarded each year to a music major who has shown
outstanding ability. The amount of the award will be
determined by the funds available from Phi Mu Alpha, the
professional music fraternity at lUP.

EXTENSION HOMEMAKER SCHOLARSHIP - Home-
makers participating in the Home Economics Extension
Program contribute funds annually for scholarships to be
given to sophomores, juniors, or seniors who are majoring in
home economics in several colleges in the state. Indiana is
allotted several each year, to be awarded on the basis of 4-H
experience, need, scholarship, and other outstanding charac-
teristics. Each award is for 3200 per year.

26 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

THOMAS V. FRAZIER MEMORIAL SCHOLARSHIP - A
senior student interested in the theatre arts is the recipient
of this award. The student may be a drama student or just
active in off-stage roles. Financial need will be a considera-
tion, with Mr. Robert Ensley and members of the Financial
Aid Office selecting the recipient.

THE G. G. HILL AWARDS - Two awards of S50 each are
given each spring to a male and to a female in business and
distributive education. The recipients are selected on the
basis of scholarship, responsibility, participation in commu-
nity and university activities, personality and leadership. The
scholarship is given by the business and distributive educa-
tion department in honor of Mr. G. G. Hill, founder and
former chairman of the department.

PATTI HURLEY SCHOLARSHIP - A four year scholarship
of $150 per year is awarded to a female graduate of Indiana
Area High School attending the University, based upon
academic achievement, participation in school activities, and
economic need. This memorial scholarship was established by
the family and friends of Patti Hurley, a 1970 graduate of
Indiana Area High School who was killed in an automobile
accident two weeks after high school graduation and prior to
entering college.

SALLY JOHNSON MEMORIAL SCHOLARSHIP FUND -
This scholarship will go to a female junior student, based upon
her outstanding athletic abilities. Information and applications
available through the physical education department.

JOHNSTOWN SYMPHONY SCHOLARSHIP - These are
scholarships for the study and expense of students studying
string instruments. Amounts and number of scholarships are
determined by the music department.

DOROTHY MARCY LONG MEMORIAL SCHOLARSHIP -
This is a scholarship awarded annually to an entering fresh-
man female on the basis of her high school academic
performance and SAT scores. The award is valued at $200
for the student's first year at lUP. This award was estab-
lished in memory of Dorothy Marcy Long by her family and
members of the Indiana branch of the American Association
of University Women.

ALAN P. MEWHA MEMORIAL FUND - Used for annual
scholarships to students in the geography and regional plan-
ning department, the grant selection will be made by a
three-member geography and regional planning scholarship
committee. The scholarships are unrestricted as to use or
purpose, and flexible in the amount awarded and time
presented.

MORRIS SCHOLARSHIP - The Helen Wood Morris Schol-
arships were established by Lieutenant-Colonel L. M. Morris
of Altoona, in memory of his wife, a graduate of the
University. Sums of $175 each are awarded annually to
students selected by a committee named by the University,
one award to a sophomore, the other to a junior. Students
chosen must be in the highest quarter of their class, must be
in need of financial assistance, and must have demonstrated

Academic Policies — 27

worthiness in terms of character, personality, leadership, and
American citizenship.

MARY MULDOWNEY SCHOLARSHIP - A scholarship in
the amount of $100 for any junior or senior student
majoring in music with an emphasis on voice, this award is
governed in amount and number of scholarships given, by
the music department.

MUSIC FACULTY SCHOLARSHIP - One scholarship is
made available by the music faculty each year to a student
enrolled in the music department. The scholarship committee
makes the selection based on scholarship, need and participa-
tion. The scholarship is awarded for the second semester.
Applications and information available through the music
department.

JENNETTE NELSON MEMORIAL FUND - This fund shall
be used for an Alpha Phi student selected by at least three
members of the alumnae chapter, shall be unrestricted as to
purpose for which granted, and flexible in the amount
presented and time awarded.

TOM NORMAN SCHOLARSHIP - This money will be
available to a soccer player in financial need. All disburse-
ments will be controlled by the soccer coach, in the amounts
he feels necessary.

OPERATION FRIENDSHIP SCHOLARSHIP - Two awards
of $25 each and a certificate are given by Dr. Norah E.
Zink, professor emeritus of the geography department of
lUP, to foreign students who have made a significant contri-

bution to cooperation and good feeling in the University and
community during the University year. These awards are
given during the spring.

ETHEL V. OXLEY/HELEN C. MERRIMAN SCHOLARSHIP
Each year the Home Economics Alumni Association honors
two former faculty members by awarding $100 scholar-
ships to outstanding students in the School. Awards are
based on evidence of such characteristics as dependability,
initiative in worthwhile professional experiences, accepting
responsibility, social sensitivity and sincerity in dealing with
people, sense of values, personality and scholarship.

ALBERT PECHAN SCHOLARSHIP - This is a scholarship
for a science major. The amount of the award depends on
the money available in the scholarship fund. Selection of a
recipient is made by the science department faculty.

LENORA PECHAN SCHOLARSHIP - The Lenora Pechan
Scholarship was established by the late Dr. Albert R. Pechan,
a former member of the Senate of the Commonwealth of
Pennsylvania and of the Board of Trustees of I UP, to
provide funds for students who are members of the Reserve
Officer Training Corps and who have been outstanding
students in the ROTC, and whose other academic work is
satisfactory. First priority will be given to students from
Armstrong County, selected by the officers of the ROTC
and the Faculty Scholarship and Loan Committee.

PENNSYLVANIA FEDERATION OF WOMEN'S CLUBS
SCHOLARSHIPS - At least four scholarships of $100 each
are offered annually to students in the art education depart-

28 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

ment. These scholarships are provided by voluntary contribu-
tions from clubs to "Pennies for Art Fund," by the Pennsyl-
vania Federation of Women's Clubs.

EDNA B. PIERCE MEMORIAL FUND - A junior ROTC
student with a one-year commitment will be awarded a
one-year scholarship. Also, an Indiana High School student,
accepted at lUP, and enrolled in a teacher education curric-
ulum, will be awarded a one-year scholarship.

PRESSER FOUNDATION SCHOLARSHIP - The Presser
Foundation of Philadelphia awards two scholarships each
year to music students at lUP. The amount varies from year
to year. Interested music students should apply through the
chairman of the music department.

QUOTA CLUB SCHOLARSHIP - The Quota Club of
Indiana has established a scholarship of $100 per year, for
senior girls in speech and hearing. Those interested in
applying for this scholarship should contact the Director of
Speech and Hearing for information.

SAFETY SCIENCE SCHOLARSHIP FUND - Awards given
annually to those deserving students majoring in safety
sciences.

SERVICE CLUB SCHOLARSHIP - The Kiwanis, Lions, and
Rotary Clubs of Indiana have scholarship programs that
provide financial aid for approximately 16 students per year
at lUP. These scholarships are administered by the local
service clubs, with assistance from the Financial Aid Office
at the University.

SAM SMITH FOOTBALL SCHOLARSHIP FUND - the

solicited funds are to be used for football scholarships. All the
funds are to be distributed as scholarships in accordance with
the rules and regulations of the University and its member-
ships.

GREGORY SPINELLl MEMORIAL FUND - This fund
provides a meaningful award and recognition for students with
exceptional promise and commitment to a career in the
criminal justice system of the U.S. An award of $100 will be
made annually to a second semester senior enrolled in the lUP
criminology department.

STUDENT ART SCHOLARSHIP - Students of the depart-
ment of art and art education contribute art works to be
sold. Funds thus received permit awards of $50 to be made
periodically. Applications for these awards are received and
screened and awards made by a committee of art students.
This award is confined to students of the art department.

STUDENT GOVERNMENT FOREIGN STUDENT SCHOL-
ARSHIP — The Student Government Association grants four
full scholarships annually to foreign students who have not
previously been in the United States and who can complete
their proposed program of study in one academic year.
Applications should be submitted to the Foreign Student
Advisor no later than March for the following year.

SYNTRON FOUNDATION SCHOLARSHIP - Through the
Syntron Foundation of Homer City, four four-year scholar-
ships are awarded annually to freshmen, each worth $800
per year. Presently, 19 scholarships are in effect each year.

Academic Policies — 29

Applications must be filed with the Director of Financial
Aid by March 2 for the following year. Nine of these
scholarships are identified as C. S. Weyandt Memorial Schol-
arships and the others are identified as J. A. Metz Memorial
Scholarships.

J. M. UHLER MEMORIAL SCHOLARSHIP - In honor of a
former President of the University and a past President of
the Indiana Kiwanis Club, the Club awards a $100 per
semester scholarship for four years to a recipient showing
adequate scholastic progress. These scholarships are available
to graduates of high schools within Indiana County. This
fund is administered by the J. M. Uhler Scholastic Commit-
tee of the Indiana Kiwanis Club.

NORAH E. ZINK FOOTBALL AWARD - Dr. Norah E.
Zink, professor emeritus of the geography department of
lUP, has established an annual award of $25 for that
member of the varsity football team whose academic average
shows the greatest improvement over the fall semester.

ZUCCHELLI SCHOLARSHIP FUND - This $100 scholarship
will be awarded to a female lUP student majoring in physical
education. Information and applications available through the
physical education department.

VOCATIONAL REHABILITATION ASSISTANCE

Students who have substantial physical or mental handicaps
may receive educational benefits through the Bureau of
Vocational Rehabilitation Assistance. In order to be eligible,

students must satisfy the physical and financial requirements
of the Agency. For further information regarding this assist-
ance, the student should contact his local Bureau of Voca-
tional Rehabilitation Assistance office or representative.

Academic Policies — 31

Academic Policies

CLASSIFICATION OF STUDENTS

The FULL-TIME undergraduate student is defined as a
student who is enrolled in courses carrying 12 or nnore hours
of credit in a Fall or Spring semester. Any student carrying
less than 12 semester hours in a semester is a PART-TIME
STUDENT. All part-time students wishing full-time status
must apply for and obtain approval of such a change.

All undergraduate summer students are considered to be
part-time for the duration of the summer session; this status
is technical, however, and does not jeopardize per se the
student's normal full-time status for Fall or Spring semesters
if such status is held for those semesters.

For purposes of designating students by class, the following
credit hour classification ranges are used:

Freshmen 28 semester hours or less

Sophomores 29—56 semester hours

Juniors 57-90 semester hours

Seniors 91 semester hours or more

Class designations are based on credits EARNED, rather than
credits ATTEMPTED.

Persons holding a degree and working for a second baccalau-
reate degree may be classified as seniors.

GRADES AND QUALITY POINTS

GRADING SYSTEM - The following grades are used in

reporting the standing of students at the end of each
semester or summer term: A, excellent; B, good; C, average;
D, passed; F, failed; I, incomplete; P, pass/fail (option).
Regarding the option of pass/fail courses, if a student fails
the course, he will be awarded an F and the terms of
"failing" a course will prevail.

The grade of I is used to record work which, so far as
covered, is of PASSING GRADE, but is incomplete because
of PERSONAL ILLNESS or other UNAVOIDABLE
REASON. It must be made up within 2 months after the
student returns to the University. The grade of W is used to
designate that the student has voluntarily withdrawn from a
course within a specified period after the beginning of any
regular semester. The W grade carries no credits or quality
points for the course in which it is reported, but does appear
on the student's record.

QUALITY POINTS - Quality points are assigned as follows:
Grade A, 4 quality points per semester hour; B, 3 quality
points per semester hour; C, 2 quality points per semester
hour; D, 1 quality point per semester hour; F, no quality
points.

Quality points are not counted on grades from other schools,
and a student transferring from another school is held
responsible for quality points only on work taken in this

University.

CUMULATIVE QUALITY POINT AVERAGE is determined
by multiplying the credit hours per course by the grade in

32 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

quality points received for that course, repeating this proce-
dure for each course attempted, totaling the credit hour-
quality points thus obtained, and dividing by the total
number of credit hours attempted.

The semester hours for a course repeated after January 1,
1974, shall be counted only ONCE for all attempts; and it is
this number of hours that will be used in quality point
average (QPA) computations. (In the case where a course is
repeated for a different number of hours of credit than
when taken initially, the number of hours corresponding to
the highest grade will be used in the QPA computations.)

The total quality points for all attempts of the repeated
course will be the number assigned for the highest grade
earned.

The QPA for the repeated course will be determined by
dividing the number of quality points by the number of
semester hours earned. Only courses with a D or F grade
may be repeated and then only with the approval of the
student's advisor. Only six repeat attempts may be made
subsequent to the adoption of this policy during a Baccalau-
reate Degree Program.

GRADE REPORTS - About a week after each semester or
summer session, a full grade report is mailed to each student
at his home address. Parents do not receive reports, as it is
assumed that University students are sufficiently mature and
trustworthy to report the facts to their parents.

CRITERIA GOVERNING CONTINUANCE AT lUP

To be in good academic standing, an undergraduate student
must maintain a 2.0 cumulative quality point average.

Freshmen entering the University any time after June 1,
1971, must have attained a 1.8 cumulative quality point
average upon the completion of their first full-time academic
year to remain at the University. A cumulative quality point
average of 2.0 is required for an undergraduate's remaining
years. To achieve the stipulated average, the Pre and Main
Summer Sessions immediately following the year's Spring
semester may be used. Students who fail to be in good
academic standing at the end of any summer's Main Session
will be dismissed from the University for at least one
academic year.

All courses taken at I UP become a part of the student's
permanent academic record. The record shall show hours
attempted, hours earned, and quality points earned.

The academic standing of all students is computed on the
basis of courses attempted at this University only. Credit is
granted for work completed in other institutions in accord-
ance with the stipulations set forth under "Admission and
Registration."

READMISSION AFTER ACADEMIC DISMISSAL - Stu-
dents who have been dismissed from the University for
academic reasons and who desire to return after the dismissal

Academic Policies — 33

interval must file a formal application for readmission with
the Dean of the School in which they were enrolled at the
time of their dismissal.

In addition to filing the formal application, students must
improve their academic average to meet the minimum
requirements of the University which are 1.8 and 2.0 for
freshmen and upperclassmen respectively. For exceptions,
refer to Criteria Governing Continuance at the University —
see page 32. Filing must be before April 1, if requesting
readmission for the following summer sessions or for the Fall
semester starting the following September. Filing must be
before November 1, if requesting readmission for the follow-
ing Spring semester.

Academic Violations

The following policies pertain to the processing of academic
violations:

Minor Violations.

a) Cheating by those who give aid as well as receive aid in
course and laboratory, except in a final examination.
SANCTION: "F" in the course.

b) Evasion of University academic policies and proce-
dures. MAXIMUM SANCTION: "W" in the course.

Major Violations. Those violations that may warrant action
beyond receiving an "F" in the course:

a) Cheating on a final course or laboratory examination.

b) A second cheating violation.

c) Possessing an examination without the teacher's
authority or prior knowledge.

d) Plagiarizing in any way.

e) Defacing library books or educational instruments or
materials.

f) Purposeful evasion of University policies and pro-
cedures.

MAXIMUM SANCTION: expulsion.

MINOR VIOLATIONS PROCEDURE - A teacher may fail
any student for cheating in his course. (The teacher should
inform the student and file a report of the violation with the
Academic Discipline Subcommittee of the Senate Academic
Procedures Committee, and the Vice President of Academic
Affairs, making the violation a matter of record in the
Subcommittee's files.) The student may request a hearing (an
opportunity to be heard) wherein the student and the teacher
involved are heard by the chairman of the teacher's depart-
ment. The heaviest sanction which can be imposed by the
chairman is to uphold the "F" grade. The student may appeal
the chairman's ruling to the Academic Discipline Subcom-
mittee of the University Senate's Academic Procedures Com-
mittee, excluding the Academic Vice-President and the Dean
of the School in which the violation occurred. The Academic
Discipline Subcommittee is chaired by a student elected by the
membership.

34 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

The Academic Discipline Subcommittee may accept the
report and decision of the department chairman, reverse his
decision and return the case to him for further hearings in
keeping with suggestions that the Subcommittee may make,
or reverse his decision and dismiss the case. It may also
accept the decision of the chairman, but reduce the sanction
imposed. It may NOT increase the sanction. Returning the
case to the chairman is not DOUBLE JEOPARDY, since the
first hearing is still not complete.

If the Academic Discipline Subcommittee accepts the report
of the department chairman (whether it lowers the sanction
or not), the matter is deemed final; except that either party
may petition the chairman to reopen the matter upon the
discovery of new evidence. The chairman will judge the
sufficiency of the new evidence, and no appeal can be taken
from his decision.

MAJOR VIOLATIONS PROCEDURE - A major violation is
handled similar to a minor violation (in that the teacher
should inform the student, and file a report of the violation
with the Academic Discipline Subcommittee of the Senate
Academic Procedures Committee, and the Vice President of

Academic Affairs, making the violation a matter of record in
the Subcommittee's files), but it proceeds to a hearing directly
by the Academic Discipline Subcommittee of the Senate
Academic Procedures Committee, whose composition is as
previously described. The hearing will follow the standards of
procedure, where the accused should:

1) Receive ten (10) days written notice of the charges
against him, and the sanctions which may be applied if
the charges are proven;

2) Receive written notice of the date, time and place of
the hearing (this should accompany the charges);

3) Be advised of the names of the witnesses who will
appear against him and the substance of their testi-
mony;

4) Have the right to present a defense and witnesses in his
own behalf, and the right to cross-examine witnesses
against him (the prosecutor, naturally, has the same
right to cross-examine defense witnesses); and

5) Have access to a transcript of the proceedings and the
findings of the board.

The accused may be assisted by an advisor of his choice, but
legal counsel cannot be used on either side of a student-
institutional hearing. The hearing may be governed by its
own rules as to internal proceedings along lines of "funda-
mental fairness." The sanction imposed by this hearing board
may be appealed to an appeal board consisting of the
Vice-President for Academic Affairs, the Dean of the School
in which the violation occurred, the Vice Chairman of the
Faculty Senate and the President of Student Government.
The appeal is governed by the principles previously outlined.

Disciplinary Dismissal or Suspension

Suspension or dismissals for disciplinary reasons are recom-
mended to the President of the University by the Vice

Academic Policies — 35

President of Academic Affairs upon the recomnnendation of
the University Judicial Board. The Board is composed of the
Vice President of Student Affairs, five faculty members, and
five student members.

ACADEMIC HONORS

Students with appropriate academic records may be gradu-
ated with one of the following distinctions:
Summa cum laude

3.75—4.00 cumulative quality point average
Magna cum laude

3.50—3.74 cumulative quality point average
Cum laude

3.25—3.49 cumulative quality point average

The Seventh Semester is used for this calculation. Honors are
not granted for subsequent degrees.

DEAN'S LIST - To be eligible for the Dean's List, which is
compiled after each semester, a student must be carrying a
minimum of 12 semester hours and have a minimum quality
point average of 3.25 (exclusive of P/F courses).

CLASS ATTENDANCE

Class attendance and class participation beyond mere physi-
cal presence are essential for maximum educational advan-
tage and are strongly encouraged. Responsibility for all
course material rests entirely with the student, whether or
not he attends each class. Under no circumstances shall class

attendance, per se, be used as a basis for awarding or altering
a grade in a course; this applies to freshman through senior
class levels. Course grade will be based on such factors as
class preparation, class participation, skill development,
effectiveness of oral presentations and/or written reports,
quiz grades, and test and final examination scores. It is the
prerogative of the instructor to administer unannounced
quizzes as part of the student evaluation process, and to pass
judgment on the merits of all cases involving late class
submissions and class requirements missed by the students.

All students are required to attend class at the opening of
the semester in order to stabilize enrollments and class
rosters.

NORMAL SEMESTER HOUR LOADS

A normal semester hour load is 15—17 academic hours. A
student who wishes to schedule more than 17 semester hours
must obtain approval from the Dean of the School in which
he is registered; approval will be predicated upon the stu-
dent's demonstrated competences.

PASS-FAIL POLICY

A student may take courses on a pass-fail basis to a total of
15 semester hours throughout his University career. The
student is limited to one pass-fail course in any given
semester during his sophomore, junior, and senior years. All
courses in THE STUDENT'S General Education program and

36 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

in HIS major and minor fields are excluded from this
prerogative.

The student may declare his intent to choose pass-fail in a
specific course no later than the end of the semester's
discrete course withdrawal period. Instructors will NOT be
notified of the identity of pass-fail students in their courses;
identification will be handled by the Computer Center
through an appropriate coded control.

A student shall be given academic credit WITHOUT QUALITY
POINTS for a course he has taken pass-fail if he receives a
passing mark in the course. The semester hours successfully
completed under pass-fail ("passed"), within the overall 15
semester hour limitation, shall be recorded as counting
towards the total semester hours earned for graduation, but
not towards the semester hours attempted data used in
calculation of the cumulative quality point average. However,
if a student fails a pass/fail course he will receive the "F"
grade, and the corresponding quality point average.

The summer sessions, collectively or in any combination,
shall be considered a unit similar to a spring or fall semester
for pass-fail purposes. Hence, a student is permitted to take
only one course during the summer on a pass-fail basis.

The purpose of pass-fail is to permit a student to take an
elective course in a field of his personal interest where he
may be competing with major students in the department in
which the course is offered. When scheduled, such a course
shall be included in the student's normal course load for the
semester.

CHANGES OF CURRICULUM

A student must indicate his desire to change to a new
curriculum in the office of the Dean of the School in which
the student is registered if the curriculum change desired is
from one department to another within the same School (for
example, change from a mathematics major to a political
science major) or in the office of the Dean of the School to
which the student wishes to transfer, if the curriculum
change is from one School to another (for example, second-
ary education major to biology major). In either case, the
student will complete an application form that is available in
the Dean's office. Before seeking a curriculum change, it is
advisable that the student consult with the chairmen of both
his old and his "new" departments.

When a student changes Schools, the Dean of the School (or
his agent) into which the transfer is sought will evaluate the
student's credits before approving the transfer. A copy of
the evaluation will be made available to the student and his
new advisor if a change in curriculum is effected.

In cases involving veteran students, the Dean of the School
into which transfer is sought (or his agent) shall give the
veteran a statement of prospective approval and the effective
date of the proposed changes. This statement shall also
indicate the amount of extended training time the change of
curriculum will entail and the amount of credit loss, if any.
The veteran shall take this statement to the veteran's counse-
lor at least one month prior to the effective date of the

Academic Policies — 37

change. No transfer of curriculum shall be made by veterans
until VA approval has been assured.

DISCRETE COURSE WITHDRAWAL POLICY

During the fall and spring semesters, students are permitted
to withdraw from a course with a grade of "W" within the
first six weeks of the semester. Faculty are required to
inform students of their standing in class prior to the end of
this six-week period.

Upon the close of the described six-week withdrawal period,
a student may withdraw from a course only with the
approval of his advisor, department chairman, and School
Dean (in that order), for such reasons as illness, accident, or
extreme personal problems. Such withdrawal may occur no
later than 1 week before the beginning of final examinations.

For all discrete course withdrawals, the student must com-
plete a course withdrawal form, available in department
offices. This form must be signed by both the student and
the instructor.

If a student fails to complete the requirements for a course
but has not formally processed a withdrawal as described
above, and if the instructor does not receive a notice of
withdrawal from the University, the instructor shall note in
his course records the student's last attendance date and/or
other student activity and assign an "F" for the course.

Discrete course withdrawals from summer session classes are
subject to the regulations prescribed by the Director of
Summer Sessions yearlv.

WITHDRAWALS FROM THE UNIVERSITY

An undergraduate student who does not pre-register for the
succeeding semester or, having pre-registered, does not
appear for registration at the beginning of the succeeding
semester, is considered to have withdrawn from the Univer-
sity. Thereafter he must apply for readmission as prescribed
under "Admission and Registration."

Any undergraduate student withdrawing from the University
during a semester or a summer session must secure an
official Withdrawal Form from the office of the Vice
President of Student Affairs, the Dean of Men, or the Dean
of Women. The student will clear with the appropriate
offices listed on the form, securing their signatures as
evidence of clearance. The Withdrawal Form will be returned
to the Office of the Vice President of Student Affairs, which
will notify the appropriate School Dean of withdrawals
approved, and official notification of withdrawal from spe-
cific classes will be sent to each instructor by the School
Dean. No person shall be considered withdrawn from the
University within a semester or summer session unless such
notice is received.

ADVISORY PROGRAM

A group of selected faculty members act as freshman
advisors for entering freshmen in their departments. In some

38 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

curricula the advisors continue with the same group of
advisees from year to year. In other curricula the freshman
advisors remain with their advisee group only for the stu-
dent's first year; under this program, the student is then
assigned an academic advisor for the remaining years through
to his degree in his chosen field.

Faculty advisors counsel the students on academic achieve-
ment, dropping courses, changing curriculum, student activ-
ities, study schedules, and personal problems. The advisor
receives a photostat copy of the student's permanent record
at the beginning of the academic year, a copy of "D's" and
"F's" at mid-term, copies of all letters pertaining to aca-
demic achievement sent to the student's home, and a copy
of the report of the student's application for Junior stand-
ing.

SOPHOMORE SCREENING

FOR JUNIOR STATUS APPROVAL

General Policy at Indiana University of Pennsylvania permits
each School to determine its own scheme for evaluating the
development and progress of its major students. However,
each School is expected to employ some effective procedure
for such evaluation.

Several of the Schools use a procedure called "Sophomore
Screening for Junior Status Approval," with the following
required:

All students (in such a School) enrolled in their fourth

semester or who will complete 57 semester hours
ATTEMPTED by the end of the current semester must apply
for Junior Status Approval by filling out an application form
by the deadline date designated and announced.

All students should check with their faculty advisors to
determine which Schools use "Junior Status" screening pro-
cedure and the criteria for Junior Status Approval.

HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION
SPECIAL REGULATIONS

Credits in health and physical education are required of
undergraduate students in the General Education segment of
the University curriculum or are part of an option for
students in that segment. The University requirement in
physical education may be altered after consultation with
the department chairperson in health and physical education,
who will act upon the recommendation of the University
physician and the Dean, School of Health Services.

Physically incapacitated students must obtain a medical
waiver from or through the University physician. This proce-
dure should be repeated each semester except in cases of
permanent disability. The waiver form should be filed with
the chairman of the health and physical education depart-
ment involved. Such students may elect to participate in
specially arranged adaptive physical education courses or
defer the University requirement until such time as the
disability dissolves. These regulations do not refer to tempo-

Academic Policies — 39

rary illness ot short duration; such cases are managed by the
individual instructor.

RESERVE OFFICERS TRAINING CORPS

The United States Army has a unit of the Reserve Officers
Training Corps at the University. In fulfilling the University's
General Education requirement, students have the option of
taking military science (Reserve Officers Training Corps) for
2 credit hours for two semesters OR of taking a combination
of health for 2 credit hours and physical education for two
semesters of 1 credit for each semester. The ROTC option
can be completed in two semesters, whereas the health and
physical education option is not usually completed in less
than three semesters. The ROTC option offers the student a
1-D Selective Service Classification for the period of partici-
pation. Completion of the 4-credit ROTC option has no
effect on future Selective Service classifications, nor does it
in any way obligate the student for later military service.

Upon graduation from the regular University course and
successful completion of the Advanced Course ROTC Pro-
gram, the student will receive a Second Lieutenant's commis-
sion in the U. S. Army Reserve. To make this program
possible, deferments from the draft are issued to students
successfully meeting the University and ROTC requirements.
Upon graduation, the former student serves on active duty
for a period not to exceed 2 years, if called by the Secretary
of the Army. This enables the student to obtain his Univer-
sity degree and then fulfill his obligation to his country.

Under special conditions, deferments to obtain advanced
degrees are granted by the Army to ROTC students who
wish to do graduate work prior to going on active duty.
Additional information on this subject can be obtained at
Pierce Hall.

UNIVERSITY SENATE

Purpose

The purpose of the University Senate is to provide a formal
means through which the student body, faculty and the
administration, working as a unified group, shall share in the
governance of the University through the establishment of
University policy.

Nothing relating to the organization and administration of
the University Senate shall be construed so as to limit the
authority of the Board of Trustees or the President of the
University with respect to the administration of the Univer-
sity as prescribed by law.

Composition and Elective Procedures

The University Senate shall consist of a number of faculty
double the number of departments of the University, an
administrative segment one-third the size of the faculty
segment, and a student segment one-half the size of the
faculty segment. Faculty and administrative members must
hold full-time contracts at the time of election or appoint-
ment, and students must be full-time and in good standing.
"Student" refers to both the undergraduate and graduate

40 - Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Student bodies. The student segment shall consist of ten
tinnes as many undergraduate students as graduate students,
each delegation to be elected by its representative student
body. Undergraduate students shall be elected under the
auspices of the Student Government Association, and gradu-
ate students through elections arranged by their comparable
body. In both cases, the officiating body shall call for and
accept such voluntary nominations for election to the Senate
as shall be made to it.

Student members of the University Senate serve on most of
the Senate Committees.

COURSE NUMBERS AND ABBREVIATIONS

COURSE NUMBERS - Courses for Freshmen are numbered
in the 100's, for the sophomores in the 200's, for juniors in
the 300's, and for seniors in the 400's.

Required courses are numbered from 1 to 50 and elective
courses are numbered from 51 to 100, within each 100.

DEPARTMENTAL COURSE ABBREVIATIONS. The follow-
ing departmental abbreviations are used to identify courses
referred to in the Undergraduate Catalog:

Art History

Allied Health

Applied Music

Anthropology

Art

Arts and Science

Art Education

Astronomy

Biology

Business

Business Education

Business Management

Chemistry

Computer Science

Consumer Services

Counselor Education

Criminology

Distributive Education

Economics

Education

Educational Psychology

Elementary Education

Elementary Math

Elementary Science

English

Foreign Language

Food and Nutrition

Foundations of Education

French

Geography

Greek

Geology

Geoscience

German

Graduate

Academic Policies — 41

Health & PE

History

Home Economics

Home Economics Education

International Studies

Latin

Learning Resources

Linguistics

Marine Sciences

Mathematics

Military Science

Music

Music — Applied

Nursing

Philosophy

Physics

Political Science

Portuguese

Psychology

Public School Nursing

Russian

Safety Science

Science

Social Science

Sociology

Spanish

Special Education

Speech and Hearing

Special Rehabilitation

Student Personnel Services

STUDENTS' ACADEMIC GRIEVANCES

If a student feels that he has been treated unfairly by any
instructor (this will refer principally to grading pralicy, but
very occasionally may include genuine disagreement in class
participation), he must try to resolve the problem first with
the chairman of the department in question. If the student is
not satisfied with the solution offered by the department
chairman, he should confer with the Dean of the School in
which he is enrolled.

'y^'^t-':^:pf .

-a •

y ' vv

Student Life and Services — 43

Student Life and Services

The Student Affairs Staff of the University provides those
developmental services to students that will support the best
learning climate possible. It is the purpose of these student
personnel services to guide the student toward optimum
personal development. Beginning with the Freshman Week
Orientation Program, the student is invited to participate in
the activities and the residence life of the University. An
attempt is made to provide the student with a maximum
opportunity for self-regulation during his years as a citizen of
the University community. The Student Affairs Staff, together
with student groups and other faculty members, endeavors to
create a rich environment which will extend the classroom
experience and will involve students in making meaningful
decisions.

ORIENTATION

At the beginning of each semester separate orientation
programs are held for all new students entering the University:
freshmen, transfer students and graduate students. The pur-
pose behind these programs is to provide academic advisement
for new students, to help new students become acquainted
with each other and to help new students become familiar
with the University and the services available to them. All
orientation programs are planned by the New Student Orienta-
tion Committee, a representative body of all major student
organizations on campus. Orientation leaders are selected on a

volunteer basis from the student body and are specially trained
to help conduct all programs.

HOUSING

Housing available to students includes:

University owned residence halls

Fraternity houses

Private apartments and houses

Privately owned residence halls

Accommodations at home or with relatives

IT IS THE POLICY OF INDIANA UNIVERSITY OF PENN-
SYLVANIA'S HOUSING OFFICE TO OFFER FULL,
EQUAL AND NON DISCRIMINATORY ASSISTANCE TO
ALL STUDENTS WITHOUT REGARD TO THEIR RACE,
COLOR, RELIGION, NATIONALITY OR SEX. All facilities
listed with the Housing Office must adhere to this commit-
ment. It is the student's responsibility to initiate and to
complete the procedures necessary to secure the housing
desired. All students are required to complete a local address
card at arena registration each semester whether living in a
University residence hall or a privately owned facility.

University Residence Halls

Indiana University of Pennsylvania is a heavily residential
campus. Its 13 residence halls are divided, on a geographical

44 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

basis, into four "quads". Each quad is supervised by a full
time, professional faculty member with a background in
student personnel or counseling. In addition, each residence
hall has a full time Residence Manager to handle the
management functions of the building as well as an under-
graduate Head Hall Counselor who supervises a team of
undergraduate Hall Counselors. Hall Counselors are respon-
sible for counseling students, planning programs, carrying out
administrative tasks, and maintaining order among the
approximately thirty students living in their individual section
of the residence hall.

Since college students spend about 85% of their time outside
of the classroom and resident students spend a great deal of
this time in residence halls, lUP residence halls are seen as
much more than a place to sleep. They are rapidly becoming
out of classroom learning environments wherein educational,
social, recreational, and community service programs are
being planned and conducted with the express purpose of
facilitating personal growth on the part of the individual
residents.

Because residence hall living is seen as a positive educational
experience, freshmen are encouraged to live in residence halls
unless they are commuting from home. In an effort to make
residence hall living more responsive to individual needs, the
University offers two separate life styles: single sex and co-ed.
Students are encouraged to consider these options carefully
and to select the one in which they would feel most
comfortable.

Generally, the policy of the University is to encourage the
development of positive social behavior and good study
habits rather than to exercise close supervision of the
individual. Residents should have a well-defined personal
recognition of their individual responsibility to protect the
dignity, rights, and feelings of fellow students. In residence
hall living, students are considered to be adults who are
responsible for their own behavior. Within the confines of
Federal, State and local laws, the faculty and administration
delegate much of the governing authority of residence halls
to the Residence Hall Association which in turn establishes
most of the governing policies for the entire residence hall
system. All students are encouraged to become actively
involved in RHA.

Student accommodations are based on double occupancy.
The housing fee includes the service of drapes and bed
linens. One pillow case and two sheets are issued at the
beginning of occupancy, each week thereafter one pillowcase
and one sheet may be exchanged for laundered items.
Furnishings include a single bed, desk, study chair, mirror,
dresser, pillow, mattress, mattress cover and telephone. Stu-
dents should bring their own blankets, bedspreads, towels,
study lamps, etc.

All lUP residence halls are recently constructed, modern
buildings. Each is equipped with study lounges, recreational
equipment, laundry facilities and locked mailboxes. In addi-
tion, sewing machines, duplication machines, desk calculators
and other specialized equipment are located in each Quad
for student use. In order to provide security, all residence

Student Life and Services — 45

halls are locked at midnight Sunday through Thursday and
at 2;00 a.m. Friday and Saturday nights. Each student has a
card key for his/her building which provides entry after the
closing hour.

New students will be admitted to the residence halls on the
day prior to their registration each semester. Food service
will be available not later than the evening meal prior to
their registration date. Students are not permitted to occupy
their rooms earlier than the established date for their arrival
on campus. Before students will be issued a room key or
meal card, housing and food service charges must be paid to
the Accounts Receivable Office in the Administrative Annex
according to the deadlines established for each semester.

Application for Housing

Incoming freshmen who wish to live in University residence
hails must complete a residence hall application on their
orientation day. Resident students will be billed for a $50
advance housing deposit as well as a $50 advance registration
fee. Both will be credited toward total University fees.

Residence hall applications will be available for returning
students during the pre-registration period for each semester.
An advance deposit of $50 is required to reserve a room for
the fall semester. This deposit is credited toward total
University fees. Any student wishing to cancel his/her reserva-
tion is entitled to a refund of $25 if written notification is
received by the Housing Office no later than July 1, otherwise
the entire deposit is forfeited.

Readmitted students and those transferring from other Uni-
versities should contact the Housing Office directly for
housing applications and/or information.

Dining Room Policy

All students residing in University residence halls must take
their meals in University dining halls. Non-resident students
may take meals in the dining halls by making arrangements
with the Housing Office. All such arrangements are on a
semester basis. There are three meal plans offered at the
University:

Plan A — 21 meals per week
Plan B — 15 meals Monday through Friday
Plan C — 15 meals over 7 days
The above plans are for one breakfast, one lunch and one
dinner each day. Guests may take meals in any of the dining
rooms at the current transient rate.

Insurance for Personal Belongings

Students are encouraged to carry insurance covering the loss or
theft of money or property while residing in a residence hall.
Check with your parents to determine whether their Home-
owners Policy will cover you while you're at college. If not,
riders can be attached.

Student Room Refrigerators

Student room refrigerators are rented on a one or two semester
basis out of the Dean of Student Life office. These refrigerators
are UL approved, 2.1 cubic foot refrigerators requiring a

46 — tndiana University of Pennsylvania

maximum of .5 amps. Privately owned refrigerators which
meet these specifications may be used in University residence
halls and are assessed a fee of $1.00 per semester for
electricity.

Student Room Telephones

Each student room on campus has a telephone which is part
of the University Centrex System. With Centrex telephones,
it is possible to dial all telephones on campus, dial direct
station to station local and long distance calls, receive
directly dialed incoming calls, and transfer incoming calls
from one telephone on campus to another. In addition, the
Centrex telephone system serves as an important educational
tool. Students may dial a specific code given to them by
their professor which connects them with the Dial Access
Retrieval System in Learning Resources thus enabling them
to hear required listening assignments in the comfort of their
own residence hall room.

Telephone bills are mailed directly to residence hall rooms
each month. Long distance calls and telegram charges only
appear on the bill. Both occupants of a room are responsible
for all charges made to their telephone. Payment is made
directly to the Bell Telephone Company.

AUTOMOBILES

Every student, faculty or staff member who parks an
automobile in campus parking areas must register their auto
each year with the Campus Police. A charge of $1 per decal per

year is levied. Resident students are not permitted to park on
campus without a decal. Decals are issued only for the
following reasons: 1. student teaching; 2. medical reasons; 3.
work requirements. A decal for these students may be
obtained through writing to the Parking Authority Review
Board. A LIST OF PARKING RULES AND REGULATIONS
MAY BE OBTAINED AT THE CAMPUS SECURITY
OFFICE, JOHN SUTTON HALL.

FACILITIES FOR COMMUTIIMG STUDENTS

Accommodations for commuting students are provided in
John Sutton Hall. Commuting students may obtain lockers in
the basement of John Sutton Hall. Library facilities provide
pleasant study conditions for commuter students and several
other lounges in John Sutton and the Student Union are
always available for commuter student use. Commuter mail is
held at the University Post Office window and mail boxes are
available for commuter students upon request. Commuter
students may purchase lunches in Foster Dining Hall, Folger
Dining Hall, Foster Dining Hall Coffee Shop, or the Student
Union Coffee Shop. In addition, several private eating estab-
lishments are close to the University campus.

STUDENT PERSONNEL SERVICES

Student Assistance and Information Center

The University Information Office, established in August,
1970, serves as an information center and communication link

Student Life and Services - 47

for areas of student concern. Located in Pratt 203, the center
has an open door policy. AN ATTEMPT IS MADE TO HELP
STUDENTS WITH ANY PROBLEMS THEY MAY ENCOUN-
TER ON AND OFF CAMPUS. The goals are to assist students
in areas of concern - sometimes by referral to appropriate
offices, to combat problems of bureaucracy and to create an
awareness of the individual on the part of the University. The
four basic concepts that the office functions under entail
investigation, recommendation, general information, and
encouragement. Though not always able to give direct answers
or correct situations, the Center does have capabilities of
finding an answer and attracting the attention of appropriate
segments on campus.

HEALTH SERVICES

Pechan Health Center is a new, completely equipped infir-
mary located on the corner of Pratt Drive and Maple Street.
This two-story structure is thoroughly equipped for all
routine work. Registered nurses are on duty 24 hours a day,
seven days a week. Medical service is provided by four
fill-time University physicians. Twenty-seven beds are avail-
able where resident students may have three days of free
hospitalization. A fee of SI. 00 is charged for each day there-
after. Commuting students are given free dispensary service
and may be admitted to the Infirmary for emergency
hospitalization for which a fee of 33.00 per day from the first
day is charged. Free dispensary service is available to students
in the Campus Demonstration School. When antibiotics or

other special drugs are prescribed, these will be billed to the
student by the Health Center. Serious illnesses and accidents
are transferred to the local hospital or to hospitals in the
students' home town.

SPECIAL CLINICS

Three clinics at the University offer diagnostic testing and
remedial or improvement service or instruction in the follow-
ing areas:

PSYCHOLOGICAL CLINIC - diagnosis of academic and
behavior problems and personal, vocational, and educational
counseling.

READING CLINIC — diagnosis and remedial instruction for
reading and spelling disabilities and instruction for the
improvement of present skills.

SPEECH AND HEARING CLINIC - diagnosis of speech
problems, hearing tests and evaluations, and a regular pro-
gram of therapy.

These services are made available without charge to students
regularly enrolled at the University to give the necessary
assistance to alleviate deficiencies which would interfere with
successful performance and progress in the University and in
future work. Students who need help in any of the areas
suggested above are encouraged to use the facilities provided
for them and may of their own initiative come to any clinic

48 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

for help; or they may be referred by any faculty member or
University official.

INSURANCE

The Indiana University of Pennsylvania Board of Trustees
instituted mandatory student accident and health insurance
at the University effective September, 1963. It is realized,
however, that some of the freshmen class students are
covered by hospitalization policies of their parents. Where
this is the case and additional coverage under the I UP
student insurance plan is not desired, a waiver card can be
submitted at the time of registration. However, the reason-
able premium required for this service makes it highly
desirable for every student to participate. Full information
concerning this insurance coverage is mailed to enrolled
students with their registration material.

CAREER SERVICES

Career Services are available to students who are graduating,
students who are enrolled to obtain teacher certification,
students who have been accepted as candidates for degrees in
the Graduate School and alumni. Occupational counseling is
provided to students of all class levels as well as alumni.

In addition to career counseling the primary functions of the
office are to make credentials available to prospective
employers, arrange for campus interviews, prepare a current
file of job opportunities, maintain an extensive library of

occupational information, make follow-up studies of the
graduates, conduct group counseling and orientation meetings
and provide general assistance in the career planning and job
seeking process. Sets of credentials are prepared at the request
of interested students or alumni.

A credit course Is available to juniors and seniors in career
planning and development.

The Officer of Career Services also receives and makes
available to graduates and undergraduates information con-
cerning summer employment.

Positions are not guaranteed by the University but Indiana's
record of placement is one of the very best in Pennsylvania.

SELECTIVE SERVICE AND MILITARY AFFAIRS
COUNSELOR

The Selective Service Counselor submits all required reports
to Selective Service boards for undergraduate men when
appropriate. He also serves as a liaison person for military
affairs and officer programs.

VETERANS — An individual who served with the Armed
Forces for more than 180 days after January 31, 1955, is
eligible for the G.I. Bill (PL 89-358), providing he meets
certain other requirements. A prospective student should
contact the Veterans Counselor and submit to him the
Veteran's Application for Program of Education.

Individuals eligible for the G.I. Bill should report to the office
of the Veterans Counselor prior to registration for a semester

Student Life and Services - 49

or for summer sessions, to be entered or continued in training
for Veterans Administration benefits purposes.

No veteran receiving G.I. benefits shall be permitted to change
curriculum without clearance from the Veterans Counselor.
All veterans must maintain normal class progression and report
any change in course load to the Veterans Counselor.

Any undergraduate receiving benefits from the Veterans
Administration must carry at least 12 credit hours during a
regular semester in order to be considered a full-time student
by the Veterans Administration. The minimum full-time
requirement for a graduate student is nine credit hours.

VETERANS' CHILDREN - Children of a deceased veteran
whose death was due to service-related causes may be eligible
for educational assistance from the Federal Government
under Public Law 634 (Dependents Educational Assistance
Act). Immediately upon acceptance to Indiana, men and
women who qualify for such assistance should contact the
Veterans Counselor to determine their eligibility. They should
report to the Veterans Counselor before registering at the
University if the Veterans Administration has approved their
training under Public Law 634.

GUIDELINES FOR STUDENT CONDUCT

The University has committed itself through a formal vote of
the I UP Faculty Senate to the joint statement on Student
Rights and Freedoms as the approved guideline for all
student rules, regulations, and procedures at Indiana. The

purpose of these general regulations is to spell out some of
the actions that place the community in jeopardy and may
therefore result in a student's suspension or expulsion from
the University. In general, these regulations are concerned
with conduct on campus but students must recognize that
the University exists within a larger community which has its
own laws and standards of behavior, and that membership in
the University community confers no exemption from those
laws and standards. Whether on or off campus, the student is
under the jurisdiction of the city, state, and national govern-
ments. Off-campus misconduct will not normally be the basis
for disciplinary action by the University; however, when
such conduct imperils the integrity and values of the aca-
demic community, these actions may also result in disci-
plinary action on campus.

MAIL

The University Post Office is located in the west wing of
Foster Dining Hall, at the corner of Eleventh and Grant
Streets. The mail is delivered to offices and residence halls
from this location. As it is a branch of the Indiana Post
Office, the University Post Office provides most postal
facilities, including boxes for commuter students.

SERVICE FACILITIES

Student Union

The Student Union, built by the students through their
Activity Fee, offers many facilities for the University family.

50 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Students may relax or watch television in the lounge, buy a
snack or a complete meal at the coffee shop, listen to their
choice of records in the music center, or play cards, billiards,
or table tennis.

Bookstore

The Co-op Store is located near the Student Union Building.
The store stocks a complete line of all needed textbooks,
supplies, paper-back books and other requirements for class
use. In addition, the shopper will find an extensive selection of
records, college wear, stationery, jewelry, sundries and sou-
venir items.

"The store is operated on a competitive retail basis, with all
profits from operations reverting to the Student Cooperative
Association for use in supporting student activities.

University Lodge

The University Lodge plays an important part in the recrea-
tional and instructional life of the University. Owned by
students and faculty, this 280 acres of wooded hillside, with
its rustic lodge, three picnic shelters, rope ski tow, toboggan
run and nature and hiking trails offers opportunities for classes
to study nature and conservation and also is in demand for
picnics, meetings, and winter sports. The Lodge itself will
accommodate groups of 300 to 400 students.
The Student Cooperative Association is currently planning a
major expansion of facilities of the University Lodge. Already
completed is a 2-acre pond which was constructed for fire
protection and future recreational use.

During the winter sports season, ski equipment can be checked
out for use by "ID" card holders.

CO-CURRICULAR ACTIVITIES

As participating members of the lUP Community students
have a responsible role in the governance of the campus. Since
a valuable part of education lies in participation in groups
where experience in leadership, social and community respon-
sibility, intellectual curiosity and religious interests can be
met, voluntary participation in a number of varied organiza-
tions is available and encouraged. In addition, students are
encouraged to initiate and support any new groups which may
reflect their interests. Faculty, selected by the students, act as
advisors.

GOVERNANCE

Student Government Association

The Student Government Association, composed of student
representatives from all areas of the University, is the only
organization representing all students and elected by students.
The president and vice-president of the Student Government
Association are chosen in a campus-wide election, other
members are elected at large at a ratio of one representative
for each 200 students.

Student Government Association is active in making recom-
mendations to the Administration for the improvement of
student welfare and is also active in promoting the general
welfare of the University and good community relationships.

Student Life and Services — 51

SGA provides an opportunity for discussion of student
problems, brings the student body, faculty and administration
closer together through a frank understanding of mutual
problems, and promotes the observance of policies that will
lead to improvement of University campus life.

Commonwealth Association of Students

lUP is a member of the Commonwealth Association of
Students (CAS), the statewide student voice of the fourteen
state-owned institutions. Headed by an Executive Director in
Harrisburg, the Association is set up to serve the special
interests of the state colleges and university through the
collection of student opinions and their dissemination to the
proper state or federal agencies, as well as to actively promote
the passage or defeat of legislation deemed relevant to the
students and public higher education in Pennsylvania. CAS
also acts as a liaison between students and the state govern-
ment, the faculty union or any organization or individual that
affects the state colleges and university.

At lUP, the CAS local chapter operates independently of the
Student Government Association. The local chapter coordin-
ator, student government president, and minority representa-
tive are each accorded voting privileges at the statewide
meetings held bi-monthly. Any full-time or part-time under-
graduate or graduate at lUP is welcome and encouraged to join
as well as actively participate in the Association's activities,
either on the state or local level.

University Senate

Students also are elected to the University Senate and have full

voting rights, together with Faculty and Administrative mem-
bers. Most of the Senate Committees include students as
voting members. Any full-time student, may be elected to the
Senate. This is the body which shares in the governance of the
University through the establishment of University policy.

Student Cooperative Association

The Student Cooperative Association plays an extremely
broad role in the extracurricular life of the University. All
students and faculty members belong to the Association.
Almost all campus-wide activities outside of the instructional
program are sponsored wholly or in part by the Association.

The activity fee is the chief source of income for the
Association's activities. The student's "ID" card will admit
him free of charge to all University social, cultural, and
athletic activities. Other income for the Association comes
from the Co-op Store profits, athletics income and income
from all other events sponsored by the Association.

Facilities under the governance of the Student Cooperative
Association are the Student Union, the Co-op Store and the
University Lodge.

Residence Hall Association

Residence Hall Association (RHA) is made up of all students
living in University residence halls. The executive body of
RHA is composed of elected representatives from each
residence hall. The purpose of RHA is to provide educa-
tional, social, and community service programs for residents;

52 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

to collect information on various aspects of residence hall
life; and to assist in formulating housing policies and proce-
dures.

ACTIVITIES

Activities Board

The Activities Board is the student organization that sponsors
a majority of the major co-curricular activities on campus. It is
financed by the Student Cooperative Association. The Board is
advised by the Director of Student Activities and works in
close cooperation with the staff of the Student Union. An
active program of lectures, dances, concerts, coffee houses,
and films are presented throughout the year.

Artist Series

The Student Cooperative Association, in cooperation with the
office of the Director of Student Activities, sponsors a series
of cultural programs in the areas of dance, music, and theatre
each year. The programs are selected by a Student-Faculty
Committee. Attendance at these programs is free to all
students.

STUDENT PUBLICATIONS

THE INDIANA PENN, the campus newspaper is published
three times a week, Monday, Wednesday and Friday, by
students who wish to gain writing experience. Interested
students are advised to attend the organizational meeting,
which is held early each semester.

The positions of editors and news editors are filled by
Student Government action upon recommendation of a

Student Life and Services - S3

Student-faculty committee. The co-editors select their own
staff. There are 10 paid staff positions.

Applications for editor and news editor may be obtained
from the PENN advisor. Only those students with at least
one semester experience on the PENN staff are eligible to
apply for the two top positions.

THE OAK is the University yearbook, a pictorial and written
review of the year's activities. Subscriptions may be pur-
chased during the Fall Semester. The Daily Bulletin will
carry notices of the subscription drive.

Applications for staff positions may be obtained from the
Oak advisor. From these applications, a committee, composed
of students and faculty, selects the staff members. The ten
paid positions on the staff are subject to the approval of the
Student Government.

SMOKE SIGNALS is an entering freshman newsletter which is
sent to all incoming freshman approximately four times prior
to their arrival on campus. Contents are geared to areas of
concern to new entrants. The staff is open to anyone who is
interested. Contact the Student Affairs Office in Room 203
Pratt Hall.

The UNIVERSITY DIRECTORY is distributed early in the
fall term to students and faculty. It contains a directory of
all properly registered students, or staff, and of University
offices.

THE EYE, a student handbook, is distributed annually to all

students, free of charge. It includes rules and regulations, the
extra-curricular program, and general information of interest
to students.

ATHLETICS

Herman Sledzik, Director; Ruth Podbielski, Associate Director

Men's athletic teams of the University compete under the
rules of the National Collegiate Athletic Association and the
National Association of Intercollegiate Athletics and hold
membership in these organizations as well as Eastern College
Athletic Conference and Pennsylvania Conference.

In each season of the academic year, the University sponsors
at least three sports simultaneously. A total of eleven varsity
sports are offered during the school year.

Sports offered in the fall include cross country, football and
soccer. Basketball, wrestling, swimming and rifle take the
stage in the winter, and track and field, golf, baseball, and
tennis hold the spotlight in the spring.

Along with varsity squads in the respective sports, footPall,
basketball, wrestling and baseball, teams compete on the
freshman or junior varsity level.

Women's athletic teams of the University compete under the
rules of the National Division of Girl's and Women's Sports
and the Association of Intercollegiate Athletics for Women.
Varsity teams compete in tennis, volleyball, field hockey.

54 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

basketball, swimming, gymnastics and fencing.

Intramurals — Royden P. Grove, Director
A well organized and varied program of intramural sports
and athletic activities is conducted for men, for women and
on a coeducational basis.

In addition to participation in seasonal team and individual
sports in organized intramural tournaments, men and women
may participate in the Contemporary Dance Performance
Group and the lUPisces, a synchronized swimming group.

Intramural handbooks are available. Contact the Intramural
Director, Memorial Field House, for this information.

RELIGIOUS LIFE

The religious life of students is cared for through the
activities of some twelve independent organizations. Three of
these, the Newman Club, the United Campus Ministry, and
the Lutheran Center, maintain private meeting facilities near
the campus. Others affiliate with and meet in local churches.
For those groups too small to arrange their own needs, the
University undertakes to provide limited facilities and faculty
advisement.

All students are urged to attend their choice of the many
community places of worship and to participate in the area,
district, and national conferences which provide opportunity
for the study of religious problems.

STUDENT ORGANIZATIONS

There are more than 150 active student organizations at
Indiana University of Pennsylvania. In order to be recognized
as an official University organization, it must be approved by
the Student Government Association, Committee F-1 and the
University Senate. Through participation in organizations, a
student can extend his classroom experiences into relevant
programs which will improve his leadership ability, enhance his
academic achievement and develop his social skills. Listed
below are the organizations presently recognized on the
Indiana campus.

Honorary Societies

Alpha Kappa Delta, honorary

sociology
Alpha Psi Omega, honorary

dramatic
Chi Beta Phi, honorary

science
Delta Omicron, honorary music

for women
Delta Phi Alpha, honorary

German
Gamma Rho Tau, honorary

business management
Gamma Theta Upsilon, honorary

geography
lota Mu Colony, student affiliate

of Sigma Delta Phi honorary

for Spanish
Kappa Delta Pi, honorary

education

Kappa Mu Epsilon, honorary

mathematics
Kappa Omicron Phi, honorary

home economics
Lambda Alpha Epsilon,

honorary criminology
Omicron Delta Epsilon,

honorary economics
Phi Alpha Theta, honorary

history
Phi Mu Alpha, honorary music

for men
Pi Delta Phi, honorary French
Pi Gamma Mu, honorary social

studies
Pi Omega Pi, honorary business
Psi Chi, honorary psychology

Student Life and Services - 55

Communications and Publications

Oak — Yearbook

Penn - Student Newspaper

WIUP-FMand CIUP-TV

Departmental Clubs

American Chemical Society

(Student Affiliate)
Anthropology Club of lUP
Art Club
Associates for Student

Development
Association of Business

System Analysts
Computer Science Club of

lUP
Counselor Education Graduate

Association
Criminology Club
Economics Club
El Circulo Espanol
Elementary Education Club
English Club
French Club
Geo-Science Club
lUP American Society of

Safety Engineers
lUP College Chaper of the

Pennsylvania School Food

Service Association
lUP Council for Exceptional

Children

I UP Home Economics

Association
lUP Student Chaper of

National Art Education

Association
Marketing Club of lUP
Mathematics Club
McKeldin Philosophy Society
Music Educators Club
National Student Speech and

Hearing Association
Nurses Club
Phi Beta Lambda, business

education
Physics Club
Psychology Club
Society for Educational

Reconstruction
Society for the Advancement

of Management
Sociology Club of lUP
Student Accounting Association

of lUP
Student Pennsylvania State

Education Association
Physical Education Majors Club

General Clubs

Activities Board

Alpha Phi Omega, Service

Fraternity for Men
Association of United States

Army
Black Student League
Campus Council on Consumer

Affairs
Campus 4-H Club
Campus Girl Scouts
Circle K Club of I UP
Collegiate Rainbow for Girls
Commonwealth Association of

Students at lUP
Foreign Students Club
Gamma Sigma Sigma, Service

Sorority for Women
Graduate Student Council
Homphilesof I UP
Indiana University Color

Slide Society
Indiana University of

Pennsylvania Film Club
Interfraternity Council
International Relations Club
lUP Black Gospel Choir
lUP Organization of Married

Students
lUP Veterans Club
l-Uppers

L'Espirit De Bleu
Makhno Brigade

Masquers

Middle Eastern Council on

Cultural Affairs
Miss lUP Scholarship Pageant

Committee
Off -Campus Student League
Operation Up-Lift
Panhellenic Council
Pershing Rifles
Politics Club of lUP
Republican Club
Residence Hall Association
Rotaract Club of Indiana,

Pennsylvania
Senior Class
Student Government

Association
Student Music Organization of

lUP
Students International

Meditation Society
The Tribe
Young Democrats

56 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Religious Organizations

Campus Christian Fellowship

Chi Alpha

Hillel Foundation

lUP Fellowship of Christian

Athletes
I UP Overcomers

Sports and Recreation Clubs

Lutheran Student Movement
Newman Student Association
Orthodox Christian Fellowship
Salt my ne Coffee House
Student Religious Liberals
United Campus Ministry

Social Fraternities and Sororities

There are 27 social sororities and fraternities affiliated with
lUP. Their membership totals approximately 1200 men and
women. These Greek organizations have broadened their usual
base of activities to include charitable projects, and each year,
they raise many thousands of dollars for worthy causes. They
continue to pursue social, cultural and intellectual activities as
well.

Sororities

Alpha Delta Pi
Alpha Gamma Delta
Alpha Omicron Pi
Alpha Phi
Alpha Sigma Alpha

Fraternities

Delta Sigma Phi
Delta Tau
Delta Tau Delta
Kappa Delta Rho
Kappa Sigma

Alpha Sigma Tau
Alpha Xi Delta
Delta Zeta
Kappa Delta

Lambda Chi Alpha
Phi Kappa Psi
Phi Kappa Theta
Phi Sigma Kappa
Sigma Chi

Phi Mu
Sigma Kappa
Sigma Sigma Sigma
Zeta Tau Alpha

Sigma Nu
Sigma Tau Gamma
Theta Chi
Theta Xi

Cheerleaders

Chess Team

Concert Dance Group

Equestrian Club

lUP Bowling Club

lUP Handball Club

lUP Ice Hockey Club

lUP'isces Synchronized Team

lUP Intramurals Program

lUP Judo Club

lUP Karate Club

lUP Orienteering Club

lUP Outing Club

lUP Sailing Club

lUP Scuba Diving Club

(UP Thunderbolts Drill Team

lUP Water Polo Club

Rugby Club

X Athletic Club

Requirements For Graduation — 57

Undergraduate students at Indiana University of Pennsylvania
may pursue programs of study in any one of the six
undergraduate schools: the School of Arts and Sciences; the
School of Business; the School of Education; the School of
Fine Arts; the School of Health Services; or the School of
Home Economics. A student may earn the degree of Bache-
lor of Arts, Bachelor of Science, Bachelor of Fine Arts, or
Bachelor of Science in Education. To do so, the student
must satisfy all of the degree requirements, which fall into
three categories: 1) University requirements; 2) School

Requirements For Graduation

requirements; 3) Department requirements. Requirements of
the latter two categories may be found under the School and
the Department in which the student is pursuing a program
of study.

University requirements for graduation in all curricula consist
of General Education requirements, residency requirements,
and the credit hour and cumulative quality point average
requirements.

GENERAL EDUCATION

All students are obligated to fulfill a basic program in
General Education consisting of 52 semester credit hours.
Different Schools and sometimes Departments within
Schools may have specific variations as to how these General
Education requirements are to be met.

The primary objective of General Education is to develop
those understandings, attitudes, values and social skills that
will enable the student to enjoy a life that is satisfying to
himself as an individual and that will enable him to play a
constructive role in his community and in society, without
respect to his professional vocational interest or activity.

The courses in the program will be distributed throughout
the 4 years of University study, but the basic or introduc-
tory courses should be concentrated in the first 2 years of
the student's program.

58 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

REQUIRED COURSES

(20 credits)

ALL students (unless exempted) are REQUIRED to have
credit for:

English 101, 102, AND 201 - 10 cr.

*Eng I, II, and III
Art 101 - Introduction to Art OR
Music 101 - Introduction to IVIusic OR
English 103 — Introduction to Theater 3 cr.

Mathematics (any course approved by

the student's School Dean) 3 cr.

**Health and Physical Education 101 —

(Personal and Community Health) 2 cr.

**Health and Physical Education 110

through 172 (coeducational physical

activities unless otherwise noted —

elect two courses, one credit EACH.) 2 cr.

Military Science 101 AND 102 4 cr.

These 20 credit hours are mandatory. The remaining 32
credit hours to fulfill the General Education requirement
must be selected as follows: 6 to 9 credits in Humanities, 8
to 11 credits in Natural Sciences and Mathematics, and 15
credits in Social Sciences. A student may take 6 credits in
the Humanities if he takes 11 credits in the Natural Sciences

"AM English majors, in both the School of Arts and Sciences and the
School of Education, MUST replace English 201 with English 202.

•Veterans are given four credits towards these requirements. Verifica-
tion of service must be established.

and Mathematics, or 9 credits in the Humanities if he takes
8 credits in the Natural Sciences. Elections must be made
from the following:

HUMANITIES

(6 to 9 credits)

Foreign Language (2 courses)* 6 cr.

AR 115 - Art of Western Man to 1200 AD 3 cr.

AR 116 - Western Art: Ren. to Baroque 3 cr.

EN 371 — The English Bible as Literature 3 cr.

EN 358 — Modern American Fiction 3 cr.

EN 359 — Black American Literature 3 cr.

EN 346 — Contemporary American And

British Poetry 3 cr.

HI 101 — History of Civilization I 3 cr.

MU 301 - Music History I 3 cr.

PH 100 — Introduction to Religion 3 cr.

PH 101 - Methods of Critical Thinking 3 cr.

PH no - World Religions 3 cr.

PH 120 - Introduction to Philosophy 3 cr.

PH 221 - Logic 3 cr.

PH 222 - Ethics 3 cr.

PH 223 - Philosophy of Art 3 cr.

*NOTE: Students in the School of Arts and Sciences must
take one year of an intermediate-level foreign language.
Students in the School of Education may elect one year of a
foreign language, any appropriate level, or two courses from
the above list.

Exception: English Education majors must take the inter-
mediate level sequence of a foreign language.

Requirements For Graduation — 59

NATURAL SCIENCES AND MATHEMATICS

GENERAL ELECTIVES

(8 to 11 credits)

Laboratory science (any sequence from the

following):
Bl 103-104
CH 111-112
CH 113-114
GS 111-112

8 cr.

each
each
each

General Biology I and II 4 cr

General Chemistry I and II 4 cr

Concepts in Chemistry 4 cr

Solar System and Stellar

Astronomy 3 cr

GS 121-122 General Geology I and II

with accompanying Labs

(GS 131-132) 4 cr. each

PY 111-112 Physics I and II with

accompanying labs

(PY 121-122) 8 cr

PY 131-132 Physics I and II - with

accompanying labs

(PY 141-142) 8 cr

SC 105-106 Physical Science I and II

each

total

total
8 cr.

NOTE: Geoscience 111-112 are a 6 semester hour pair
which should be taken in the 111-112 sequence. If these
are elected for fulfilling the General Education requirement
for a Geoscience major, another science course of at least 3
semester hours must also be taken. Science 105-106, Physi-
cal Science I and II, may be taken with either course first;
one course is in no way prerequisite to the other.

In addition to the basic courses already listed, general
electives in mathematics and the natural sciences may be
selected, as advised in the student's major department, from
any of the following for which there is no prerequisite or for
which the student has taken the prerequisites:

Bl 261 - Ornithology
Bl 262 — Entomology
Bl 271 - Evolution
Bl 272 — Conservatism of
plant and ani-
mal resources
Bl 110&

120 - Biol-Ecology

CO 200 - Intro to

Computers
CO no - Intro to Com-
puter Science
GS 1 10 — General

Astronomy
GS 1 20 - Geology of Pa.
GS 213 — Navigation *
GS 330 — Paleontology
GS 321 - Mineralogy
GS 371 - Meteorology I
GS 361 — Oceanography I

MA Oil — Elementary

Functions
MA 01 3-01 5 - Calculus for
the Natural
and Social
Sciences
MA 362 - Probability and

Statistics
PY 222 - Mechanics I
PY 231 - Electronics
PY 242 - Optics
PY 342 - Thermal and

Statistical Phys.
PY 472 - Nuclear Phys.
*SC 111 - Science in Mod-
ern Civilization
*SC 401 - Growth of Science
and Its Concepts I
*SC 402 - Growth of Science
and Its Concepts II
* Listed under Chemistry
** Listed under Physics

60 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

SOCIAL SCIENCE

(15 cr.)

102

104

101

111

101

151

101

Each student will elect 5 courses from the following:

AN 110 — Introduction to Anthropology 3 cr.

CR 101 — General Administration of Justice 3 cr.

EC 101 — Basic Economics 3 cr.

EC 121 — Principles of Economics I 3 cr.

GE 101 - World Geography 3 cr.

• History of Civilization II 3 cr.

• History of U.S. & Pa. II 3 cr.

• World Politics 3 cr.

• American Politics 3 cr.

■ General Psychology 3 cr.

■ Principles of Sociology 3 cr.
Contemporary Social Science 3 cr.

NOTE: School of Education students are required to take
History 104 and Psychology 101. The other three courses
are up to the student's choice.

RESIDENCY

The last 30 credits in a student's curriculum MUST be
earned by enrollment in courses at Indiana University of
Pennsylvania.

CREDIT HOUR AND CUMULATIVE

QUALITY POINT AVERAGE

Every student must complete a minimum of 124 semester
hours to graduate, including 52 hours in General Education

(all on a passing basis), and must have a 2.0 ("C" grade)
cumulative quality point average and a 2.0 ("C") average in
his major field.*

ADVANCED PLACEMENT AND

EXEMPTION EXAMINATIONS

Courses taken by students prior to admission to college
under the Advanced Placement Program of the College
Entrance Examination Board may be recognized by the
award of college credit or by exemption from required
subjects. Those who earn a grade of 3, 4, or 5 in the
Advanced Placement Examination will be granted exemption
from the course and/or credit toward the number of credit
hours required for graduation.

For students who have had other unusual opportunities of
instruction or have advanced in a given field, an opportunity
to gain exemption from a course is afforded through exemp-
tion examinations, given at the discretion of each depart-
ment. Departments offering such options will publicize their
availability campus-wide every year. A student who passes an
exemption examination will be exempt from taking that
course in his academic program.

When a student receives CREDIT for a course by examina-
tion, the credit will be applied to his graduation require-
ments just as though the course had been taken. If a student

•Effective for members of the 1971 Freshman class onward and for
transfer students admitted from Spring of 1971 onward.

Requirements For Graduation — 61

is granted EXEMPTION ONLY from a course, he will be
permitted to take a free elective in place of that course.

This enables the student to further specialize, to correct
weaknesses outside his major field, to build his knowledge in
an ancillary area, or to introduce himself to an entirely
different area.

Courses for which credit and/or exemption are awarded by
examination will not be used in the determination of quality
point averages.

APPLICATION FOR GRADUATION

It is the student's responsibility to complete an application
for graduation form in the office of the Dean of his School,
early in the term at the close of which he expects to
graduate. Students are responsible for knowing and fulfilling
the requirements for graduation in their degree program.

Certification for graduation is not final until approved by
the Dean of the School in which the student is enrolled.

Students who expect to graduate at the end of the summer
sessions must complete all requirements for graduation by
the conclusion of the Main Summer Session, UNLESS
PRIOR EXCEPTION be made by the student's School Dean.
Diplomas will not be issued until all bills and obligations
have been satisfied, including the degree fee.

SECOND BACCALAUREATE DEGREE

In order to receive a second or subsequent baccalaureate

degree, a graduate of Indiana University of Pennsylvania or
of another accredited college or university must earn at least
30 additional credits by enrollment in courses at Indiana
University of Pennsylvania which are approved by the
Department and the School in which the subsequent degree
is earned. In addition, the student must meet any other
degree requirements of the Department and the School in
which the degree is earned.

Honors are not granted for subsequent degrees.

THREE-YEAR DEGREE PROGRAM

There is no special significance to the 4-year baccalaureate
program; more or less time could be used effectively in
pursuit of the Bachelor's degree. For those who wish to
graduate in 3 years, the accelerative features outlined below
indicate how this could be accomplished:
Six semesters at 1 7 credits each
Exemption and credit for English 101
Advanced Placement Examination Program
College Level Examination Program
Departmental Examinations for

exemption and credit
Summer Session Enrollment(s)
Minimum requirement for degree

Any student who desires an accelerated program should
consult BOTH his advisor AND the Dean of his School
concerning the opportunities for credit by examination and
the total credit hours and courses required for graduation.

102 cr.
4 cr.

18 cr.

124 cr.

ii.^.

^^^

■>'• '-'*-'WM!!^

^^^^

'^^_Ay^^

^^»^

^tL ^

rr-rl

pti^t^

:)^:^^

w Oki.

School of Arts and Sciences - 63

The School of Arts and Sciences

DR. FRANCIS G. MC GOVERN, DEAN; ASSOC. DEANS: DR. CHARLES R. FUGET, DR. SUZANNE H. HUDSON

The School of Arts and Sciences has as its objective the
providing of a liberal education — which Mark VanDoren
defines as "nothing less than a complete one" — as the basis
of the student's preparation for a satisfying career. In a
dynamic society such as America's, a broad liberal education
accompanying career preparation is virtually a necessity. The
School maintains an emphasis upon fundamental understand-
ing and application of the basic principles of our cultural
heritage, combined with development of a thorough back-
ground of knowledge in the student's specific area of
interest. It seeks to promote in the student critical and
objective thinking, analytical skill, and a keen awareness of
his responsibilities to society as it prepares him for his
chosen field.

DIVISIONS

The School's programs of study are the product of its
departmental faculties, organized in three divisions: Humani-
ties, Natural Sciences and Mathematics, and Social Sciences.
It supports service courses available to non-Arts and Sciences
students, as well as its own degree and non-degree programs.
All Arts and Sciences students must major in a School
discipline; double-majors and minors are also available, as are
interdisciplinary and pre-professional programs.

Humanities Division

English

French

German

Journalism

Russian

Spanish

Speech and Theater

Philosophy

Pre-Professional Programs
Dental School Preparation
Law School Preparation
Medical School Preparation
Theological School

Preparation
Veterinarian School

Preparation

Related Professional Fields:

Preparation for:

Chiropractic

Pharmacy or Pharmacology

Optometry

Osteopathy

Podiatry

Natural Sciences and
Mathematics Division

Biology

Chemistry

Computer Science

Geoscience

Geology

Applied Mathematics

Mathematics

Natural Sciences

Physics

Social Sciences Division

Criminology

Economics

Geography

History

International Studies

Government and Public

Service
Political Science
Psychology
Regional Planning
Sociology Anthropology

64 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

DEGREES

The departments of biology, chemistrv. mathematics, and
physics offer work leading to either a Bachelor of Science or a
Bachelor of Arts degree, depending upon the specific course
program pursued. The Bachelor of Science degree is offered in
computer science, geoscience and in regional planning. All
other programs of the School, those in the departments of
criminology, economics, English, geography, history, the
languages, philosophy, political science, psychology, and
sociology-anthropology lead to the Bachelor of Arts degree.

Several Arts and Sciences departments sponsor Master of
Arts or Master of Science degrees in the University's Gradu-
ate School, and the English department offers a graduate
program leading to the Doctor of Philosophy degree. Infor-
mation on these programs should be obtained from the
Graduate School.

Degree Requirements

In addition to the University's General Education require-
ments, all students seeking a baccalaureate degree in the
School of Arts and Sciences must complete the requirements
for a major as established by the department through which
they wish to specialize. Statements of these requirements,
and for minoring in a specific field, appear in the depart-
ment sections that follow. A double major or minor may
encompass a discipline outside as well as within the School,
but should be opted only with adviser approval. As a general
principle, there is considerable latitude in course choice for

Arts and Sciences majors; for specifically required courses,
substitutions in any program must have the written approval
of the student's department chairman or the School Dean.
The intermediate series foreign language requirement (a
description follows) applies without exception to all Arts
and Sciences degrees.

THE FOREIGN LANGUAGE REQUIREMENT. A candidate
for a Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Science degree must
demonstrate a proficiency in a foreign language equivalent to
that attained upon completion of 2 years of college instruc-
tion in that language. This requirement may be met by:

a) Successful completion of two semesters at the second-year
level in a specific foreign language; or

b) Successful completion of an exemption or credit
examination in lieu of the above, the examination
administered by the appropriate Indiana foreign lan-
guages department.

Students with strong high school foreign language preparation
should schedule the intermediate series sequence in the first
semester; for instance, French III (seepage 110.) Students with
less preparation should schedule the introductory level series,
for instance, French I. Students uncertain as to the strength of
their preparation should seek the counsel of the appropriate
foreign languages department chairman. Because of its sequen-
tial nature, all students should begin their foreign language
course work in their first semester.

School of Arts and Sciences - 65

The foreign language requirement may be met through work in
French, German, Greek, Latin, Russian, or Spanish.

Any foreign student, registered as such at Indiana, whose
acquired native language is other than English and who
demonstrates an acceptable proficiency in English, is exempt
from the foreign language requirement for an Arts and
Sciences degree, if the department he is majoring in does not
require a specific language not thus covered.

SPECIAL CREDIT PROGRAMS

School majors may be interested in programs such as the
Marine Science Consortium or the various Foreign Study
Tours. Credits obtained through such arrangements normally
are applicable toward an Arts and Sciences degree. Also of
interest are the School's credit-awarding Indiana at Valladolid
(Spain) and Indiana at Duisburg (Germany) programs, as well
as the Summer Study in Jalapa (Mexico) Program.

The Marine Science Consortium was established in 1968 for
the purpose of promoting teaching and research in the marine
sciences. The participating institutions include Indiana Uni-
versity of Pennsylvania and thirteen other colleges and
universities. Although no separate major in the Marine
Sciences exists, elective courses may be taken and credited
toward undergraduate curricula in Biology, Geology, Geog-
raphy, and Earth Science. The Marine Science Consortium
offers five 3-week sessions during the summer at the NASA-
Wallops Island Station, Virginia. Normally, several research
cruises are offered each summer.

Students must register for credit and pay credit fees to a
participating institution. Room and board fees are paid to the
Consortium. Applications for all summer sessions must be
submitted to the institutional Director by April 1. Students
must be accepted by the Consortium before registering at a
participating institution. See page 130 for a listing of Marine
Science Consortium courses. For brochure, summer bulletin,
and application forms, contact either;

Dr. J. G. Humphreys, Director
Biology Department,

or
Prof. Paul Prince, Assoc. Director
Geoscience Department

India: A Nation in Transition — In this special program two
weeks on campus are devoted to lectures, individual research,
group activity, film, and personal experiences designed to
acquaint the student with India.

Seven weeks of study in India are related to economics,
culture, geography, politics, and personal experience in a
non-western culture. These weeks include living for a week
with individual Indian families, industrial development visits,
experiences related to non-western religion with visits to a
limited number of shrines, examination of contributions of
Indian culture, and a look at Indian urbanization.

Self-Instruction in Critical Languages, FL 485 — A course
intended for the student whose professional or personal
interest leads him to the study of an uncommonly-taught

66 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

language, and whose motivation and aptitude are sufficiently
high to undertake this as independent study. Native drill-
masters will assist the student in three weekly tutorial sessions,
and specialists from other institutions will test orally the
achievement of each student at the conclusion of the course.
Among the twenty African, Asiatic and European languages
available in this program, Japanese, Chinese, Arabic, Hebrew,
and Portuguese are of considerable interest today. For further
information, contact the chairperson. Department of Romance
and Classical Languages.

Indiana at Valladolid — For the past 13 years the School's
Department of Romance and Classical Languages has spon-
sored a semester of study at the University of Valladolid,
Spain. For details and brochure, please contact the chair-
person. Department of Romance and Classical Languages.

Indiana At Dulsburg — The University has an exchange
program with the University of Duisburg, West Germany open
to upper level students both in Arts and Sciences and in
Education, as well as to other students having specific interest
in a foreign study experience and evidencing sufficient
preparation in the German language. The program involves a
direct exchange of students with the University in Duisburg.
Fifteen scholarships involving free tuition are available annu-
ally. For further information, contact the Chairperson Depart-
ment of German — Russian.

Indiana — Mexico Summer Program — The Spanish Section of
the Department of Romance and Classical Languages cooper-
ates with the Pennsylvania Consortium for International

Education (PCIE) in sponsoring a program of study in Spanish
language and Latin American related areas in Mexico. The
program is located at Jalapa in Veracruz, and the cost of the
program includes transportation, complete room and board,
tuition, etc. The student may earn up to six hours of graduate
or undergraduate credit depending on the courses he elects.
For a detailed brochure, please contact the chairperson,
Romance and Classical Languages Department.
See page 127—128 for listing of additional foreign studies.

ACADEMIC CONCENTRATION IN HOSPITAL
AND HEALTH CARE ADMINISTRATION

The hospital administrator's unique contribution to the
health of the public is his expertise in the organization of
the many components of the health care delivery system in
general and the hospital in particular. The hospital is clearly
one of the most complex institutions in our society. The
hospital administrator occupies a difficult management posi-
tion and an important one if the public is to be properly
served.

Today, thirty-eight universities in the United States, Canada
and Puerto Rico offer graduate degrees in health and hospi-
tal administration. A baccalaureate degree from an accredited
college or university is the primary prerequisite for admis-
sion. Graduate programs leading to a master's degree in
health and hospital administration consist of one or two
years of full-time academic study and may include a period
of up to one year of administrative residency in a hospital or

School of Arts and Sciences — 67

Other health-related organization under the preceptorship of

an adnninistrator. Courses in hospital administration remain

the foundation of the curricula.

Undergraduate preparation for a career in health and hospital

care administration can be obtained through several Arts and

Sciences courses.

For additional information see page 219 under School of

Health Services.

PRE-PROFESSIONAL PROGRAMS

The School of Arts and Sciences offers five pre-professional
programs that prepare the student for application to a
professional school; pre-dental, pre-legal, pre-medical, pre-
theological and pre-veterinary medicine. The last four are
grounded in an Arts and Sciences department(s) — pre-legal in
Economics, English, History, Philosophy or Political Science;
pre-medical and pre-veterinary in Biology; and pre-theological
in Philosophy. Pre-dental is grounded in the Natural Science
Division. In addition, the School offers a major in the Natural
Sciences for those students whose goal is pharmacy or
pharmacology, optometry, osteopathy, podiatry, or a similar
professional field. All programs are so designed that, should
work at a professional school not ensue, the student may earn
an lUP baccalaureate degree, provided he has been faithful to
faculty advisement.

Course work in the pre-legal program centers upon a carefully
developed interdisciplinary minor. For detailed guidance in
pre-law, students should consult with the Associate Dean of
the Social Sciences Division.

The pre-professional health programs in Arts and Sciences
presuppose that the student has an excellent background in
the high school sciences and mathematics, or will prove to be
an excellent college student. Because admission standards at
most professional schools are very high, students desiring
pre-professional preparation for any of these fields will find it
advantageous to major in the basic department discipline,
making known to the department chairman their eventual goal
but delaying explicit affiliation with the pre-professional
program until they have established themselves academically at
the college level. Commitment to any pre-professional program
must be made not later than the end of the student's fourth
semester.

Students interested in the related health fields (dentistry,
pharmacy, optometry, osteopathy, physical therapy, podiatry,
etc.) should consult with the Associate Dean of the Natural
Sciences and Mathematics Division during their first semester
of lUP attendance, or as soon thereafter as possible.

INTERNSHIP PROGRAMS

Several departments have established programs under which
students engage in off-campus supervised work experience for
credit. During the past year Indiana students have worked in
Harrisburg, Pa. as aides to state legislators, with the Governor's
Justice Commission and the Local Government Commission,
and with the Investigations Division, Pennsylvania Department
of Justice. Others have worked in state hospitals at Torrance,
Woodville and Mayview, at correctional institutions in Pitts-

68 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

burgh, Greensburg, and Warrendale, as child therapists at the
Indiana County Guidance Center, as peer group counselors on
the local campus, as an assistant to the Pennsylvania State
Republican Chairman, as on-site guides at The United Nations,
as workers on an Israeli kibbutz, and as student aides for the
Department of Education, Puerto Rico. Other students have
worked in the Pittsburgh federal probation office. Many
students have worked with major political parties and candi-
dates at the local and state level. At the county level, they
have been attached to the County Planner, the Common Pleas
Court, Coroner, Treasurer, Commissioners and Boro Manager.
Students have also worked in the Washington office of
Pennsylvania Congressmen, and in the Governor's Office. At
the study-abroad level, internships are also available in West
Germany in schools, government offices, social agencies and
publishing.

For more information about specific Internship programs
students should consult with the chairman for the department
in which the student is majoring. Low-income students eligible
for internships may receive federal-state funding.

BIOLOGY DEPARTMENT

School of Arts and Sciences - 69
Biology

FRANCIS W. LIEGEY, CHAIRPERSON: ALICO, BAKER, CONWAY,
CHARNEGO, CISKOWSKI, DIETRICH, FERRENCE, FORBES.
GALLATI, GREAVES, GOLD, HUE, HUMPHREYS, MERRITT, J. H.
MILLER, R. N. MOORE, NASTASE, PICKERING, SCHROCK,
STAPLETON, STRAWCUTTER, VALLOWE, WAECHTER,
WASKOSKIE, ZENISEK

Degrees offered by the Biology Department are the Bachelor
of Science in Biology, the Bachelor of Arts in Biology, and
the Bachelor of Science in Education with a Biology major.
The first two degree programs are under the School of Arts
and Sciences, and the third is under the School of Educa-
tion. The department also offers a Biology minor.

CURRICULA

The program leading to a B.S. in Biology is a concentrated
curriculum designed to give the student adequate preparation
for admission to graduate school or professional colleges,
such as Medical, Dental and Veterinary Colleges. In addition,
with the proper selection of electives, the graduate should be
qualified to assume a position in industry or in state and
federal agencies requiring well-trained biologists.

The program leading to a B.A. in Biology is a more flexible
curriculum, permitting the student to obtain an adequate
background in related areas. Students electing this curricu-
lum would be most interested in going into the fringe areas
of biology, such as sales, technical services, or management.
Although the training should be sufficient for admission to
graduate school or professional colleges, the student would

be at a disadvantage compared with students who elect the
B.S. program.

The program leading to the B.S. in Education with a Biology
major is designed to prepare for Certification in public
school teaching.

Core Program

Requirements for ALL Biology majors are 15 credits in
Biology, 16 credits in Chemistry, and 4 credits in Mathe-
matics as follows:
Biology (15 credits)

Bl 105 - Cell Biology

Bl 110 - Plant Biology

Bl 120 - Animal Biology

Bl 490 - Biology Seminar
Chemistry (12 credits)

CH 111 - Gen Chem I

CH 112 - Gen Chem II

CH 231 - Organic Chem I

CH 351 — Biochemistry
Mathematics ( 4 credits)

MA013-Calcl 4 or.

B. S. in Biology

In addition to the Core Program, requirements for the degree
of Bachelor of Science in Biology are 18 additional credits in
Biology, 4 additional credits in Chemistry, 4 additional credits
in Mathematics, and 8 credits in Physics, as follows:

cr.

or.

cr.

70 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Biology

Bl Electives

Chemistry

CH 232 - Organic Chem II

Mathematics

MA 015 - Calc II

Physics

PY 1 1 1 - Physics I
PY 112 - Physics II
PY 121 - Physics I Lab
PY 122 - Physics II Lab

B. A. in Biology

In Addition to the Core Program, requirements for the degree
of Bachelor of Arts in Biology are 12 additional credits in
Biology electives.

B. S. in Education — Biology Major

In addition to the Core Program, requirements for the degree
of Bachelor of Science in Education with a Biology major are
13 additional credits in Biology, 8 credits in Physics, 29 credits
in Professional Education, and the General Education require-
ments of the University as follows:

Core Program (35 credits)
Biology (13 credits)
Bl 262 - Ecology

see page 69

3cr.

Bl 263 - Genetics 3 cr.

Bl Electives 7 cr.

Physics (8 credits)

Same as for B.S. in Biology — see page 69
Professional Education (29 credits) — see page 184
General Education — see page 57

Minor in Biology, Arts and Science Students

To minor In Biology, a student must gain the permission of
the Biology Department Chairman. The minor consists of a
minimum of 17 credits and a suggested course sequence is as
follows:

Bl 103 - Gen Biol I 4 cr. or
Bl 140 - Gen Biol II 4 cr. or
plus
Bl 110 -Plant Biol
Bl 120 -Animal Biol

Special Required Courses

The Biology Department provides special service courses for
other Departments and Schools.

Elementary Education: Bl 31 1 and EL 312

Home Economics: Bl 151 and Bl 241

Nursing; Bl 150, Bl 151 and Bl 241

Physical Education: Bl 151

Bl 105 - Cell Biol

4 cr.

Bl Elective

3cr.

5cr.

1 5 cr.

School of Arts and Sciences — 71
Biology

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

A travel fee will be required for all field courses.

General Education Courses

Bl 103 GENERAL BIOLOGY I 4 cr.

Introduces biological components of some of man's major problems.
Considerable time on information and methodology current in
biological sciences, ecology, energy storage and release, molecular
transport, chemical control, and development. Three hours lecture,
2 hours lab per week.

Bl 104 GENERAL BIOLOGY II 4 cr.

Prerequisite: 81 103.

Completion of background information with study of selected areas
of biology, such as genetics, evolution, and behavior. Intensive
consideration of the impact of biological problems on man's
existence. Three hours lecture, 2 hours lab per week.

Biological Science Courses

Bl 105 CELL BIOLOGY 4 cr.

Introductory course to increase depth of beginning student's
understanding of structural, functional developmental and evolu-
tionary aspects of cell concept. Three hours lecture, 2 hours lab per
week.

Bl 110 PLANT BIOLOGY 5 cr.

Prerequisite: Bl 105 or special permission.

Plant structure, function and development, recognition and group-
ing, environmental relationships, and economic importance of
plants considered. Three hours lecture, 4 hours lab per week.

Bl 112 PLANT DIVERSITY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: Bl 110.

Anatomy and life processes of selected algae, bacteria, fungi,
mosses, ferns and their allies. Two hours lecture, 3 hours lab per
week.

Bl 120 ANIMAL BIOLOGY 5 cr.

Prerequisite: Bl 105 or special permission.

Morphology, physiology, embryology, ecology, taxonomy, social
and economic importance of animals; consideration of principles
applicable to a correlation of classical with present zoology. Three
hours lecture, 4 hours lab per week.

Bl 251 PLANT TAXONOMY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: Bl 1 10.

Considers the collection, preservation, and identification and tax-
onomy of plants of this region. Two hours lecture, 3 hours lab
per week.

Bl 252 FIELD ZOOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: Bl 120.

Field study of animals; collection and preservation techniques for
utilization in museum and instructional use; student collections
and field trips required. Two hours lecture, 3 hours lab per week.

Bl 261 ORNITHOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: Bl 105 or Bl 103 and 104.

A study of birds of the region. Indoor laboratory as well as field
trips required. Two hours lecture, 3 hours lab per week.

Bl 262 GENERAL ENTOMOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: Bl 120.

Morphology, anatomy, ecology, taxonomy, economic and public
health importance of insect orders, particularly those of Western
Pennsylvania; student collection and field trips required. Two
hours lecture, 3 hours lab per week.

72 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Bl 263 GENETICS 3 cr.

Prerequisites: Bl 1 10 or 120 and CH 231.

Deals with the distribution and function of the hereditary mate-
rial: special emphasis on microbial, viral, and molecular genetics.
Two hours lecture, 3 hours lab per week.

Bl 271 EVOLUTION 3 cr.

Prerequisite: One year biology.

Historical development of evolutionary thought, evidence for
evolution and operational mechanisms involved: origin and phylo-
genetic relationships of biologic groups. Three hours lecture per
week.

Bl 272

3 cr.

CONSERVATION OF PLANT AND

ANIMAL RESOURCES
Prerequisites: Bl 105 or Bl 103 and 104.

Special attention to study of accepted practices in soil, water,
forest and game conservation. Two hours lecture, 3 hours lab per
week.

Bl 285 BIOTECHNIQUE 3 cr.

Prerequisites: One year biology, one year chemistry.
Production of whole mount, smear, squash, microtome section
and serial section microscope slides of both plant and animal
organisms. Three combined lecture/laboratories of 2 hours each per
week.

Bl 331 ANIMAL DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: Bl 120.

Aspects of comparative and molecular development of animals.
Two hours lecture, 3 hours lab per week.

Bl 332 COMPARATIVE VERTEBRATE ANATOMY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: Bl 120.

Discussion of anatomy of representative vertebrates from a compar-
ative point of view. Stresses major organizational changes observed
in vertebrate history. Two hours lecture, 3 hours lab per week.

Bl 350 CELLULAR PHYSIOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: CH 231.

Topics include nutrition, uptake and preparation of food and
oxygen, release of energy and elimination of waste products; would
complement the animal and plant physiology. Two hours lecture, 4
hours lab per week.

Bl 351

PLANT PHYSIOLOGY

3cr.

Prerequisites: 81 110, CH 231.

Studies physiological processes occurring in plants, considered in
relation to growth and development of plant. Two hours lecture, 3
hours lab per week.

Bl 352 COMPARATIVE ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: Bl 120, CH 351.

Comparative study of homeostatic mechanisms and systems in
animals and their relation to fundamental chemical and physical
events in cells. Two hours lecture, 3 hours lab per week.

Bl 361 MICROBIOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: Bl 105, CH 351.

Introduction to morphology, physiology, and ecology of procaryo-
tic organisms. Importance of microorganisms in basic and applied
research, economics, infection, and immunology are discussed.
Two hours lecture, 3 hours lab per week.

Bl 362 ECOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: Bl 110 and 120.

Study of interrelations and adaptations of organisms; includes
consideration of physical and biotic environmental factors. Field
trips. Two hours lecture. 3 hours lab per week.

Bl 372 PLANT ANATOMY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: Bl 1 10.

Embryological development and growth and maturation of typical
vascular plants; emphasis placed on differentiation and maturation
of plant organs of various families. Two hours lecture, 3 hours lab
per week.

School of Arts and Sciences - 73
Biology

BI441 GENERAL PHYSIOLOGY 4 cr.

Prerequisites: Bl 350, 351, or 352, CH 351, MA 013 (or permission
of instructor).

Molecular approach to quantitative analysis of mechanisms of
functional operation and coordination in living organisms. Emphasis
on chemical and physical principles operating at primary functional
units of organization. Three hours lecture and 3 hours lab per week.

Bl 446 DENDROLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisites; Bl 110 or 112, or by permission of instructor.
Study of woody plants as to their identification, distribution,
ecology, culture, anatomy, physiology, mensuration and utiliza-
tion. Two hours lecture, 3 hours lab per week.

Bl 472 RADIATION BIOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: Two years Biology, one year Physics, and General,
Organic, and Biochemistry.

Aspects of nuclear physics and radioactive isotopes; uses, effects,
detection and measurement of radioactive nuclides used in biol-
ogy. Two hours lecture, 3 hours lab per week.

Bl 475 MAMMALOGY 3 cr.

General consideration of major radiations of mammals — history of
the order and discussion of some current mammalian research
topics. Emphasis on comparative morphology and structural and
functional evolution. Research paper required. Two hours lecture, 3
hours lab per week.

Bl 476 PARASITOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: Bl 120

Structure, physiology, ecology, life cycles, pathology and treatment
of parasitic protozoa, flatworm and roundworm species of man.
Dissection of hosts for parasites. Two hours lecture, 3 hours lab per
week.

Bl 478 MYCOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: Bl 1 10

Involves systematics, morphology, and physiology of
Mysomyocophyta and Eumpcoohyta, with emphasis on economi-

cally important and experimentally useful taxa. Two hours lecture,
3 hours lab per week.

Bl 480 BIOLOGY SEMINAR 1 cr.

Discussion of recent trends in biological thought and research.
Students report on assigned readings and/or personal research.

Bl 481 SPECIAL TOPICS 1-3 cr.

These courses vary from semester to semester covering diverse topics
in specific areas of Biology.

Bl 482 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-3 cr.

Student investigates independently any field of biology in which
interested. Work supervised by a faculty member but does not
involve regular class or laboratory hours. Enrollment by permission
only.

Bl 489 LITERATURE OF BIOLOGY 2 cr.

Designed for student who wishes to acquaint himself with some of
the useful sources of reference in biology. Given only in the
summer.

Bl 498 BIOLOGY INTERNSHIP Max 6 hrs. toward the major.

Max. 12 hrs. total
Prerequisites: Biology major with at least 90 credit hours and
permission of the Director of Internships and the Chairman.
Selected students have opportunity, under Department supervision,
to gain off-campus practical experience in area of interest. Total
number of credits and number of credits toward the Biology major
will be decided in consultation between student, his advisor, and
Director of Internships.

Bl 499 RESEARCH BIOLOGY 1-3 cr.

Acquaints student with techniques of modern research by actively
engaging in a program of biological experimentation and/or research
with a faculty member (or members). No formal lectures or
laboratories. Enrollment by permission only.

74 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Course Required of Secondary Education Majors

ED 451 TEACHING SCIENCE IN THE 3 cr.

SECONDARY SCHOOL
Background to help science majors meet the problems of teaching
science. Various inquiry approaches useful in meeting objectives of
a contemporary science class are taught and exemplified. Two
hours lecture, 2 hours lab per week.

Courses Provided for Students in
Elementary Education

Bl 311 ENVIRONMENTAL BIOLOGY 4 cr.

Laboratory and field course providing basic knowledge in biology
and its practical implications. Physical and biological aspects of the
environment are studied. Three hours lecture, 3 hours lab per week.

ES312 TEACHING OF ELEMENTARY SCIENCE 3 cr.

Emphasis placed upon science as it relates to the child and the
curriculum, planning for teaching science, and recent innovations
in science teaching. (Course offered on the block only.)

Courses Provided For Students in Home
Economics, Physical Education and Nursing

BI150 VERTEBRATE ANATOMY 3 cr.

Study of systematic anatomy of vertebrate's body. Deals almost
entirely with the mammal. The cat is used for dissection in lab. Two
hours lecture, 3 hours lab per week.

BI151 HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY 3 cr.

Functions of various organ systems of humans. Recommended for
non-majors, not open to majors. Two hours lecture and one
lecture-demonstration per week.

81 241 GENERAL MICROBIOLOGY 3 cr.

Study of microorganisms, and role they play in water, soil, food,
and infection. Standard methods and techniques are emphasized in

laboratory. Two hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory per week.
(Non-majors only.)

NOTE: See Marine Science Consortium Section for additional course
listings.

CHEMISTRY DEPARTMENT

School of Arts and Sciences - 75
Chemistry

STANFORD L. TACKETT, CHAIRPERSON: BALLAS, BORDAS,
CHRISTODOULEAS, COLEMAN, COSTA, FAZIO, HARTLINE,
KOLACZKOWSKI. MARKS, McKELVEY, NELSON, PATSIGA,
SCROXTON, SYTY, WUNZ, ZAMBOTTI, ZIMMERMAN.

Degrees offered by the Chemistry Department are the Bache-
lor of Science in Chemistry, the Bachelor of Arts in Chemis-
try and the Bachelor of Science in Education with a
Chemistry major. The first two degree programs are under
the School of Arts and Sciences, and the third is under the
School of Education. The department also offers a Chemis-
try minor.

CURRICULA

The B.S. in Chemistry is a professional degree and is
accredited by the American Chemical Society. The student
completing this major should be qualified to assume a
position in industry or government as a chemist or to apply
for admission to graduate school to pursue advanced studies
leading to an M.S. or Ph.D. degree. The student considering
going to a professional school should also be qualified upon
completion of this degree. Those students who are particu-
larly interested in biochemistry should elect a few selected
biology courses.

The curriculum leading to the B.A. in Chemistry is designed
to allow for the workable union of nonscience areas with
chemistry in such a way as to retain the fundamental science

and mathematics requirements needed for a career in chemis-
try. A cognizant selection of electives will qualify the
student for entrance into many fields in which there is an
acute need for educated people and, at the same time,
satisfy the entrance requirements of various professional and
graduate schools.

Some possible and useful combinations between chemistry
and other disciplines would include chemistry-business
administration, chemistry-criminology, chemistry-government,
chemistry-predental, chemistry-prelaw, chemistry-premedicine,
chemistry-prepharmacy, and chemistry-English (technical writ-
ing). The student must arrange a practical sequence of non-
chemistry courses in consort with his advisor and the
department chairman concerned.

The curriculum leading to the B.S. in Education with a
Chemistry major is designed to prepare the student to
teach chemistry at the secondary school level. Upon comple-
tion of the specified course work, the graduate is eligible for
certification as a chemistry teacher by the Pennsylvania
Department of Education.

Core Program

Requirements for ALL Chemistry majors are 29 credits in
Chemistry, 8 credits in Mathematics, and 8 credits in Physics
as follows:

76 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Chemistry
CH 113-114
CH 231-232
CH 321
CH 322
CH341
CH 343

Mathematics
MA 017-019

Physics

PY 131-132
PY 141-142

Concepts in Chem I and II
Org Chem I and II
Quant Anal
Instrumental Anal
Phys Chem I
Phys Chem Lab I

Calc I and II for Physics

Phys I and II
Phys Lab I and II

8 or.

CH 331 1

8 or.

CH335

4 or.

CH351

4cr.

CH376

4 cr.

CH412

1 cr.

CH421

CH441

CH498

8cr.

Mathematics (one

MA 361

MA 471

3 cr. each

*MA481

1 cr. each

CO 110

Foreign Language

B.S. in Chemistry

In addition to the Core Program, requirements for the degree
of Bachelor of Science in Chemistry are 14—15 more credits in
Chemistry and 3 more credits in Mathematics. In addition, the
Department requires that the foreign language requirement (6
credits) of the School of Arts and Sciences be fulfilled by
German or Russian courses. Course numbers are as follows:

Chemistry
CH 301
CH342
CH344
CH411

Chemistry Seminar
Phys Chem II
Phys Chem Lab II
Inorg Chem

1 cr.
3cr.
1 cr.
3cr.

Electives from the following (6-7 credits):
Org Qua! Anal
Advan Org Chem
Biochem
Radiochem
Inorg Preparations
Advan Instrum Anal
Advan Phvs Chem
Problems in Chem

3cr.
3cr.
4cr.
3cr.
3cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.
1-2 cr.

Ord Diff Eq 3 cr.

Advanced Calculus for Applications 3 cr.
Special Topics in Mathematics

(Applied Differential Equations) 3 cr.

Introduc to Computer Science 3 cr.

GM 251-252 Ger III and Ger IV or

GM 256 Sci Ger (in place of 252) 3 cr. each

RU 251-252 Russian III and IV 3 cr. each

*MA 481 is currently a temporary number. A different
permanent number will be assigned in the future.

B.A. in Chemistry

In addition to the Core Program, requirements for the degree
of Bachelor of Arts in Chemistry are 15 credits minimum in a
complementary field, including a minimum of 6 credits of
advanced work. Any foreign language may be taken to fulfill
the arts and sciences graduation requirement.

School of Arts and Sciences - 77
Chemistry

B.S. in Education (Chemistry Major)

In addition to the core program requirements for the degree of
Bachelor of Science in Education with a chemistry major are
4—5 more credits in Chemistry (a minimum of 33 credits total
in Chemistry are required), 4 credits in biology, and 3 credits
in education, as follows:
Chemistry

CH 498 Problems in Chem 1 or 2 cr.

(at least one of the following)

CH411 Inorganic Chem 3 cr.

CH 351 Biochemistry 4 cr.

CH 342 Physical Chemistry II 3 cr.

Biology

Bl 105
Education

ED 451

Cell Biology

4 cr.

Teaching Science in the

Secondary School (see Biology) 3 cr.

Minor in Chemistry

The minor in Chemistry consists of a minimum of 20
credits, selected as follows:

CH 111-112 Gen Chem I and II 8 cr.

CH 231-232 Org Chem I and II 8 cr.

CH 321 Quant Anal 4 cr.

CH 323

or
CH 351

Anal Methods
Biochem

4 cr.

Special Courses

The Chemistry Department provides certain special courses as
services for other Schools and Departments, such as Chemistry
101 and 102 for Home Economics and Health Professions,
Chemistry 103 for Physical Education and Indiana Hospital
nurses, and Chemistry 355 for Home Economics.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

For those courses which combine lecture and laboratory,
attendance and satisfactory performance in the laboratory are
required in order to pass the course.

CH 101-102 CHEMISTRY FOR HOME ECONOMICS 4 cr. each

AND HEALTH PROFESSIONS I AND II
Topics from fields of inorganic, organic and biochemistry that are
most Important to the student of home economics ana nursing.
Three hours lecture, 2 hours lab per week.

CH 103 PRINCPLES OF CHEMISTRY 4 cr.

One-semester course to survey areas of inorganic and biochemistry.
Open only to Physical Education majors and Indiana Hospital
nurses. Three hours lecture, 2 hours lab per week.

CH 111-112 GENERAL CHEMISTRY I AND II 4 cr. each

Lecture-discussion of principles of chemistry, including theory and
applications. The lab illustrates principles discussed. Three hours
lecture, 3 hours lab per week.

CH 113-114 CONCEPTS IN CHEMISTRY 4 cr. each

These two semesters of general chemistry give the chemistry major
an in-depth and quantitative background in areas of physical,
inorganic and analytical chemistry. Three hours lecture. 3 hours
lab per week.

78 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

CH 231-232 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY I AND II 4 cr. each

Prerequisites: CH 112 or CH 114.

Study of compounds of carbon, with special emphasis on struc-
ture and reactions of more important classes of carbon com-
pounds. Laboratory work involves preparation and purification of
representative compounds. Three hours lecture, 4 hours lab per
week.

CH 301 CHEMISTRY SEMINAR 1 cr.

Discussion of current technical literature and current research
problems of staff. Lectures by outside chemists and student
presentations. Open to junior or senior chemistry majors and to
others by permission of the instructor. One hour per week.

CH 302 INDUSTRIAL CHEMISTRY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: CH 232.

Study of applications of chemistry and science to industries of
western Pennsylvania for the science teacher. Consists of lectures,
laboratory work, and field trips to representative industries. Two
hours lecture, 3 hours lab per week.

CH 303 GLASSBLOWING TECHNIQUES 1 cr.

Introduces science student to techniques necessary for construction
and modification of scientific glass apparatus. Limited to junior and
senior science majors and others by permission of instructor. Two
hours instruction per week with additional practice at student's
convenience.

CH 305 NEW APPROACHES TO TEACHING

HIGH SCHOOL CHEMISTRY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: at least junior chemistry education major.
Survey of current approaches in teaching high school chemistry.
Modified versions of Chem Study Approach and Chemical Bond
Approach investigated: individualization of chemistry and appli-
cation of various teaching materials and techniques used in
individualizing chemistry surveyed. Environmental chemistry and
development of relevant topics in chemistry used to better
understand chemical basis of our current environmental problems.

CH 321 QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS 4 cr.

Prerequisite: CH 112orCH 114.

Theory and practice of quantitative analysis, including gravimetric
and volumetric analysis; special emphasis on perfecting student's
laboratory techniques and application of general chemical knowl-
edge through problem solving. Three hours lecture, 4 hours lab per
sNeeV..

CH 322 INSTRUMENTAL ANALYSIS 4 cr.

Prerequisite: CH 321.

Designed to instruct modern instrumental methods of chemical
analysis. Student learns theory behind the instrument, principles of
operation, interpretation of data obtained, and limitations of
methods. Three hours lecture, 4 hours lab per week,

CH 323 ANALYTICAL METHODS 4 cr.

Prerequisite: CH 112 and non-chemistry major.
Principles of precipitation, acid-base, and oxidation-reduction,
equilibria are applied to problem solving and to laboratory
determinations: instrumental methods of analysis, such as color-
imetry, atomic absorption and flame emission, gas chromatogra-
phy, etc. Three hours lecture, 4 hours lab per week.

CH 331 ORGANIC QUALITATIVE ANALYSIS 3 cr.

Prerequisites: CH 231-232 (CH 232 may be taken concurrently).
Gives student experience in systematic identification of various
classes of organic compounds by both chemical and physical
methods. Four hours lecture-laboratory per week.

CH 335 ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: CH 232 and CH 341.

Selected topics of current interest covered. Possible topics include:
reaction mechanisms, molecular spectroscopy, stereochemistry,
natural products, heterocyclics, polymer chemistry and organic
synthesis.

School of Arts and Sciences - 79
Chemistry

CH 341 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY I 4 cr.

Prerequisites; MA 015, 019, or 113 and PY 112 or 132, CH 112
or 114.

Chemical thermodynamics with applications to solutions, phase
and chemical equilibria-kinetic theory. Four hours lecture per
week.

CH 342 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY II 3 cr.

Prerequisite: CH 341.

Study of solids, liquids, surfaces, chemical kinetics, electrochemis-
try, atomic and molecular structure. Three hours lecture per week.

CH 343 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY LABORATORY I 1 cr.

Prerequisites: CH 321 , 341 .

Experiments illustrating application of fundamental laws to actual
systems. Three hours lab per week.

CH 344 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY LABORATORY II 1 cr.

Prerequisite: CH 342, 343.

Extension of Physical Chemistry Laboratory I; experiments related
to chemical kinetics, molecular spectroscopy and other topics of
physical chemistry. Three hours lab per week.

CH 351 BIOCHEMISTRY 4 cr.

Prerequisite: CH 231.

Study of chemistry of carbohydrates, liquids, proteins, minerals,
vitamins, and hormones and biological functions of each. Four
hours lecture per week.

CH 355 BIOCHEMISTRY AND NUTRITION 3 cr.

Prerequisite: CH 102.

Course for Home Economics major; studies chemistry and biological
function of biologically active compounds with respect to nutri-
tional requirements. Three hours lecture per week.

CH 376 RADIOCHEMISTRY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: CH 322.

Study of basic aspects of nuclear structure, phenomena of radio-
active isotopes and chemical effects of such isotopes. Concurrent lab

work utilizing instruments for detection and measurement of
radioactive nuclides used in chemical experimentation. Lecture-
Laboratory — 3 hours.

CH411 INORGANIC CHEMISTRY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: CH 341 .

Gives understanding of advanced theories of atomic structure,
chemical bonding, acids and bases, coordination compounds, and
selected topics. Three hours lecture per week.

CH412 INORGANIC PREPARATIONS 3 cr.

Prerequisites: CH 321 and CH 411.

Lectures include discussion of descriptive chemistry of elements
according to their periodicity; laboratory includes investigation of
synthesis; purification, and characterization of inorganic substances.
Four hours lecture-laboratory per week.

CH 421 ADVANCED INSTRUMENTAL ANALYSIS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: CH 322.

Study of modern chemical analysis, using advanced instrumental
techniques; emphasis on theory, principles of operation, capabilities,
and limitations of advanced analytical instruments used. Four hours
lecture-laboratory per week.

CH 441 ADVANCED PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 3 cr.

Prerequisite or Co-requisite: CH 342.

Study of fundamental ideas of quantum and statistical mechanics,
molecular structure, and other topics of current interest. Three
hours lecture per week.

CH 498 PROBLEMS IN CHEMISTRY 1 to 2 cr.

Prerequisite: Permission of Chairman.

Course of independent study on selected problems, including lab
work, library reading, and conferences with staff member. A
minimum of 4 hours per week required per credit.

SC105 PHYSICAL SCIENCE I 4 cr.

See course description in Physics Department, page 146. This course
is not a prerequisite for Physical Science II.

80 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

COMPUTER SCIENCE DEPARTMENT

SC 106 PHYSICAL SCIENCE II 4 cr.

Designed to survey chemical principles and concepts and to relate
these principles to our current environmental problems. Brief
exploration made of chemistry of minerals and rocks and sources of
energy for the future.

SC111 SCIENCE IN MODERN CIVILIZATION 3 cr.

Designed to acquaint non-science major with some of the major
scientific discoveries and to develop an awareness of how science
affects our lives. Three hours lecture per week.

HOWARD E. TOMPKINS, CHAIRPERSON: BUTERBAUGH, MAPLE,
SHUBRA

A major in Computer Science leading to the B.A. or B.S.
degree and a minor for majors in a variety of disciplines (not
restricted to the sciences) are offered.

Computer Science is largely a tool discipline. Most computer
use is in connection with some other subject area. Hence
students should combine the study of another academic
discipline with a major or minor in Computer Science.
Students particularly interested in the application of com-
puters to business problems should consider the Systems
Analyst major in the Business Management Department as an
alternative course of study.

Students planning to enter the computer field by way of a
college education should set their goals beyond simple
programming, for example, in the analysis of problems from
their "other" discipline for computer solution, in the design of
computer software, or in the evaluation of computer system
performance.

Toward such goals, a Computer Science major today should
be preparing:

1 ) to program well,

2) to analyze real-world problems in preparation for
programming, and

School of Arts and Sciences —81
Computer Science

3) to manage activities that are strongly computer
dependent, or

4) to improve the tools that programmers and systems
analysts use, i.e. to develop

4a) better machine systems,
4b) better software systems,
4c) better languages for communicating with

machines, or
4d) better methods for solving intractable problems,

5) to teach about computers at college or high school
level, or

6) to advance the fundamental theory of digital infor-
mation processors.

CURRICULA

The Computer Science Major Program to the B.A. or B.S.

Degree

(Note 1)

Computer Science core courses:

CO 110 Introduction to Computer Science 3 cr.

(Note 2)
CO 220 Applied Computer Programming 3 cr.

Languages
CO 250 Introduction to Numerical Methods 3 cr.
CO 300 Assembler Language Programming 3 cr.

CO 340 Data Structures & Non-numeric 3 cr.

Processing

CO 480 Seminar on Current Computer 2 cr.

Topics, 1 credit each semester
of senior year
At least one of the following:

CO 410 Processor Architecture &
Microprogramming (3 cr.)
CO 430 Introduction to Systems

Programming (3 cr.)
CO 440 Large File Organization & Access (3 cr.) 3 cr.
Additional Computer Science courses to bring the total CO
credits to a minimum of 27

Minimum: 7 cr.

Computer Science course requirement: 27 cr.

Mathematics prerequisite to CO 250:

Math 013-015 or 017-019 or Math 111-113

Calculus (Note 3) 8 cr.

General Education requirement of the School of
Arts and Sciences, including Foreign Language.
Six credits of the 8 in the Calculus may be
applied toward the General Education require-
ment of 52 credits. CO courses are not accepted
as part of the General Education requirement
for CO majors. Hence the additional require-
ment is: 46 cr.

Elective courses, preferably including minor (Note
4), possibly including additional Mathematics
and Computer Science courses. 44 cr.

Minimum total for the B.A. or B.S. degree 124 cr.

82 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Note 1: If a minor is selected from the Division of Natural
Sciences and Mathematics, or from the School of
Business, or if an additional 9 credits of Computer
Science are taken, including 4 credits of CO 485, then
the B.S. degree is awarded. Otherwise the B.A. degree
is awarded.

Note 2: Credit in or exemption from CO 110 may be
obtained by examination. Credit so obtained applies
to the major credit requirement of 27 credits, but
exemption does not. Alternatively, CO 200 (3 cr.)
followed by CO 210 (2 cr.) may be taken instead of
CO 110 (3 cr.). In the latter case, only the 3 credits
from CO 200 may be applied to the major credit
requirement of 27 credits.

Note 3: Any calculus sequence may be elected, MA 111 — 112
(—113) for students interested in pure math, MA
017—019 for students interested in applied math, and
MA 013—015 for all others. Any calculus sequence
may apply to a minor in mathematics.

Note 4: Minors are possible in a wide variety of fields. See
Note 1. For specific restrictions on the minor
program, see the announcement of the selected minor
department in the Undergraduate Bulletin.

Concentration in Business for Computer Science
Majors

(18 hours minimum; B.S. degree awarded)

BU 221 Introduction to Accounting (3 cr.)
BU 251 Intermediate Accounting (3 cr.)

BU 439 Business Information Systems (3 cr.)
Additional general business courses (3 cr. or more)

Additional data processing and systems analysis courses

(3 cr. or more) such as:
BM 340 Business Systems Technology (3 cr.)

BM 443-444 Business Systems Analysis (3 cr. each)

Minor in Computer Science

Any 15 credits of Computer Science for which the student is
qualified, necessarily including CO 220, Applied Computer
Programming Languages.

An undergraduate course in Computer Science for
majors in other disciplines who wish to take only one
course is: CO 200 introduction to Computers (3 cr.)

A student who decides to minor in Computer Science after
completing CO 200 may petition to have CO 200 accepted
in the minor, in place of CO 110. The department's decision
may be based on an examination.

COURSE DESCRIPTIOIMS

CO 110 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER SCIENCE 3 cr.

Basic structure of modern digital computers; batch processing vs.
interactive time-shared on-line computing; problem analysis and
computer solution using flowcharting and the Fortran language.
Tvuo hours of lecture and 1 hour of programming discussion per
week. Exemption by examination possible.

School of Arts and Sciences — 83
Computer Science

CO 200 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERS 3 cr.

A computer appreciation course for students with an interest in
computers and what they can do; survey of computer organiza-
tion, flowcharting, and programming; exercises in the interactive
BASIC language; economic, political, psychological, and technical ef-
fects of computers in our society. Three hours of lecture per week.

CO 210 PROGRAMMING THE COMPUTER 2 cr.

Prerequisite: CO 200 or BU 339.

Development of computer programming skills using an algorithmic
language. Including computer representation of data. Problem
analysis and computer solution using flowcharting and the language
learned. Two recitation hours per week. May be used as a
prerequisite to advanced courses in place of CO 1 10.

CO 220 APPLIED COMPUTER 3 cr.

PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES
Prerequisite: CO 110 or BU 339 or consent of instructor.
Linguistic concepts basic to programming languages; comparison
of the major higher-level procedure-oriented computer languages;
introduction to tape and disc files; documentation, testing, and
management practices in program development; extensive group
project in COBOL. Two hours lecture and 1 hour programming
discussion per week.

CO 250 INTRODUCTION TO NUMERICAL METHODS 3 cr.

Prerequisites: CO llOand MA 015, 019or 113.
Algorithmic methods for finding functional values, roots of equa-
tions, solutions to systems of equations; matrix operations, curve
fitting, interpolation, numerical integration and differentiation,
errors in computation. Three hours lecture per week.

CO 300 ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAMMING 3 cr.

Prerequisites: CO 110 or BU 339 or consent of instructor.
Examination of structure and languages of machines; representa-
tion of data, addressing techniques, symbolic coding, assemblers,
macros, etc.; problem solution using assembly language. Two
hours lecture and 1 hour programming discussion per week.

CO 340 DATA STRUCTURES AND 3 cr.

NON-NUMERIC PROCESSING
Prerequisites: CO 110.

Basic concepts of data; storage systems and structures; lists,
arrays, strings, hashing techniques, searching and sorting tech-
niques; data structures in programming languages; string pro-
cessing. Three hours lecture per week.

CO 350 APPLIED NUMERICAL METHODS 3 cr.

Prerequisites: CO 250, MA 233, and MA 361, or consent of
instructor.

Numerical methods for large linear systems and ordinary differential
equations. Three hours lecture per week.

CO 410 PROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE AND 3 cr.

MICROPROGRAMMING
Prerequisites: CO 300 and CO 340.

The logical description of computer processor structure (architec-
ture), with emphasis on the microprogramming approach. Focuses
on the Microdata 1600 minicomputer. Three hours lecture per
week.

CO 430 INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEMS 3 cr.

PROGRAMMING
Prerequisites: CO 300 and CO 340.

Concepts and techniques of systems programming with an empha-
sis on assembly and compilation of user programs. Representation
of source language so as to facilitate the needed translation
process. Exercises on the Microdata 1600/30 and Sigma 6. Three
hours lecture per week.

CO 440 LARGE FILE ORGANIZATION AND ACCESS 3 cr.

Prerequisites: MA 362 (or equivalent probability and statistics), CO
300 and CO 220.

The organization of large computer files for business systems,
information systems, and other applications. Use of COBOL and
Assembler for efficient file access. Evaluation of file access
systems. Three hours lecture per week.

84 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

CRIMINOLOGY DEPARTMENT

CO 460 THEORY OF COMPUTATION 3 cr.

Prerequisites: CO 340 and MA 231, or consent of instructor.
Formal methods for describing and analyzing programming lan-
guages and algorithms: Backus-Naur forms; productions; regular
expressions; introduction to automata; Turing machines; recent
concepts in algorithm theory. Three hours of lecture per week.

CO 480 SEMINAR ON CURRENT COMPUTER TOPICS 1 cr.

Prerequisites: 12 credits in Computer Science courses.
Student presentation and discussion of topics from the current
Computer Science literature. May be repeated once for a total of
2 credits. One hour seminar per week.

CO 481 SPECIAL TOPICS IN COMPUTER SCIENCE 3 cr.

Prerequisites: 12 credits in Computer Science or consent of
instructor.

Seminar in advanced topics of Computer Science; content will
vary, depending on interests of instructor and students. May be
repeated for additional credit. Three hours lecture per week.

CO 485 SPECIAL PROJECTS IN COMPUTER SCIENCE 1-4 cr.

Prerequisites: Permission of a Computer Science faculty member
who agrees to supervise your project.

Arrangements for selection of a specific topic must be made
before the end of the prior term. Hours as arranged.

VICTOR McGUIRE, CHAIRPERSON: BOGAN, BROWN, COHEN,
KUPCHELLA, KATZMAN, McNABB, MELODINI, SHANE,
SHANNON, SWEET, WEGENER

The Departnnent of Criminology offers men and women who
seek a career in the Criminology field a professional educa-
tion program supported by a broad liberal arts education.
The degree offered is the Bachelor of Arts degree with a
major in Criminology, under the School of Arts and Sci-
ences; also available are a Two-year Academic Diploma and a
minor in Criminology.

The program in Criminology has a five-fold objective:

1. The education of students for employment and leader-
ship in the expanding field of criminal justice.

2. The education of presently employed law enforcement
and correctional officers who recognize the need for
raising their educational level.

3. The instruction of students who wish to acquire an
understanding of the processes of criminal justice as a
cultural part of their higher education.

4. The instruction of students who wish to prepare for
graduate study and research in the administration of
justice.

5. A curriculum that provides an excellent foundation for
students preparing for a career in law.

Nearly every level of government offers opportunities for
professional careers in criminology. Employment opportu-
nities normally exist in more than 50 Federal agencies,

School of Arts and Sciences - 85
Criminology

including the Federal Bureau of Investigation, U. S. Secret
Service, Bureau of Narcotics, Intelligence Division (IRS),
Inspection Service (IRS), Alcohol Tobacco Tax Division
(IRS), State Department Security, Atomic Energy Commis-
sion, and military investigative branches.

Both men and women will find employment opportunities in
parole and probation work for Federal, state, and local
governments, institutional careers concerned with the cus-
tody and treatment of juveniles and adults at all levels of
government. In addition, many police departments have
specialized units dealing with juveniles, community relations,
training and research. Criminalistic laboratories provide
another career area, and there are a wide variety of opportu-
nities in traffic administration, investigative and security
activities in the commercial and industrial fields.

Career opportunities are available also in research and teach-
ing at the college and university level and in research
divisions of agencies in the field of administration of justice.

CURRICULA

Required Courses:

CR 101 General Administration of Justice 3 cr.

CR 102 Criminology 3 cr.

CR 301 Criminal Law I 3 cr.

CR 302 Criminal Law II 3 cr.

CR 490 Crime in Modern Society 3 cr.

B.A. in Criminology

In addition to the Required Courses, the requirements for the
degree of Bachelor of Arts in Criminology are 15 more hours
in Criminology, as follows:

CR Electives 15 cr.

Two- Year Academic Diploma in Criminology

For officers and students taking this program in Criminol-
ogy, requirements in addition to the Required Courses are 18
more credits in Criminology, 6 credits in English, 3 credits in
Sociology, 3 credits in Psychology, 3 credits in Political
Science, 15 credits of electives in the Social Sciences divi-
sion, as follows:

Criminology

The following are suggested, but substitutions may be
permitted, depending on circumstances:
CR 201 Police Administration I 3 cr.

CR 202 Police Administration II 3 cr.

CR 310 Criminal Investigation 3 cr.

CR 340 Crime Prevention 3 cr.

CR 350 Techniques of Interviewing 3 cr.

CR 415 Supervision in the Administration
of Justice

English
EN 101
EN 102

Psychology
PC 201

English I
English II

General Psychology

3 cr.

3 cr.
3 cr.

3 cr.

86 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Political Science

PS 111
Sociology

SO 151
Electives

American Politics

Introduction to Sociology

Any of the Social Sciences

3 cr.

15 cr.

Minor in Criminology

The minor in Criminology must be approved by the depart-
ment and consists of a minimum of 18 credits, consisting of
the Required Courses plus the following:

Criminology Electives 3 or more cr.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

CR 101 GENERAL ADMINISTRATION OF JUSTICE 3 cr.

J Administration of criminal justice in United States. Deals with

role of police, courts, and correctional process.

3 cr.

CR 102 CRIMINOLOGY

Prerequisite: CR 101.

General survey of nature and causes of crime and its prevention
and treatment.

CR 201 POLICE ADMINISTRATION I 3 cr.

Prerequisite: CR 102.

Analysis of organizational structure, administrative practices, and
operating procedures of law enforcement agencies.

CR 202 POLICE ADMINISTRATION II 3 cr.

Prerequisite: CR 201.

Continuation of Police Administration I, with special emphasis on
staff functions, such as records, communications, training, person-
nel administration, and finance.

CR 301 CRIMINAL LAW I 3 cr.

Prerequisites: CR 101 and 102.

A study and substantive law analysis of the elements of crimes, with
an emphasis on understanding the application of those elements.
Attention is given to defenses, uncompleted conduct, conspiracy
and parties to crime.

CR 302 CRIMINAL LAW II 3 cr.

Prerequisites: CR 101 and 102.

Laws of arrest, search and seizure, with a discussion of important
case law. Analysis of safeguards established for protection of
individual liberties, especially as found in application of rules
governing the introduction and use of information in formalized
legal proceedings.

CR 310 CRIMINAL INVESTIGATION 3 cr.

Theory and practice of investigation; discussion of various types
of information obtainable from persons and things; application of
investigative theory to crime and accidents.

CR 311 CRIMINALISTICS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: CR 310.

Application of scientific crime detection methods; emphasis on
collection, preservation, and interpretation of physical evidence
found in connection with a crime. Two hours lecture, and 3 hours
lab per week.

CR 320 TRAFFIC ADMINISTRATION I 3 cr.

Origin and growth of traffic problem; emphasis on traffic enforce-
ment and procedures, organization and functions of police traffic
division, study of traffic laws and judicial process.

School of Arts and Sciences - 87
Criminologfy

CR 325 INSTRUMENTAL DETECTION OF DECEPTION 3 cr.

Prerequisite; CR 350.

Devices tor measuring emotional responses to verbal stimuli;
psychological and physiological aspects ot deception; analysis of
detection of deception techniques and their application to law
enforcement. Two hours lecture, and 3 hours lab per week.

CR 330 PLANNING AND RESEARCH 3 cr.

Prerequisites: CR 101 and 102.

Role of planning and research in contemporary law enforcement;
analysis of planning process and nature of planning with emphasis
on planning for special events and situations.

CR 340 CRIME PREVENTION 3 cr.

Organization and function of crime prevention agencies; problems
and techniques in the prevention of crime; community resources
in preventing crime.

CR 350 TECHNIQUES OF INTERVIEWING 3 cr.

Consideration of the nature, methods, and principles of interview-
ing; emphasis on role playing in interviewing situations.

CR 360 COMMERCIAL AND INDUSTRIAL SECURITY 3 cr.

Plant protection and industrial security; merchandising safety and
security; credit and insurance investigative procedures.

CR 370 COMMUNITY RELATIONS 3 cr.

Role of law enforcement agencies in modern day society; police-
community relations units, human relations resources, civil rights
and professionalism in law enforcement.

CR 410 QUESTIONED DOCUMENT ANALYSIS 3 cr.

Evaluation and identification of questioned documents; admissibil-
ity as evidence, preparation and presentation in court. Two hours
lecture, and 3 hours lab per week.

CR411 ADVANCED CRIMINALISTICS , 3 cr.

Prerequisite: CR 31 1 .
Ballistics, serology, narcotirs, poisons, firearms identification.

chromatography, alcohol tests, and hair identification. Two hours
lecture and 3 hours lab per week.

CR 415 SUPERVISION IN THE ADMINISTRATION 3 cr.

OF JUSTICE
Consideration of supervisory problems In field of administration
of justice; emphasis on such topics as leadership, motivation,
morale, discipline, public relations, communications, decision-
making, and the training functions.

CR 420 TRAFFIC REGULATION AND CONTROL 3 cr.

Organization for traffic control, accident investigation, traffic flow
pattern, high accident frequency locations, signs, signals, and
simple engineering remedial actions. Traffic safety research.

CR 425

3cr.

ADVANCED INSTRUMENTAL DETECTION

OF DECEPTION
Prerequisite: CR 325.

Special techniques in detection of deception, including: Backster
techniques, Keeler technique. Modified Backster technique, and
the Integrated Control Question technique. Statistical chart inter-
pretation. Polygraph research. Two hours lecture, 3 hours lab per
week.

CR 430 COMPARATIVE STUDY OF JUSTICE 3 cr.

Comparison of American system of administration of justice with
those of other nations, including developed and underdeveloped
countries.

CR 431 ETIOLOGY OF DELINQUENT BEHAVIOR 3 cr.

Analysis of the aberrant behavior of children and youth in terms
of modern behavioral sciences; personality and social factors
examined with a view toward developing prevention and control
procedures.

CR 432

3cr.

TREATMENT AND CONTROL OF
DELINQUENCY
Analysis of juvenile court procedures, juvenile probation, juvenile

88 - Indiana University of Pennsylvania

institutions, and juvenile parole in treatment and control of
delinquency.

CR 440 INSTITUTIONAL TREATMENT 3 cr.

OF THE OFFENDER
Modern philosophy and methods in treatment of adult criminals
and juvenile delinquents in correctional institutions.

CR 445 NON-INSTITUTIONAL TREATMENT OF 3 cr.

THE OFFENDER
Analysis of principles and practices in probation and parole: case
method; techniques of supervision.

CR 460 INDUSTRIAL SECURITY AND SAFETY 3 cr.

Administration of fire and accident prevention programs; govern-
ment security programs; document control, security clearances,
and visitor control; special problems and hazards.

Ch 480 SEMINAR IN ADMINISTRATION OF JUSTICE 3 cr.

Study of problems in administration of justice, reports based upon
original investigation; reviews of recent books and periodical
literature; topics of current interest, Enrollment limited.

CR 481 SPECIAL TOPICS 1-3 cr.

Prerequisite: 15 credits in Criminology.

Individual research under direction of staff. Course may be taken
more than once for credit. By appointment only.

CR 488 INTERNSHIP 12 cr.

Prerequisite: 18 credits in Criminology.

Practicum designed to broaden educational experience of students
through appropriate observational and work assignments with
governmental agencies and private firms. Offered during summer
and spring only. By appointment only.

CR 490 CRIME IN MODERN SOCIETY 3 cr.

Analysis of nature and extent of crime at state, national, and
international levels of government; consideration of special prob-

lems in metropolitan areas, organized crime, the professional
criminal and white-collar crime; crime control in a democratic
society.

CR 492 CORRECTIONAL ADMINISTRATION 3 cr.

Administration of juvenile and adult probation and parole pro-
grams, and correctional institutions; emphasis on special problems
encountered in field.

CR 498 SUPERVISED PROFESSIONAL EXPERIENCE 6 cr.

Prerequisite: 18 credits in Criminology.

Practicum designed for full-time police officers who attended the
FBI Academy and/or Pennsylvania State Police Academy. By
Departmental approval only.

ECONOMICS DEPARTMENT

School of Arts and Sciences - 89
Economics

DONALD A. WALKER, CHAIRPERSON: CROSS, DAVIS, GARVIN,
HOLT, HUFF, MARTEL, RICHARD, STONEBRAKER, WARE.

The Economics Department offers courses to meet the needs
of I UP students in three general areas: a program that
prepares students majoring in Economics for graduate school
or immediate employment; a program that prepares Indiana
students to teach Economics on the high school level; and a
program that enables students majoring in other departments
to take courses in Economics.

Degrees offered are the Bachelor of Arts in Economics and
the Bachelor of Science in Education with a major in Social
Sciences, concentrating on Economics.

CURRICULA

The program for Economics majors is designed for those
who intend to pursue careers as economists in education,
government, industry, finance, or commerce. The economist
in today's world occupies an increasingly important position
and great opportunity exists for qualified people.

Economics 101, BASIC ECONOMICS, may be taken in
partial fulfillment of the Social Sciences segment of the
University's General Education requirement. Economics 101
can not be programmed by Economics majors or minors, by
students enrolled in the Business School, or by students in the
School of Education who are contemplating teaching social
science on the high school level. Instead, Economics 121,

PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS I, should be substituted, as
this course serves as a foundation for many advanced Eco-
nomics courses and should be programmed by all students who
wish to take such courses. Economics 121 also counts toward
fulfillment of the Social Science General Education require-
ments. Students can receive credit toward graduation for either
EC 101 or EC 121 but not both.

Students majoring in other fields are welcome to choose
Economics courses among the upper-division electives. These
courses are designed to aid the student in developing
sophisticated insight into economic issues and are valuable in
many ways, regardless of the student's ultimate vocation.
It is recommended that the Economics major take a minor in
one of the other Social Sciences, in Business (Business
Management, General Business, Accounting), or in Mathe-
matics. A minor in Mathematics is strongly recommended for
those whose future may include graduate work in Economics.

Core Program

Requirements for ALL Economics majors and minors are 6
credits in Economics, as follows:

EC 121 Principles of Economics I 3 cr.

EC 122 Principles of Economics II 3 cr.

B.A. in Economics

In addition to the Core Program, requirements for the degree
of Bachelor of Arts in Economics are 21 more credits in
Economics, as follows:

90 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

EC 421 Macroeconomic Analysis
EC 422 Microeconomic Analysis
Economics electives

3 cr.

15cr.

B.S. in Education (Economics Concentrate)

In addition to the Core Program requirements for the degree
of Bachelor of Science in Education with a major in Social
Sciences, concentrating in Economics, are 9 more credits of
Economics electives, excluding Economics 101.

Minor in Economics

To minor in Economics, the student must take 9 credits of
Economics electives in addition to the Core Program, exclud-
ing Economics 101 as a possible elective.

Concentrations in Economics

The Department of Economics offers several concentrations
in particular aspects of Economics. The concentrations are
designed to equip students with the education and skills that
will enable them to obtain a position in government or
private business upon completion of the undergraduate
degree. The Department provides verification that students
have completed a concentration, and they may also have the
information recorded on their transcripts. These concentra-
tions are not restricted to Economics Majors. The concentra-
tions available at present are:

Competition and Public Policy

Economics of Government Affairs

international Economics

Labor Economics

Managerial Economics

Monetary Economics

Quantitative Economics
Detailed information regarding these concentrations may be
obtained from the Department Chairperson.

Pre Law Program

The Department of Economics is a participant in the Pre
Law Program offered by the School of Arts and Sciences.
For further information concerning this program see page 67.

Grades and Quality Points

The quality point average necessary for graduation or the
approval of a specific program is 2.0. This requirement is
applicable to economic majors, minors, concentrates of the
School of Education, and the concentrations offered by the
Department of Economics. The calculation of the quality
point average is indicated on page 31 .

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

EC 101 BASIC ECONOMICS 3 cr.

Study of how man makes a living, individually and collectively,
with particular reference to our own economic system. For those
who do not plan to take more than 3 credits of Economics.

EC 121 PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS I 3 cr.

Nature and methodology of economics; mixed capitalism and mar-
ket economy; national income; employment theory, including
economics of fiscal policy; money, banking, and Federal Reserve
System; economic arowth.

School of Arts and Sciences -91
Economics

EC 122 PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS II 3 cr.

Economics of the firm; theory of consumer demand: determina-
tion of price and output in different market structures; distribu-
tion of income; foreign trade and the balance of payments.

EC 241 CONTEMPORARY ECONOMIC ISSUES 3 cr.

Examination of relevant and important problematic aspects of
U. S. and of world economy, including a rigorous but non-
technical analysis of problem, and a formulation and evaluation of
possible corrective policies.

EC 283 ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS 3 cr.

Examination of economic costs and benefits of environmental
control and modification. Techniques of economic analysis used to
understand economic aspects of environmental problems and con-
tribute toward their solution.

EC 305 MATHEMATICS FOR ECONOMISTS 3 cr.

Elements of algebra and calculus necessary to enable students to
grasp mathematical foundations of economic theory and statistical
research, with examples taken from economic theory and data.

EC 306 MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EC 305 or its mathematical equivalent or permission of
the instructor. Application of mathematical methods to micro-
economics and macroeconomics, and an introduction to linear
programming.

EC 320 HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EC 121 or 122 or permission of the instructor.
Examination of social, political, intellectual, and economic origins
of work of the more prominent past economists, and of content
and impact of their work.

EC 325 MONETARY ECONOMICS I 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EC 121 or permission of the instructor.
Organization, operation, and economic significance of U. S. mone-
tary institutions; commercial banks and Federal Reserve System;

survey of monetary theory and policy; mechanism of international
payments.

EC 326 MONETARY ECONOMICS II 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EC 325 or permission of the instructor.
Detaileo study of monetary theory; tasks of central banking;
principal objectives of monetary policy; intensive study of recent
monetary experience; complementary and competing aims of
monetary and fiscal policy.

EC 330 LABOR ECONOMICS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EC 122 or permission of the instructor.

History, structure, and operations of trade unions and employer
organizations; major Federal labor legislation; collective bargaining
theory; wage determination; current labor problems.

EC 331 ECONOMIC ORGANIZATION OF INDUSTRY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EC 122 or permission of the instructor.
Social effectiveness of industries analyzed through measures of
market structure, market conduct, and market performance.

EC 332 GOVERNMENT AND BUSINESS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EC 122 or permission of the instructor.
Formal and informal methods used to maintain, supplement, and
moderate competition as well as regulation as a substitute for

competition.

EC 333 REGULATION OF INDUSTRY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: EC 121 and 122 or permission of the instructor.
Examines theory and practice of regulation, emphasizing effects of
regulation on economic performance and efficiency in U. S.

EC 334 ECONOMICS OF CORPORATE DECISIONS 3 cr.

Prerequisites: EC 121 and 122 or permission of the instructor.
Applies economic theory to corporate decision making. Topics
include corporate objectives, profit maximization, economic
measurement and forecasting.

92 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

EC 335 PUBLIC FINANCE 3 cr.

Prerequisites: EC 121 and 122 or permission of the instructor.
Taxation and expenditure theory at Federal level; Federal budget
and debt considerations: public sector impact upon economy,
intergovernmental fiscal relations.

EC 336 STATE AND LOCAL FINANCE 3 cr.

Analysis of character and impact of state and local government
revenue sources, expenditures, and fiscal systems.

EC 339 ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT I 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EC 121 or permission of the instructor.
Theory of grow/th; theory of economic development of under-
developed countries.

EC 340 ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT II 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EC 121 or permission of the instructor.
Application of theory of growth and analysis of economic devel-
opment of selected economies; empirical and econometric studies
of underdeveloped countries and their economic institutions.

EC 341 HISTORY OF THE ECONOMIC

DEVELOPMENT OF THE UNITED STATES 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EC 121 or permission of the instructor.
Examination of main patterns of the United States' economic
growth since end of eighteenth century; emphasizes economic
development as a laboratory for economic analysis.

EC 342 HISTORY OF THE ECONOMIC

DEVELOPMENT OF MODERN EUROPE 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EC 121 or permission of the instructor.
Study of dynamic forces which contributed to development of
modern Europe; industrial revolution in England; industrialization
on the continent; impact of Europe on world economy.

EC 343 ECONOMICS OF HUMAN RESOURCES 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EC 121 or permission of the instructor.
Inquiry into economic, demographic, and related factors affecting
growth, structure, and distribution of an economy's population.

EC 345 INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS I 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EC 121 or permission of the instructor.
Theory of international trade; analysis of balance of payments;
international economic equilibrium; mechanism of international
economic and monetary adjustments.

EC 346 INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS II 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EC 345 or permission of the instructor.
Application of theory of international trade to empirical data and
problems: historical survey and examination of current problems
of international trade; the institutional setting of international
trade.

EC 350 COMPARATIVE ECONOMICS SYSTEM 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EC 121 or permission of the instructor.
Capitalism, socialism, and communism subjected to economic
analysis; their principles, practices, institutions and philosophies.

EC 351 SOVIET ECONOMY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EC 121 or 122 or permission of the instructor.
Thorough study of operations of Soviet economy. Course will
compare and contrast workings of Soviet economy with other
Communist countries.

EC 355 QUANTITATIVE ECONOMICS 3 cr.

introduction to economic statistics. Material covered regarding
empirical frequency distributions, probability, distributions of
random variables, and functions of random variables, and tests of
economic hypotheses.

EC 356 INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMETRICS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EC 355 or its equivalent, or permission of the instructor.
Introduction to econometrics. Interest centers upon linear normal
regression models of two or more random variables, special
econometric problems, and solutions of simultaneous equations.

EC 371 ECONOMICS OF LABOR LEGISLATION 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EC 330 or permission of the instructor.
Economic background and effects of governmental regulation of

School of Arts and Sciences — 93
Economics

labor relations, with emphasis on a detailed examination of
National Labor Relations Act as amended.

EC 372 ECONOMICSOF WAGES AND EMPLOYMENT 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EC 330 or permission of the instructor.

Analysis of wages and employment under various market struc-
tures. Also, analysis of impact of labor market forces on wages,
prices, and distributive shares.

EC 381 REGIONAL ECONOMICS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: Three credit hours in Economics or permission of the
instructor.

Process of regional economic growth, location theory, basic tech-
niques of regional analysis, public and private area development
programs.

EC 382 URBAN ECONOMICS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: Three credit hours in Economics or permission of the
instructor.

Structure of urban economy, goals, processes, problems, and
policy in urban economic development.

EC 421 MACROECONOMIC ANALYSIS 3 cr.

Prerequisites: EC 121 and 122 or permission of the instructor.
Income and employment analysis; national income accounts and
theory: classical, Keynesian, and post-Keynesian models; invest-
ment, growth, and inflation theory; role of government in our
economy.

EC 422 MICROECONOMIC ANALYSIS 3 cr.

Prerequisites: EC 121 and 122 or permission of the instructor.

Consumer behavior, theory of the firm, market structures, distri-
bution, general equilibrium analysis, applications to current prob-
lems of economic policy.

EC 450 INTERNSHIP IN ECONOMICS 2-12 cr.

Prerequisite: A student must be an economics major who has
completed at least 12 credit hours in economics, and who has at
least a 2.5 grade point average in major and all course work. Course

provides on-the-job experience in economics positions with private
and governmental employers. Student Is also required to complete
related academic work in form of papers and selected readings.
Number of credits earned will depend upon the nature of the job
and amount of time involved in internship. A maximum of 6 of the
credits earned in this course may be counted toward the 27 credits
in economics requirement for economics majors.

EC 480 SEMINAR 3 cr.

Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor.
Seminar in selected economic issues or problems.

EC 481 SPECIAL TOPICS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor.

EC 482 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-6 cr.

Prerequisite: Permission of the Department and the instructor.

94 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

ENGLISH DEPARTMENT

RICHARD E. RAY, CHAIRPERSON: ANDERSON, BETTS, J.
BRIGHT, L. BRIGHT, COMO, COMPTON, COOK, CRAIG, CUREY,
J. DAVIS, DAY, DeGEORGE, EISEN, FORCE, FREUND, FRITZ,
FURGIUELE, GOURLEY, GRAY, GRAYBURN, GRUBB,
HALDEMAN, HAYWARD, HAZLEY, HEIMER, R. G. JOHNSON,
KRASZEWSKI, KRUPNIK, C. MAHAN, D. McCLURE, McMANMON,
L. MILLER, NANIA, NIX, M. OMRCANIN, R. ROFFMAN, ROUMM,
RUFFNER, RUSSELL, SAMSEY,SEACRIST,SEINFELT,R.SHAFER,
H. SMITH, STERNGLASS, SWAUGER, SWIGART, R. L. THOMAS,
TRUBY, WADDELL, H. WARREN, WATTA, WELDY, WILSON,
WOODWORTH, YARUP, YOUNG.

One goal of the English program is to contribute to the
general language proficiencies of all its students. These
proficiencies include the ability to express oneself compre-
hensibly and clearly in written language, to speak distinctly,
tastefully and meaningfully in oral language, and to appreci-
ate, understand and draw sustenance from both long-
recognized and recently produced literary and dramatic
achievements in the English language. In its programs, the
English Department attempts to prepare its majors for
careers in the teaching of English at the secondary school
level and for careers of all types where skill in communica-
tion and a conviction in favor of humane values are con-
sidered an appropriate background for the performance of
assigned duties and responsibilities.

Degrees offered by the English Department are the Bachelor of
Arts in English, in Pre-Law English, in Speech and Theater, or
in Journalism and the Bachelor of Science in Education with

an English or Communication major. The first four degree
programs are under the School of Arts and Sciences, and the
fifth is under the School of Education. In addition, an English
minor is available in the School of Arts and Sciences.

CURRICULA

Special Requirements

In meeting the University's General Education requirements,
English majors in both the School of Education and the
School of Arts and Sciences are REQUIRED to replace EN
201, English III, with EN 202, Introduction to Literary
Analysis. It is recommended that this course be taken during
the sophomore year, as early as possible in the major
program. Also, ALL English majors, in both the School of
Education and the School of Arts and Sciences, MUST
complete the intermediate sequence of a foreign language.
This may be done in one of three ways; by examination, by
earning credit in the third and fourth semesters of a foreign
language, or by completing four semesters of a new language.
If the last procedure is used, the two beginning foreign
language courses may be applied as free electives to the total
number of credits needed for graduation.

Speech and Theater majors are required to spend at least one
summer in the Summer Theater Workshop.

English majors in the School of Arts and Sciences may not
use professional education courses as free electives toward
the 124 hours for graduation.

School of Arts and Sciences — 95
English

B. A. in English

The candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Arts in English
usually chooses this program because he wishes a broad
undergraduate education in liberal studies. He may intend to
prepare for graduate study in English for eventual college
teaching or for other non-academic professions. This program
does not lead to certification in secondary English.
In addition to the General Education requirement for Eng-
lish majors (English 101, 102, and 202), requirements for
the degree of Bachelor of Arts in English are 30 more credits
in English selected from the list herein. All courses listed
give three credits except English 390, which gives three or
six credits. The English major also may select a minor of at
least 15 hours in any one of several fields, such as history,
philosophy, psychology, or foreign languages.
EN 260

EN 206 - The Nature of Drama
EN 208 - The Art of the Film
EN 220 — Advanced Composition

or
EN 221 - Creative Writing

or
EN 222 - Journalistic Writing
EN 230 - History of the English

Language
EN 235 - Languages of Media
EN 240 - Classical Literature in

Translation
EN 245 - Literature for

Adolescents
EN 246 — Contemporary Short

Fiction
EN 247 - Poetry and Its Forms

English Literature to

the Restoration
EN 261 — English Literature from

the Restoration to 1900
EN 305 - Modern Drama
EN 310 - Oral Interpretation
EN 31 1 - Oral Communication
EN 321 - Feature Writing
EN 330 - Structure of English
EN 331 — Trends in Linguistics
EN 340— European Literature

From the Renaissance

to the Twentieth

Century
EN 341 — Modern European

Literature
EN 345 — Criticism of Contem-

— Milton

— The English Bible as
Literature

— Restoration and 18th
Century Drama

— The Augustans

— The Age of Feeling
-The Rise of the

English Novel

— The Romantic
Movement

—Victorian Literature
—19th Century English

Novel
—Modern British Fiction

— The English Essayists

— Literary Britain: Tour

— Seminar: Studies in
English and American
Literature

— Special Topics

— Independent Study

B.A. in Pre Law — English

The requirements for this major are the same as for the English
Arts and Sciences major with the addition of a 21 s.h. prelaw
interdisciplinary minor.

For the requirements of the pre-law minor students should
contact the departmental pre-law adviser.

Minor in English

To minor in English, 15 credits in English are required
beyond the General Education requirement of English 101,
English 102, and English 201.

EN 346 -

■ Contemporary Amer-

EN 370

ican and British Poetry

EN 371

EN 350 -

■ American Literature

to 1865

EN 373

EN 351 -

■ American Literature

From 1865 to 1915

EN 375

EN 352 -

■ American Literature

EN 376

From 1915 to 1945

EN 377

EN 358 -

• Modern American

Fiction

EN 379

EN 359 -

Black American

Literature

EN 380

EN 360 -

Old and Middle
English Literature

EN 381

EN 361 -

- Chaucer

EN 383

EN 362 -

■ English Drama to the

EN 385

Restoration

EN 390

EN 365 -

■ 16th Century Prose
and Poetry

EN 480

EN 366 -

- Shakespeare

EN 369 -

- 17th Century Prose

EN 481

and Poetry

EN 482

96 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

B.A. in Journalism

Students interested in a career in advertising, journalsim, or
public relations can enroll in this innovative, flexible major.
The Journalsim major combines journalism elective courses,
the student's choice of a variety of courses from other
University departments, plus internships that provide on-the-
job experiences.

A student who completes the major is graduated with a B.A. in
Journalism. Various related minor fields of study are open,
too.

Because journalism itself covers all areas of life, the journalism
major covers many areas of study of preparation. Thus, a
number of departments are cooperating to make journalism
study at lUP a very broad experience.

The following journalism courses are currently available:

BUSINESS MANAGEMENT POLITICAL SCIENCE

EN 105 — Journalism and Mass

Media
EN 120 — Newspaper Reporting
EN 208 - The Art of the Film
EN 220 — Advanced Composition
EN 221 - Creative Writing
EN 222 - JournalisticWriting
EN 223 - Photojournalism
EN 235 — Languages of Media
EN 311 — Oral Communication

EN 321 - Feature Writing

EN 323 — Management in Mass

Communications
EN 326 - Public Relations
EN 327 - Layout Design and

Production
EN 399 - Internship
EN 481 - Special Topics
EN 482 - Independent Study

The following courses are available as free electives:

ART

Drawing
Graphic Design

BUSINESS

Marketing
Principles of Selling

Advertising
Consumer Behavior
Marketing Research
Personnel Management
Training

COMPUTER SCIENCE

introduction to Computers

CONTINUING EDUCATION

Career Planning

CRIMINOLOGY

General Administration of

Justice
Criminology
Community Relations

HISTORY

U.S. Urban History
Contemporary U.S. History
Diplomatic History of the U.S.

I & II
History of Women

LEARNING RESOURCES

introduction to Radio Broad-
casting
Photography
Television Production
Motion Picture Production
Advanced Motion Picture

Production
Advanced Photography

American Politics
Comparative Government
News interpretation
Legislative Process
Public Opinion
Metropolitan Problems
Constitutional Law & Civil

Liberties
Public Administration
Contemporary Political

Problems
State and Local Political

Systems
Mass Media In American

Politics

PSYCHOLOGY

Developmental Psychology
Personality
Social Psychology
industrial Psychology
Motivation

SOCIOLOGY

Contemporary Social Problems
Population Problems
Modern Social Institutions
Racial & Cultural Minorities
The Community
Industrial Sociology
introduction to Social Research
Social Dynamics
Social & Cultural Change

SOCIAL SCIENCE

Studies in Urban and Regional
Planning

School of Arts and Sciences — 97
English

B.A. in Speech and Theater

In addition to the General Education requirement for Eng-
lish majors (English 101, 102, and 202), requirements for
the degree of Bachelor of Arts in Speech and Theater are 30
more credits in English selected from the following list. All
courses listed give 3 credits, with the exception of EN 31 2.

The major in Speech and Theater is required to spend at
least one summer in The Summer Theater Workshop during
the Pre-Session and Main Session of the summer school.
Also, the major in Speech and Theater may elect a minor of
at least 15 hours in another field.

EN 205 ■
EN 206 ■
EN 208 -
EN 211 -
EN 215-

EN 305 ■
EN 310-
EN 311
EN 312

EN 315

The Dramatic Arts
The Nature of Drama
The Art of the Film
History of the Theatei
Creative Dramatics
and Storytelling
Modern Drama
Oral Interoretation
Oral Communication
Summer Theater
Workshop (3-9 cr.)
Fundamentals of
Acting

EN 316-

EN 317 -
EN 318-
EN 319-

EN 320 -
EN 322 -
EN 362 -

EN 366 -
EN 373 -

Directing and Play

Production

Costume and Make-Up

Stagecraft

Scenic Design and

Lighting

Advanced Acting

Playwriting

English Drama to

the Restoration

Shakespeare

Restoration and

18th Century Drama

B. S. in Education (English Major)

In addition to the General Education requirements for
English majors (English 101, 102, and 202), requirements for
the degree of Bachelor of Science in Education with an
English major are a minimum of 36 more credits in English,
in order to satisfy the requirements for certification. Since

English majors do not take a minor, many of them augment
the minimal 36-credit program with courses that will prepare
them for graduate study in their profession of secondary
English teaching.

Of these 36 credits, nine are in required courses, and the
remainder may be selected from those listed as follows, of
which a maximum of 12 credits may be in journalism,
speech, or dramatics courses. Also required is Education 452.
All the English courses give three credits except English 390,
which gives three or six credits, and English 482, which gives
varied credits.

Required:

EN 220 - Advanced Composition (EN 221 or EN 222 may be

substituted)
EN 230 — History of the English Language
EN 330 - The Structure of English
EN 452 — The Teaching of English and Communication (not counted

in the 36 hours for the major)

English
EN 102
EN 105

EN 205
EN 206
EN 208
EN 223
EN 240

EN 245

Electives:

— Newspaper Reporting

— Journalism and the
Mass Media

— The Dramatic Arts

— The Nature of Drama

— The Art of the Film

— Photojournalism

— Classical Literature
in Translation

— Literature for
Adolescents

EN 247
EN 260

EN 305
EN 310-
EN 311
EN 321

Contemporary Short
Fiction

• Poetry and Its Forms

• English Literature to
the Restoration

• English Literature from
the Restoration to 1900

• Modern Drama

■ Oral Interpretation
Oral Communication

• Feature Writing

98 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

EN 331 -

- Trends in Linguistics

EN 365 -

-16th Century Prose

EN 340-

- European Literature

and Poetry

From the Renaissance

EN 366 -

- Shakespeare

to the Twentieth

EN 369 -

- 17th Century Prose

Century

and Poetry

EN341 -

- Modern European

EN 370 -

- Milton

Literature

EN 371 -

-The English Bible as

EN 345 -

- Criticism of Contemp-

Literature

orary Writing

EN 373-

- Restoration and 18th

EN 346 -

- Contemporary

Century Drama

American and

EN 375 -

- The Augustans

British Poetry

EN 376 -

- The Age of Feeling

EN 350 -

- American Literature

EN 377 -

- The Rise of the

to 1 865

English Novel

EN 361 -

- American Literature

EN 379 -

- The Romantic

From 1865 to 1915

Movement

EN 352 -

- American Literature

EN 380 -

- Victorian Literature

From 191 5 to 1945

EN 381 -

- 19th Century English

EN 358 -

- Modern American

Novel

Fiction

EN 383 -

- Modern British Fiction

EN 359 -

- Black American

EN 385 -

- The English Essayists

Literature

EN 390 -

- Literary Britain: Tour

EN 360 -

- Old and Middle

EN 480 -

- Seminar; Studies in

English Literature

English and American

EN 361 -

- Chaucer

Literature

EN 362 -

- English Drama to the

EN 481 -

- Special Topics

Restoration

EN 482 -

- Independent Study

B . S. in Education (Communication Major)

This major leads to a teaching certificate in communication
in the secondary school. The major takes a basic program
covering literature, language, composition, speech, theater,
and media and selects one or more specialties from the
following: literature, linguistic science, writing, speech, theater.

Independent Study, EN 482 and EN 399, Internship are
available in all of the specialties. However, such independent
activity is usually reserved for students who are at least
halfway through their certification requirements. An excep-
tion may be made by the department chairman. The nature of
the independent activity depends upon the specialty under
which it falls.

Independent activity may be defined as that done independ-
ently of a rigidly structured course but not necessarily
independently of regular faculty direction and consultation.

A student who wishes to engage in an independent activity
under the communication program must obtain permission
to do so at the time of Pre-Scheduling (October for the
Spring Semester, March for the Fall Semester, and May for
the Summer Sessions).

The student must present a proposal for the approval of
both his adviser and the department chairman. The proposal
will outline in detail the student's plan to engage in inde-
pendent activity. If the proposal is approved by both the
adviser and the department chairman, the student then
pre-schedules for EN 482 or 399.

Despite the 124-credit minimum for graduation with a
baccalaureate degree at Indiana University of Pennsylvania,
the Communication program offers a student the opportu-
nity to develop his skills and knowledge beyond the normal
restrictions of the classroom and credit hours. Such opportu-
nity comes in part with the flexibility of the independent

School of Arts and Sciences - 99
English

activity, described above. Further opportunities lie in the
co-curricular areas (cannpus newspaper, plays, debate, etc.)
for which students under many circumstances could be given
appropriate specialties credit. Training and experience out-
side the University and even prior to admission to the
University should be considered in the student's development
of Specialties. In short, since the Communication program is
designed to prepare teachers of the wide area of communica-
tion for the secondary schools of the Commonwealth, the
Department recognizes that preparation and training of such
teachers should be restricted as little as possible by enforce-
ment of required courses and course credits.

In the end the teacher of communication should be certifi-
cated on the basis of course preparation, independent activi-
ties, experiences, performances and whatever else contributes
to an evaluation of his knowledge and training. A teacher
certificated as a communication teacher has fulfilled the
Basic Program and has developed one or more of the
following Specialties: Literature, Linguistic Science, Writing,
Speech, Theater.

The communication teacher then enters his teaching experi-
ence with not only a basic knowledge in literature, language,
composition, speech, theater, and the media, but with a
specialty that gives him confidence to meet an advanced
writing class or to direct a play or to advise a newspaper.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

EN 050 ENGLISH FOR FOREIGN STUDENTS 3 cr.

Provides foreign students an opportunity to improve their ability to
speak and write English. The emphasis is on individualized exercises
and assignments.

EN 100 BASIC ENGLISH 3 cr.

Designed to review, strengthen, and further develop the basic
English skills necessary for clear and effective communication.
Reserved for assignment of selected students.

EN 101 ENGLISH I 4 cr.

Should be taken the first semester at lUP. Course uses readings in
nature and history of language, semantic and linguistic analysis,
and problems in rhetoric. Seven theme-length expository papers
are written, in addition to shorter exercises and a written final
examination. Three hour lecture, 1 hour individual instructor-
student conference.

EN 102 ENGLISH II 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EN 101.

Analytical reading of various types of nonfictional prose, aimed at
enunciating both meaning and techniques by which meaning Is
manifested. Writing in course consists of three substantial docu-
mented papers.

EN 103 INTRODUCTION TO THEATER 3 cr.

Explores place of theater in life of man, with critical appreciation
of various arts and skills involved: emphasis on creative function
of the audience.

EN 105 JOURNALISM AND THE MASS MEDIA 3 cr.

A critical examination of roles-goals of newspapers, magazines,
radio and television as they affect American society socially,
politically, and economically. For Journalism majors.

EN 120 NEWSPAPER REPORTING 3 cr.

Open to first and second-year students in any department who
either work or aspire to work on University newspaper staff;

100 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

includes instruction in writing the news story, preparing copy,
interviewing, covering special events and similar reporting activi-
ties.

EN 201 ENGLISH III 3 cr.

Prerequisites: EN 101 and 102.

Focuses on analysis of an imaginative literature. Writing consists
of two substantial critical papers on themes generated by the
reading.

EN 202 INTRODUCTION TO LITERARY ANALYSIS 3 cr.

Offers beginning English majors opportunities to study examples
of various approaches to works of literary art and requires them
to practice such approaches through writing at least three critical
papers.

EN 205 THE DRAMATIC ARTS 3 cr.

Deals with basic problems that confront a director of plays in
high school. Course studies principles of play selection, rehearsal
procedures, scenic demands, and all other aspects pertinent to a
successful production.

EN 206 THE NATURE OF DRAMA 3 cr.

Study of selected plays of various styles and periods, to gain
greater understanding and appreciation of art of drama.

EN 208 THE ART OF THE FILM 3 cr.

Concentrates on the film as an artistic medium. Eight to twelve
motion pictures are shown during semester and are analyzed in class
discussions.

EN 211 HISTORY OF THE THEATER 3 cr.

Study of development of theater, with special emphasis on
important plays, people, theaters and technical innovations.

EN 215

3 cr.

CREATIVE DRAMATICS AND
STORY TELLING
Through workshop experiences, stresses creative dramatics as a

way of teaching for adults, a way of learning for children in both
elementary and secondary schools.

EN 220 ADVANCED COMPOSITION 3 cr.

Primarily seeks to improve writing style, particularly in the more
utilitarian forms, such as magazine article and personal essay.

EN 221 CREATIVE WRITING 3 cr.

Prerequisite is demonstrated ability and interest in creative writ-
ing; may be substituted for EN 220. This is a seminar course in
which the kinds of writing done are chosen in line with the
special interests and abilities of each student.

EN 222 JOURNALISTIC WRITING 3 cr.

Emphasis on intelligent use of writing ability in a journalistic
style, and understanding of the "why" of journalism and mass
media. May be substituted for EN 220.

EN 223 PHOTOJOURNALISM 3 cr.

Introduction to still photography for news media. Includes prepa-
ration of portfolio and learning of specialized processing techniques
for high-speed work. For Journalism majors.

EN 230 THE HISTORY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE 3 cr.

Studies historical development of the English language, as a basis
for a better understanding of modern American English.

EN 235 LANGUAGES OF MEDIA 3 cr.

Introductory course in nature of language and communication,
heavily grounded in practice of communication in various media
which resources of university make available to student.

EN 240 CLASSICAL LITERATURE IN TRANSLATION 3 cr.

Masterpieces studied range from those of ancient Greece to Middle
Ages. English literature and American literature excluded.

EN 245 LITERATURE FOR ADOLESCENTS 3 cr.

Surveys poetry, drama and fiction with which the adolescent is
familiar through his school work and his personal reading.

School of Arts and Sciences
English

EN 246 CONTEMPORARY SHORT FICTION 3 cr.

Attention given to form, structure, and art of the modern short
story, British, American, and Continental.

EN 247 POETRY AND ITS FORMS 3 cr.

A study in appreciation of poetry, with special attention to
technique of the poet and structure of poetry.

EN 260

3 cr.

ENGLISH LITERATURE TO THE

RESTORATION
A survey of major English authors, major works, and major
literary genres written from the beginnings of English literature to
the Restoration (1660).

EN 261 ENGLISH LITERATURE FROM THE 3 cr.

RESTORATION TO 1900
A survey of major English authors, major works, and major
literary genres written from the Restoration to 1900.

EN 305 MODERN DRAMA 3 cr.

Reading of plays starts with Ibsen and other Scandinavian dra-
matists, followed by plays by outstanding Continental, British,
and American playwrights.

EN 310 ORAL INTERPRETATION 3 cr.

Emphasizes understanding and appreciation of literature through
developing skill in reading aloud.

EN 311 ORAL COMMUNICATION 3 cr.

Fundamental principles of public speaking, audience analysis,

interest and attention, selection and organization of speech mate-
rial.

EN 312 SUMMER THEATER WORKSHOP 3-6cr.

A theater practicum offering credit for practical experience in
Theater by the Grove, lUP's semi-professional summer repertory
theater.

EN 313 HISTORY OF RHETORICAL THEORY 3 cr.

Survey of rhetorical theory from Greek and Roman through
modern times.

EN 314 PERSUASION 3 cr.

Advanced study of problems involved in influencing an audience.

EN 315 FUNDAMENTALS OF ACTING 3 cr.

Gives attention to theory and practice in techniques of acting.

EN 316 DIRECTION AND PLAY PRODUCTION 3 cr.

Affords each student opportunity to select, cast, rehearse, and
produce a one-act play.

EN 317 COSTUME AND MAKE-UP 3 cr.

Deals with practical application of straight and character makeup;
emphasis on costuming to show how mood and illusion can be
created through proper selection of style, color and texture of
materials.

EN 318 STAGECRAFT 3 cr.

Study and practice in all aspects of backstage technical craft.

EN 319 SCENIC DESIGN AND LIGHTING 3 cr.

Prerequisite: At least one course in dramatic literature and some
experience in stagecraft.
Theories and techniques of designing and lighting stage settings.

EN 320 ADVANCED ACTING 3 cr.

Prerequisite; EN 315.
Involves study and practice in problems of period and style acting.

EN 321 FEATURE WRITING 3 cr.

Designed for student who might work in journalism or who might
wish to write on a part-time or free-lance basis.

EN 322 PLAYWRITING 3 cr.

Prerequisites; One course in dramatic literature, and consent of

instructor.

102 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

A course providing time, place, advice and intelligent criticism for
those interested in writing for the stage.

EN 323 MANAGEMENT IN MASS COMMUNICATIONS 3 cr.

Attention given to the process of advancement to management
positions in journalism. For Journalism majors.

EN 324 CREATIVE WRITING II 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EN 221.

A workshop for students who wish to write fiction or poetry
under guidance of instructor.

EN 325 ADVANCED COMPOSITION II 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EN 220

Workshop and tutorial atmosphere for students who intend to write
or teach writing.

EN 326 PUBLIC RELATIONS: PRINCIPLES & 3 cr.

PRACTICES
Explores functions of Public Relations in detail.

EN 327 LAYOUT DESIGN AND PRODUCTION 3 cr.

Provides basic techniques and theories of layout design and
production, including typography, headlines, copyfitting, newspaper
design and layout, photo cropping, etc.

EN 330 THE STRUCTURE OF ENGLISH 3 cr.

Training in analysis of American-English Language, with structural
and generative approaches to system of grammar emphasized.
Course is a prerequisite for Ed 452, Teaching of English and
Speech in the Secondary School.

EN 331 TRENDS IN LINGUISTICS 3 cr.

Explores recent developments in linguistic theory and research.

EN 332 THE DIALECTS OF AMERICAN ENGLISH 3 cr.

Examines relationship of dialectal differences in sounds, structure
and vocabulary to geographical and sociological factors.

EN 333 PSYCHO-LINGUISTICS 3 cr.

An introduction to those aspects of the study of language that
bear on relationship of thought and behavior; the ways people
move from their perception of reality to verbal and non-verbal
communication.

EN 340

3 cr.

EUROPEAN LITERATURE

FROM THE RENAISSANCE

TO THE TWENTIETH CENTURY
Selected European works from Renaissance to twentieth century
representing all major genres with exception of the epic.

EN 341 MODERN EUROPEAN LITERATURE 3 cr.

Selected Continental fiction concerned with alienated man and
quest for identity in the intellectual climate of pluralism and
changing values.

EN 345 CRITICISM OF CONTEMPORARY WRITING 3 cr.

Covers basic texts of literary criticism and relates development of
critical concepts to work of influential literary critics of twentieth
century. Not open to freshmen and sophomores.

EN 346

CONTEMPORARY AMERICAN AND
BRITISH POETRY
Study of British and American poetry since World War II.

3cr.

EN 350 AMERICAN LITERATURE TO 1865 3 cr.

Provides a study of major American writers from colonial times to
the Civil War.

EN 351 AMERICAN LITERATURE FROM 3 cr.

1865 to 1915
Emphasis on in-depth study of masterpieces of American literary
Realism and Naturalism, in both fiction and poetry.

EN 352 AMERICAN LITERATURE FROM 3 cr.

1915 to 1945
A study of major writers and major works in American literature
between World War I and World War II.

School of Arts and Sciences - 103
English

EN 358 MODERN AMERICAN FICTION 3 cr.

Major American writers of fiction since 1945 are considered.

EN 359 BLACK AMERICAN LITERATURE 3 cr.

Analyzes significant Black American literature of a variety of
types — autobiography, essay, fiction, poetry.

EN 360

OLD & MIDDLE ENGLISH LITERATURE 3 cr.

Study of Old English includes a reading of both prose and poetry,
whereas the reading in Middle English is limited to major works of
poetry, excluding Chaucer's.

tN361 CHAUCER 3cr.

Studies Chaucer, his life, his language, the development of his literary
style and his art, with and through his major poetical works.

EN 362 ENGLISH DRAMA TO THE RESTORATION 3 cr.

Traces development of English drama from 900 A.D. to closing of
theaters in 1642, but does not include plays of Shakespeare.

EN 365 SIXTEENTH-CENTURY PROSE & POETRY 3cr.

Covers English literature from late Middle Ages to High Renaissance.

EN 366 SHAKESPEARE 3 cr.

Studies Shakespeare's development as a poetic dramatist against
background of Elizabethan stage; examines audience, textual prob-
lems, language imagery, and philosophy.

EN 369 SEVENTEENTH-CENTURY PROSE & POETRY 3 cr.

Covers English Literature from death of Elizabeth to 1660:
examines work of such poets as Donne, Jonson, Herbert, and
Marvell, and such prose stylists as Bacon, Burton, and Browne.

EN 370 MILTON 3 cr.

Consists of a close reading of English poems of John Milton, with
particular attention to Paradise Lost and Samson Agonistes.

EN 371 THE ENGLISH BIBLE AS LITERATURE 3 cr.

Considers literary aspects of English Bible by relating earlier

translations to the Authorized Version of 1611 and by tracing
some of the major influences of King James Bible upon writers
and speakers of modern English.

EN 373 RESTORATION & 18th CENTURY DRAMA 3 cr.

Emphasizing critical theory and social implication of English
drama from 1660-1780, concentrates on great comedies of man-
ners of Etherege, Congrave, Wycherly, and Sheridan.

EN 375 THE AUGUSTANS 3 cr.

Examines in some detail the major poems of Dryden and Pope,
major prose of Swift, Addison and Steele, and selected works of a
few minor writers.

EN 376 THE AGE OF FEELING 3 cr.

Emphasizes art and criticism of Samuel Johnson, as revealed in his
writings and Boswell's Life.

EN 377 RISE OF THE ENGLISH NOVEL 3 cr.

Surveys development of English novel from its forerunners through
fiction of Gothic romanticists and Jane Austen.

EN 379 THE ROMANTIC MOVEMENT 3 cr.

Examines basic tenets of Romantic philosophy in major writings
of period from 1780-1832 — poetry, the essay, and fiction.

EN 380 VICTORIAN LITERATURE 3 cr.

Examines essays, novels, and poetry of second half of nineteenth
century, with special consideration of criticism they offer of
political, economic, social, and religious practices and creeds of
Victorian England.

EN 381 NINETEENTH CENTURY ENGLISH NOVEL 3 cr.

Traces historical and technical development of novel from Scott
to Hardy.

EN 383 MODERN BRITISH FICTION 3 cr.

Covers important twentieth century novels — including works by
Conrad, Lawrence and Joyce — from about 1900 to recent times.

704 - Indiana University of Pennsylvania

EN 385 THE ENGLISH ESSAYISTS 3 cr.

Considers major essayists, both as members of and influences on
society of their time.

EN 390 LITERARY TOUR; BRITAIN 3 cr. or 6 cr.

Offered each summer, either for three weeks during Pre-Session or
for six weeks during Main Session. Visits London, Stratford, and
Cambridge or Oxford, as well as other places important in English
literature.

EN 399 INTERNSHIP 3-12 cr.

On-the-job training opportunities in journalism and related areas.

EN 480 SEMINAR: STUDIES IN ENGLISH & 3 cr.

AMERICAN LITERATURE
A seminar in English or American literature, the special topic to be
chosen by the instructor. Open to junior and senior English majors.

EN 481 SPECIAL TOPICS 2-3 cr.

These courses vary from semester to semester, covering such diverse
topics as autobiography, science fiction, folklore, the political novel,
black theater, journalism specialities, etc.

EN 482 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-6 cr.

Opportunities for independent study that goes beyond the usual
classroom activities. Approval of department chairman required.

ED 452 TEACHING OF ENGLISH & COMMUNICATION

IN THE SECONDARY SCHOOL 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EN 330.

This course is a prerequisite to student teaching in English.
Introduces student to current professional practices in the teaching
of English and communication in high school.

FOREIGN LANGUAGES

School of Arts and Sciences — 105
Foreign Languages

Foreign Language study is offered by the Department of
German-Russian and the Department of Romance and Class-
ical Languages. Majors in French, German, Latin, Russian, and
Spanish are available as well as classes in elementary and
intermediate Greek and Latin. Courses in Self-Instruction in
Critical Languages which provide for study in twenty African,
Asiatic and European languages including Japanese, Chinese,
Arabic, Hebrew and Portuguese are also available.

Students who major in a language will acquire an active skill in
all phases of that language and enter more deeply into its
history, culture and literature. They will also gain some
knowledge of its linguistic development throughout the
centuries. Language specialists are destined for careers in
government work, librarianship, journalism, foreign trade,
airlines, tourism, business, and teaching. Students who choose
careers as secondary school teachers will find the close
supervision and advanced methodology offered by the depart-
ments a distinct asset. Students also may elect to do further
graduate work in their language, thereby enhancing their high
school teaching careers or preparing themselves for a career in
college teaching.

Degrees offered are the Bachelor of Arts in the selected
language, the Bachelor of Science in Education in the selected
language, and the Master of Education and Master of Arts in
Spanish and German. In addition to major concentrations, an
18-credit sequence may be chosen for the area of concentra-
tion required for a degree in Elementary Education, or a
21 -credit sequence to satisfy the requirements for a minor.
Both Arts and Sciences and Education students in Romance

and Classical Languages and in German and Russian are
required to take HI 101-102, History of Civilization I and II.

GENERAL EDUCATION

LANGUAGE REQUIREMENTS

Students in the School of Arts and Sciences, who must pass a
second year language course (FL 251 and 252) as one of the
School's requirements for graduation, may choose any one of
the six languages offered. The six credits for these courses are
part of the General Education requirement. Self-instruction in
Critical Languages does not fulfill the General Education
requirement, but may be counted as a general elective. The
student with no previous foreign language study will take FL
151-152 (three credits each) as prerequisites; the credits will
not be applicable to any School or department requirements,
but may be counted as general electives in the total required
for graduation. Generally, the student should program in
accordance with previous school or practical background
according to the schedule:

1 year of high school, or equivalent, equals FL 151

2 years of high school, or equivalent, equals FL 152

3 years of high school, or equivalent, equals FL 251

4 years of high school, or equivalent, equals FL 252
Individual placement may be requested by the student, in
which case the pertinent factors regarding preparation will be
weighed by the department, with the student's individual
requirements and the judgment of classroom instructors also
being considered.

106 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

CURRICULA

Core Program

Basic requirements for all majors and minors in any foreign
language are credits for Foreign Language I and II (FL 151
ana 152) and Oral Practice I and ll (FL 051 and 052). For
students wishing to major in Latin, Greek 151 and 152 are
substituted for FL 051 and 052. These credits may be
obtained by course work at the University, or by advanced
placement owing to previous high school or other work in
the language or special examination.

B.A. in the Specified Language

The requirement for the degree of Bachelor of Arts in the

specified language is 36 credits in the chosen language above

the first year level, as follows:

Foreign Language

FL 251-252 - Language III and IV 6 credits

FL 053054 - Oral Practice* 4 credits

FL 351-352 — Advanced Language I and II 6 credits

FL 055-056 - Advanced Oral Practice I and II* 2 credits
FL 361-362 — Development of Culture and

Literature I and II** 6 credits

FL Electives 12 credits

•Students majoring in Latin will replace FL 053 and 054 with Greek
251 and 252 and omit the FL 055 and 056 requirement.

'Students majoring in Spanish may select the sequence 361 362 or
363-364. Upon completion of either sequence, either course from the
other sequence may be selected.

The language major who takes first year courses FL 151-152
should take FL 051-052 concurrently.

B. S. in Education (Foreign Language Major)

The requirement for the degree of Bachelor of Science in
Education with a foreign language major is a minimum of 33
credits in the major language above the first year level and,
in addition, three credits in the Teaching of Foreign Lan-
guage in the Secondary School (ED 453), for a total of 36
credits. Also, a proficiency examination in the major lan-
guage chosen and a semester of supervised student teaching
is necessary before certification is granted.
Foreign Language

FL 251-252 - Language III and IV 6 credits

FL 053-054 - Oral Practice* 4 credits

FL 351-352 — Advanced Language I and II 6 credits

FL 055-056 - Advanced Oral Practice I and 11** 2 credits
FL 361-362 — Development of Culture and

Literature I and II** 6 credits

FL Electives 9 credits

•students majoring in Latin will replace FL 053 and 054 with Greek
251 and 252 and omit the FL 055 and 056 requirement.

"Students majoring in Spanish may select the sequence 361-362 or
363-364. Upon completion of either sequence, either course from the
other sequence may be selected.

Education

ED 453 — Teaching of Foreign Language

in the Secondary School 3 credits

An Education language major may be certified in a second

language, if he wishes, by taking the following sequence:

FL 251-252 6 credits

FL 053-054* 4 credits

School of Arts and Sciences
German and Russian

DEPARTMENT OF GERMAN
AND RUSSIAN LANGUAGES

FL 351 352
FL 055056"
FL 361-362

6 credits
2 credits
6 credits

A student in Elementary Education may elect a concentration
of 18 hours of a foreign language, consisting of the following:

6 credits
4 credits
6 credits
2 credits

ith Greek 251

FL 251-252
FL 053054
FL 351-352
FL 055-056

•Students majorinj
and 252 and o

ng in Latin will replace FL 053 and 054 i
it the FL 055 and 056 requirement.

Minor in Foreign Language

A minor in a foreign language consists of 21 credits, as follows:

FL 251-252 6 credits

FL 053-054* 4 credits

FL 351-352 6 credits

FL 055-056* 2 credits

FL 361 3 credits

•Students majoring ii
251 and 252 and on

1 will replace FL 053 and 054 with Greek
FL 055 and 056 requirement.

EDITH CORD, CHAIRPERSON: BRODE, OMRCANIN, READY,
ROFFMAN, SOMMER, VOELKER, WILLIAMS

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

German and Russian Courses

GM 151-152 GERMAN I AND II 3 cr. each

RU 151-152 RUSSIAN I AND II

Designed for beginning student who will complete a two sennester

course only. Basic syntax and simple, functional vocabulary

stressed, using texts containing reading materials based on culture

of language areas involved.
GM 051-052 ORAL PRACTICE I AND II 2 cr. each

RU 051-052 ORAL PRACTICE I AND II

Using lab approach and lab-type class paralleling above courses;

stresses pattern drills, phonetics, exact pronunciation, and oral

composition.

GM 251-252 GERMAN III AND IV 3 cr. each

RU 251-252 RUSSIAN III AND IV

Designed primarily for students with one year of college or
two-three years of high school (or equivalent) background. Course
reviews grammar, utilizing texts based on a cultural approach to
study of a people and their language.

GM 053-054 ORAL PRACTICE III AND IV 2 cr. each

RU 053-054 ORAL PRACTICE III AND IV

Taken by majors to continue the development of previous skills,

these courses parallel 251 and 252.

Elective Courses in German

GM 253 INTERMEDIATE COMPOSITION 3 cr.

AND CONVERSATION
Can be taken instead of or in addition to 252. Designed for majors
or serious students. Offered in spring only.

108 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

GM 256 SCIENTIFIC GERMAN 3 cr.

Designed to substitute for German 252, will be offered in the
second semester. Primarily for science majors, it may be taken as
an elective by German majors.

GM 351-352 ADVANCED GERMAN LANGUAGE 3 cr. each

I AND II
Reviews and supplements the skills derived from earlier courses,
taught in German using single language texts, hence preparing
student for future studies in grammar and stylistics.

GM 055-056 ADVANCED ORAL PRACTICE 1 cr. each

Relatively informal courses, supplementing precedmg sequence.
Designed to increase speaking ability, the courses involve discus-
sions of cultural differences between countries. The largely un-
structured approach permits repeating of these courses.

GM 361-362 DEVELOPMENT OF GERMAN 3 cr. each

CULTURE AND LITERATURE
Examines historical and cultural aspects of countries involved,
reviews their characteristic contributions throughout the centuries,
and analyzes relationship of each literary movement to age that
produced it.

GM 363-364 INTRODUCTION TO GERMAN 3 cr. each

LITERATURE I AND II
Selected readings in German poetry, drama, and fiction, to
acquaint student with some techniques for intelligent understand-
ing and formal criticism of works of literature.

GM 367 NINETEENTH CENTURY 3 cr.

GERMAN LITERATURE
GM 368 TWENTIETH CENTURY 3 or.

GERMAN LITERATURE
GM 369 CONTEMPORARY GERMAN 3 cr.

LITERATURE

GM 381 GERMAN DRAMA IN ENGLISH 3 cr.

TRANSLATION
Representative works of major dramatists studied in English transla-
tion. Primarily intended for students of English literature, compara-
tive literature, and not considered as credit toward a German major.

GM 480-489 SPECIAL TOPICS IN GERMAN 1-3 cr.

LANGUAGE OR LITERATURE
Devoted to a special aspect of German language or literature. May
be arranged for individual or group study. Permission of Depart-
ment required.

GM 391 SPECIAL PROJECTS IN GERMAN 1-3 cr.

LITERATURE
Devoted to a special aspect or figure of German literature, this
semester-type course may be arranged on an individual or group
basis.

GM410 HISTORY OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE 3 cr.

History and development of German Language, with special
emphasis on relationships with English. Analysis of annals in Gothic,
Old High German, and Middle High German using methods of
historical and contemporary linguistics.

ED 453

3 cr.

GM 370-371 THE AGE OF GOETHE I AND II

3-6 cr.

TEACHING OF FOREIGN LANGUAGE

IN THE SECONDARY SCHOOL
Prerequisite: Successful completion of the sequence 351-352 and
055-056 in the student's major language; passing a language
proficiency examination, or permission of instructor.

GM499 INTERNSHIP IN GERMANY 3-1 2 cr.

Prerequisite: German 352 or equivalent

A supervised field experience in Germany with approved public
agencies and institutions or private firms; no longer than one
semester and no less than one month. Positions will be matched as
closely as possible with the Intern's personal interests and his degree
of proficiency in the German language. Academic work at the
Gesamthochschule in Duisburg may precede or follow the Intern-

School of Arts and Sciences - 109
German and Russian

ship. Open to students in other disciplines, such as Political Science,
International Relations, Business, etc., with their adviser's approval.

Elective Courses in Russian

RU 351-352 ADVANCED RUSSIAN 3 or. each

LANGUAGE I AND II
Conducted entirely in Russian for students with two years of
college Russian, advanced grammar, composition, reading, and oral
self-expression on a variety of topics.

RU 055-056 ADVANCED ORAL PRACTICE 1 cr. each

I AND II
For students with two years of college Russian, advanced oral
expression on readings, current events and more abstract themes.

RU 361-362 DEVELOPMENT OF RUSSIAN 3 cr. each

CULTURE AND LITERATURE
I AND II
Readings, discussions and lectures in Russian on the course of
Russian civilization; open to students with two years of college
Russian or equivalent.

RU 367-368 NINETEENTH CENTURY RUSSIAN 3-6 cr.

LITERATURE I AND II
Reading selections from masterpieces of 19th century Russian
fiction; reports, discussions, compositions, and analysis of lan-
guage; conducted entirely in Russian.

RU 369-370 TWENTIETH CENTURY 3-6 cr.

RUSSIAN LITERATURE
Analysis of contemporary Russian language as used by various
Soviet writers in fiction and periodical literature; conducted
entirely in Russian. Students will do independent reading of Soviet
novels in English.

RU 371 RUSSIAN POETRY 3 cr.

Reading of selected lyric poets of 19th and 20th centuries, with
particular emphasis on development of modern Russian; con-
ducted entirely in Russian.

RU 372 RUSSIAN DRAMA 3 cr.

Reading and listening to selected plays of 19th and 20th centuries
in an attempt to understand and master the idiom of conversa-
tional Russian; conducted entirely in Russian.

RU 480-489 SPECIAL TOPICS IN RUSSIAN 1-3 cr.

LANGUAGE OR LITERATURE
Devoted to a special aspect of Russian language or literature. May
be arranged for individual or group study. Permission of depart-
ment required.

IIEJI

110— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

DEPARTMENT OF ROMANCE AND
CLASSICAL LANGUAGES

LUDO OP DE BEECK, CHAIRPERSON: CARRANZA, DRESCHER,
FAUST, FISEL, A. M. GUARDIOLA, A. P. GUARDIOLA, HENRY,
ISAR, JONES, LANDIS, LISCINSKY, LOZADA, MENDIZABAL,
MILTZ, PHILLIPS, SHIELDS, SOREIMTO, SPIEKER, WHITMER

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

FR, GK, LA,SP 151-152 FRENCH, GREEK, LATIN,

SPANISH I AND II 3 cr. each

For beginning student; pronunciation, reading, oral and written
communication are the objectives. Majors tal<e 051 and 052
concurrently with 151 — 152.

FR,SP051-052 ORAL PRACTICE I AND II 2 cr. each

Two hours weekly oral practice in small group, to improve
pronunciation and response through basic drill.

FR, GK, LA, SP 251-252 FRENCH, GREEK, LATIN,

SPANISH III AND IV 3 cr. each

Continued training in basic skills, with possible addition of study of
specific topics; consult the department for topics of interest. Majors
take 053 - 054 (Or 051 - 052) concurrently.

FR,SP053-054 ORAL PRACTICE II I AND IV 2 cr. each

Improves oral skills to a higher level, through conversation and
discussion.

FR, GK, LA, SP 351-352 ADVANCED FRENCH, GREEK,
LATIN, SPANISH LANGUAGE
I AND II 3cr. each

Reviews grammar in depth; analyzes the structure of the language;

frequent themes required. Majors take 053 — 054, or 055 — 056

concurrently.

FR, SP 055 - 056 ADVANCED ORAL PRACTICE
I AND II
Informal advanceo conversation; meets twice weekly.

FR 361

362 DEVELOPMENT OF FRENCH CULTURE

AND LITERATURE I AND II 3 cr. each

SP 361 - 362

DEVELOPMENT OF SPANISH CULTURE
AND LITERATURE I AND II 3 cr

each

SP 363 - 364 DEVELOPMENT OF SPANISH-AMERICAN

CULTURE AND LITERATURE I AND II 3cr. each
Study of the historical and cultural aspects of countries involved;
review of their function in the world over the centuries; analysis of
the literary schools and evolution.

Elective Courses in French

PR 253

3 cr.

INTERMEDIATE COMPOSITION
AND CONVERSATION
Given according to demand and staff availability.

FR 254 COMMERCIAL FRENCH

Prerequisite: FR 251 or equivalent.

Commercial letter writing, use of technical language, survey of
special business practices and methods of French-speaking com-
mercial systems and problems of translation are studied.

3 cr.

FR 363 MEDIEVAL AND RENAISSANCE

LITERATURE
FR 365 SEVENTEENTH CENTURY FRENCH

LITERATURE
FR 366 EIGHTEENTH CENTURY FRENCH

LITERATURE
FR 367 NINETEENTH CENTURY FRENCH

LITERATURE

3 cr.

School of Arts and Sciences
Romance and Classical

FR 368 TWENTIETH CENTURY FRENCH 3 cr.

LITERATURE
Designed to present general surveys of literature of respective
periods, with due consideration to social factors and events behind
them.

FR 371 THE FRENCH NOVEL 3 cr.

Elective survey of the origin and development of French Novel. A
selected list of works representative of major forms are read in
their entirety.

Elective Courses in Spanish

FR 372

STUDIES IN CONTEMPORARY
FRENCH LITERATURE

Content of this course will vary in accordance

interests of those who elect it.

3 cr.

vith needs and

FR 461 STRUCTURES OF FRENCH AND ENGLISH 3 cr.

Modern methods of linguistic analysis applied to a study of
French syntax; transformational, distributional and traditional
models serve to explain mechanisms of the language with a
pedagogical intent.

FR 482 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-3 cr.

Elective Courses in Latin

LA 361
LA 362

3 cr.

DEVELOPMENT OF ROMAN CULTURE

AND LITERATURE

LATIN CONVERSATION AND 3 cr.

COMPOSITION
Aims at the ability to speak Latin on a conversational level and to
write grammatically correct Latin prose.

LA 371-372 SURVEY OF LATIN LITERATURE 3 cr.

I AND II
This course sequence will give a comprehensive view of Latin
literature from Ennius to the Middle Ages.

SP 253 INTERMEDIATE COMPOSITION AND 3 cr.

CONVERSATION
Given according to demand and staff availability.

SP 254 COMMERCIAL SPANISH 3 cr.

Prerequisite: SP 251 or equivalent.

Practice with letter writing, technical business terms, and methods
of translation.

SP 365 SPANISH LITERATURE BEFORE 1650

SP 367 NINETEENTH CENTURY SPANISH

LITERATURE

3 cr.
3cr.

3cr.

SP 368 TWENTIETH CENTURY SPANISH

LITERATURE
Present general surveys of literature of respective periods, with
due consideration to social factors and events behind them.

SP 370 GOLDEN AGE DRAMA 3 cr.

Traces the development of Spanish theater and examines its
artistic and spiritual flowering in Baroque period.

SP 371 THE SPANISH NOVEL 3 cr.

After a brief survey of origins and trends of the Spanish novel,
major stress is given to the Nineteenth Century Novel and the
Generation of 98.

SP 376 SPANISH-AMERICAN LITERATURE 3 cr.

Following a consideration of the salient tendencies of Spanish-
American Literature, this course may take the form of a compre-
hensive survey, or it may concentrate its attention upon the novel
of social thesis.

SP 390 SPANISH IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 3 cr.

Prerequisite: Spanish 251-252 or equivalent.
The prospective teacher of Spanish on the elementary level is

112 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

GEOGRAPHY AND
REGIONAL PLANNING DEPARTMENT

introduced to materials suitable for Grades 1 through 6. Prepara-
tion of games, songs, poems, and story telling included.

SP 480 BUENOS AIRES SEMINAR

SP 481 SPECIAL TOPIC

Designed to meet special needs of a student group.

3 cr.

SP482

INDEPENDENT STUDY

Linguistics

FL 421 LANGUAGE AND SOCIETY 3 cr.

The student considers salient facts of language and its role in
society and culture. Language families, linguistic change, and
reciprocal influences of culture and language are presented.

FL 485 SELF-INSTRUCTION IN CRITICAL LANGUAGES

Recorded materials and texts are available for independent study of
uncommonly-taught languages. Prerequisite; Foreign Language re-
quirement and Language Aptitude test. Examples: Portuguese,
Arabic, Hungarian, Chinese, Japanese, Hebrew. Contact the coordin-
ator in Romance Languages.

Education

3 cr.

) 453 TEACHING OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES

IN THE SECONDARY SCHOOL
Prerequisite: Successful completion of 351-352 and 055-056 in
the student's major language; passage of a language proficiency
examination or permission of the instructor.

Methods and material for secondary school teaching, current
theories and techniques, and illustrative units are studied. One
period per week spent in study of the use of the language
laboratory.

MAURICE M. ZACUR. CHAIRPERSON: BALLAS, CHAMBERS,
GAULT, HEIDEN, KULKARNI, MILLER, PAYNE, SHIREY, TEPPER,
WEBER, WINSLOW, WOOD

The function and purpose of geography is to prepare the
future citizen to nnake rational judgments in his private and
public life as it relates to the use of natural and cultural
resources. Geography also acts as a meaningful integrator of
the many subject-matter areas taken by the student.

Though geography is listed as social science in Arts and
Sciences curricula, it is of broader scope. Geography includes
physical geography (earth science), cultural geography, eco-
nomic geography, urban and regional planning, or combines
these for a broad understanding of man in his total environ-
ment.

Vocational opportunities in Geography and Regional Plan-
ning are good. Students v\/ill find a wide variety of positions
in government service, marketing, urban and regional plan-
ning, armed forces map services, editorial positions and
business.

Three programs for a major are offered by the department:
(1) the Bachelor of Science in Regional Planning, (2) the
Bachelor of Arts in Geography (Physical, Regional, Urban, or
Cultural-Economic), and (3) the Bachelor of Science in
Education with a major in Social Sciences, concentrating on
Geography. The first two degree programs are under the

School of Arts and Sciences - 113
Geography and Regional Planning

School of Arts and Sciences, and the third is under the
School of Education.

CURRICULA

Bachelors Degree Programs in Geography or
Regional Planning

A student desiring a Bachelors degree may elect either of
two programs: Geography (specializing in Cultural-Economic
Geography, Physical Geography, Urban Geography and Plan-
ning, or Regional Geography); or Regional Planning.
In either case, requirements for the major are 36 credits of
which 15 credits must be taken as follows:

Core Program for Bachelor's Degree (Arts & Sciences)

GE 149 Economic Geography 3 cr.

GE154 Cultural Geography 3 cr.

GE 240 Climatology I 3 cr.

GE 246 Physiography 3 cr.

GE 491 Geography Thought and Philosophy 3 cr.

B. A. Degree in Geography

In addition to the 15 Geography credits required in the Core
Program, 21 more credits must be elected in Geography,
including GE 251 - Geography of United States and
Canada.

It is suggested that the student concentrate his electives as
grouped for a specialization as shown in the section on
Course Descriptions.

B. S. Degree in Regional Planning

This is a professional program for Regional or Urban Plan-
ning employment. In addition to the 15 credits required in
the Bachelors Core Program, 21 more credits are required, as
follows:

GE 479 or 490 Cartography or Map and

Photo Interpretation 3 cr.

GE 455 Introduction to Planning 3 cr.

GE 456 Planning: Basic Studies and

Analysis 3 cr.

GE 457 Planning: Dev. of Principles

and Theory 3 or.

GE 458 Planning: Design 3 cr.

GE 355 Urban Geography 3 cr.

Elective in Geography 3 cr.

GE 355 Urban Geography 3 cr.

Elective in Geography 3 or.

In addition a 21 s.h. Interdisciplinary minor or a 15-21 s.h.

minor in an approved discipline is required. An optional

Internship in Planning for 12 s.h. may be elected with faculty

approval.

B. S. in Education (Geography Concentrate)

Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Science in
Education with a major in Social Sciences, concentrating on
Geography are a minimum of 15 credits in Geography as
follows (department recommends 24 s.h. in the concentra-
tion):

GE 101 World Geography 3 cr.

114 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

GE 149 Economic Geography

3 cr.

GE 355
GE 240

Urban Geography
Climatology
or

3cr.
3cr.

GE455
GE456

GE 246
GE 251

Physiography

Geography of United States

3 cr.

GE457

and Canada

3cr.

Regional Geography Electives
Geography Electives

6cr.
6 or.

GE458

GE 355 or 452

NOTE: GE 101 helps to fulfill the University's General
Education requirement.

Minor in Regional Planning

A minor consists of 15 s.h. course work as follows:

Introduction to Planning 3 cr.

Planning: Basic Studies and

Analysis 3 cr.

Planning: Dev. of Principles

and Theory
Planning: Design

Urban Geography or Conservation
Environmental Analysis
Minors having completed 456, 457, and 458 may apply fo
Internship.

3 cr.
3 cr.

3 cr.

COURSE DESCRIPTIOIMS

Minor in Geography

A minor consists of 15 credits of Geography course work,
including that taken as General Education. Although a
student may elect any combination of the courses listed
below, the Department encourages one of the following
concentrations: (1) Core Program for Arts and Sciences
(suggested for those anticipating graduate work in geog-
raphy); (2) Physical Geography (suggested for Geo-Science
majors); (3) Regional Geography; (4) Cultural-Economic
Geography (suggested for Business, Economics, or Sociology
majors); or (5) Urban Geography and Urban/Regional Plan-
ning (suggested for Sociology, Economics, or Political Sci-
ence majors).

Cultural — Economic Geography

GE 101 WORLD GEOGRAPHY 3 cr.

Understanding and appreciation of man's interrelationship with
the earth, accomplished through study of physical, cultural,
economic, and demographic factors.

GE 149 ECONOMIC GEOGRAPHY 3 cr.

Designed to promote geographic and economic concepts, methods,
and skiHs pertinent to understanding of spatial variation of
production, consumption, and exchange over the earth's surface.

GE 154 CULTURAL GEOGRAPHY 3 cr.

May be taken in lieu of GE 101. Course considers relationship of
various ethnic and cultural groups to natural environment. Student
is acquainted with tools, philosophy, and literature of cultural
geography and related disciplines.

School of Arts and Sciences -115
Geography and Regional Planning

GE 253 GEOGRAPHY AND SOCIETY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: 3 cr. GE.

Designed for elementary and secondary school social science
teachers. Concepts such as: spatial arrangement, areal change,
earth for support of man, urbanization, biophysical relationships
with society, interdependency, the chorological organization of
knowledge.

GE 353 GEOGRAPHIC INFLUENCES IN HISTORY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: 3 cr. GE.

Studies relationships of natural environmental factors to settle-
ment, development, and progress of selected countries — with
major emphasis on United States.

GE 354 TRADE AND TRANSPORTATION 3 cr.

Embraces analysis, theory, and application techniques; treatment
mcludes trade patterns, place theory, statistics and models; circula-
tion, accessibility, time, and distance concepts.

GE 453 POLITICAL GEOGRAPHY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: 6 cr. GE and 6 cr. Social Science or permission.
Considers evolution of nation-state and a systems-analytic view of
geography of international disputes and political geography of
United States.

GE 461 REGIONAL FIELD STUDIES 1-3 cr.

Prerequisite: 12cr. GE.

These trips, which involve the study of a selected area through
agencies of travel and actual investigation, are arranged from time
to time to suit the needs of the student group.

GE 481 SPECIAL TOPICS IN GEOGRAPHY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: 6 cr. GE and 6 cr. Social Science.
Study of contemporary problems: boundary questions, world
trade, world food resources, control and development of natural
resources, settlement population problems, etc. Course will vary In
topics offered.

GE 482-483 INDEPENDENT STUDY 3-6 cr.

Prerequisite: 18 cr. GE and 3 OPA in GE.
Independent research under faculty direction, by application only.

GE 491 GEOGRAPHY THOUGHT AND PHILOSOPHY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: 12 cr. GE.

Seminar, required, limited to junior or senior Geography majors.
Seminar in history of the discipline, great ideas, leading problems,
and unresolved issues.

Physical Geography

GE 153 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY 3 cr.

Introduces natural factors of landscape, weather, climate, soils,
rocks, minerals, structure of earth's crust, oceans; and tools of
geography: globes, maps, aerial photographs.

GE 240 CLIMATOLOGY I 3 cr.

Studies elements of weather and climate, and climatic regions of
earth; understanding and application are underscored in the lab-
oratory. (Spring semester only.)

GE 241 CLIMATOLOGY II 3 cr.

Prerequisite: GE 240 or Meteorology.

Physical aspects of climatology: heat and water budget, climatic
classifications, paleo-climates, regional climates, micro-climates,
climatic change, statistical and mathematical models.

GE 246 PHYSIOGRAPHY 3 cr.

Studies form of earth's crust and its associated water bodies;
classification, distribution, and processes involved in their geomor-
phological development and their effects upon the human land-
scape. (Fall semester only.)

GE 422 AEROSPACE SCIENCE 3 cr.

Treats of atmosphere and space environment; flight problems;
satellites and space probes; manned orbital and space exploration
projects. Problems of teaching and bibliography will be con-
sidered. (Non-majors only). (Summer Pre-Session only.)

116— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

GE 452 CONSERVATION - ENVIRONMENTAL

ANALYSIS 3cr.

Prerequisite: 9 cr. GE.

Conservation of natural and human resources, regional understand-
ing, planning, utilization, evaluation, field work, workshop activi-
ties, projects.

GE479 CARTOGRAPHY 3 cr.

Gives an understanding of the compilation and use of maps and
develops an ability to construct economic and geographic maps. Use
of aerial photographs is treated briefly.

GE 490 MAP AND PHOTO INTERPRETATION 3 cr.

Maps and aerial photographs, along with remote sensing materials,
permit inventory and analysis of geologic, land use, urban develop-
ment, and other landscape phenomena. The understanding of these
materials and associated tools for their use is presented.

GE 494 FIELD TECHNIOUES IN GEOGRAPHY 1-3 cr.

Prerequisite: 12 cr. GE or permission.

Proposes to give experience in study of land utilization and use of
geographic tools and techniques of the field.

Urban Geography and Planning

GE 355 URBAN GEOGRAPHY 3 cr.

Introduces student to basic principles of urban geography. Con-
cepts of site, situation, location, function, urban land use, central
place theory, urban structure, and urban hierarchy introduced.
Relationships between urban geography and urban planning
emphasized.

GE455 INTRODUCTION TO PLANNING 3 cr.

Prerequisite: 1 2 cr. GE and/or Soc Sci or permission.
Examines four phases involved in preparation of a community plan.
Items such as land use, natural resources, topography, soils, geology,
climate and drainage are utilized in a general comprehensive plan.

GE 456 PLANNING: BASIC STUDIES AND ANALYSIS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: GE 455

Research, analytical design, and plan making techniques in urban
regional planning; examines basic items necessary to prepare urban
and regional comprehensive plans.

GE457 PLANNING: DEV. OF PRINCIPLES & THEORY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: GE 455

Examines process of city planning during ancient, medieval, and
Renaissance periods. Reviews early planning in America, as well as
present planning.

GE 458 PLANNING: DESIGN 3 cr.

Prerequisite: GE 455

Offers student an opportunity to work on various concepts of city
and subdivision design, utilizing effects of topography, natural
resources and other physical elements upon urban design.

GE 499 REGIONAL PLANNING INTERNSHIP 12 cr.

Prerequisites: 90 s.h. including at least three of the following: GE
455, 456, 457, or 458: or permission. Approval of Internship
Screening Committee.
The internship provides practical experience in a planning agency.

Regional Geography (No Prerequisites Required)

GE 251 GEOGRAPHY OF UNITED STATES 3 cr.

AND CANADA
Investigation of man's adjustment to his environment as influ-
enced by physical factors of climate, vegetation, relief soils, and
natural resources, as well as recognition of cultural factors.

GE 252 GEOGRAPHY OF PENNSYLVANIA 2 cr.

Studies internal and external relationships to gain insight into
various regions of the state and Pennsylvania's world relationships.

GE 256 GEOGRAPHY OF EUROPE 3 cr.

Investigates relationships underlying land use, dominant interna-

School of Arts and Sciences -117
Geography and Regional Planning

tional problems, boundary disputes and regional complexes of
European continent.

GE 257 GEOGRAPHY OF U.S.S.R. 3 cr.

Special emphasis upon major geographic regions of the Soviet
Union; natural resources, cultural patterns, population — both
numbers and distribution, strategic areas and related geopolitical
problems studied.

GE 261 GEOGRAPHY OF EAST ASIA 3 cr.

Studies Korea, Manchuria, Outer Mongolia, Japan, and China, as
well as geographic background for planning solutions for raising
standards of living, for wise use and restoration of natural
resources, and industrialization.

GE 262 GEOGRAPHY OF SOUTH AND 3 cr.

SOUTHEAST ASIA
Studies India, Pakistan, Indochina, Ceylon, Burma, Thailand, and
Indonesia with special attention to regional similarities and differ-
ences, particularly as they pertain to human adjustment.

GE 263 GEOGRAPHY OF NORTH AFRICA 3 cr.

AND SOUTHWEST ASIA
Study of Sahara Desert, Turko-Arabian peninsulas and Afghani-
stan, emphasizing the critical problems of water supply, land use,
over-population, industrialization, resources and relationships of
these countries to other countries.

GE 271 GEOGRAPHY OF SOUTH AMERICA 3 cr.

Studies South America, with special emphasis on regional differ-
ences and similarities; stresses foreign relations, especially with the
United States. The unique problems of South America, with
special attention to tropical land use, are considered.

GE 281 GEOGRAPHY OF AFRICA, 3 cr.

SOUTH OF SAHARA
A systematic study of the physical, cultural, and historical geogra-
phy, followed by studies of major regions and nations of Africa,
emphasizing political, cultural, and economic factors in the devel-
opment of that continent.

Education

ED 455 TEACHING OF SOCIAL SCIENCE IN 3 cr.

SECONDARY SCHOOLS
Study of modern methods and techniques for teaching Social
Science and of current curricula in Social Science.

118— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

GEOSCIENCE DEPARTMENT

WALTER H. GRANATA, JR., CHAIRPERSON: CLARK, HALL,
PARK, PRINCE, C. SUTTON

The Geoscience Department provides curricula in areas of
natural science dealing with and related to the earth and its
environment by offering courses in astronomy, geology,
meteorology, and oceanography.

In addition to on-campus instruction, opportunities exist for
summer course work and research in geology and oceanogra-
phy at the Marine Science Consortium located at Lewes.
Delaware, and Wallops Island, Virginia. (See pages 130—131.)
Marine Science courses are described on pages 130—131.

Degrees offered by the Geoscience Department are the
Bachelor of Science in Geology, the Bachelor of Science in
Geoscience, and the Bachelor of Science in Education with a
major in Earth and Space Science or with a major in General
Science. The first three degree programs are under the School
of Arts and Sciences, and the last two are under the School of
Education.

The Department also will act in an advisory capacity for
students enrolled in the proposed B.S. in Natural Science with
concentrations in either Astronomy or Meteorology-
Oceanography. These degree programs are designed to prepare
students for graduate work in the aforementioned disciplines.

CURRICULA

The B.S. degree in Geology is, in a sense, a dual purpose degree
program. Not only is it designed to graduate well trained,
competent geologists, able to compete for positions as
professional geologists in the job market; but it is also designed
so as to provide the student with the necessary allied science
and math background to enable the good student to qualify
for admission to the Graduate School of his choice in Geology.

The B.S. degree in Geoscience offers the student a broad-based
science background. In addition to the 38 hours of Geoscience
(Astronomy, Geology, Meteorology, Oceanography) the stu-
dent will also acquire a strong background in Math and the
Allied Sciences of Chemistry, Biology and Physics. The
student who earns the B.S. degree in Geoscience may
anticipate career openings in government or private industry in
those expanding fields directly associated with environmental
studies. The B.S. in Geoscience will also prepare the student
for admission to graduate study, should he choose to pursue
his academic preparation beyond the undergraduate level.

The department recognizes as one of its functions the role of
serving the field of public education by the preparation of
qualified and certified teachers of earth and space science.
Also, because of the interdisciplinary nature of both the
department and the requirements for preparing general sci-
ence teachers, the department administers the program
designed to lead to general science certification and includes
majors of that category as department members.

School of Arts and Sciences — 1 19
Geoscience

Minor in Geology

The minor in geology consists of 15 semester hours of
geology. General Geology I and II are required. The remain-
ing 7 hours of geology may be selected by the student. It is
recognized that the anthropology student minoring in geol-
ogy would benefit from courses differing in content from
those benefiting students who, for example, are majoring in
Urban Planning. The department staff members will be
happy to consult with students concerning their special
needs.

Minor in Geoscience

The requirement for the minor in Geoscience will be 16 credit
hours of geoscience, taken within the following framework.
Student must complete one course in each discipline within
the department; Astronomy 3 credits; Geology 4 credits;
Meteorology 3 credits; Oceanography 3 credits, for a total of
13 credits. The additional 3 credits can be taken in any one of
the aforementioned disciplines. It is further stipulated that
neither the non-major General Astronomy or the Geology of
Pennsylvania courses will be acceptable toward the minor in
Geoscience.

DEGREE PROGRAMS

B.S. in Geology

The departmental requirements for the Degree of Bachelor of

Science in Geology are as follows:

Geology 35 cr.*

Geoscience 3 cr.

Math

Chemistry
Physics
Electives

7-8 cr.

8cr.

Bar.

24-25 cr.

■ I ncludes a summer field course of 5 cr.
Detailed program description available in Geoscience Department

B.S. in Geoscience

The departmental requirements for the degree of Bachelor of
Science in Geoscience are as follows:

Geoscience

(Selected under advisor's supervision)

38 cr.

Math

7-9 cr.

Biology

12-14 cr.

Chemistry

8cr.

Physics

8cr.

Electives

9-1 3 cr.

Detailed program description available in Geoscience Department

B. S. in Education (Earth and Space Science Major)

The departmental requirements for the degree of Bachelor of
Science in Education with a major in Earth and Space
Science are as follows, including 33 credits in Geoscience:

Astronomy 7 cr.

Geology 14 cr.

Meteorology 6 cr.

Oceanography 6 cr.

Math 4 cr.

120 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Biology 4 cr.

Chemistry 8 cr.

Physics 4 cr.

Detailed program description available in Geoscience Department

B. S. in Education (General Science Major)

A major in another science department may be certified in
General Science if his program includes, or is supplemented
with, the prescribed credits, as follows and 13 credits in
Geoscience:

Astronomy

Geology

Geoscience Field course

Meteorology

Math

Biology

Chemistry

Physics

Science Elective

3 cr.
3-4 cr.
3-4 cr.

3 cr.

4 cr.
8 cr.
8 cr.
8 cr.
3 cr.

Detailed program description available in Geoscience Department

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

GS110 GENERAL ASTRONOMY 3 cr.

Specifically designed to introduce students to discipline of astron-
omy; emphasis placed on study of planets, space program, constel-
lations, and Milky Way. Two hours lecture, one laboratory session

or night observation per week. No science or math majors except
those completing general science certification requirements.

GS 120 GEOLOGY OF PENNSYLVANIA 3 cr.

A general course dealing with basic geologic principles, using
various geologic provinces and features of Pennsylvania as exam-
ples. For non-majors only. Two hours lecture, 3 hours lab per
week.

GS 121 GENERAL GEOLOGY I 3 cr.

Introduction to science of earth, properties and processes of
earth's interior and crust and their interaction with surface
processes to shape and modify man's physical environment. Three
hours lecture per week.

GS 122 GENERAL GEOLOGY II 3cr.

Prerequisite: GS 121 or permission of instructor.
Introduction to history of earth, its physical changes and sequences
of configuration, and record of biological evolution. Three hours of
lecture per week,

GS 131 GENERAL GEOLOGY I LABORATORY 1 cr.

Should be taken concurrently but may follow GS 121.
Identification of common minerals and rocks; introduction to
topographic and geologic maps, to land forms, and to geologic
structures. Three hours lab per week, including field trips.

GS 132 GENERAL GEOLOGY II LABORATORY 1 cr.

Should be taken concurrently but may follow GS 122.
Selected problems in geologic map interpretation, paleontology,
and stratigraphic rock sequences. Three hours lab per week,
including field trips.

GS213 NAVIGATION 3 cr.

Thorough grounding in meanings of terms used in navigation, in
purposes and use of navigational instruments and publications and
in theory and general methods of piloting, dead reckoning and

School of Arts and Sciences
Geoscience

electronic and celestial navigation. Two hours lecture, 2 hours lab
per week.

GS 321 MINERALOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: GS 121 or Chem 111.

Concerned with properties of minerals; introduction to crystal-
lography and chemistry of crystals, followed by a determination
of minerals and their probable genesis. Two hours lecture, 3 hours
lab per week.

GS 322 PETROLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: GS 321.

Concerned with a description of rock character based upon
mineral components and physical relationship between mineral
components of a rock. Two hours lecture, 3 hours lab per week.

GS 324 GLACIAL GEOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisites; GS 121 and GS 122.

Study of origin and development of all features resulting from
action of glaciers. Two hours lecture and a laboratory or field trip
per week.

GS325 STRUCTURAL AND FIELD GEOLOGY I 3 cr.

Prerequisite: GS 122 or permission of instructor.
Analysis of deformation structures such as folds, joints, faults,
foliation and lineation. Includes lab and field work with geologic
maps, cross sections, Brunton compass, stereographic projections,
and field reports on structures observed In the region. Two hours
lecture, 3 hours lab per week, and field trips.

GS326 STRUCTURAL AND FIELD GEOLOGY II 3 cr.

Prerequisite: GS 325.

Techniques of geologic field work Including work with Brunton
compass, aerial photographs, plane table and alidade, drafting, and
rock color charts. Includes a field project involving compilation of
measured and described stratigraphic sections, a geologic map, cross
sections, and field report. Two hours lecture, 3 hours lab per week,
and field trips.

GS 327 GEOMORPHOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: GS 121 and GS 122.

A study of the origin of the earth's land forms, including
relationship of geologic structure to landform types and role of
geomorphic processes in landscape development. Two hours lec-
ture, 3 hours lab per week.

GS 330 PALEONTOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisite; GS 122 or permission of instructor.
Study of the morphology, evolution, geologic significance and
paleoecology of invertebrate fossils. Two hours lecture, 3 hours
lab per week.

GS 335 ECONOMIC GEOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: GS 321 .

Deals with location and probable origin of fossil fuels, ores of the
non-metals, and metallic ores, both ferrous and nonferrous. Two
hours lecture, 3 hours lab per week.

GS 341 SOLAR SYSTEM Set.

Prerequisite: Math 013 and Phys. 111.

Fundamentals of astronomy, with emphasis on observational
methods, mechanics and origin of the solar system, and spatial
relationship of the solar system to the other members of universe.
Two hours lecture, 3 hours lab or night observation per week.

GS 342 STELLAR ASTRONOMY 3 cr.

Prerequisite; Math 013 and Phys. 111.

Fundamentals of astronomy, with emphasis on sun, stars, galaxies.
the sidereal universe and use of spectroscopy for gathering astro-
nomical data. Two hours lecture. 3 hours lab or night observation
per week.

GS 350 OPERATION OF THE PLANETARIUM 1 cr.

Prerequisite; GS 341 and GS 342 or permission of instructor.
Designed to acquaint the student with methods of operation and
repair of a Spitz A-3-P planetarium. Content includes topics

722 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

suitable for lectures to various age groups. Student will write and
present a demonstration lesson.

GS 361 OCEANOGRAPHY I 3 cr.

Prerequisite: Physics I and Calculus I or permission of instructor.
Introduction to physical, chemical, geological and biological
nature of ocean; topography, submarine geology and bottom
deposits. Two hours lecture, 3 hours lab per week.

GS 362 OCEANOGRAPHY II 3 cr.

Prerequisite: GS 361.

A continuation of Oceanography I. Emphasis upon marine geol-
ogy, coastal geomorphology, and structure and sedimentary envi-
ronments of the continental shelf, slope and ocean basin.

GS 371 METEOROLOGY I 3 cr.

Prerequisite: One year of Physical Science or Physics.
Introduction to meteorological sciences; composition and structure
of the atmosphere; radiation principles; elementary thermody-
namics and heat balance. Two hours lecture, 3 hours lab per
week.

GS 372 METEOROLOGY II 3 cr.

Prerequisite: GS 371 or permission of instructor.
Introduction to physical, dynamical and theoretical meteorology.
Two hours lecture and 3 hours lab per week.

GS411 SEDIMENTOLOGY AND STRATIGRAPHY I 3 cr.

Prerequisite: GS 321 or permission of instructor.
Study of sedimentary processes and of origin, interpretation, and
identification of sedimentary rocks utilizing sieve analysis, hand
lens, and petrographic microscope. Two hours lecture, 3 hours lab
per week, and field trips.

GS412 SEDIMENTOLOGY AND STRATIGRAPHY II 3 cr.

Prerequisite: GS 421 or permission of instructor.

Principles and processes involved in development and description

of stratified rock sequences, principles and problems of correla-
tion, and selected stratigraphic problems. Two hours lecture, 3
hours lab per week, and field trips.

GS 461 FIELD TECHNIQUE IN GEOSCIENCE 3 cr.

Instruction in methods employed in the field to obtain and
interpret geologic information. Two hours lecture, 3 hours lab per
week.

GS 480 GEOSCIENCE SEMINAR 1 cr.

For seniors majoring in some aspect of geoscience. The seminar:
(1) provides student opportunity to prepare, formally present, and
defend a scientific paper based either on his own research or on a
topic chosen by him with the approval of instructor, (2) provides
opportunity to discuss topics presented by other students, faculty,
or guests.

GS 481 SPECIAL TOPICS 1-3 cr.

Prerequisite: Permission of instructor.

It is the department's intention to use this course to schedule
extended field trips and for teaching special courses which will
utilize the specialities of the geoscience faculty.

GS482 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-3 cr.

Independent study provides the student with an opportunity to use
library, laboratory or field research in an area which is of interest to
him under the supervision of a designated faculty member.

NOTE: See Marine Science Consortium section for additional course
listings.

HISTORY DEPARTMENT

School of Arts and Sciences - 123
History

GEORGE T. WILEY, CHAIRPERSON: CASHDOLLAR, CORD,
FERGUSON, FRICKE, GOODRICH, HATFIELD, KADLUBOWSKI,
KLEIN, LANDON, LEHMAN, MARCUS, MASTRO, MILLER,
MOORE, OLIVER, RIFE, SMITH, VOGEL, YACKUBOSKEY.

Programs in history are designed to give both those who
major in history in the School of Arts and Sciences, and
those who concentrate in history in the School of Education
an opportunity to study in some depth the past story of
man and his world. Degrees offered by the History Depart-
ment are the Bachelor of Arts in History and the Bachelor
of Science in Education with a major in Social Studies,
concentrating in history. The first program is under the
School of Arts and Sciences, and the second is under the
School of Education.

The history student will find that his program is excellent
preparation for government service, for pre-law training, for
broad business opportunities, for work in varied fields of
journalism, for archival positions, and for teaching. Not only
the story of the people of the United States, but also that of
other peoples is covered, in the belief that historical under-
standing is essential for the future of mankind.

CURRICULA

Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Arts in History
are 30 credits in history. Requirements for the degree of
Bachelor of Science in Education with a major in Social
Studies, concentrating on history, are a minimum of 15

credits in history within the 42 hours required for social
science certification. The requirement for a minor in history
is 15 credits. For all history programs, courses in history in
General Education are applicable. Although there are no
prerequisites to history courses, all programs should be
planned with an advisor. Every major and concentrate in
history will be advised by History Department staff members.

Admission to History 482 and 483, initiation in the local
chapters of Phi Alpha Theta and Pi Gamma Mu, participation
in study tours and study-abroad programs and other activities
should be investigated by every history student. The depart-
ment is committed to the idea of a broad education.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

HI 101 HISTORY OF CIVILIZATION I 3 cr.

Survey course, presenting in various forms origin and development
of Western man's major political, social, economic, religious, and
mtellectual institutions to approximately 1600 A. D.

HI 102 HISTORY OF CIVILIZATION II 3 cr.

Survey of man's development from 1600 A.D. to present, in which
^ economic, political, social, and intellectual trends are discussed in a
basic presentation, the student then selects a topic of personal
preference from a variety of preparations offered by individual
professors.

HI 103 HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES 3 cr.

AND PENNSYLVANIA I
Survey of American history from colonization to 1865, with
attention to Pennsylvania, colonial foundations, emergence of
Federal Union, political and social reform, and controversy over
sectionalism and slavery.

124 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

HI 104 HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES 3 ci.

AND PENNSYLVANIA II
Survey of history of the United States and Pennsylvania since
1865, with emphasis on major economic, political, and social
trends and development of American culture. Also considered is
role of America in world affairs.

HI 200 INTRODUCTION TO HISTORY 3 cr.

For history majors and concentrates. Topics include philosophy of
history, important schools of history and historians, and methods of
historical research. Student is encouraged to become a better
historian and to identify with historical profession.

HI 301 HISTORY OF GREECE 3 cr.

Will analyze major political, social, and economic developments in
ancient Greek civilization from Bronze Age to death of Alexander.

HI 302 HISTORY OF ROME 3 cr.

Will trace Roman history from early Republic down to fall of
Empire. Roman political theory will be particularly emphasized.

HI 303 MEDIEVAL EUROPE 1,400-1000 3 cr.

History of early Medieval Europe, from decline of Rome to
beginnings of High Middle Ages; emphasis on political, social,
economic, religious, and intellectual developments.

HI 304 MEDIEVAL EUROPE II, 1000-1300 3 cr.

History of late Medieval Europe, from High Middle Ages to
Renaissance period: emphasis on political, social, economic, reli-
gious, and intellectual developments.

HI 305 RENAISSANCE AND REFORMATION 3 cr.

History of Europe from c. 1250; rise of commercial city. Kings, and
pressures on Christian Church to 1600. Some consideration of
technology and voyages.

HI 306 EARLY MODERN EUROPE 3 cr.

Greatness of France under Louis XIV; Sweden; Thirty Years' War.
Emergence of modern society; French Revolution.

HI 307 HISTORY OF EUROPE: 1815-1914 3 cr.

Study of Europe in 19th century, with emphasis on the emergence
of major thought patterns. Romanticism, Nationalism, Socialism,
and Positivism.

HI 308 TWENTIETH CENTURY EUROPE 3 cr.

Political, economic, and diplomatic trends in Europe since 1900,
with major emphasis on causes and results of war, and search for
security.

HI 320 HISTORY OF ENGLAND TO 1688 3 cr.

Survey of growth of English nation, with emphasis on political,
social, and economic developments leading to 17th century conflict
between Crown and Parliament.

HI 321 HISTORY OF ENGLAND, 1688 to PRESENT 3 cr.

Survey of growth of England as a democratic constitutional
monarchy. Attention directed to industrial revolution, and to
imperial expansion and England's role in 20th century world.
Attention given to social and cultural history.

HI 322 FRENCH REVOLUTION AND NAPOLEON 3 cr.

Brief sketch of Old Regime, concentration on Revolution, and
Empire, with emphasis on politics, social structure, diplomacy, and
economics.

HI 323 MODERN FRANCE 3 cr.

Investigation of political, cultural, economic, and social develop-
ments since 1815. Discussions and readings.

HI 324 HISTORY OF GERMANY TO 1848 3 cr.

Study of evolution of German nation from its prehistoric origins,
emphasizing medieval and early modern phases, to 1848.

HI 325 HISTORY OF GERMANY: 1849-1970 3 cr.

Study of development of modern Germany from Revolution of
1848, including imperial republican and totalitarian phases, to
post-War formation of East and West Germany.

HI 326 HISTORY OF RUSSIA 3 cr.

General survey of Russian history, culture, and institutions. Special

School of Arts and Sciences -125
History

consideration given to study of historical forces formative of
Revolution of 1917.

HI 327 HISTORY OF SOVIET RUSSIA 3 or.

General survey of contemporary Soviet history, culture, and
institutions. Special consideration given to study of communist
theory and its place in current Russian historiography.

HI 340 COLONIAL AMERICA 3 cr.

Survey of original thirteen states from their inception as colonies
within British empire to 1763, the eve of independence. Attention
given to their political development; economic position within
empire; relations with Indians; and evolution of social, educational
and religious life.

HI 341 AMERICAN REVOLUTION 3 cr.

An examination of Whig-Tory participants of American Revolution.
Examines events from 1763 to 1783. Changing interpretations of
the courses and effects of the revolution will be discussed.

HI 342 JEFFERSON-JACKSON ERAS, 1783-1850 3 cr.

Survey of United States history from 1783 to 1850, with special
attention on constitutional, political, economic, and social trends.

HI 343 CIVIL WAR AND RECONSTRUCTION 3 cr.

Study of failure of American democracy to cope with issues of mid-
nineteenth century, followed by political, economic, military, and so-
cial developments during War and reconciliation of North and South.

HI 344 HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES,

1876-1900 3cr.

Stresses reaction of various segments of heterogeneous population
to rapid industrialization, urbanization, and corporatization of
American life and emergence of U.S. as a world power; special
attention to formation of new institutions.

HI 345 HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES

1900-1929 3cr.

Emphasis on political, social, economic, and diplomatic develop-
ments in American history between 1900 and 1929.

HI 346 CONTEMPORARY UNITED STATES HISTORY 3 cr.

Study of political, economic, and cultural changes in American life
since 1929; examines roots of social problems facing us today. Some
recent foreign policy trends also studied.

HI 350 HISTORY OF LATIN AMERICA:

COLONIAL PERIOD, 1450-1820 3 cr.

Study of life of people, Indian cultures, conquest by Spaniards and
Portuguese, government during Colonial Period, and Wars of
Independence.

HI 351 HISTORY OF LATIN AMERICA:

NATIONAL PERIOD, 1820-PRESENT 3 cr.

Study of history of nations which have emerged since independence;
emphasis on economic, political, cultural, and social developments
of these nations, as well as relationships of these nations to others in
the Hemisphere.

HI 360 HISTORY OF PENNSYLVANIA 3 cr.

Emphasizes the cultural, economic, political, and social develop-
ment of our state in its various periods from colonial to today.
Special attention given to diversity of Pennsylvania's people, their
institutions, and problems.

HI 361 HISTORY OF AMERICAN FOREIGN

RELATIONS, 1775-1900 3 cr.

Traces Foreign Relations of United States from Independence to
emergence as a world power. Topics concentrate on themes of
commercial relations, political isolation, expansion, and debate over
imperialism.

HI 362 HISTORY OF AMERICAN FOREIGN

RELATIONS, 1900-PRESENT 3 cr.

Treats primarily our 20th century involvement in world affairs and
domestic debate over that involvement. Special emphases will be
placed on role of interest groups and increasing power of Executive
Department over Foreign Affairs.

725 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

HI 363 SOCIAL AND INTELLECTUAL HISTORY

OF THE UNITED STATES TO 1875 3 cr.

Selected topics in early American intellectual and cultural growth,
with emphasis on Puritanism, Enlightenment, cultural nationalism,
and Romantic Movement.

HI 364 SOCIAL AND INTELLECTUAL HISTORY

OF THE UNITED STATES SINCE 1875 3 cr.

Selected treatment of historical development of modern American
movements in social and political thought, religion, philosophy, fine
arts, and literature.

HI 365 HISTORY OF BLACK AMERICA

SINCE EMANCIPATION 3 cr.

Description and analysis of role of blacks in history of United States
since the Civil War; emphasis on key leaders, major organizations,
leading movements and crucial ideologies of blacks in modern
America.

HI 366 AMERICAN LABOR MOVEMENT 3 cr.

Investigation of growth of American labor movement from 19th
century to present; emphasis on role of Knights of Labor, American
Federation of Labor, Industrial Workers of the world and Congress
of Industrial Organizations. Study of working class in its working
and living settings.

HI 367 ECONOMIC HISTORY OF THE

UNITED STATES 3 cr.

Historical development of economic institutions in American life
since Independence: emphasis on farming, labor, transportation,
banking and manufacturing.

HI 368 U.S. URBAN HISTORY 3 cr.

A survey of American cities from their beginnings to present
emphasizing relationship of urban history to social science theory,
and stages and process of city development.

HI 380 HISTORY OF THE ISLAMIC CIVILIZATION 3 cr.

An approach to learning about a non-Western culture: Muhammad,

Arabs, Muslims as creators of a great civilization from rise of Islam
to 1800; emphasis on cultural institutions of Islam and their
inter-relationships within Middle East.

HI 381 HISTORY OF THE MODERN MIDDLE EAST 3 cr.

Survey of changes that have taken place in Middle East and in Islam
since eighteenth century and of contemporary problems in that
region.

HI 382 HISTORY OF THE FAR EAST 3 cr.

History of China and Japan from ancient times. Buddhism, medieval
Japan; Chinese Communism, industrialization. Some consideration
of peripheral Asia from 1500.

HI 390 HISTORY OF WOMEN-WORLD CULTURES 3 cr.

Explores religious, legal, political, and mythic dimensions of women
in society from ancient to modern times, including Eastern, Western
and American experiences.

HI 391 FILM AS HISTORY 3 cr.

Particularly concerned with probing relationship between cinema
and society. History of film is explored and student is given some
background in film interpretation and cinematography, the western,
science fiction, police films, and great foreign and American
detective films.

HI 481 SPECIAL STUDIES IN HISTORY 3-9 cr.

Each semester six to ten courses are offered in interest areas that are
not part of the regular program. For example. Film as History, the
American Jew, Fighting the Great Wars, History of Baseball, the
Car, and the Christian Perspective have been offered as special
studies. Students may schedule as many of these courses as desired,
but two per semester is the usual limit.

HI 482 INDEPENDENT STUDY 3-6 cr.

Involves directed reading or research for qualified students. We
encourage experimental projects and personalized learning. Honors
sections are provided for qualified students. Prerequisites: 12 credits
in history: a 3.0 history average: permission of a faculty member.

School of Arts and Sciences
International Studies

INTERNATIONAL STUDIES

HI 483 INDEPENDENT STUDY 3 cr.

An honors program within the independent study format. Minimum
qualifications are a 3.0 Q.P.A., 15 credits of history, and a 3.2
average in history classes. Satisfactory honors work is rewarded by
formal recognition at graduation.

Degree programs in International Studies are offered in both
the School of Arts and Sciences (Bachelor of Arts) and the
School of Education (Bachelor of Science in Education).
Both degrees are interdisciplinary and, consequently, draw
upon the faculty and course offerings of many other depart-
ments. The course selection is broad enough to prepare the
student for any one of a great variety of career opportu-
nities. The Bachelor of Arts program is designed for the
specialist who is interested in a professional career, the
Bachelor of Science in Education program for majors in
Social Sciences is designed to certify the graduate to teach
world cultures or any of the social sciences in the public
schools.

CURRICULA

B. A. Program

Beyond the General Education courses required of all stu-
dents in the University, the requirements for the degree of
Bachelor of Arts in International Studies are as follows:

1. The student must build an interdisciplinary sequence of
15 hours taking an introductory or comparative interna-
tional course from each of five social science disciplines.
This selection depends upon the goal of the major and
should be determined in consultation with his advisor
and/or the Director of the Center for International
Studies.

2. The student should complete a specialization sequence in

128 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

the economic and political systems of another culture
which must include a study of language, literature,
history and geography of that region. This specialization
sequence must include at least 15 semester hours. Cur-
rently, three specializations are offered: Soviet Studies,
The Far East, and Latin America. However, students
interested in Africa or the Middle or Near East may
elect interdisciplinary courses focusing on the developing
nations. It is also possible to build a program centering
on the Atlantic Community of Nations.

Specialization must include work in at least three disciplines.
The student is expected to have completed the intermediate
language sequence of the appropriate language in the General
Education requirements, so that no credit towards specializa-
tion is given for language courses numbered below the 300
level.

Minor in International Studies

A minor in International Studies consists of meeting the
requirements listed under (1) above. The curriculum of the
Center for International Studies is flexible enough that the
student can plan a program to match his interests.

B. S. in Education (International Studies
Concentrate)

A concentration in International Studies will supplement the
student's required courses and leads to Certification in the
social science fields for teaching positions in the state of
Pennsylvania.

LINGUISTICS MINOR INTERDISCIPLINARY
PROGRAM (In process of approval at this time)

Interdisciplinary Linguistics Board: SHARON MONTGOMERY (Phil-
osophy: Chn.), ANDERSON (English; At-large), BORMANN (Special
Education - Speech & Hearing), HUDSON (Humanities), ISAR (Ro-
mance & Classical Languages), OLIN'FAHLE (Sociology-Anthropology),
MAGEE (Psychology), STERNGLASS (English), TOMPKINS (Com-
puter Science), WILLIAMS (German and Russian).

Linguistics is a social science, concerned with an aspect of
human behavior that has traditionally set man apart from the
lower animals — our use of an intricate system of speech sounds
to communicate with our peers and our use of written symbols
to transmit our accumulated knowledge to our descendents.
Language has always been regarded as peculiarly human, but
even this belief is being questioned by those conducting
contemporary experiments on the language capabilities of
monkeys. The problems of modern linguistics are of concern
to many diverse fields, including anthropology, sociology,
psychology, philosophy, and speech and hearing. Linguistics
has always had a close relationship with literature and foreign
language learning. Developments in other areas have had their
impact on linguistics. Formal models of language and its
structures are a part of computer science. This Interdiscipli-
nary Linguistics Minor is intended to offer to students the
opportunity to acquaint themselves with modern linguistics
from a variety of perspectives.

The Interdisciplinary Linguistics Minor consists of 18 credits
chosen from the list of options below, selected from at least
three participating departments, and including no more than 6
credits from the student's major department. Any one of the
following courses is strongly recommended as an initial
program course: AN 233, EN 330, FL421,or SH 302.

School of Arts and Sciences - 129
Linguistics Minor Interdisciplinary Program

The program is academically supervised by an Interdisciplinary
Linguistics Board consisting of the Associate Dean of Human-
ities, an at-large complement, and one representative from
each of the following departments: Computer Science,
English, German and Russian Languages, Philosophy, Psychol-
ogy, Romance and Classical Languages, Sociology-
Anthropology, and the Speech and Hearing section of the
Special Education Department. Board members serve as
Interdisciplinary Linguistics advisors.

Some of the courses listed below in the program have
prerequisites; these must be satisfied as prescribed by the
department offering the course.

Program Courses

AN 233
CO 220
CO 340
CO 460
EN 230
EN 330
EN 331
EN 332
EN 333
FL 421
fl 351-352

FR 461
PH 221

Cultural Symbolism I: Language in Culture

Applied Computer Programming Languages

Data Structures and Non-Numeric Programming

Theory of Computation

History of the English Language

The Structure of English

Trends in Linguistics

Dialects in American English

Psycholinguistics (Also PC 333)

Language and Society

Advanced Language I — II, where "fl" Is FR, LA,

SP, GM, or RU (French, Latin, Spanish, German,

or Russian).

Structures of French & English

Logic I

PH 300 Philosophy of Language

PH 321 Logic II

PC 333 Psycholinguistics (also EN 333)

SH 302 Language Development

SH 430 Language Disorders

NOTE: Specific offerings of Special Topics or other courses in
the 480 series offered by participating departments may be
approved by the Board for inclusion in the minor. Consult
Board members for current information.

130 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

MARINE SCIENCE CONSORTIUM

J. G. HUMPHREYS AND PAUL PRINCE
MARINE SCIENCE CONSORTIUM.

lUP Dl RECTORS TO THE

The following course listings are offered through the Marine
Science Consortium which operates during the summer at
the NASA-Wallops Island Station, Virginia. See page 65 for
additional information.

All courses include lecture and field work and meet for
morning and afternoon sessions on Monday through Friday.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

Ml 110 INTRODUCTION TO OCEANOGRAPHY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: None.

Introduction to physical, chemical, biological and geological
aspects of oceans and methods and techniques of oceanography.
Lab emphasis placed on at-sea assignments.

Ml 211 FIELD METHODS IN OCEANOGRAPHY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: Ml 110 or consent of instructor.
Familiarization with dynamic marine environment involving use
and application of oceanographic instruments and sampling
devices.

Ml 212 NAVIGATION 3 cr.

Prerequisite: Four years high school math or equivalent or consent
of the instructor.

Covers navigation, i.e., the art and science of safely bringing a vessel
from one position to another in a body of water. Course divided
Into: (1) brief historical background: (2) navigation within sight of
land, i.e. piloting; (3) navigation in the open sea, including
electronic navigation methods.

Ml 221 MARINE INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: One year biology or consent of instructor.
Study of marine invertebrates with emphasis on development,
reproduction, structure, function, and classification of selected
marine organisms.

Ml 241 MARINE BIOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: Botany and zoology or consent of instructor.
Study of plant and animal life in marine environment with
emphasis placed upon physical and chemical factors affecting
biota.

Ml 250 MANAGEMENT OF WETLAND WILDLIFE 3 cr.

Prerequisite: None.

The ecology and management of wetland wildlife, particularly of
freshwater marshes and saltwater marshes. Special emphasis on
ecosystem approach.

Ml 260 MARINE ECOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: One year of biology or consent of instructor.
A course in ecology of marine organisms.

Ml 270 SCUBA DIVING non credit or 3 cr.

Prerequisites: Swimming ability and good health. (A standard
diving physical form will be mailed to students electing the
course.)

Students who complete course will receive a National Association
of Underwater Instructors Diver Certification.

Ml 280 MARINE FIELD BIOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: None.

An introduction to basic principles of ecology and natural history of
selected plants and animals in terrestrial, freshwater, and marine
environments. Suitable for non-science majors.

Ml 331 CHEMICAL OCEANOGRAPHY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: Ml 1 10 and one year of chemistry.
Treatment of oceanic chemical phenomena by sampling and
laboratory analysis techniques.

School of Arts and Sciences
Marine Science Consortium

Ml 342 MARINE BOTANY 3 cr.

Prerequisites; One year of biology or one semester of botany.
In-the-field studies and laboratory analysis by instrumentation of
marine and marine fringe plants of the Middle Atlantic Coast as
exemplified by those found in the Cape Henlopen, Delaware, and
Wallops Island, Virginia, areas.

Ml 343 MARINE ICHTHYOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: General Biology and/or consent of the instructor.
A study of fishes. Specimens collected along Eastern Seaboard by
students will be used to illustrate anatomy, physiology and
systematics of this major vertebrate group. Field collections will give
student opportunity to observe relationships of these animals to
biotic and physical environment.

Ml 344 ANATOMY OF MARINE CHORDATES 3 cr.

Prerequisites: Six hours of biology including general Zoology.
Designed to familiarize students with various aspects of marine
chordates.

Ml 345 MARINE ORNITHOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: One year of Biology, or consent of the instructor.
Introduces student to avain fauna of seacoast and enables compari-
son with inland species. In addition to field work providing visual
and vocal identification, lecture material will include information on
distribution, behavior, physiology, and anatomy of birds.

Ml 362 MARINE GEOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: Ml 110 and physical geology or consent of instruc-
tor.

Studies of structural and sedimentary environments of continental
shelf, slopes, and ocean basins and crustal structure of earth and
its relation to sedimentary record and geologic history of oceans.

Ml 364 PHYSICAL OCEANOGRAPHY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: Ml 1 10, one year of physics, one semester of calculus
and permission of the instructor.

Course includes consideration of physical properties, mass and
energy budgets, theory of distribution of variables: cause, nature.

measurement, analysis and prediction of tides, currents and waves;
and basic instrumentation in the field.

Ml 420 MARINE MICROPALEONTOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: One year of geology and biology or consent of
instructor.

Deals with modern, living representatives of microorganisms
important in fossil record with particular emphasis placed on
taxonomy, morphology, evolution and ecologic affinities of repre-
sentative groups.

Ml 431 ECOLOGY OF MARINE PLANKTON 3 cr.

Prerequisites: One year of Biology.

Study of phytoplankton and zooplankton in marine and brackish
environments. Qualitative and quantitative comparisons made be-
tween the planktonic populations of various types of habitats in
relation to primary and secondary productivity.

Ml 459 COASTAL GEOMORPHOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: One year of Geology.

A study of coastal geomorphology with emphasis on Late Cenozoic
and Pleistocene sea-level changes in response to world-wide contin-
ental glaciation. The student will participate in field studies of
Pleistocene deposits and the weathering of these deposits.

Ml 481 SPECIAL TOPICS 3 cr.

Ml 500 PROBLEMS IN MARINE SCIENCE 3 cr.

Graduate students or undergraduate students with advanced stand-
ing registering for this course may elect either of the following
options:

Option A: Take a 200, 300, or 400 level Ml course and complete
in addition to regular course requirements a project in
the area under direction of instructor.

Option B: Complete an independent research project. A research
proposal must be approved by the Academic Commit-
tee of M.S.C. in advance of the time research is to be
pursued.

132 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

MATHEMATICS DEPARTMENT

MELVIN R. WOODARD, CHAIRPERSON: ANGELO, ARMS,
BERTNESS, BROUGHTOIM, BURIOK, BUSOVICKI, CROOKS, A.
DAVIS, DEISHER, DUNCAN, R. GIBSON, HARTMAN, HENNE-
MANN, W. LONG, MADERER, D. McBRIDE, R. McBRIDE, McCOY,
MORRELL, MUELLER, OAKES, PETERS, REBER, REIGH,
RETTIG, D. SHAFER, SHAWER, SHEPLER, E. SMITH, W. SMITH,
SPEAKMAN, STILWELL, TROXELL, WESTWOOD, WILLISON, R.
WOLFE.

Degrees offered by the Mathematics Department are the
Bachelor of Science in Mathematics, the Bachelor of Arts in
Mathematics, the Bachelor of Science in Applied Mathe-
matics, the Bachelor of Arts in Applied Mathematics, and
the Bachelor of Science in Education with a Mathematics
major. The first four degree programs are under the School
of Arts and Sciences, and the fifth is under the School of
Education. The Department also offers a Mathematics minor.

computer science is used or to continue their studies in
applied mathematics or computer science in graduate school.
This student would not be expected to continue graduate
studies in pure mathematics.

For either program, the Mathematics major requires 36
credits in mathematics, distributed as described later. If in
addition to these 36 credits, the student elects at least an
additional 26 credits in the Natural Sciences and Mathe-
matics Division, he receives the Bachelor of Science degree.
Otherwise he receives the Bachelor of Arts degree.

The program leading to the B.S. in Education with a
Mathematics major prepares the student for teaching mathe-
matics in junior or senior high school. Many graduates,
however, continue their formal education in mathematics at
the graduate level.

CURRICULA

The program for a mathematics major in the School of Arts
and Sciences is two-phased. A student may pursue a degree
in Mathematics or a degree in Applied Mathematics. Those
completing a degree in Mathematics will be prepared to
continue their studies in mathematics in graduate school
though some may enter business, industry, or Government
service. Those students receiving a degree in Applied Mathe-
matics will be primarily prepared to enter business, industry,
or Government service in an area where mathematics or

Core Program

Requirements for ALL Mathematics majors, beyond the
University's General Education requirements, are Computer
Science 110 and 18 credits in Mathematics, as follows:

MA 111, 113, 115 - Calculus I, II, and III 12 cr.

MA 231 — Introduction to Algebraic Structures 3 cr.

MA 233 — Introduction to Linear Algebra 3 cr.

B. A. or B. S. in Mathematics

In addition to the Core Program, requirements for both the

School of Arts and Sciences - 133
Mathematics

B. A. and the B. S. in Mathematics are 18 more credits in
Mathematics, as follows:

I. MA 381 - Advanced Calculus I 3 cr.

MA 376 - Abstract Algebra 1 3 cr.

II. At least 3 credits in one of the following:

MA 382 - Advanced Calculus II 3 cr.

MA 377 - Abstract Algebra II 3 cr.

MA 421 — Introduction to Topology 3 cr.

III. At least enough credits in the following courses to
meet the minimum requirements of 36 credits total for
the major:

MA 371 — Linear Algebra 3 cr.

MA 355 — Foundations of Geometry I 3 cr.

MA 356 — Foundations of Geometry II 3 cr.

MA 361 — Ordinary Differential Equations 3 cr.

MA 363 — Introduction to Probability 3 cr.

MA 364 - Mathematical Statistics I 3 cr.

MA 365 - Mathematical Statistics II 3 cr.

MA 423 - Complex Variables I 3 cr.

MA 425 - Complex Variables II 3 cr.

MA 341 - Theory of Numbers 3 cr.

It is strongly recommended that the Mathematics major take
two of the three courses in Section II, one of the two being
Topology. It is further recommended that students who
intend to take graduate courses in mathematics check the
requirements for entrance to their intended school of gradu-
ate study for guidance in choosing courses from Section III.

B. A. or B. S. in Applied Mathematics

In addition to the Core Program, requirements for the B. A.
and the B. S. in Applied Mathematics are as follows:

MA 361 — Ordinary Differential Equations 3 cr.

MA 471 — Advanced Calculus for Applications 4 cr.

MA 363 - Probability 3 cr.

MA 364 - Mathematical Statistics I 3 cr.

MA 423 - Complex Variables I 3 cr.

MA 480-489 - Seminar in Mathematics 2 cr.

(This might be optimization, problem
solving, partial differential equations,
game theory, etc.)
CO 250 — Introduction to Numerical Methods 3 cr.

CO 350 - Applied Numerical Methods 3 cr.

B. S. in Education (Mathematics Major)

In addition to the Core Program, requirements for the degree
of Bachelor of Science in Education with a Mathematics
major are credit for Computer Science 110 plus 16 credits in
Mathematics, including Education 456, as follows:
I. Required courses:

MA 355 — Foundations of Geometry 3 cr.

MA 452 — Mathematics Seminar* 1 cr.

ED 465 — Teaching Mathematics in

the Secondary Schools 3 cr.

"Seminars in teaching geometry, teaching algebra, and teaching general
mathematics will be conducted as part of the seminar offerings. It is
strongly recommended that each Mathematics major take one of
these seminars. It should be noted that the student may take as many
as 3 additional credits in Mathematics Seminars.

134 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

II. Two 3-credit courses (total of 6 credits) must be
selected from the following five courses:

MA 376 - Abstract Algebra I 3 or.

MA 381 - Advanced Calculus I 3 or.

MA 371 - Linear Algebra 3 or.

MA 363 - Introduction to Probability 3 cr.

MA 341 - Theory of Numbers 3 cr.

III. Mathematics elective (see above) 3 cr.

One of the purposes of the program is to provide maximum
flexibility in student course selection. Prior to scheduling for
the junior year, all Mathematics Education majors will meet
for the purpose of being advised regarding courses they
should elect, depending on whether they desire to teach at
the junior high level or the senior high level, or to enroll in
graduate school.

Minor in Mathematics

The Minor in Mathematics consists of a minimum of 1 7 credits
in mathematics made up of any two semester sequence in
calculus and additional credits selected from courses for
mathematics majors. This excludes MA 101,011, and 362.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

MA 010 BASIC ALGEBRA 3 cr.

A basic course in algebra including factoring, exponents ano
radicals, systems of linear equations, complex fractions, and
inequalities. Designed for those students who lack the basic
algebraic skills required in MA Oil Elementary Functions. 3 credits
— three lecture hours per week.

MA011 ELEMENTARY FUNCTIONS 3 cr.

For students not prepared to begin study of calculus; topics include
polynomial, exponential, logarithmic and trigonometric functions.
Three hours lecture per week.

MA 013-015 CALCULUS I AND II FOR THE

NATURAL AND SOCIAL SCI ENCES 4 cr. each

Prerequisite: Two years of high school mathematics.
Introduces non-math major to analytic geometry, elementary
functions (including trig functions), central ideas of the calculus
(limit, derivative and integral), applications of these central ideas to
social and natural sciences and numerical methods that involve
series. Four hours lecture per week.

MA 017/019 CALCULUS I AND II FOR 4 cr. each

PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY
Prerequisite: High school algebra, geometry, and trigonometry.
Techniques of differentiation and integration, with application to
analytic geometry of two and three dimensions by means of
vector analysis (algebra and calculus), kinematics, surface integrals,
line integrals, infinite series, matrices and simultaneous linear
equations, differential equations with numerous applications to
physical problems. Four hours lecture per week.

MA 101 FOUNDATIONS OF MATHEMATICS 3 cr.

Introduces logic and mathematical way of analyzing problems;
develops an appreciation for nature, breadth, and power of
mathematics and its role in a technological society and introduces
useful mathematics or mathematics related to student interest.
Possible topics include: logic, problem-solving, number theory,
linear programming, probability, statistics, intuitive calculus, intro
to computers, mathematics of finance, game theory. Three hours
lecture per week.

MA 111/113/115 CALCULUS I, II, AND III 4 cr. each

Prerequisite: Permission of the Mathematics Department.
Courses stress the theory of the calculus as well as applications in
problem solving. Included are: Calculus I: sets and functions.

School of Arts and Sciences
Mathematics

two-dimensional analytic geometrv, limits, derivatives with applica-
tions; Calculus II: The Riemann integral and its properties,
approximation of integrals, applications of integral, and develop-
ment for differentiating and integrating transcendental functions;
Calculus III: polar coordinates, continuity and differentiation of
functions of several variables, multiple integrals, line and surface
integrals, theory of continuous and differentiable functions and
series. Four hours lecture per week.

'ma 214 PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS FOR

BUSINESS MAJORS 3 cr.

Designed to introduce study of probability theory, discrete random
variables and probability distributions, empirical frequency distri-
butions, theoretical frequency distributions, statistical investigations
and sampling, and sampling distributions.

MA 231 INTRODUCTION TO ALGEBRAIC STRUCTURES 3 cr.

Gives student of mathematics basic ideas of contemporary math-
ematics. Includes mathematical logic, algebra of sets, equivalence
relations and partitions of sets, functions, and fundamentals of
group theory. Methods of proof in area of abstract mathematics
stressed.

MA 233 INTRODUCTION TO LINEAR ALGEBRA 3 cr.

Introduction to vector spaces, linear transformations and matrix
theory. Begins concepts studied in a more theoretical setting in
Math 371. Three hours lecture per week.

MA 240 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS 3 cr.

Prerequisite; CO 1 10 and a two semester calculus sequence.
Topics include set algebra, mappings, relations, semigroups, groups,
directed and undirected graphs. Boolean algebra and prepositional
logic, with examples and applications of these to various areas of
computer science. Emphasis placed on developing an intuitive
understanding of basic structures rather than formal theories, and
influence of these topics on theory and practice of computing.
Three hours lecture per week.

MA 341 THEORY OF NUMBERS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: MA 1 15.

Divisibility, congruences, primitive roots, number theoretic func-
tions, diophantine equations, continued fractions, quadratic resi-
dues. Three hours lecture per week.

MA 355 FOUNDATIONS OF GEOMETRY I 3 cr.

Prerequisite: MA 231, 233.

Studies various groups of transformations and geometries associ-
ated with these groups in the Euclidean plane. The Euclidean
Similarity, Affine and Projective Groups of Transformations are
studied. Three hours lecture per week

MA 356 FOUNDATIONS OF GEOMETRY II 3 cr.

Prerequisite: MA 355.

An extension of ideas of Math 355. The real projective plane is
introduced and the analytic projective geometry of this plane.
Three hours lecture per week.

MA 361 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: MA 015, 019, or 115.

Special solvable non-linear equations, linear equations with solu-
tions based on operator tscnniques, the Lapiace transform, or
infinite series. Numerous applications to physical problems. Three
hours lecture per week.

MA 362 PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS 3 cr.

For non-math majors.

Frequency distributions, measures of central tendency, variation,
elementary probability, sampling, estimation, testing hypotheses,
correlation, and regression; emphasis on applications, as opposed
to theoretical development of subjects. Three hours lecture per
week.

MA 363 INTRODUCTION TO PROBABILITY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: MA 015, or 019, or 1 15.

Probability theory necessary for urKJerstanding of mathematical
statistics developed; applications of theory given with emphasis on

136 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

binomial, Poisson, and normal distributions. Distributions of sums
and a central limit theorem developed. Three hours lecture per
week.

MA 364 MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS I 3 or.

Prerequisite: MA 363.

Multivariate distributions, properties of the moment generating
function, change of variable technique, Chi-square distribution,
estimation, confidence intervals, testing hypotheses, contingency
tables, goodness of fit. Many practical applications. Use of calcu-
lating machines where appropriate. Three hours lecture per week.

MA 365 MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS II 3 cr.

Prerequisite; MA 364.

Correlation and regression from applied and theoretical points of
view, bivariate normal distribution, small sample theory. Student's
t and F distributions, analysis of variance, nonparametric methods.
Many practical applications. Use of calculating machines or com-
puters where appropriate. Three hours lecture per week.

MA 371 LINEAR ALGEBRA 3 cr.

Prerequisites: MA 231 and 233.

Topics covered in IVIA 233 explored more deeply. Canonical forms,
elementary divisors and multi-linear algebra studied. Three hours
lecture per week.

MA 376 ABSTRACT ALGEBRA I 3 cr.

Prerequisites: MA 231 and 233.

Development of theory of integral domains, fields, rings, and
groups; designed to develop student's power to think for himself
and to improve ability to construct formal proofs. Three hours
lecture per week.

MA 377 ABSTRACT ALGEBRA II 3 cr.

Prerequisite: MA 376.

Designed to have student continue study of algebra by use of
axiomatic method; Euclidean domains; polynomial domains and
extension fields included; inter-relationships between these struc-

tures and simpler structures, particularly groups and rings, are
developed as in study of Galois group of a polynomial and in an
introduction to Galois Theory. Three hours lecture per week.

MA 381 ADVANCED CALCULUS I 3 cr.

Prerequisite: MA 015, 019, or 111.

Study of set theory, real number system, functions, topology of
cartesian space, sequences, convergence and uniform convergence,
continuity, and uniform continuity. Three hours lecture per week.

MA 382 ADVANCED CALCULUS II 3 cr.

Prerequisite: MA 381.

Includes study of convergence sequences in R, global properties of
continuity, uniform continuity, differentiation in R, Reimann
integrals, and infinite series. Three hours lecture per week.

MA 421 INTRODUCTION TO TOPOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: MA 1 15.

Study of sets, functions, continuity, compactness, the separation
axioms, and metric spaces; application of topology to analysis is
demonstrated. Three hours lecture per week.

MA 423-425 COMPLEX VARIABLES I AND II 3 cr. each

Prerequisite: MA 115.

Introduction to theory of functions of a complex variable; topics
included are elementary functions, analytic functions, conformal
mapping, integration, series, and applications. Three hours lecture
per week.

MA 452
MA 453
MA 454

1-4 cr.

SEMINAR IN TEACHING ALGEBRA

SEMINAR IN TEACHING GEOMETRY

SEMINAR IN TEACHING

GENERAL MATHEMATICS
Seminars are designed for pre-student teacher. Students in each class
will gain insights into the problems in teaching each topic, and
become aware of the materials available and methods of instruction
geared to the special type of student. Education majors only.

MA 471 ADVANCED CALCULUS FOR APPLICATIONS 4 cr.

Prerequisite: MA 019 or 115

Selected mathematical topics that are encountered in intermediate
and advanced physics. Four hours lecture per week.

MA 480-489 SEMINAR IN MATHEMATICS 1-4 cr.

These seminars cover topics such as game theory, optimization,
calculus of variations, etc., beyond the scope of the courses
normally given. Seminar topics for a given semester will be available
at time of registration. Course structure is at discretion of professor.

ED 456 TEACHING MATHEMATICS IN THE

SECONDAFIY SCHOOL 3 cr.

(To be taken the semester or summer session preceding student
teaching.)

Prepares students to teach mathematics in modern secondary
school. Lesson planning and presentation evolves from examination
of teaching strategies, use of media in teaching mathematics, and
handling of individual differences. Three hours lecture per week.

Courses for Elementary Education Majors Only

MA 160 MATHEMATICS FOR

ELEMENTARY TEACHERS I 3 cr.

Topics included are: sets, concepts of logic, mathematical systems,
systems of numeration developing the sets of integers, rational
numbers, and real numbers. Three hours lecture per week.

MA 250 MATHEMATICS FOR

ELEMENTARY TEACHERS II 3 cr.

Prerequisite: MA 160

Topics included are: sentences in one variable, sentences in two
variables, non-metric geometry, metric geometry, coordinate geom-
etry, introduction to statistics and probability. Three hours lecture
per week.

School of Arts and Sciences
Mathematics

^ 251 BASIC CONCEPTS OF ALGEBRA 3 cr.

(ELEMENTARY)
Prerequisite: MA 250.

Treats topics touched upon in earlier courses but from a more
axiomatic point of view; included are: language and proof in
elementary algebra, algebraic structures, real numbers as a com-
plete ordered field, algebraic expressions and functions and (if
time permits) complex number system. Three hours lecture per
week.

A 350 FOUNDATIONS OF INFORMAL

GEOMETRY (ELEMENTARY) 3 cr.

Prerequisite: MA 250

In line with present trends in mathematics curriculum for ele-
mentary schools, topics in geometry are studied from intuitive,
informal approach. Activities and materials for teaching geometrical
concepts to children are integral part of course. Three hours lecture
per week.

^^351 PRE CALCULUS MATHEMATICS

(ELEMENTARY) 3 cr.

Examines function concept as applied to elementary real number
functions and relations (polynomial, periodic and circular, expo-
nential and logarithmic functions). Selected topics from algebra,
analytic geometry and trigonometry included as time permits.
Sources of activities and materials that develop the conceptual
foundation of these topics for children will be investigated also.
Three hours lecture per week.

. 313 TEACHING MATHEMATICS IN 3 cr.

THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS
Prerequisite: MA 160. for Special Education Majors.
Prerequisite: MA 250, for Elementary Education Majors.
Emphasis given to recent developments in curriculum and instruc-
tion, techniques for developing concepts, implications of recent
research and resources and materials helpful to prospective teach-
ers. Three hours lecture per week.

138 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

NATURAL SCIENCES

PHILOSOPHY DEPARTMENT

CHARLES R. FUGET, DIRECTOR

The program leading to the Bachelor of Science degree in
Natural Sciences is designed to prepare students for various
professional schools — optometry, podiatry, pharmacy, dent-
istry (the natural science major is not recommended for
medical school preparation). The degree is offered by the
School of Arts and Sciences.

In addition to the University's General Education require-
ments and the requirements of the School of Arts and
Sciences, a total of 38 credits are required for the major. The
distribution is: Biology, 14 cr.; Chemistry, 16 cr.; Physics,
8 cr.; and Mathematics or Computer Science, 7 to 8 cr.

NOTE: The credits in Natural Science and in Mathematics
INCLUDE those required in the General Education portion of
the degree requirements.

ROBERT M. HERMANN, CHAIRPERSON: BOONE, CHAN,
FERRARA, KANNIWISHER, LIN, MONTGOMERY, SCHAUB.

Philosophy (Major and Minor)

The program in philosophy is designed to provide the student
with a capacity for thinking clearly, a critical attitude and the
ability to reason theoretically.

The major offers the background required for graduate work
in philosophy. Those whose primary interests are in other
disciplines will find philosophy courses which relate directly to
their fields on a theoretical level. Both the minor and double
major are especially desirable for their reflective benefits and
because of the essentially interdisciplinary nature of phil-
osophy.

Requirements for Major and Minor Philosophy

MAJOR MINOR

PH 101 Methods of Critical Thinking
or

3 cr PH 221 Logic 1 3 cr.

3 cr PH 324 History of Philosophy I 3 cr.

3 cr PH 325 History of Philosophy II 3 cr.

18 cr Departmental Electives 6 cr.

27 cr. total

15 cr. total

No more than one 100-level course may be counted toward
the major or minor. Majors concentrating in Philosophy may
take up to 9 hours in Religious Studies, minors no more than 3
hours. These courses are indicated in the catalog by an
asterisk.

School of Arts and Sciences

Natural Sciences

Philosophy

Religious Studies

A program of courses in religious studies including a minor is
offered by the department. These courses are indicated with an
asterisk. The program in religious studies is designed to provide
a balanced, non-sectarian approach leading to a better under-
standing of the phenomenon of religion in human experience.

Requirements for minor in Religious Studies

No more than one 100-level course may be counted among the
required fifteen hours. One philosophy course (3 hrs.) may be
included among the departmental electives.

REQUIRED

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

PH 310 Western Religious Thought in Development
PH 340 Contemporary Western Religious Thought
PH311 Oriental Religio-Philosophic Thought
Departmental Electives

3cr.
3cr.
3cr.
6cr.

Pre-Law Program

The Philosophy Department participates in the university
Pre-Law Minor Program whereby a student majors in one of
several academic disciplines including philosophy and also
meets the pre-law minor requirements. (See "Pre-Professional
Programs", page 67.) Students interested in the philosophy
major/pre-law minor should consult with the departmental
pre-law advisor. Philosophy courses included in the prelaw
minor program are as follows:

PH 221, Logic I, PH 222, Ethics and PH 327 American
Philosophic Thought.

PH 100 INTRODUCTION TO RELIGION* 3 cr.

A beginning approach to the study of religion. Questions discussed
will include: the nature of religion, types of religion, origins of
religion, conceptions of diety, the religious nature and destiny of
man, religion and science, religion and society, and contemporary
religious issues.

PH 101 METHODS OF CRITICAL THINKING 3 cr.

A workshop designed to develop students' ability to critically
analyze deductive and inductive argumentation, rhetoric and persua-
sion with examples drawn from media, textbooks, advertising,
scholarly works, personal contacts, etc. Emphasis upon the nature
of definition, clarification of meaning, detection of fallacies,
scientific methodology.

PH 110 WORLD RELIGIONS* 3 cr.

y/^ History, comparative theology, ritual and contemporary influences

of world's major religions. A nonsectarian study of Hinduism,

Buddhism, Confucianism, Taoism, Shinto. Zoroastrianism, Judaism,

Christianity, and Islam.

PH 120 INTRODUCTION TO PHILOSOPHY 3 cr.

Designed to acquaint the beginning student with philosophical
problems and methods in such areas as metaphysics, epistemology.
logic, value theory and philosophy of religion.

Electives

PH 210 WORLD SCRIPTURES* 3 cr.

Major sacred writings of Hindu, Buddhist, Zoroastrian, Moslem,
Confucian, Taoist, and Judeo-Christian traditions will be studied
from point of view of their religious significance.

PH 221 LOGIC I 3cr.

An introduction to symbolic logic dealing with the symbolization of
deductive arguments in the sentential calculus, syllogistic calculus
•Program in Religious Studies.

140 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

and quantificational calculus, including the logic of relations.
Natural deduction proofs, truth trees and other tests of validity are
covered .

PH 222 ETHICS 3 cr.

Investigation of efforts to rationally justify moral judgment. What
is the "moral?" Are moral notions cultural, rational, divine, or
innate in origin? Are they "relative" or "absolute?" Are they
intuitive, cognitively meaningless, or supportable by "good rea-
sons?"

PH 223 PHILOSOPHY OF ART 3 cr.

Meaning of aesthetics as a philosophical discipline; methodological
questions; a classification of problem areas; questions of imitation,
history and art, the artist, the audience; consideration of some of
the major vuestern and non-western writers' positions. Nature of
artistic creativity; art and anarchy; chance and art; definition of art
in the present culture.

PH 300 PHILOSOPHY OF LANGUAGE 3 cr.

An investigation of issues in the philosophy of language and related
issues in linguistics (including anthropological linguistics, sociolin-
guistics and psycholinguistics). Topics include, e.g., the influence of
language on perception, rationalist/empiricist perspectives on lan-
guage acquisition, language and political control, reference, mean-
ing, truth.

PH 310

3 cr.

WESTERN RELIGIOUS THOUGHT IN

DEVELOPMENT*
Theological development of the Judeo-Christian religious tradition,
approached through indepth study of selected writings from the
early Church Fathers to the Protestant Reformers.

(311 ORIENTAL RELIGIO-PHILOSOPHIC 3 cr.

THOUGHT*
Advanced study in those religious philosophies which have shaped
the oriental worldviews and ways of life. Emphasis on Hinduism,
Jainism, Buddhism, Confucianism, Taoism, Mohism, and Shinto.

PH 321 LOGIC II 3cr.

Prerequisite: PH 221 or permission of instructor. A continuation of
Logic I designed to enable students to evaluate consistency of
statements, validity of arguments, soundness and completeness of
formal systems. Focus on quantificational calculus and inductive
logic.

PH 323 POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY 3 cr.

Political thought of such major classical theorists as Plato, Aris-
totle, Cicero, Augustine, Aquinas, Hobbes, Rousseau, Locke,
Marx, and Mill, examined against the background of metaphysical
roots from which their political views derive.

PH 324 HISTORY OF PHILOSOPHY I 3 cr.

Prerequisite: PH 120 or departmental permission.
Western philosophy of pre-Socratic, classical Greek, Roman and
medieval periods. Special attention given to Plato, Aristotle,
Augustine, and Aquinas, as well as the philosophic schools.

PH 325 HISTORY OF PHILOSOPHY II 3 cr.

Prerequisite: PH 1 20 or departmental permission.
Continuation of PH 324, beginning with 15th century Renaissance
thought and ending with the 19th century precursors of contem-
porary philosophies.

PH 327 AMERICAN PHILOSOPHIC THOUGHT 3 cr.

Study of the more original and influential postures developed in
America from colonial period to present, and of the thinkers who
gave them their most complete expressions.

PH 329 PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION 3 cr.

Philosophical problems in religious thought: nature of religious
experience, mysticism, defining "religion," conceptions of deity,
existence of God, meaning of religious language, faith, and
knowledge.
^Program in Religious Studies.

School of Arts and Sciences

Natural Sciences

Philosophy

PH 330 PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 3 cr.

An investigation into nature of formal and empirical sciences:
structure of scientific tfiougfit and its dependence upon or Inde-
pendence of theory; the logical and metaphysical status of scien-
tific "laws" and theoretical concepts; reductionism in science; the
concept of causality; the logic of explanation; problems in con-
firmation theory; science and value.

(No special background required. Recommended for math and
science majors.)

PH 331 THEORY OF KNOWLEDGE 3 cr.

Investigation into problems involved in justifying knowledge
claims and a consideration of methods suggested for their resolu-
tion. Particular attention paid to problems of certainty, objectiv-
ity, perception and truth.

PH 340 CONTEMPORARY WESTERN 3 cr.

RELIGIOUS THOUGHT*
Introduction to thought of such contemporary theologians as
Bonhoeffer, Buber, Bultmann, Kierkegaard, Teilhard, Tillich,
Barth, Brunner and Niebuhr.

PH 410 CONTEMPORARY PHILOSOPHY 3 cr.

Survey in depth of 20th century philosophic scene; to include
logical positivism, logical and linguistic analysis, existentialism, and
phenomenology.

PH 420 METAPHYSICS 3 cr.

Divergent views of the subject's nature and of the main questions
which it raises; being, form, substance, unity, mind, existence,
necessity, possibility, time, eternity, space, and the self.

PH 481 SPECIAL TOPICS 3 cr.

Topical courses which will vary from semester to semester. See
current schedule of classes.

PH 482 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-6 cr.

Individual students wishing to pursue philosophical or religious
"Program in Religious Studies.

studies interests not covered in department's regular offering may
do so by seeking approval for independent study. Make inquiry of
the chairperson. Upon approval students are guaranteed at least five
hours of faculty time per credit. All programs of study must be
accepted by the department as a whole. May be taken more than
once to a maximum of 6 credits. (This option is available to both
philosophy majors and non-majors.)

142 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

PHYSICS DEPARTMENT

GARY L. BUCKWALTER, CHAIRPERSON: BERRY, EDDY, FOX,
GAGGINI, HERSHMAN, MATOLYAK, MATOUS, McNAMARA,
RAMSEY, RIBAN, ROBERTS, WHITSON.

The Physics Department aims to fully prepare qualified
young men and women for careers in physics. Two degrees
are offered within the School of Arts and Sciences: the
Bachelor of Science in Physics and the Bachelor of Arts in
Physics. Each of these is adequate preparation for those
wishing to enter a graduate program in physics or wishing to
pursue research in industrial technology or for those wishing
a strong physics background before aiming at their direct
goal of medical research, air pollution control, etc. Two
degrees are provided within the School of Education, the
Bachelor of Science in Education with a Physics major and
the Bachelor of Science in Education with a Physics-
Mathematics major. The department also provides a minor in
Physics, as well as general science courses for those who wish
to be truly liberally educated with a working knowledge of
the rudiments of physical science.

CURRICULA

Core Program

Requirements for ALL Physics programs are 18 credits in
Physics and 18 credits in Mathematics as follows:

Physics

*PY 131-0-

*PY 132-0-

*PY 131-1 -

*PY 132-1 -

PY 222 -

PY 322 -

PY 331 -

PY 350 -

Mathematics

*MA 017

*MA 019

MA 361

MA 471

CO 200 -

or
CO 110 -

•Or appropriate <

Physics l-C Lecture

Physics I l-C Lecture

Physics l-C Lab

Physics I l-C Lab

Mechanics I

Electricity and Magnetism I

Modern Physics

Intermediate Experimental Physics I

- Calculus I for Physics

- Calculus II for Physics

- Ordinary Differential Equations

- Introduction to Applied Math
Introduction to Computers

Introduction to Computer Science

Jbstitute.

or.

cr.

3 cr.

B. S. in Physics

In addition to the Core Program, requirements for the degree
of Bachelor of Science in Physics are 24 more credits in
Physics and 3 more credits in Mathematics, as follows:

Physics

PY 223- Mechanics II 2 cr.

PY 231 - Electronics 4 cr.

PY 242 -Optics 3cr.

PY 323 - Electricity and Magnetism II 2 cr.

School of Arts and Sciences - 143
Physics

PY 342 — Thermal and Statistical Physics
FY 351 - Interm. Exp. Physics II
PY 473 - Quantum Mechanics I
PY 472 - Nuclear Physics

or
PY 490 - Solid State Physics
Physics Elective
Mathematics One of the following:
MA 233 - Intro to Linear Algebra
MA 363 - Introduction to Probability
MA 381 - Advanced Calculus I
MA 423 - Complex Variables I
CO 250 - Intro to Numerical Methods

B. A. in Physics

In addition to the Core Program, requirements for the degree
of Bachelor of Arts in Physics are 18 more credits in Physics
as follows:
Physics

PY 223

PY 231

PY 323

PY 351

PY 473

cr.

or.

cr.

Mechanics II

Electronics

Electricity and Magnetism II

Interm. Exp. Physics II

Quantum Mechanics I

Physics Elective

In addition, students are required to complete a two-
semester Natural Science sequence other than Physics and a
two-semester advanced Social Science or a two-semester
advanced Natural Science sequence.

2cr.
4 cr.
2cr.
3cr.
4 or.
3 cr.

B. S. in Education (Physics Major)

In addition to the Core Program, requirements for the degree
of Bachelor of Science in Education with a Physics major are
10 more credits in Physics and 8 credits in Chemistry as
follows:

Physics

PY 231 - Electronics
PY 242 - Optics
Physics Elective

Chemistry
CH 111-112

General Chemistry I and II

4 cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.

4 cr. each

B. S. in Education (Physics — Mathematics Major)

In addition to the Core Program, requirements for the degree
of Bachelor of Science in Education with a combined
Physics-Mathematics major are 6 more credits in Physics and
12 more credits in Mathematics, as follows:

Physics

PY 242 - Optics
Physics Electives

Mathematics

MA 231 — Intro to Algebraic Structures
MA 233 - Intro to Linear Algebra
MA 355 — Foundations of Geometry I
MA 381 - Advanced Calculus I

3 cr.
3 cr.

3 cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.

144 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Minor in Physics

To minor in Physics, a student must offer 15 credits in
Physics.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

PY 101 PHYSICS AND OUR ENVIRONMENT 3 cr.

An overview of the areas of energy, transportation and pollution.
These topics are approached via the relevant concepts of physical
science and physics. Three hours lecture per week.

PY 111-0 PHYSICS I LECTURE 3 cr.

Prerequisites: Elementary algebra and trigonometry.
General college physics; mechanics, wave motion, and sound.

PY 112-0 PHYSICS II LECTURE 3 cr.

Prerequisite: PY 111-0

Electricity and magnetism, heat, light, atomic and nuclear physics,
and an elementary introduction to relativity and quantum theory.

*PY 111-1 PHYSICS I LAB 1 cr.

Physics laboratory at level of Physics 1; exercises in mechanics, wave
motion, and sound. Three hours laboratory per week.

•PY 112-1 PHYSICS II LAB 1 cr.

Physics laboratory at level of Physics 1 1: exercises in optics,
electricity and magnetism, and radioactivity. Three hours laboratory
per week.

PY 131-0 PHYSICS l-C LECTURE 3 cr.

Prerequisites: MA 01 3, 01 7, or 111, at least concurrently.
A calculus-based course in general college physics; topics covered are
similar to those covered in Physics 111, but are treated in more
depth through use of calculus.

PY 132-0 PHYSICS I l-C LECTURE 3 cr.

Prerequisites: MA 015, 019, or 113, at least concurrently.
Continuation of Physics l-C; topics covered are similar to those

covered in Physics II, but are treated in more depth through the use
of the calculus.

*PY 131-1 PHYSICS l-C LAB 1 cr.

Sequence of physics laboratory at same level as Physics l-C;
exerciese in mechanics, wave motion, sound and kinetic theory.
Three hours laboratory per week.

*PY 132-1 PHYSICS ll-C LAB 1 cr.

Sequence of physics laboratory at same level as Physics ll-C;

exercises in optics, electricity and magnetism, and radioactivity.
Three hours laboratory per week.

PY 151-0 MEDICAL PHYSICS LECTURE 3 cr.

Development of concepts and principles of physics with a strong
emphasis as to their use and application in medical and other
biophysical areas.

PY 151-1 MEDICAL PHYSICS LAB 1 cr.

Experimental work dealing with applications of physical principles
to field of medicine. Practical experience with use of electronic
equipment, chart recorders, etc., of type found in modern day
medicine will be introduced.

PY 222 MECHANICS! 2 cr.

Prerequisites: PY 1 1 1 or 131; MA 015, 019, or 113.

Dynamics of a particle in one, two and three dimensions, central

forces including planetary and satellite motion, energy in particle

dynamics, statics, systems of particles. Two hours lecture per

week.

PY 223 MECHANICS II 2 cr.

Prerequisites: PY 222, MA 071 or MA 361.

Mechanics of a rigid body, constraints, oscillations, wave motion,
introduction to Lagrangian and Hamiltonian formulation and rela-
tivistic mechanics. Two hours lecture per week.

♦Physics 111-1, 112-1, 131-1, 132-1 also satisfy the General Education
requirement for a laboratory science.

School of Arts and Sciences - 145
Physics

PY 231 ELECTRONICS 4cr.

Prerequisites: PY 112-0 or 132-0; MA 015, 019 or 1 13.
Circuit theory, transients, vacuum-tube and transistor circuits,
frequency response, input and output impedance, feedback and
electronic noise. Operational amplifiers and digital electronics.
Three hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory per week.

PY 242 OPTICS 3 cr.

Prerequisites: PY 112-0 or 132-0; MA 015, 019 or 113.
Geometrical optics, physical optics, including interference, diffrac-
tion and polarization. Quantum Optics is introduced. Three hours
lecture per week.

PY 322 ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM I 2 cr.

Prerequisite: PY 222.

Electrostatic potential theory, dielectrics, dipole theory, magneto-
statics. Maxwell's equation for static fields, and Legendre's poly-
nomials and other approximation methods. Two hours lecture per
week.

PY 323 ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM II 2 cr.

Prerequisite: PY 322.

Time-dependent form of Maxwell's equations, electromagnetic
induction, vector potential, magnetism, radiation fields, and poynt-
ing vector. Three hours lecture per week.

PY 331 MODERN PHYSICS 3 cr.

Prerequisites: PY 11 2-0 or 132-0; MA 015, 019 or 113.
Introduction to particle ana wave properties of matter, atomic
structure, relativity, solid state and nuclear physics. Three hours
lecture per week.

PY 342 THERMAL AND STATISTICAL PHYSICS 3 cr.

Prerequisites: PY 1 1 2-0 or 1 320, MA 01 5, 01 9, or 1 1 3.
Thermometry, laws of thermodynamics, low-temperature physics,
entropy, properties of ideal gas, and an introduction to statistical
mechanics. Three hours lecture per week.

PY 350 INTERMEDIATE EXPERIMENTAL PHYSICS I 3 cr.

Prerequisites: PY 242 and 331 .

Required fundamental experiments in areas of mechanics, optics,
modern physics and heat. Six hours laboratory per week.

PY 351 INTERMEDIATE EXPERIMENTAL PHYSICS II 3 cr.

Prerequisite: PY 350.

Increasingly sophisticated experiments in essential areas of physics.
Analog and digital computers and the Van de Graaff are available.
Three hours lecture per week.

PY 421 SELECTED EXPERIMENTS I 3 cr.

Prerequisites: PY 231 and 331.

Experiments selected from advanced optics, microwaves, radio and
optical astronomy, semiconductor properties, cryogenics, and clas-
sic experiments in atomic physics. Six hours laboratory per week.

PY 432 ADVANCED ELECTRONICS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: PY 231.

Digital Measurement, Switching Circuit, Logic circuits. Counting,
Coding. Input and Output, AD and DA converters, Computer
organization. Two hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory per week.

PY 472 NUCLEAR PHYSICS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: PY 331.

Survey of nuclear physics; nuclear size; nuclear mass, reaction
theory, types of radioactive decay, nuclear models, nuclear forces

and elementary particles. Three hours lecture per week.

PY473 QUANTUM MECHANICS I 4cr.

Prerequisites: PY 222 and 331.

Quantum mechanics following method of Schrodinger; the theory
is applied to properties of harmonic oscillator, hydrogen atom,
electron in a magnetic field and radioactive decay of alpha
particles. Four hours lecture per week.

PY474 QUANTUM MECHANICS II 3 cr.

Prerequisite: PY 473
A sequel to Phys 473, General Principles of quantum mechanics

146 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

are further developed. Matrix mechanics, angular momentum
theory, time-independent perturbations, variational methods, spin,
and introduction to the many-body problem. Three hours lecture
per week.

PY 490 SOLID STATE PHYSICS 3 or.

Prerequisites: PY 223 and 331.

Reciprocal lattice, crystal structure, the quantization of fields to
produce quasi-particles such as phonons, magnons, excitons. Fermi
gas of electrons, energy bands, semiconductor crystals, and photo-
conductivity. Three hours lecture per week.

PY498 PROBLEMS IN PHYSICS 1-4 cr.

Prerequisites: PY 11 2-0 or 132-0, MA013, 017, or 111.

Students select from topics such as: Physics education projects,
spectrum analysis, cosmic rays, digital and analog computer appli-
cations, astrophysics. Van de Graaff accelerator experiments, cryo-
genics and electro-paramagnetic resonance.

General Education Courses

SC 105 PHYSICAL SCIENCE I 4 cr.

The physical world is studied by focusing on concepts of matter
and energy; emphasis on physical phenomena that can be explain-
ed by Physics and Astronomy. Three hours lecture, 2 hours
laboratory per week.

SC 106 PHYSICAL SCIENCE II

See course descriptions in Chemistry Department section.

4 cr.

3 cr.

; 401 THE GROWTH OF SCIENCE AND

ITS CONCEPTS I
Traces development of science concepts and their interaction with
growing society of Western Civilization, from earliest beginnings to
time of Newton. Treatment is non-mathematical. Three hours
lecture per week.

: 402 THE GROWTH OF SCIENCE AND 3 cr.

ITS CONCEPTS II
Influence and development of concepts of Science in Western
Civilization are studied from Newton to present time; stress placed
on non-mathematical understanding of the basic ideas. Three hours
lecture per week.

3 457 TEACHING PHYSICS IN THE 3 cr.

SECONDARY SCHOOL
Provides foundation for a prospective secondary school physics
teacher in the area of current professional practices, curriculum,
and methods.

POLITICAL SCIENCE DEPARTMENT

School of Arts and Sciences — 147
Political Science

RICHARD F. HEIGES, CHAIRPERSON: CARONE, CHASZAR,
GREEN, KEENE, KRITES, LEE, MORRIS, PALMER, PLATT,
SMITH, THORPE, WILSON.

Political scientists focus upon political systems, including the
effect of environment on the system, system inputs, the
decision-making agencies which render binding public pol-
icies, and system outputs. Approaches to the study of
government and politics include: the NORMATIVE approach,
in which philosophical attention centers on values by ask-
ing the question, "What ought to be?"; and the BEHAV-
IORAL approach, in which an attempt is made to develop
verifiable theories through scientific methods by asking the
questions, "how" and "why?"

Students majoring in political science find employment as
public school teachers and also opportunities, usually
through civil service examinations, in federal, state, and local
governments, and with private civic groups, interest groups,
and political groups. Students who go on to graduate work
find appointments at higher levels and in college teaching.
Students majoring in political science, as in any of the social
sciences, are in demand by employers in business and industry.

The political science major is also especially suitable for the
pre-law student.

Degrees offered by the Political Science Department are the
Bachelor of Arts in Political Science; the Bachelor of Arts in
Government and Public Service; the Bachelor of Arts in Pre

Law-Political Science; and the Bachelor of Science in Educa-
tion with a Social Science Major, concentrating on Political
Science. The department also offers a minor in political
science.

An interdisciplinary major sponsored by the Political Science
Department is International Studies. For information on this
major, see page 123.

CURRICULA

Core Program

Required of ALL Political Science majors and minors (except
Government and Public Service majors) are six credits in the
following basic courses:

PS 1 1 1 — American Politics

(formerly American Citizenship)
PS 101 -World Politics

3 cr.
3 cr.

B. A. in Political Science

In addition to the Core Program, requirements for the
Bachelor of Arts in Political Science are 30 more credits in
political science, distributed so that at least one course is in
three of the following four areas: American Studies, Political
Theory, Public Administration, and International Studies.
Students preparing for graduate study should take PS 499 —
Scope and Methods, at least one Political Theory course, and
courses in Computer Science and Statistics.

148 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

B.A. in Government and Public Service

This major requires 36 s.h. as follows: PS 251, 370, 371,
Economics 330, 336; Psychology 358; Sociology 345; Psy-
chology 300 or Sociology 262; plus four of the following: PS
250, 350, 351, 352, 353, 354, 355, 358, 499, 458 (Intern-
ship). Also majors should select one of five interdisciplinary
minors prescribed by department. For descriptive information
about this new interdisciplinary program, contact department
chairperson.

B. A. in Pre Law-Political Science

The requirements for this major are the same as for the
political science major with the addition of a 21 s.h. pre-law
Interdisciplinary minor.

For requirements in a pre-law minor students should contact
the departmental pre-law adviser.

B. S. in Education (Political Science Concentration)

In addition to the Core Program, requirements for the degree
of Bachelor of Science in Education with a major in Social
Science, Political Science concentration, are 9 more credits in
political science. Recommended electives are PS 250, 251,
350, 351, 353, or 354 and 499; desirable alternatives are PS
280, 283, 285, 352, 359, and 381-386.

Minor in Political Science

A minor in political science consists of 15 credits in political
science, composed of the 6-credit Core Program and 9 more
credits elected from all political science courses.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

Required Courses

PS 111 AMERICAN POLITICS 3 cr.

Introduction to American national government and politics, empha-
sizing Constitution, Party system. Congress, Presidency, Courts, and
problems in national-state relations, civil rights, foreign policy, and
social and economic policies.

PS 101 WORLD POLITICS 3 cr.

Analysis of contemporary (Post 1945) state system and forces
shaping world in which we live. Student is given a framework
within which he can analyze contemporary international politics.

American Studies

PS 250 CONTEMPORARY POLITICAL PROBLEMS 3 cr.

Emphasizes dynamics of government as they are evidenced in
public opinion, pressure groups, political parties and our govern-
mental institutions; attention also directed toward the political-
economic nexus within American society.

PS 251 STATE AND LOCAL POLITICAL SYSTEMS 3 cr.

Institutions and processes of state and local governments, with
special attention to Pennsylvania; emphasis on nature of federal-
ism, state constitutions, and role of state and local government in
an urban society.

PS 298 NEWS INTERPRETATION 1 cr.

Designed to provide students with techniques for intelligent
reading of daily newspaper and weekly news magazines and to
give some understanding of current affairs at state, national and
international levels.

PS 350 THE PRESIDENCY 3 cr.

Examination of Office of President, with attention to constitu-
tional foundations, evolution, structure, powers, and functions;
some comparisons between presidential and parliamentary systems
and between offices of President and Governor.

School of Arts and Sciences
Political Science

PS 351 LEGISLATIVE PROCESS 3 cr.

Functional study of legislative bodies and process of legislation,
covering organization of legislative assemblies, operation of com-
mittee system, procedures, bill drafting, aids, and controls over
legislation.

PS 352 PUBLIC OPINION 3 cr.

Study of nature of public opinion within political system: atten-
tion to formation of public opinion, expression, propaganda, mass
media, and interest groups.

PS 353 AMERICAN POLITICAL PARTIES 3 cr.

Tfie role of people, parties, and pressure groups in politics of
American democracy; attention to sectional and historical roots of
national politics, voting behavior, pressure group analysis, and
campaign activities.

PS 354 METROPOLITAN PROBLEMS 3 cr.

Analyzes multiplicity of problems facing our metropolitan areas.
Contemporary developments such as urban renewal, and shrinking
tax base, federal aid to cities, subsidized mass transit, municipal
authorities, and political consolidation are examined.

PS 355 INTERGOVERNMENTAL RELATIONS 3 cr.

Explores characteristics of federal systems of government, with
emphasis on theories, origins, institutions, problems in intergovern-
mental relations in United States, federal systems in other nations,
and trends.

PS 358 JUDICIAL PROCESS 3 cr.

Explores nature and limits of judicial power, courts as policy-
making bodies, selection of judges, decision process, external
forces impinging on the courts, and role of Supreme Court in its
relationship with Congress, the Presidency, and federalism.

PS 359 CONSTITUTIONAL LAW AND 3 cr.

CIVIL LIBERTIES
Study of civil liberties and civil rights issues through leading
Supreme Court decisions; topics treated include First Amendment

rights, procedural due process and the Bill of Rights, and Equal
Protection problems in civil rights.

Political Theory

PS 360 POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY 3 cr.

Evolution of the Western political tradition of Constitutionalism
from Plato and Aristotle to Locke and Montesquieu: religious and
rational foundations: medieval theories of authority and represent-
ation; early modern theories of the state and sovereignty; concepts
of law: natural rights, liberty and equality, and justice treated in
detail.

PS 361 MODERN POLITICAL THOUGHT 3 cr.

Development of Western political thought since the mid-1 6th
century: classic liberalism; conservative thought; modern irrational
ideologies such as fascism and national socialism: socialist thought;
contemporary collectivist liberalism.

PS 362 AMERICAN POLITICAL THOUGHT 3 cr.

Develops an understanding of American political thinkers from the
Puritans through the current Afro-American writers. Political
phenomena is examined relating to past writings and inferences
are made for future political behavior.

Public Administration

PS 370 PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 3 cr.

Theories of organization and structural organization, personnel
processes, executive functions, financial administration, the poli-
tics of administration, public relations, and problems of demo-
cratic control of bureaucracy.

PS 371 FEDERAL ADMINISTRATIVE POLICY 3 cr.

Intensive study of role of Federal agencies and their administra-
tors in determining and developing public policy. Public adminis-
tration in practice is emphasized by utilizing case studies.

150 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

International Studies

PS 280 COMPARATIVE GOVERNMENT I - 3 cr.

WESTERN POLITICAL SYSTEMS

Analyzes western political systems with emphasis upon major
contemporary democratic governments of Europe. Analyzes and
compares their political cultures, political institutions and political
processes.

PS 281 INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS 3 cr.

Provides a conceptual framework for understanding sovereignty,
nationalism, power, security, dispute settlement, and diplomatic,
legal, economic, and military relations of nation-states.

PS 282

3 cr.

INTERNATIONAL LAW AND

ORGANIZATIONS
Analysis of nature and function of international law in relations
among nations, and an inquiry into purposes, structures, and
actions of contemporary international political organizations, with
emphasis on United Nations.

PS 283 AMERICAN FOREIGN POLICY 3 cr.

Examines formulation and execution of American foreign policy,
with attention to governmental institutions, mass media, interest
groups, and public opinion; emphasizes contemporary problems.

PS 285

3 cr.

COMPARATIVE GOVERNMENT II:
NON-WESTERN POLITICAL SYSTEMS
Analyzes major non-western political systems with emphasis upon
authoritarian and totalitarian systems. Analyzes and compares in a
systematic manner their political cultures, political institutions and
political processes.

PS 380 SOVIET POLITICS 3 cr.

Essential features of Communist party and government of
U.S.S.R., including geographical and historical background and
ideological and theoretical foundations. PS 280, Comparative
Government, should be taken prior to this course.

PS 381-386 POLITICAL SYSTEMS 3 cr. each

Intensive, comparative study of the government and politics of a
selected region. Suggested prerequisite; PS 280 and/or 285.
PS 381 - Latin America
PS 382 - Africa
PS 383 - Asia
PS 384 - Middle East
PS 385 — Central and Eastern Europe
PS 386 - Atlantic Community

PS 389 DEVELOPING NATIONS 3 cr.

Political characteristics of emerging nations; impact of economic
and social change upon political structure; evolving patterns of
political development; and techniques of nation-building. Suggested
prerequisite: PS 280 and/or 285.

Research, Study, and Methodology

PS 480 POLITICAL SCIENCE SEMINAR 3 cr.

Readings and brief written assignments on a specific topic deter-
mined by the instructor in charge.

PS 481 SPECIAL TOPICS 3 cr.

Readings and brief written assignments on a specific topic deter-
mined by the instructor in charge.

PS 482 INDEPENDENT STUDIES 3 cr.

Readings and brief written assignments on a specific topic deter-
mined by the instructor in charge.

PS 485 HONORS IN POLITICAL SCIENCE 3 cr.

Prerequisites: 15 credits in Social Sciences, including 9 credits in
Political Science, 2.0 OPA in Social Studies, and permission of
department chairman and instructor.

Directed readings and one or more papers; topic to be selected by
instructor and student.

School of Arts and Sciences
Psychology

PSYCHOLOGY DEPARTMENT

PS458 POLITICAL SCIENCE INTERNSHIP 2-12cr.

Prereqursites: 9 credits in Political Science with 2.0 QPA; PS 111;
approval of instructor and Chairperson.

Practical experience in government and politics. "Log" and research
project required. Course grade determined by the instructor

PS 499 SCOPE AND METHODS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: PS 111.

Explores approaches, methods, and tools of Political Science;
designed to prepare student who plans to do graduate work in
Political Science. Majors and Minors only.

RICHARD D. MAGEE, CHAIRPERSON: CARTWRIGHT, EDGAR,
GROVER, JACOBS, PATTON, REID, RICH, RITTLE, ROSS,
SCHNEIDER, STIRES, TEGLASI. THORNTON, VANDECREEK,
WALZ. ADJUNCT PROFESSORS: BESHAI, KLINEDINST, LEVIT,
PALMER, PLUMMER, RUSNAK

The program in psychology leads to a Bachelor of Arts degree
and is designed to give the student an understanding of the
methods and major findings of the science of behavior, with an
introduction to several areas of professional application. The
major offers the background required for graduate work in
psychology and also preparation for such related fields as
social work, personnel work, advertising, medicine, law, and
theology. The department also offers a minor in psychology.

CURRICULA

B. A. in Psychology

The major in psychology consists of a minimum of eleven
courses, including PC 101 — General Psychology and MA
362 — Probability and Statistics, both of which can be used
to meet General Education requirements, and Experimental
Design and Analysis I and II. At least two courses must be
taken from Group A and two courses from Group B below.
Psychology majors are required to complete a minor or
concentration.

752 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

cr.

Course Group A

PC 361 - Motivation

PC 362 - Physiological Psychology

PC 363 - Perception

PC 365 — Conditioning and Learning

PC 366 — Hunnan Learning and Mennory

PC 367 - Animal Behavior
Course Group B

PC 351 — Intro, to Psych. Measurement

PC 354 - Developmental Psychology OR

PC 355 - Child Psychology

PC 356 - Personality

PC 357 — Abnormal Psychology

PC 358 - Social Psychology

Suggested Course Sequence for Psychology Majors

Freshman Year

First Semester PC 101 — General Psychology

Second Semester MA 362 - Probability & Statistics
Sophomore Year

First Semester PC 290 — Exp. Design & Analysis I

Second Semester PC 291 — Exp. Design & Analysis II
Junior Year

First Semester One course from Group A

One course from Group B

Second Semester One course from Group A

One course from Group B

Senior Year At least three additional courses in

psychology

Minor in Psychology

A minor in psychology consists of six courses: General Psy-
chology, Probability and Statistics, Experimental Design and
Analysis I, one course from Group A, one course from Group
B, and one additional course to be selected by the student.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

PC 101 GENERAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 cr.

An introduction to the scientific study of behavior.

PC 200 THE PSYCHOLOGY OF ADJUSTMENT 3 cr.

Prerequisite: PC 101.

Designed to present fundamental concepts of psychological adjust-
ment. Emphasis on preventive approaches to maladjustment and
psychological disorders. (Cannot be used to meet requirements for
major in psychology.)

PC 290 EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN AND ANALYSIS I 3 cr.

Prerequisites: PC 101, MA 362.

A laboratory course devoted to designing, conducting and evalu-
ating results of psychological experiments.

PC 291 EXPERIMENTAUDESIGN AND ANALYSIS II 3 cr.

Prerequisites: PC 101, 290.
A continuation of Experimental Design and Analysis I.

PC 351

3 cr.

INTRODUCTION TO PSYCHOLOGICAL
MEASUREMENT
Prerequisites: PC 101, MA 362

Survey of psychological measurement techniques, with emphasis
on theoretical assumptions underlying these techniques and discus-
sion of interpretation and limitations of measuring instruments.

PC 354 DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: PC 101
Comprehensive study of all factors tfiat contribute to human

School of Arts and Sciences - 153
Psychology

development from conception to death, particularly as they relate
to psychological development of individual. A survey course
directed at students not planning to take PC 355, PC 373, PC 374.
Credit toward a major or minor in psychology will not be given for
both PC 354 and PC 355.

PC 355 CHILD PSYCHOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: PC 101

Study of factors that influence total development and behavior of
child. Current theories and research are considered, with focus upon
optimum development of individual. Credit toward a major or
minor in psychology will not be given for both PC 355 and PC 354.

PC 356 PERSONALITY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: PC 101.

Provides comparative analysis of major representative traditional
and contemporary theories of personality.

PC 357 ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 or.

Prerequisite: PC 101.

Abnormal behavior studied from statistical, normative, and patho-
logical reference point.

PC 358 SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisite; PC 101.

Scientific approach to study of behavior and experience of
individuals in relation to other individuals, groups, and cultures.

PC 361 MOTIVATION 3 cr.

Prerequisites: PC 101, 290.

Systematic study of how behavior is initiated, sustained, directed,
and terminated. Lecture and laboratory.

PC 362 PHYSIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: PC 101, 290.

Study of relationship between behavior and anatomy and physiol-
ogy of nervous system. Lecture and laboratory.

PC 363 PERCEPTION 3 cr.

Prerequisites: PC 101, 290.

Study of perceptual process. Sensory mechanisms for processing
information are examined, as well as responses to complex stimuli.
Lecture and laboratory.

PC 365 CONDITIONING AND LEARNING 3 cr.

Prerequisites: PC 101, 290.

Examination of basic principles of learning and related phenom-
ena; discussion of classical conditioning, discrimination learning
and aversive control of behavior. Lecture and laboratory.

PC 366 HUMAN LEARNING AND MEMORY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: PC 101, 290

Study of methods and findings in areas of verbal learning, retention,
and human information processing. Lecture and laboratory.

PC 367 ANIMAL BEHAVIOR 3 cr.

Prerequisites: PC 101. 290,

Comparative survey of behavioral processes, with emphasis on
sensory systems and learning, in organisms of different phylo-
genetic levels. Lecture and laboratory.

PC 373 ADOLESCENT PSYCHOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: PC 101.

Study of adolescent and his world, especially the physical aspects
of adolescence, psychological growth patterns, social pressures and
adaptation.

PC 374 PSYCHOLOGY OF ADULTHOOD 3 cr.

AND OLD AGE
Prerequisite: PC 101.

Examines developmental and psychological needs of young adult,
the middle-aged and elderly, in light of current theory and research.

PC 375 APPLIED SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: PC 101,358

The application of social-psychological research and analysis to
selected public issues.

J54 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

SOCIAL SCIENCE

PC 399 INDUSTRIAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: PC 101.

Systematic study of applications of psychology to business and
industry.

PC 410 HISTORICAL TRENDS IN PSYCHOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: PC 101

Comprehensive overview of historical antecedents of contemporary
psychology with emphasis on their implications for future develop-
ments in the field.

PC 450

3 cr.

INTRODUCTION TO CLINICAL

PSYCHOLOGY
Prerequisites: PC 101 and department consent.
Overview of clinical psychology, with emphasis upon clinician's
use of methods of evaluation, and treatment and modification of
behavior.

PC 451 PSYCHOLOGICAL PRACTICUM 1-12 cr.

Prerequisites: PC 101 and department consent.
Under supervision of psychology department, selected students
receive experience in application of psychological techniques. May
be taken more than once to a maximum of 12 credits.

PC 480 RESEARCH SEMINAR PSYCHOLOGY

Prerequisites: PC 290 and department consent

3 cr.

2-3 cr.

PC 481 SPECIAL TOPICS IN PSYCHOLOGY

Prerequisites: PC 101 and department consent.
A seminar providing study of selected topics not emphasized in
other courses. May be taken more than once to a maximum of 6
credits.

PC 482 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN PSYCHOLOGY 1-3 cr.

Prerequisites: PC 101 and department consent.
Individual students pursue their particular interests in psychology
in consultation with a member of the staff. May be taken more
than once to a maximum of 6 credits.

MERLE RIFE (ACTING) ASSOCIATE DEAN

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

SS101 CONTEMPORARY SOCIAL SCIENCE 3cr.

An Interdisciplinary study of a current social topic that uses
a team teaching approach. Topics may vary from semester
to semester. The course is one option in the Social Science
General Education Program.

SS398 SOCIAL SCIENCE FOREIGN STUDY 2-6 cr.

Directed foreign study, emphasizing historical, political,
economic, social and geographical aspects of the area. Back-
ground reading, lectures and briefings, diary or evaluative
paper. Course credit may be applied as General Education
or elective credit. (For details see Center for International
Studies.)

Social Science Minor 21 s.h.

A Social Science minor consists of course work in three
Social Science departments beyond General Education
courses.

SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY DEPARTMENT

School of Arts and Sciences

Social Science

Sociology and Anthropology

DAVID MEHDI AZIMI, CHAIRPERSON: ARROYO, BENTON,
BROWN, GERALD, GRANT, HOLT2, LANHAM, LOUDEN,
NEWHILL, OLIN FAHLE, RAIBOURN, RAWLEIGH, SANDERSON,
SNYDER, VEXLER.

The Sociology-Anthropology Department provides an oppor-
tunity for studies in two closely related disciplines. Although
a student may elect to concentrate his studies in one area
more than another, studies in both disciplines are recom-
mended. Sociology and anthropology are both concerned
with man's social and cultural setting and the nature of his
relationships with his fellow men. Sociology focuses prim-
arily on studies of our own society, whereas anthropology is
mainly concerned with non-Western cultures.

Sociology-Anthropology training can be preparatory for a
variety of vocations. Teaching in secondary schools or in
colleges and universities are vocations of interest to many
students. Social work is an area of increasing opportunities.
Anthropologists find employment opportunities primarily in
higher education, museum work, and in civil service posi-
tions. Students planning future studies in theology, law,
personnel management or other human relations occupations
will find that undergraduate training in sociology and anthro-
pology is eminently appropriate.

Degrees offered by the department are the Bachelor of Arts
in Sociology-Anthropology, with concentration in either
Sociology or Anthropology, the Bachelor of Science in
Education with a major in Social Sciences, concentrating on

Sociology. The first degree program is under the School of
Arts and Sciences, and the second is under the School of
Education. The department also offers a minor.

CURRICULA

A major in Sociology-Anthropology requires a total of 27
credits in the department, including courses noted on the
next page.

Core Program

All programs require six credits of Core Program, as follows:

SO 151
AN 110

Principles of Sociology
Introduction to Anthropology

3 cr.
3 cr.

B. A. with Concentration in Sociology

In addition to the Core Program requirements for the degree
of Bachelor of Arts with a concentration in Sociology are 21
credits in sociology, distributed as follows:

Required Courses:

SO 231 Contemporary Social Problems 3 cr.

SO 343 Development of Social Theory 3 cr.

SO 344 Introduction to Social Research. 3 cr.

Sociology Electives 12 cr.

B. A. with Concentration in Anthropology

In addition to the Core Program, requirements for the

156 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Degree of Bachelor of Arts with a concentration in Anthro-
pology are 21 credits in anthropology, distributed as follows:

Required Courses:

AN 222 Introduction to Physical Anthropology 3 cr.

AN 233 Cultural Symbolism I: Language in 3 cr.

Culture

AN 244 Basic Archaeology 3 cr.

Anthropology Electives 12 cr.

B. S. in Education (Sociology Concentration)

In addition to the Core Program, requirements for the degree
of Bachelor of Science in Education with a major in Social
Science, Sociology concentration, are 9 more credits in
sociology, at the student's choice.

Minor in Sociology or Anthropology

A minor in Sociology or Anthropology consists of 15 credits
in either discipline composed of the 6-credit Core Program
and 9 more credits, elected from either sociology or anthro-
pology courses.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

Sociology Courses

so 151 PRINCIPLES OF SOCIOLOGY 3 cr.

The science of structure and functioning of fiuman groups; taking
culture and social institutions as basic materials, studies seeking to
record and explain man's social behavior are explored.

SO 231 CONTEMPORARY SOCIAL PROBLEMS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: SO 1 51 .

Explores pressing social issues; problems are defined and solutions

explored in ligfit of fiistorical, political, economic, social and

antfiropological data.
SO 238 INTRODUCTION TO SOCIAL WORK 3 cr.

Prerequisite: SO 1 51

Introduction to tfie dynamics of the helping relationship.

SO 262 MODERN SOCIAL INSTITUTIONS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: Sophomore standing or higher.

Focuses on modern social institutions, such as science and tech-
nology, arts, industry, etc., and their place in society. Readings,
assignments, and topics of discussion determined by instructor.

SO 331 SOCIOLOGY OF HUMAN SEXUALITY 3 cr.

Depth analysis of a formerly taboo topic, human sexuality, whereby
current information derived from biological, sociological, and
psychological research on human relationships is presented to
provide a foundation for self-understanding and societal values.

SO 332 RACIAL AND CULTURAL MINORITIES 3 cr.

Prerequisite: SO 151.

Study of national, racial and religious minorities and divergent
heritages in our national life.

SO 333 JUVENILE DELINQUENCY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: SO 151.

Study of some of social and cultural factors that relate to
delinquency; emphasis on consequences of societal reaction to
delinquency.

SO 334 POPULATION PROBLEMS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: SO 151.

Focus upon population growth and distribution; the present
"population explosion" is a topic of central interest.

SO 335 SOCIAL STRATIFICATION 3 cr.

Prerequisite: SO 151.

Schoo/ of Arts and Sciences - 157
Social Science
Sociology and Anthropology

Study of social status patterns and social mobility; determinants of
social class divisions and consequences of class distinction for
individuals and society discussed.

SO 336 SOCIOLOGY OF THE FAMILY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: SO 151.

Sociological study of family from various tfieoretlcal view points;
emphasis on interrelation between structure and function of family
and existing and emerging social environment.

SO 337 WORLD CULTURES 3 cr.

A minimal orientation to study of cultural diversity in human
societies; emphasis on determinates of cultural variability and
problem of ethnocentrism. Not open to Sociology-Anthropology
majors in liberal arts. Recommended for Social Science Education
students who concentrate in Sociology-Anthropology.

SO 339 THE COMMUNITY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: SO 151.

Analysis of social structure of communities of local level in
relation to the national community structure; examination of
current problems and future trends.

SO 340 INDUSTRIAL SOCIOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: SO 151.

Work and milieu of worker; social organizations in industry;
problems of workers; industrial morale and team work; and
relation of industry to community and society.

SO 341 SOCIOLOGY OF EDUCATION 3 cr.

Prerequisite: SO 151.

A sociological approach to understanding role of educational
institutions in American society, with special emphasis on status
and role of public school teacher.

SO 342 SOCIAL AND CULTURAL ASPECTS 3 cr.

OF HEALTH AND MEDICINE
Prerequisite: 6 credits in Sociology-Anthropology.
Review of fields of medical sociology and anthropology; attention

focused on such topics as social background of illness, folk
medicine, cultural differences in perceptions of illness, and social
organization of health facilities.

SO 343 DEVELOPMENT OF SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: 6 credits of Sociology-Anthropology
Examination of historical development of social theory with special
attention to classical theorists and theoretical ideas which have
contributed most significantly to modern sociology.

SO 344 INTRODUCTION TO SOCIAL RESEARCH 3 cr.

Prerequisite: SO 151

Overview of basic quantitative and qualitative methods and general
problems of research design. Problems and projects are assigned.

SO 345 SOCIAL DYNAMICS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: SO 151.

Study of interaction between and among individuals and groups in
various social settings; emphasis placed on small groups, socializa-
tion, collective behavior, and mass communications.

SO 346 THE HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF 3 cr.

SOCIAL WELFARE POLICIES
Prerequisites: Introduction to Social Work, or approval of the
instructor.

Beginning with Elizabethan Poor Laws of early seventeenth cen-
tury England and culminating in examination of the "war on
poverty." course will appraise manner by which compjeting philo-
sophical perspectives have served to inform and been informed by
the development of social welfare policies intended to remedy
conditions of poverty in Western society.

SO 401 SOCIAL AND CULTURAL CHANGE 3 cr.

Prerequisite: SO 151 or AN 110 and junior standing or permission
of instructor.

Focused on effects of innovations as they produce changes in
society and cultural patterns; emphasis on technology, urbaniza-
tion, ecological problems and underdeveloped countries. Students
will be able to read in areas of special interest.

158 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

so 451 SPECIAL READINGS IN SOCIOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: SO 151 and permission of instructor.
Readings on specific topics in sociology, with presentations and
class discussions. Instructor guides selection of readings and pre-
sentations. May be taken twice for credit (with different instruc-
tors who present different topics.)

SO 471 FIELDWORK IN SOCIOLOGY 3-12cr.

Prerequisites: 12 credits in Sociology (2.5 QPA), including SO 151,
SO 231, and SO 238. For sociology majors only. Permission of the
instructor.

Supervised experience in community work with cooperating public
and private agencies.

SO 480 SOCIOLOGY SEMINAR

A seminar for advanced students devoting itself to an intensive
analysis of specialized issues within the discipline.

SO 481 SPECIAL TOPICS IN SOCIOLOGY 3 cr.

Focuses on specialized topics in sociology which are not included
among regular course offerings.

SO 482 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-3 cr.

An opportunity for students to engage in an in-depth analysis of
some topic through consultation with a faculty member. Some kind
of semester project is ordinarily expected.

SO 483 READINGS IN SOCIOLOGY 1-3 cr.

Readings on special topics in sociology, with presentations and class
discussions. Instructor guides selection of readings and presenta-
tions.

Anthropology Courses

AN 110 INTRODUCTION TO ANTHROPOLOGY 3 cr.

General consideration of man's biological and cultural adaptations,
stressing analysis of the nature of cultural systems as a method for
perceiving and understanding variations among men today.

AN 211 CULTURAL ANTHROPOLOGY 3 cr.

Survey of problems and theories in science of culture. Each

student makes a study of a particular major anthropologist or
theoretical approach.

AN 222 INTRODUCTION TO PHYSICAL 3 cr.

ANTHROPOLOGY
Biological evolution and principles of human genetics; evolution of
primates and fossil record for the evolution of man stressed;
relationship between race and culture discussed.

AN 233 CULTURAL SYMBOLISM I: 3 cr.

LANGUAGE IN CULTURE
Focuses on social and cultural functions of language; particular
emphasis on problems in anthropology with respect to non-Western
languages.

AN 244 BASIC ARCHAEOLOGY 3 cr.

Investigates nature of archaeological data, goals of archaeology,
models for history and prehistory, and significant archaeological con-
tributions to knowledge. Includes a survey of excavation methods.

AN 312 WORLD ETHNOGRAPHY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: AN 110 or 211.

Study in depth of specific non-literate cultures to explore ques-
tions of cultural integration.

AN 313 OLD WORLD ARCHAEOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: AN 110 or 244.

Prehistory of Europe and Asia, from Paleolithic through Neolithic
developments; emphasis on technology, chronology, ecology, and
cultural processes.

AN 314 ETHNOLOGY OF NORTH AMERICAN 3 cr.

INDIANS
Prerequisite: AN 110 or 211.

Survey of culture history and culture area characteristics of
Indians of North America; detailed study of representative groups
related to historical, functional, and ecological concepts.

School of Arts and Sciences

Social Science

Sociology and Anthropology

AN 315 NORTH AMERICAN ARCHAEOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: AN 110 or 244.

Prehistory of North American Indians, emphasizing technology
and stylistics, cultural evolution, and cultural ecology.

AN 316 THE ANTHROPOLOGY OF RELIGION 3 cr.

Prerequisite: AN 1 10 or 211.

Deals with nature, function and universal characteristics of religion
in human society by utilizing the cross-cultural approach. Theories
concerning religious phenomena serve as topics for discussion.

AN 317 QUANTITATIVE AND INSTRUMENTAL 3 cr.

ARCHAEOLOGY
Prerequisite: AN 244.

Theory and methods for quantitative analysis of archaeological
data will be applied to data recovered by University excavation
programs. Instruments used for analysis of artifacts, flotation
samples, features, soil samples, and for report preparation will be
used by each student.

AN 318 MUSEUM METHODS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: AN 110,211, or 244.

Lecture and laboratory course concentrating on history of muse-
ums, natural science and anthropological museum methods and
techniques, providing practical experience in exhibit preparation
and installation.

AN 319 SOCIAL STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION 3 cr.

Prerequisite: AN 110 or 211.

A survey concerning mechanisms of integration in social organiza-
tion and their role in the development of societies; Family,
Kinship and Ideological systems are stressed.

AN 320 ARCHAEOLOGICAL FIELD SCHOOL 6 cr.

Prerequisite: AN 1 10 or 244.

Field excavation of selected archaeological sites in Indiana and
adjacent counties; opportunity for varied experience in historic
and prehistoric Indian sites, both open sites and rock shelters.

AN 321 METHODS OF CROSS-CULTURAL ANALYSIS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: AN 110 or 211.

Comparative methods and techniques reviewed and evaluated in
relation to the problems they were designed to solve. Statistics
and computational equipment will be used in analysis of data
derived from Ethnographic Atlas or Human Relations Area Files.

AN 322 CULTURE AND PERSONALITY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: PC 101, and AN 1 10 or SO 151

An examination of personality characteristics produced in a given
cultural milieu or sub-group. Cross-cultural comparisons and anal-
yses are made with respect to child rearing, male-female role
differentiation, bodily movements, suppression, nnental disturbance,
and religious expression.

160 - Indiana University of Pennsylvania

AN 371 CULTURAL AREA STUDIES 3 cr.

Prerequisite: AN 110 or 211.

Analysis of prehistoric, historic, and contemporary aspects of
ethnological studies in a culture area; social organization, linguistic
ties, cultural ecology, folklore, mythology, artistic expressions of
peoples, and their world view examined. Course may be repeated
UNDER DIFFERENT LETTER DESIGNATIONS according to
selection of culture areas by instructors responsible for the course.

THE FOLLOWING CULTURE AREAS ARE AVAILABLE
INITIALLY:

AN371A CULTURAL AREA STUDIES

AN371B CULTURAL AREA STUDIES

AN 371C CULTURAL AREA STUDIES

AN 371 D CULTURAL AREA STUDIES

NORTHERN EUROPE
SOUTHEAST ASIA
CHINA AND JAPAN
CARIBBEAN

AN 401

SOCIAL AND CULTURAL CHANGE 3 cr.

Prerequisites: AN 110 or SO 151 and Junior Standing or permis-
sion of instructor.
For description of course, see SO 401.

AN 480 ANTHROPOLOGY SEMINAR 1-3 cr.

A seminar for advanced students devoting itself to an intensive

analysis of specialized issues within the discipline.
AN 481 SPECIAL TOPICS IN ANTHROPOLOGY 3 cr.

Focuses on specialized topics in anthropology which are not

included among regular course offerings.

AN 482 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1 -3 cr.

Opportunity for students to engage in in-depth analysis of some
topic through consultation with a faculty member. Some kind of
semester project is ordinarily expected.

AN 483 READINGS IN ANTHROPOLOGY 1-3 cr.

Readings on special topics in anthropology, with presentations and
class discussions. Instructor guides selection of readings and presen-
tations.

School of Business - 161

The School of Business

ELWOOD B. SHEEDER, DEAN

The establishment of a School of Business was authorized by
the Board of Trustees of Indiana University of Pennsylvania
in IVIay 1966, and it was indicated that the School should
consist of several departments. At present, these are the
Business and Distributive Education Department and the
Business Management Department.

Degree programs offered by the School of Business are the
Bachelor of Science in Education with a major in Business
Education or with a major in Distributive Education and the
Bachelor of Science in Business Management.

Business Education has been one of Indiana's areas of
specialization for some 50 years. The program in Distributive
Education prepares Teacher-Coordinators for schools offering
programs in marketing, distribution and cooperative work
experience. These two degree areas are designed to prepare
teachers for comprehensive high schools, area vocational-
technical schools, and community colleges. The Business
Management program has as its primary purpose the prepara-
tion of students for careers in business and industry.

DEPARTMENTS

Business and Distributive Education

Those enrolled in this Department have a choice of the
following areas of concentration; Accounting, Data Proces-

sing, Secretarial (all include certification in Typewriting), and
Distributive Education. Students are encouraged to select
more than one area of concentration, as additional hours
beyond the minimum requirements enrich the student's
preparation for teaching. Student teaching is carried out
under local supervision at the various centers. In addition,
coordinators from the University observe and counsel the
student teachers.

Business Management

The training offered by the Business Management Depart-
ment is intended to provide a broad liberal background in
the behavioral sciences; to give a keen perception of the
social-economic world in which we live and work; to provide
the foundation of general professional education for person-
ally fruitful and socially useful careers in the varied fields of
business and other types of institutions; and to furnish the
opportunity to obtain the specialized knowledge and skills
essential to future occupational growth and advancement for
students preparing for responsible technical, supervisory, and
executive positions. Students may pursue work according to
their particular interests and aptitudes.

DEGREE REQUIREMENTS

All degree candidates in the School of Business must fulfill
the University's 52-credit General Education requirement.

162 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

and candidates for degrees in Education must fulfill the
28-credit requirement in professional Education courses,
needed for certification. Specific courses to fulfill the Gen-
eral Education requirement and meet special degree require-
ments within the School of Business are identified under the
Departments involved.

In addition, degree requirements for ALL Business students
include a general requirement of 18 credits in Business
courses as follows:
General Requirement

BU 221 Introduction to Accounting 3 cr.

BU 235 Business Law I 3 cr.

BU 251 Intermediate Accounting 3 cr.

BU 321 Business Communication 3 cr.

BU 336 Business Law II 3 cr.

BU 339 Business Data Processing 3 cr.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

The courses listed below (prefix BU) are available to stu-
dents in both the Business and Distributive Education Depart-
ment and the Business Management Department. Students in
the School of Business should refer to the specific require-
ments for their respective degrees (BE — Business Education,
DE — Distributive Education, and BM — Business Manage-
ment), shown by the department.

BU 101

3 cr.

BUSINESS ORGANIZATION AND
MANAGEMENT
This introductory course is an overview of the principles, prac-

tices, and methods common to most business firms in a private
enterprise system.

BU 131 PRINCIPLES OF TYPEWRITING 2 cr.

Emphasis on development of correct techniques in typewriting,
introduction to basic styles of business letters, simple tabulations
and simple manuscripts; specific standards of speed and accuracy
are required. Credit may be given by examination.

BU 132 INTERMEDIATE TYPEWRITING 2 cr.

Prerequisite: 2.0 QPA in BU 131 or "credit by examination."
Emphasis on further development of speed, accuracy, and produc-
tion ability; includes business letters with special features, business
reports, business forms, rough drafts, manuscripts, liquid and
stencil duplication.
- BU 221 INTRODUCTION TO ACCOUNTING 3 cr.

Introduces student to the keeping of records for service and
professional establishments, as well as mercantile enterprises involv-
ing the single proprietor.
. BU 233 MARKETING 3 cr.

Study of business activities necessary to planning, pricing, promot-
ing, and placing of goods and services for use by household
consumers and industrial users.

BU 235 BUSINESS LAW I 3 cr.

Deals with the nature of law and the agencies and procedures for
its enforcement, contracts, agency employment, negotiable instru-
ments, property and bailments.

BU 251 INTERMEDIATE ACCOUNTING 3 cr.

Prerequisite: at least a 2.0 QPA in BU 221.

Special consideration given to accrued and deferred items; the
significance and handling of valuation accounts and interpretation
of the effect of all types of transactions on the operation of a
business.

BU 261 SHORTHAND THEORY 3 cr.

An introductory course in the basic principles of Gregg Short-
hand, Diamond Jubilee.

School of Business - 163

BU 262 SHORTHAND DICTATION 3 cr.

Prerequisite; BU 261.

Major objectives are to review and strengthen student's knowledge
of principles of Gregg Shorthand, Diamond Jubilee, to build
shorthand-writing speed, and to build transcription skill.

BU 271 ADVANCED TYPEWRITING 2 cr.

Prerequisites: At least a 2.0 QPA in BU 131 and 132.
Continuation of speed and accuracy development and production
ability, advanced work in letter forms, legal documents, statistical
reports, tables, and manuscripts. Instruction on VariTyper included.

BU321 BUSINESS COMMUNICATIONS 3 cr.

Develops student's ability to express facts and ideas clearly and
effectively in writing. Basic principles of organizing, developing, and
presenting material in letters and reports are presented with
emphasis on practical application of principles to the solution of
management problems through written and oral communications.

BU 332 RETAIL MANAGEMENT 3 cr.

Prerequisite: DE 331 or BU 233 or BU 333.

Study of structure and changing environment of retailing: special
emphasis on merchandise management, organization, sales promo-
tions, services and control.

BU 333 PRINCIPLES OF SELLING 3 cr.

Covers field of selling, preparing to sell, the selling process and an
introduction to sales management. Sales demonstrations incorpo-
rating audio-visual aides are a part of course.

BU 335 MACHINE MATHEMATICS 3 or.

Prerequisite: BE 111, Foundations of Business Mathematics or
permission of instructor.

Fundamental mathematical processes utilized in business are applied
in realistic business situations through use of office machines
including a ten-key and full-keyboard adding-listing machines and
electronic calculators.

BU 336 BUSINESS LAW II 3 cr.

Prerequisite: BU 235.

The basic aim is same as that stated for Business Law I. Attention
given to kinds of business organizations, sales, insurance, surety
and guaranty, leases and mortgages, trust and estates, bankruptcy,
business torts and crimes.

BU 339 BUSINESS DATA PROCESSING 3 cr.

Students are familiarized with development and use of Business
Data Processing Systems. Data processing methods and equipment,
computer programming, and interpretation of business information
are covered.

BU 352 CORPORATE ACCOUNTING 3 cr.

Prerequisite: BU 251.

Continued study of financial principles and practices of account-
ing with emphasis on characteristics, records, and financial reports
of corporations.

BU 353 COST ACCOUNTING 3 cr.

Prerequisite: 2.0 QPA in BU 221 and BU 251.
Basic theory and procedures for determining unit cost of produc-
tion and cost control involving material, labor, and manufacturing
expenses in job-order and process cost systems. The costing of
joint and by-products.

BU 363 TRANSCRIPTION 3 cr.

Prerequisite: BU 262.

Develop additional speed in taking dictation, with emphasis on
development of transcription skill.

BU364 OFFICE PRACTICE 3 cr.

Prerequisite: BU 271, Advanced Typewriting.

Advanced study of theory and practice in activities common to the
office — records management; handling of mail; bank, telephone,
and telegraph services; receiving callers; writing reports; dictating
and transcription equipment; bank, financial, and legal transactions;
shipping and receiving services; reference books; etc.

164 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

BU 439 BUSINESS INFORMATION SYSTEMS 3 cr.

Orientates student to philosophy and concepts of business Infor-
mation systems. Areas of problem definition, information eco-
nomics, information management, flow charting, truth table test-
ing, and documentation included.

BU 454 FEDERAL TAXES 3 cr.

Prerequisite: BU 352.

The intent is to acquaint students with Federal Income Tax Laws
as they affect individuals, single proprietorship, and partnerships.

BU 455 AUDITING 3 cr.

Prerequisite: BU 353.

Study of auditing theory and practical application of auditing
standards and procedures to the verification of accounts and
financial statements; working papers; and audit reports.

BUSINESS AND DISTRIBUTIVE
EDUCATION DEPARTMENT

DENNIS D. TIGER, CHAIRPERSON: BEAUMONT, BETTA,
BIANCO, GHESSIE, McCLELLAND, MAHAN, MOREAU,
PATTERSON, POLESKY, SHROCK, THOMAS, VARNER, WOOMER.

Degrees offered by the Business and Distributive Education
Department are the Bachelor of Science in Education with a
Business Education major and the Bachelor of Science in
Education with a Distributive Education major.
In addition to the 18 credits in business courses required of all
candidates for a degree from the School of Business, a core
program of 16 credits is required of all majors in the Business
and Distributive Education Department, as follows:

Core Program

Business

Business Org. and Management

Principles of Typewriting

Intermediate Typewriting

Principles of Selling

Machine Mathematics
Business Education
*BE 111 Foundations of Business Mathematics

BU 101
BU 131
BU 132
BU 333
*BU 335

3 cr.
2 cr.

2 cr.

3 cr.
3 cr.

3 cr.

* May be part of

iity's General Education requirement.

B. S. IN EDUCATION
(BUSINESS EDUCATION MAJOR)

The curriculum in Business Education prepares students for a
professional career in teaching office occupations. The Busi-
ness Education curriculum is designed with three areas of

School of Business - 165

concentration or fields of specialization. The three fields of
concentration are Accounting, Data Processing, and Stenogra-
phy. Students may pursue the work of the entire curriculum
or they may elect to pursue work according to their
aptitudes as follows:

1. The Complete Program leads to certification in all of the
high school business subjects. Those who possess aptitudes
that indicate success in Accounting, Data Processing, and
Secretarial work may pursue this complete program if
they wish. School administrators believe that the com-
plete program is desirable for breadth of certification
when teaching in the public schools of the Common-
wealth of Pennsylvania.

2. The Accounting Field includes all courses in the curricu-
lum listed under that heading and meets the requirements
for certification in Accounting and Typewriting.

3. The Secretarial Field includes all courses in the curricu-
lum listed under that heading and meets the requirements
for certification in Secretarial subjects and Typewriting.

4. The Data Processing Field includes all courses in the
curriculum listed under that heading and meets the require-
ments for certification in Accounting, Data Processing, and
Typewriting.

All Business Education majors are required to complete the
requirements for certification in at least two of the following
areas of certification: 1. Accounting, 2. Data Processing, 3.
Marketing, 4. Stenography, and 5. Typewriting.

Students pursuing the Accounting Field or Secretarial Field
may elect courses which will afford certification in a third area
of certification since the courses listed under these headings in
the curriculum only provide for certification in two areas.

In addition to the degree requirements previously outlined for
the School of Business and the Business and Distributive
Education Department, all majors in Business Education must
complete the following:

BU 271 Advanced Typewriting 2 cr.

BE 31 1 Methods of Teaching Business Courses 3 cr.

BE 312 Evaluative Techniques in Business

Courses 3 cr.

*EC 121 Principles of Economics I 3 cr.

■Mav be part of the University's General Education requirements.

Practical Business Experience

Before graduation, each student is encouraged to complete
the equivalent of 12 months of secretarial practice, account-
ing practice, data processing, clerical practice, or a combina-
tion of these. This experience should be in the field or fields
in which the student is contemplating certification and can
be acquired during summer vacations and in offices on the
campus during the regular school term.

Specialization in the several areas available to the Business
Education student is accomplished by taking the courses listed
as follows:

166 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Courses Required in the Secretarial Sequence

BU 261
BU 262
BU 363
BU364

Shorthand Theory
Shorthand Dictation
Transcription
Office Practice

Courses Required in the Accounting Sequence
BU 352 Corporate Accounting
BU 353 Cost Accounting

or
BU 454 Federal Taxes

Courses Required in the Data Processing Sequence

BU 340
BU 439
BM342
BU352
BU454

Electives
BU453
BU455

Business System Technology
Business Information Systems
Business Problem Application I
Corporate Accounting
Federal Taxes

Cost Accounting
Auditing

3 cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.

3 cr.
3 cr.

3 cr.

cr.

application of business mathematics include methods used to
compute interest, discounts, partial payments, discounting of notes
and drafts, depreciation, amortization, sinl<ing fund redemptions,
effective rate of interest, and preparation of statistical data.

E311 METHODS OF TEACHING 3 cr.

BUSINESS COURSES
Prerequisites: EP 302 and completion of at least one major area.
Methods of teaching shorthand, typewriting, bookkeeping, office
machines, and general business courses are presented. Unit plans,
lesson plans, and video-taped microteaching are emphasized.

E 312 EVALUATIVE TECHNIQUES IN 3 cr.

BUSINESS COURSES
Prerequisite: BE 31 1 .

Construction, administration, scoring, treatment and grading of
various types of tests; includes analysis of test results, remedial
teaching and other evaluation procedures.

1433 SUPERVISED WORK EXPERIENCE AND 6 cr.

SEMINAR IN OFFICE OCCUPATIONS
Students gain experience in selected office occupations. This
cooperative business experience is conducted by competent busi-
ness and University personnel. There is a weekly evening seminar.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

BE 111 FOUNDATIONS OF BUSINESS MATHEMATICS 3 cr.

Develops an understanding of numbers and a knowledge of funda-
mental concepts in arithmetic and algebra in the solution of
common and advanced problems encountered in business by the
businessman and consumer. Topics illustrating and emphasizing the

General Electives

BE 371 PERSONAL TYPEWRITING 1 cr.

AND DUPLICATING
In this beginning course in typewriting, students learn how to
touch type and use the spirit duplicator and mimeograph machines.
(Open to all students EXCEPT BE and DE majors and Office Man-
agement majors in the Business Management Department.)

School of Business - 167

B. S. IN EDUCATION

(DISTRIBUTIVE EDUCATION MAJOR)

The curriculum in Distributive Education is designed to pre-
pare students for a professional career teaching the distributive
occupations. Students following this program will be gradu-
ated as Teacher-Coordinators of Distributive Education and
will be also certified to teach certain courses in Business
Education.

Teaching in the field of Distributive Education combines the
personal satisfaction of teaching with the enjoyment of
public relations work in the distributive area of business —
retailing, wholesaling, and service enterprises. The student
who likes the prestige of teaching, along with the plus values
of working with business leaders and young people, will find
this a challenging and rewarding career. Distributive Educa-
tion presents a promising future for persons in the teaching
profession. With the recognition of the importance of distri-
bution to our national economy, this vocational field of
teaching is expanding rapidly.

In addition to the degree requirements previously outlined for
the School of Business and the Business and Distributive
Education Department, all Distributive Education majors must
complete the following:

BU 233 Marketing 3 or.

BU 332 Retail Management 3 or.

DE 310 Principles of Distributive Education 3 cr.

DE 313 Methods of Teaching Distributive

Education 3 cr.

DE 331 Modern Merchandising
DE 434 Work Experience and Seminar in
Distributive Education
*EC 121 Principles of Economics I

•May be part of the University's General Education requirements.

3 cr.

6 cr.
3 cr.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

DE 310 PRINCIPLES OF DISTRIBUTIVE EDUCATION 3 cr.

To acquaint prospective teacher-coordinators with objectives of
vocational distributive education, including state plan and curricu-
lum. To understand problems in organizing, administrating, and
supervising a complete cooperative program.

DE 313

3 cr.

METHODS OF TEACHING COURSES

IN DISTRIBUTIVE EDUCATION
Prerequisite: DE 310.

To acquaint students with basic principles of group and individual
instruction in various subject matter areas, as well as methods of
presentation. Students prepare unit plans, lesson plans, demonstra-
tions and evaluations.

DE 331 MODERN MERCHANDISING 3 cr.

Techniques for planning and controlling inventory, analyzing sales,
working with modern systems for handling cash, uses of color,
line and design. Practice in preparing merchandise display units.

DE 434

6cr.

SUPERVISED WORK EXPERIENCE AND
SEMINAR IN DISTRIBUTIVE EDUCATION
Prerequisite: BU 333.

Students gain experience in selected distributive occupations. This
cooperative business experience is conducted by competent busi-
ness and University personnel. There is a weekly evening seminar.

168 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

BUSINESS MANAGEMENT DEPARTMENT

donald j. bobbins, chairperson: breyer, burner,
cawley, cooper, fletcher, lindh.mawhinney.mcafoose,
McCaffrey, mcclure, pillion, plivelic, reifel, shildt,
spencer, stevenson, strock, weiers

This Department offers those who seek a career in the world
of business or industry an opportunity to pursue their interests
in any of six areas of specialization: Accounting, Systems
Analyst, Finance, Marketing, Personnel Management, or Gen-
eral Business. The degree offered by the Business Management
Department is the Bachelor of Science in Business Manage-
ment. The curriculum is generally similar for all during the first
two years. The choice of an area of specialization is necessary
prior to the start of the student's junior year.

The Accounting area provides the training necessary for a
person to enter the field of public accounting, accounting in
business or industry, or governmental accounting.

The Finance area provides specialized training for those
desiring positions in banking, brokerage, or insurance.

The Marketing area provides training for those interested In
advertising, marketing research, sales management, retailing
and the marketing service departments of wholesalers and
manufacturers.

The Personnel Management program is designed to prepare
students for eventual positions in personnel and related
management areas.

The Systems Analyst area provides training in business

computer technology and in the designing and implementa-
tion of management information systems.

The General Business area provides an opportunity for
students to pursue training in two or more of the previous
areas of specialization, but not to the extent permitted a
student concentrating in only one of these areas. It also
permits greater flexibility in obtaining minors from other
departments.

Each area provides for a variety of business, economics, or
business-related courses, designed to enrich the student's
understanding of the world of modern business.

The Department requires that two-thirds of a student's
electives be taken in Business or business-related courses.

In addition to the 18 credits in Business courses required of
all candidates for a degree from the School of Business, a
core program of 25-26 credits is required of all Business
Management majors, as follows;

Core Program

Business

BU 233 Marketing 3 cr.

Business Management

BM 201 Personnel Management 3 cr.

BM215 Business Statistics 3 cr.

Other
*MA011

Elementary Functions
and

3 cr.

School of Business — 169

•MA013

Calculus I for the Natural and
Social Sciences

4 cr.

'MA 013-015 Calculus I and II for the Natural

and Social Sciences 4 cr. each

*MA 362 Probability and Statistics 3 cr.

EC 121*122 Principles of Economics I and II 6 cr.

•May be part of the University's General Education requirement.

Courses required for the specific areas of specialization follow.

Accounting Sequence

In addition to the requirements previously outlined, require-
ments for specialization in Accounting are 12 more credits in
Business, 9 more credits in Business Management, and 6
more credits in Economics, as follows;
Business

BU 352 Corporate Accounting 3 cr.

BU 353 Cost Accounting 3 cr.

BU 454 Federal Taxes 3 cr.

BU 455 Auditing 3 cr.
Business Management

BM 241 Finance 3 cr.

BM 451 Advanced Principles of Accounting 3 cr.

BM 456 Advanced Cost Accounting 3 cr.
Economics

EC 325 Monetary Economics I 3 cr.

EC 330 Labor Economics 3 cr.
This program leaves 12 credits for electives.

Finance Sequence

In addition to the requirements previously outlined, require-
ments for specialization in Finance are 6 more credits in
Business, 24 more credits in Business Management and 6
more credits in Economics, as follows:
Business

BU 352 Corporate Accounting 3 cr.

BU 454 Federal Taxes 3 cr.
Business Management

BM 241 Finance 3 cr.

BM 380 Principles of Invest. 3 cr.

BM 381 Insurance I 3 cr.

BM 382 Principles of Real Estate 3 cr.

BM 383 Insurance II 3 cr.

BM 385 Securities & Commodities Markets 3 cr.

BM 481 Investment Analysis 3 cr.

BM 485 Financial Inst, and Markets 3 cr.
Economics

EC 325 Monetary Economics I 3 cr.

EC 330 Labor Economics 3 cr.
This program leaves 3 credits for electives.

Marketing Sequence

In addition to the requirements previously outlined, require-
ments for specialization in Marketing are 6 more credits in
Business, 21 more credits in Business Management and 6
more credits in Economics, as follows:
Business

BU 332 Retail Management 3 cr.

170 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

BU 352 Corporate Accounting

Business Management

3 cr.

BM 241

Finance

BM 331

Consumer Behavior

BM 332

Marketing Management

BM433

International Marketing

BM 434

Advertising

BM 435

Seminar — Cur. Market Problems

BM 438

Marketing Research

Economics

EC 325

Monetary Economics 1 ^

EC 330

Labor Economics

This program leaves 6 credits for electives.

Personnel Management Sequence

In addition to the requirements previously outlined, require-
ments for specialization in Personnel Management are 6 more
credits in Busiriess, 9 more credits in Business Management,
6 more credits in Economics, 3 credits in Sociology, and 3
credits in Psychology, as follows:

Business
BU 454

Federal Taxes

Business Management

BM 301 Training Management

BM 381 Insurance I

BM 383 Insurance II

BM 401 Case Studies in Personnel Management

3 cr.

3 cr.
3cr.
3cr.

3 cr.

BM 480

Economics
EC 325
EC 330

Psychology
PC 400

Practices and Processes of Collective

Bargaining

Monetary Economics I
Labor Economics

3 cr.

3 cr.
3 cr.

3 cr.

Industrial Psychology
This program leaves 9 credits for electives.

Systems Analyst Sequence

In addition to the requirements previously outlined, require-
ments for specialization as a Systems Analyst are 6 more
credits in Business, 24 more credits in Business Management,
and 3 credits in Computer Science, as follows;
Business

BU 352 Corporate Accounting

BU 439 Business Information Systems
Business Management

BM 241 Finance

BM 340 Business Systems Technology

BM 342 Bus. Problems AppI I

BM 441 Bus Prob Program

BM 442 Bus Prob AppI II

BM 443 Bus Systems Analysis I

BM 444 Bus Systems Analysis II

BM 445 Quant Methods - Operat Res
Computer Science

CO 110 Introduction to Computer Science 3 cr.

This program leaves 6 credits for electives.

cr.

School of Business —171

General Business Specialization

In addition to the requirements previously outlined, require-
ments for specialization in General Business are 6 more
credits in Business, 3 more credits in Business Management,
and 6 more credits in Economics, as follows:
Business

BU 352 Corporate Accounting 3 cr.

BU 454 Federal Taxes 3 cr.

Business Management

BM 241 Finance 3 cr.

Economics

EC 325 Monetary Economics I 3 cr.

EC 330 Labor Economics 3 cr.

This program leaves 24 credits for electives.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

BM 201 PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT 3 cr

Introduces and stresses basic policies and procedures required in
management of personnel, with emphasis on procuring, develop-
ing, maintaining, and utilizing employees for maximum efficiency.

BM 215 BUSINESS STATISTICS 3 cr.

Prerequisites: MA 362.

Objective is application of statistical methods, which are used in
guiding business decisions; emphasis is on classical decision theory
and Bayesian decision theory.

BM 241 FINANCE 3 cr.

Study of methods of securing and managing funds on short,
intermediate, and long-term bases; the financial analysis, planning,
and control of a corporation.

BM 301 TRAINING MANAGEMENT 3 cr.

Prerequisite: BM 201.

Principles, problems and procedures in planning, organizing, direct-
ing, and controlling training at all echelons of a business enter-
prise.

BM 331 CONSUMER BEHAVIOR 3 cr.

Prerequisites: BU 233, PC 201.

Survey of noteworthy contributions of behavioral sciences and
research of consumer purchasing and decision-making process,
with particular attention to formal and informal influence pat-
terns.

BM 332 MARKETING MANAGEMENT 3 cr.

Prerequisites: BU 233, BM 331.

Analysis of marketing and operational problems and policies
involved in planning, organizing, coordinating, and controlling a
business from a total marketing program.

BM 340 BUSINESS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: BU 339, 439; CO 300.

Reviews computer technology and its influence on the organiza-
tion and processing of data files, along with the input, output,
processing communications and storage devices.

BM 342 BUSINESS PROBLEM APPLICATION I 3 cr.

Prerequisites: BU 339, 439.

System design and programming of applications related to differ-
ent business areas utilizing card, taped, and disk files.

BM 380 PRINCIPLES OF INVESTMENTS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: BM 241.

Analysis of various types of securities and other forms of invest-
ment possibilities and a study of sound investment policies from a
corporate viewpoint. Factors influencing the general movement of
security prices and the return from investments are considered.

BM 381 INSURANCE I 3 cr.

Comprehensive study of that insurance which provides protection
against the economic loss caused by termination of earning

172 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

capacity. Analyzes benefits, unden/vriting, ratemaking, and legal
doctrines.
BM 382 PRINCIPLES OF REAL ESTATE 3 cr.

Study of the regulations, legal aspects and professional ethics of
the real estate business, including the area of financing, advertis-
ing, property valuation and appraisal and selling.

BM 383 INSURANCE II 3 cr.

Study of the hazards of underlying, the principles involved in, and
the protection provided by property and liability insurance,
including multiple line and "all risks" insurance, and corporate
suretyship.

BM 385 SECURITIES AND COMMODITIES MARKETS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: BM 241.

Study of the structure of security and connmodity markets; the
nature of speculative transactions and methods of trading; analysis
of pricing; and the objectives of security and commodity market
regulation.

BM 401 CASE STUDIES IN PERSONNEL 3 cr.

MANAGEMENT
Prerequisite: BM 201.

Actual and realistic case studies illustrating the principles, prac-
tices, and procedures involved in planning, organizing, and control-
ling the personal aspect of supervising employees.

BM 433 INTERNATIONAL MARKETING 3 cr.

Prerequisites: BU 233, BM 331.

International marketing is analyzed, with consideration given to
the significance of government regulation; organization structures
of export and import enterprises; and credit policies.

BM 434 ADVERTISING 3 cr.

Prerequisite: BU 233.

An introduction to the principles, practices, and creations of
advertising. The use of various media, legal, economic, social and
ethical aspects of advertising are also considered.

BM 435 SEMINAR IN CURRENT MARKETING 3 cr.

PROBLEMS
Prerequisites: BM 332, 438, 434.

A terminal course designed for majors in Marketing; considers
current literature in the field, case problems pertaining to the
total marketing effort, and actual problems of local companies.

BM 438 MARKETING RESEARCH 3 cr.

Prerequisite: BU 233.

The nature, methods, analysis, and application of present-day
marketing research techniques utilized in the solution of practical
marketing problems, studied through the use of case material and
outside research.

BM 441 BUSINESS PROBLEM PROGRAMMING 3 cr.

Prerequisites: BU 339, 340, 439; BM 342

The study of Business-oriented high-level languages of Cobol, and
RPG, and solving problems in accounting, marketing, statistics,
and finance.

BM 442 BUSINESS PROBLEM APPLICATION II 3 cr.

Prerequisites: BU 439; BM 340, 342.

Business-oriented information system involving magnetic tape and
indexed sequential disk files; creation, maintenance, and report-
writing functions are considered.

BM 443 BUSINESS SYSTEMS ANALYSIS I 3 cr.

Prerequisites: BU 339, 439, BM 340, 342.

Study of the techniques used in Systems Analysis, involving
systems definition, feasibility, quantitative, and evaluative tech-
niques of business.

BM 444 BUSINESS SYSTEMS ANALYSIS II 3 cr.

Prerequisites: BM 441, 442, 443.

Study of business sub-systems, such as production, inventory, and
marketing, with the requirement of a documented study of a
sub-system of an outside business.

School of Business -173

BM 445 QUANTITATIVE METHODS - 3 cr.

OPERATING RESEARCH
Prerequisites: BM 441, 442, 443.

Develops the computer programs necessary for business decision-
making techniques; intensive analysis of the decision-making pro-
cess: diagnosing problems; evaluation of alternative solutions,
projection of results and the choice of alternatives.

BM 451 ADVANCED PRINCIPLES OF ACCOUNTING 3 cr.

Prerequisite: BU 352.

Study of accounting problems of a specialized nature, including
the application of funds statement, consignments, installment
sales, receivership accounts, agency and branch accounting and
corporate combinations.

BM 456 ADVANCED COST ACCOUNTING 3 cr.

Prerequisite: BU 353.

Study of the theory, preparation, and use of budgets, the analysis
of cost variances, direct costing, and extensive analysis of various
cost-control and profit-planning programs.

BM 480 THE PRACTICES AND PROCESSES OF 3 cr.

COLLECTIVE BARGAINING
The role, function, and authority of negotiation committees,
techniques of negotiation, the negotiations agreement, the media-
tion process and the arbitration process will be analyzed through
mainly a case study approach.

BM 481 INVESTMENT ANALYSIS 3 cr.

Prerequisites: BU 352, BM 241, 380.

Integrates the work of the various courses in the finance areas and
familiarizes the student with the tools and techniques of research
in the different areas of investments.

BM 485 FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS AND MARKETS 3 cr.

Prerequisites: EC 325, BM 380.

Review of entire structure of financial institutions, money and
capital markets, of which the business enterprise is both a supply
and demand factor, and structure and dynamics of interest-rate
movements.

BM 490 DECISION MAKING IN BUSINESS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: Junior status.

A case approach to the analytical techniques and concepts neces-
sary in making business decisions concerning marketing, costs,
pricing, profits, competition, production, and capital management.

BM495 PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT INTERNSHIP 3-6 cr.

Practical experience within a personnel office.

BM 496 MARKETING INTERNSHIP 3-6 cr.

Practical experience in the marketing field.

BM497 ACCOUNTING INTERNSHIP 6 cr.

Practical experience with a public accounting firm.

Business Electives

66-2/3rds percent of your undesignated electives must be from the

following courses:

BU 101 BUSINESS ORGANIZATION AND 3 cr.

MANAGEMENT
(Restricted to Freshmen and Sophomores)

PC 400 INDUSTRIAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 cr.

SO 340 INDUSTRIAL SOCIOLOGY 3 cr.

Any 3 credit BU or BM course not requiring
a prerequisite or for which you have had the
prerequisite. 3 cr. each

Any non-required Economics course for
which you have fulfilled the prerequisite
requirements. 3 cr. each

Any business related course with permission
of Business Management Dept. Chairperson.

Non-Business Electives:

Any course listed above in the Social Science

and Humanities elective groups. 3 cr. each

Other non-business electives are available

with the approval of the Dean, School of

Business or the department chairman.

School of Continuing Education — 1 75

The School of Continuing Education

GEORGE W. BILICIC, DEAN

For a variety of reasons increasing numbers of American adults
will enroll in continuing education programs to pursue their
educational objectives during the rapidly changing final quar-
ter of the Twentieth Century. As a response to this need for
recurrent education, lUP has established the School of
Continuing and Non-resident Education.

This School provides opportunities for adults to participate in
short courses and community service programs offered
through the Community-University Study Series each spring,
summer and fall. It also offers tutoring, testing, and other
academic and advisement services to meet the needs of adult
learners. Assistance in career planning is also available.

Currently, criminology courses for credit are offered at a
number of locations in Western Pennsylvania through the
Criminology Extension Program, in cooperation with other
institutions of higher education. Additional extension pro-
grams in other subject areas (business, safety science, social
sciences, fine arts, etc.) are being developed as the School
expands its offerings.

The School encompasses a variety of centers to meet specific
needs. The Crime Study Center develops community-oriented
activities with a major emphasis on pre-professional and
in-service criminal justice training. In addition, the Center is a
vehicle for grant development, grant administration, manage-

ment consultation, research, and information exchange. Special
conferences and seminars, such as the Delinquency Control
Institute, are also designed by the Center on a state, regional,
and national scale. The Adult Education Center provides in-
service educational opportunities and instructional resources
for adult and continuing educators and staff development
programs for personnel who work with senior citizens in
Western Pennsylvania. The Adult Education Center also coop-
erates with school districts in promoting Adult Basic Educa-
tion (ABE) and High School Equivalency (GED) Programs.
The Center for Foreign Study presents inter-disciplinary
learning opportunities, foreign study tours, often through
consortia arrangements with other institutions of higher
education. The Institute for Local Government and Commu-
nity Assistance serves local elected and appointed officials and
agency personnel through conferences and seminars, consult-
ing and technical assistance services, and a newsletter and fact
sheets which are vehicles for information dissemination.

The School of Continuing Education coordinates and adminis-
ters continuing education conferences, institutes, and work-
shops for the University to respond to public needs. On the
basis of needs assessment and community interest, the School
designs continuing education and community service programs
for the general public and for special publics, such as women,
senior citizens, professional people, labor union members and

176 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

leaders, businessmen, local governmental and state officials,
volunteers, paraprofessionals, and other distinct audiences. An
example of this is a developing program, the Continuing
Education (Extension) Program for Business, Industry, and
Labor. The School has a deep interest in providing access to
lUP credit courses (through the Credit Classes Program and
Extension Programs) to mature adults beyond the normal
college age of 18—22 years who wish to continue their
education by enrolling in regular credit courses offered at the
Main Campus, the Branch Campuses, and Off-Campus loca-
tions. The School generates proposal-writing activities for the
support of adult or continuing education, community service,
and community development.

The School of Continuing and Non-resident Education offers
programs at the Main Campus in Indiana, at the Branch
Campuses in Punxsutawney and Kittanning, and in other
communities in the lUP service area and, thereby, contributes
to extension of the resources of the University to the people
of the State. Both credit and non-credit programs are available.
The Continuing Education Unit (CEU) is awarded for credit-
free programs that meet established criteria. The School of
Continuing and Non-resident Education does not have a
permanent faculty of its own. The School attracts resource
people as needed from the community, the University, and
other educational institutions.
Programs in the School of Continuing Education:

Community-University Studies Program

Academic Services and Testing Center

Center for Foreign Study

Foreign Student Advisory

Criminology Extension Program

Continuing Education Conferences and Institutes

Credit Classes Program

General Extension Program

CRIME Study Center

Adult Education Center

Institute for Local Government and Community Assistance

Older Americans Program/Aging Projects

Programs for Business, Industry and Labor

New and Developing Programs

THE BRANCH CAMPUSES

ROBERT H. DOERR, DIRECTOR
ARMSTRONG BRANCH CAMPUS

NORMAN T. STORM, ACTING DIRECTOR
PUNXSUTAWNEY BRANCH CAMPUS

lUP operates two branch campuses, one in Punxsutawney, 28
miles north of Indiana Campus, and one in Kittanning, 28
miles west of the Indiana Campus. The first branch campus
was established in September, 1962, in Punxsutawney. The
following year the Armstrong County Campus in Kittanning
was opened. Over 200 students are enrolled at the Punxsu-
tawney Campus and 550 students at Armstrong County
Campus.

Both campuses have University faculty members who teach
full time at the branch campuses. To meet additional
curriculum needs, other faculty from the main campus travel

School of Continuing Education -177
Branch Campuses

to the branch campuses. The branches provide one to two full
years of college work which, if satisfactory, is transferable to
the main campus of lUP or to other accredited colleges.
Control of the branch campuses is directly vested with the
Indiana University Administration and Board of Trustees.
Advisory Boards from the respective areas identify local needs.
Both branch campuses carry full accreditation as integral parts
of the undergraduate programs of lUP. This means that
courses offered at the branch campuses are of the same quality
as those offered at the main campus.

Programs of Study

The branch campuses of lUP offer basic general education
courses in most majors in the various undergraduate schools of
the University. Thus students may schedule a full program for
the freshman and sophomore years by pursuing work that will
fulfill these general education requirements. In addition to
these required courses a number of electives are offered in
many fields.

In some majors, the student will be able to complete only one
year's work at a branch campus instead of the two years which
would qualify him for junior status; hence it will be necessary
for him to continue his studies at the main campus after the
first year. This is true of students majoring in highly
specialized fields. In any event, no student accepted at either of
the branch campuses is eligible for transfer to the main campus
at Indiana until he has completed two semesters and has
achieved the necessary grade point average.
Students find many advantages in remaining at the branch

campuses for two years providing they can obtain a full
program of University credit. A smaller student body and a
closer relationship among faculty members, administration,
and students at the branch campuses are very beneficial to
students.

Faculty advisors and administrators at the branch campuses
are available to advise students on their instructional program
and the proper time for continuing at the Indiana Campus
whether it be after two, three or four semesters.

Criminology Associate Degree Program

This special two-year program in Criminology is offered only
at the branch campuses and is not offered on the main campus
of lUP. When a student is accepted for admission into this
two-year program, it is understood that he will remain in the
particular program at the branch campus until it is completed.
It is further understood that the student in this special
two-year program may not transfer into any other major
offered by the University until completion of this program. At
that time, the student may apply for admission into a
four-year baccalaureate degree program according to the
availability of openings on the main campus of lUP. Admission
is not guaranteed. If accepted, however, the credits earned in
the two-year program will apply toward the four-year degree
program in Criminology.

Admission

Any prospective student who wishes to attend either of the
branch campuses instead of the Indiana Campus may apply for
admission by requesting an application from the Admissions

178 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Office, or from the Director of either branch campus. The same
standards and requirements used for admission at the main
campus are applied at both University branch campuses.

Housing

Both branch campuses have privately-owned residence halls for
students living beyond commuting distance. Students are free
to choose their housing from all available sources which
include the privately owned residence halls and private homes
or apartments in the community. At the Punxsutawney
Campus, the Punxsutawney Area College Trust maintains two
residence halls: Pact Hall (women) and Trust Hall (men).
There are two privately-owned residence halls at the Arm-
strong County Campus as well as rooms and apartments in
private homes in the community adjacent to the branch
campus. A list of rooms and apartments is available in each
campus directors office.

Both branch campuses have residence halls with integral
laundry facilities.

Food Service

Each branch campus has its own dining hall within the
residence hall. Meals are served seven days a week during the
time when the University is in session. Residence hall students
as well as students living in private homes and apartments may
make arrangements to take meals in the dining halls. The
dining service is operated by the ARA Slater Food Service.

Libraries

The Armstrong County Campus library, an integral part of

Academic Hall, has more than 18,000 volumes. In addition,
the library provides microfilm, 150 periodicals, and language
and shorthand tapes and records. All books and magazines are
displayed on open stacks. The library which seats about 100
students is open 65 hours per week.

The Punxsutawney library contams more than 12,000 vol-
umes as well as 100 periodicals, recordings of music, poetry
and dramas. There are 59 titles available on microfilm in
addition to The New York Times, 1965-1970. The Punxsu-
tawney library is open 56 hours a week.

The University employs professional librarians for both branch
campuses. The libraries at the branch campuses are especially
practical since the volumes are geared for the specific
curricula. If volumes and other materials are not immediately
available, the general holdings of the Rhodes R. Stabley
Library on the Indiana campus are available to the students
through inter-library loan.

Extra-Curricular Activities — Armstrong
County Campus

A large part of the extra-curricular activities at the Arm-
strong County Campus takes place in the Student Union
which adjoins the two dormitories and the Academic build-
ing. The Union is a two story building, the first floor of
which is equipped for such activities as pool, ping pong, and
dancing. The second floor is furnished as a lounge with
television and a piano. Movies are scheduled bi-weekly and
dances are scheduled on alternate Fridays.

School of Continuing Education
Branch Campuses

Each Wednesday from 7:00 to 10;00 P.M. the students may
participate at the local YMCA in a Gym-Swim sponsored by
the branch campus and supervised by college faculty. The
Gym-Swim physical activity includes swimming, gymnastics,
volleyball, and basketball.

Each year two semi-formal dances for students and faculty
are held, one during the Christmas season and the other in
the Spring. A fall outing at the University Lodge on the
outskirts of Indiana is supervised by faculty members. All
three functions are organized and sponsored by student
government.

The students of the Armstrong County Campus are encour-
aged to attend the University Artists-Lecture Series on the
Indiana campus. Bus transportation is provided for those
students who wish to attend these monthly activities.

Many of the students are active in Women's Judicial Board,
Student PSEA, Big Brother and Big Sister, Newman Club,
and other branch campus activities.

The churches, social and civic organizations of the area invite
and encourage the students to take an active part in their
projects and activities.

Extra Curricular Activities — Punxsutawney Campus

The newly completed Student Union building is the scene of a
major portion of extra-curricular activities at the Punxsu-
tawney Campus. The new Union provides facilities for dances,
pool, ping-pong, movies and also has a lounge area equipped

with color television and piano. This building is expected to
re-activate the drama club since it provides more suitable
facilities for plays and musicals.

Outstanding functions of the school year are the Christmas
and Spring semi-formal dinner dances and an informal party
at the University Lodge held in conjunction with the Kittan-
ning Campus.

A campus van facilitates the transporting of small groups of
students for such events as intramural athletic activities to
both Main Campus and the Kittanning Campus. Bus transpor-
tation is provided for larger groups of students wishing to
attend artist series performances, athletic events and other
Main Campus activities.

Various clubs are active on the Punxsutawney Campus,
especially the Circle K which is the college division of
Kiwanis International. Circle K participates in many worth-
while community service projects. The elected Student
Government supervises and arranges for all extra-curricular
activities on the campus.

The churches of the area invite and encourage students to
take an active part in their functions and the Coalition for
Christian Outreach spransors a person to spend time with the
students giving spiritual help and guidance to those desiring

it.

Rules and Regulations Concerning Student Behavior

Students at the Branch Campuses are subject to the same
rules and regulations as students on the main campus.

180 - Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Fees

Branch Campus students pay the same basic fees as main
campus students.

CONTINUING EDUCATION

The School of Continuing Education plays a significant role in
programming criminology extension classes, community-
university studies classes (non-credit), and academic work-
shops and institutes in the Punxsutawney and Kittanning
Areas. While meeting the needs of the traditional students in
the Criminology Extension Program; the School is also
responsive to the needs of the local community through credit
and non-credit activities.

A representative of the School maintains office hours at both
branch campuses.

COURSE OFFERINGS

AT THE BRANCH CAMPUSES

Anthropology -Sociology Department
AN 110 Intro to Anthropology
SO 151 Principles of Sociology

Art Department

AR 101 Introduction to Art

AR 116 Western Art: Renaissance to Baroque

Biology Department

Bl 103 General Biology I
Bl 104 General Biology II

Business Department

BU 101 Business Organization and Management

BU 221 Introduction to Accounting

BU 233 Marketing

BU 235 Business Law I

BU 251 Intermediate Accounting

Chemistry and Physics Department

SC 105 Physical Science I

SC 106 Physical Science II

Criminology Department

CR 101 General Administration of Justice

CR 102 Criminology

CR 301 Criminal Law I

CR 302 Criminal Law II

CR 201 Police Administration I

CR 202 Police Administration II

CR 310 Criminal Investigation

CR 340 Crime Prevention

CR 350 Techniques of Interviewing

CR 370 Community Relations

CR 431 Etiology of Delinquent Behavior

CR 432 Treatment and Control of Delinquency

CR 440 Institutional Treatment of the Offender

CR 445 Non-Institutional Treatment of the Offender

CR 490 Crime in Modern Society

Economics Department

EC 101 Basic Economics

EC 121 Principles of Economics

School of Continuing Education - 181
Branch Campuses

English Department

EN 101 English I

EN 102 English II

EN 103 Introduction to Theater

EN 201 English III

EN 358 Modern American Fiction
Foreign Language Department

SP 151 Spanish I

SP 152 Spanish II

SP 251 Spanish III

SP 252 Spanish IV

FR 151 French I

FR 152 French II

FR 251 French III

FR 252 French IV

GM 151 German

Geography Department

GE 101 World Geography

GE 251 Geog of United States and Canada
Health and Physical Education Department

HE 101 Health

History Department

HI 101 Hist of Civilization I

HI 102 Hist of Civilization II

HI 104 Hist of U.S. and Pa. II
Home Economics Department

CS 113 Management and Equipment

CS 315 Family Finance and Consumer Economics

Mathematics Department

MA Oil Elementary Functions

MA 013 Calculus I (Non-Math and Non-Physics Majors)

MA 101 Foundations of Math

MA 1 1 1 Calculus I (Math Majors)

MA 160 Math for Elementary Teaching I

MA 250 Math for Elementary Teaching II

MA 362 Probability and Statistics
Military Science Department

MS 101 World Military History (Fresh)

MS 102 American Military History (Fresh)

MS 203 Fundamentals of Tactical Operations
With Applied Terrain Analysis &
Military Topography (Soph)

MS 204 National Security and Concept of Force (Soph)
Music Department

MU 101 Introduction to Music
Philosophy Department

PH 110 World Religions

PH 120 Intro to Philosophy

PH 221 Logic I — General Logic

PH 222 Ethics
Political Science Department

PS 111 American Politics

PS 101 World Politics
Psychology Department

PC 101 General Psychology

EP 302 Educational Psychology

PC 354 Developmental Psychology

School of Education - 183

The School of Education

CHARLES M. KOFOID, DEAN

The departments of the School of Education offer programs
leading to the degree of Bachelor of Science in Education,
the degree of Master of Education, and the doctoral program
leading to the degree of Doctor of Education in Elementary
Education. Appropriately, all programs completed in the
School of Education lead to certification for public school
teaching or supervision in the Commonwealth of Pennsyl-
vania.

SUMMARY OF PROGRAMS OFFERED

Elementary Education

Secondary Education
•English

Communication
•Biology
•Chemistry
•Earth and Space Science

General Science
•Mathematics
•Physics

•Physics-Mathematics
•Comprehensive Social Studies

French

German

Russian
•Spanish

Latin

Bachelor of Science in Education
Master of Education
Doctor of Education
Bachelor of Science in Education
•Master of Education

Counselor Education

Educational Psychology

Dental Hygiene
Public School Nursing
Reading Specialist

Special Education

Education for Mentally

Retarded
Rehabilitation Education
Speech Pathology and

Audiology

Certification Areas
Undergraduate

Education for Safe
Living — Driver Education
Graduate

Instructional Media

Specialist
School Psychologist
School Social Worker

Master of Education
see Graduate School
Master of Education
see Graduate School
Bachelor of Science i
Bachelor of Science i
Master of Education
see Graduate School

(for details.
Bulletin)
(for details.
Bulletin)
n Education
n Education
(for details.
Bulletin)

Bachelor of Science

Master of Education

Bachelor of Science in Education

Master of Education

Certificate (for details, see School
of Health Services)

Certificate (for details, see
Graduate School Bulletin)
Certificate
Certificate

DEGREE REQUIREMENTS

All degree candidates in the School of Education (except for
three special programs) must complete satisfactorily a mini-
mum of 124 credits in three categories: General Education, a

184 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

specialized major field, and professional education:

General Education — 52 to 55 credits, described under
requirements for Graduation.

Specialized major field — requirements listed under Depart-
ment offerings.

Professional Education — 29 credits, as follows:
EP 302 Educational Psychology
EP 377 Educ. Tests & Measurements
FE 302 History and Philosophy of

American Education
LR301 Audio-Visual Education
Methods Course — (Teaching of ,

see under major department offerings)
One semester student teaching, including

professional Practicum and School Law

The three special programs are those leading to the Bachelor
of Science in Education in Dental Hygiene, in Public School
Nursing, and in Rehabilitation Education. For each program,
the degree requirements are listed in the pages following.

SOPHOMORE SCREENING FOR

JUNIOR STANDING

School of Education majors are screened at the close of the
sophomore year for Junior Standing approval. The student
must have earned a minimum of 57 semester hours, achieved
a 2.0 cumulative quality point average, successfully com-

cr.

pleted English I and English II and received speech clearance
and department approval.

STUDENT TEACHING

Student teaching is designed to be a learning experience. The
student teacher is a student learning to teach under the
supervision of a full time cooperating teacher in an off campus
center. A University Supervisor is also assigned to work with
individual student teachers and cooperating teachers
In general, students have 56 semester hours in general
education, 40 semester hours in their subject area of specializa-
tion and 14 semester hours of professional education.
Students in their first semester of the senior year will not have
completed all of this work. Twelve semester hours of student
teaching (except in Home Economics Education where it is 8
semester hours) and 2 semester hours of Professional Prac-
ticum and School Law provide the student a total of 28
semester hours of professional education at the time of
graduation.

PROFESSIONAL PRACTICUM

Professional Practicum, including School Law, is a seminar
type course, (except Elementary Education majors schedule
this in their department prior to student teaching) scheduled
concurrently with student teaching and designed to help
student teachers: (a) get an overview and understanding of the
total school program, (b) gain knowledge of Pennsylvania
School laws governing education, and (c) obtain breadth and
depth in understanding the role of classroom teachers in their
particular areas of specialization.

School of Education - 185

THE UNIVERSITY SCHOOL

The University School provides for a program of instruction
from kindergarten through sixth grade, thus affording oppor-
tunities for professional laboratory experiences and research
activities. Professional laboratory experiences are planned
and scheduled with the Director of Professional Laboratory
Experiences. Research activities are scheduled with the Direc-
tor of the University School.

THE UNIVERSITY CLINICS

Three clinics under the supervision of the School of Educa-
tion offer diagnostic testing and remedial service and instruc-
tion in the following areas:

PSYCHOLOGICAL CLINIC - diagnosis of academic and
behavior problems and personal, vocational, and educational
counseling.

READING CLINIC — diagnosis and remedial instruction for
reading and spelling disabilities and instruction for the
improvement of present skills.

SPEECH AND HEARING CLINIC - diagnosis of speech
problems, hearing tests and evaluations, and a regular pro-
gram of therapy.

Regularly enrolled students at the University may avail
themselves of these services without charge.

In addition, a CHILD STUDY CENTER provides psychologi-
cal testing for any pre-school and school-aged child within
the area served by the University.

COMMONWEALTH REQUIREMENTS FOR
TEACHER CERTIFICATION

Certification standards for Commonwealth public school
teachers are established by the Department of Education and
the State Council on Education. The Chairman of the
Department in which the student is majoring must verify to
the office of the School of Education that all qualifications
are met. The Dean of the School is authorized to determine
final approval for certification.

Applicants for certification are required by State Law to be
of good mental and physical health, not in the habit of using
either narcotic drugs in any form or intoxicating beverages
to excess.

The Instructional I certificate is issued to the beginning
teacher upon graduation from the School of Education.
With the addition of 24 semester hours of post-baccalaureate
work and successful teaching experience, students may
acquire the Instructional II certificate, leading to permanent
certification to teach in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.
Graduates of approved programs in non-teaching areas, such
as Dental Hygiene and Public School Nursing, are issued an
Educational Specialist I certificate.

GRADUATE PROGRAMS

Information descriptive of M.Ed., Ed.D. and Teaching Intern-
ship programs may be found in the current issue of the
Graduate School Bulletin.

186 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

DENTAL HYGIENE

On November 17, 1950, the Board of Presidents of the
State Colleges approved a curriculum for dental hygienists
leading to the degree of Bachelor of Science in Education,
upon fulfillment of the following:

(1) The satisfactory completion of an accredited 2-year
curriculum for the preparation of dental hygienists, approved
by the State Dental Council and Examining Board.

(2) Licensing of the student by the proper state authorities.

(3) In addition, the satisfactory completion of 60 credits of
professional and general education courses.

102 English I and II
English III

Introduction to Art, Music
or Theater

Anglo America
102 History of Civilization I or II
History of U.S. and Pa. II
American Politics
Principles of Economics
Principles of Sociology
Hist and Phil of American
Education
General Psychology
Educational Psychology

101 and

EN 201

101

MU 101

101

251

101 and

104

111

121

151

302

PC 101

302

cr.

PC 300
LR 301

Electives
Total

The Psychology of Adjustment
Audio-Visual Education

3 cr.
3 cr.

14 credits
60 credits

In each category above, credit may be given for equivalent
courses in the two-year dental hygiene curriculum. In such
cases, students may increase their electives by the number of
semester hours so credited.

Electives may be chosen with the approval of the Dean from
any field or curriculum offered at the college in which the
student is enrolled.

Dental hygienists who have had less than two years of
special training on the basis of which they have been
licensed by the State Dental Council and Examining Board
will pursue additional courses to fulfill the requirements for
the degree.

School of Education — 187
Educational Psychology

EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY DEPARTMENT

BRUCE A. MEADOWCROFT, CHAIRPERSON: ANGELONI, BAHN,
CUTLER, DeFABO, HAYS, HELMRICH, LEVENTRY, QUIRK,
SHANK, YANUZZI.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

Professional Education Courses

3 cr

EP 302 EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY

Prerequisite: PC 101.

(Required of all Education majors — It is recommended that this
course be taken immediately prior to the student teaching experi-
ence.)

Designed to promote better understanding of principles of psy-
chology governing human behavior, with particular emphasis on
their relation to learner, learning process, and learning situation in
an educational environment.

EP 377

3 cr.

EDUCATIONAL TESTS AND

MEASUREMENTS
Prerequisite: PC 101.

(Recommended that this course be taken immediately prior to
student teaching experience.)

Designed to acquaint students with major methods and techniques
of evaluation used to assess and report growth, development, and
academic achievement of individuals in an educational environ-
ment. Includes interpretation of standardized test information and
basic research techniques.

General Electives or for Instructional II Certification

EP 372 PSYCHOLOGY OF CHILDHOOD EDUCATION 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EP 302.

Emphasizes relationship which physical, social, emotional, and
intellectual development have on theory and practice of childhood
education.

EP 373 PSYCHOLOGY OF ADOLESCENT EDUCATION 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EP 302.

Study of significant characteristics, behavior, and educational and

social problems of adolescents.
EP 376 BEHAVIOR PROBLEMS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EP 302.

Examination of emotional and social aspects of behavior problems

encountered in classroom situations and potential remedial

techniques.
EP 378 LEARNING 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EP 302.

Explores learning theories and educational application jn the

classroom.
EP 380 MENTAL HEALTH IN THE CLASSROOM 3 cr.

Prerequisite: EP 302.

Considers human adjustment and mental health in relation to

causative factors and explores dynamics of personal and inter-
personal relationships.

EP 383 EDUCATION OF THE 3 cr.

DISADVANTAGED CHILD
Prerequisite: EP 302.

Acquisition of necessary understandings of physiological, psy-
chological, and social implications relevant to working with and
teaching disadvantaged child.

EP 384 TUTORIAL EXPERIENCE IN THE 3 cr.

PUBLIC SCHOOLS
Prerequisite: instructor permission.

Provides student with tutorial experience in the public schools
with professional supervision.

EP481 SPECIAL TOPICS IN 3 cr.

EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY
Prerequisite: Department Chairman permission.
Provides opportunity for students to investigate in depth an area
of Educational Psychology under professional supervision.

188 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

ELEMENTARY EDUCATION DEPARTMENT

ROBERT L. KING, CHAIRPERSON; BAKER, BARTHA, A. DAVIS,
B. DAVIS, DeCICCO, DORSEY, ELLIOTT, GLOTT, KUHNS, LOTT,
McFEELY, MILLWARD, MOTT, REILLY, RI2ZO, STUART,
WILLIAMS.

Requirements for a degree in Elementary Education, in
addition to the University's General Education requirements
and 24 credits in Professional Education, are 27 credits in
Elementary Education and a concentration of at least 18
credits in one of the following academic areas: early child-
hood education, English, French, geography, German,
history, mathematics, science, social studies, or Spanish.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

Required Courses in Elementary Education

EL 211 MUSIC FOR THE ELEMENTARY GRADES 2 cr.

Geared for elementary education students. Includes basic ideas for
understanding, development, and confidence for future classroom
teachers and their pupils in areas of music education.

EL 213 ART FOR THE ELEMENTARY GRADES 2 cr.

The creative use of art materials and an understanding of develop-
ment of capacities of children through art.

EL 215 CHILD DEVELOPMENT 3 cr.

Survey of human development, from conception to adolescence,
in terms of basic scientific data. Development, growth, and
behavior studied and their implications for home, school, and
community considered.

EL 221 CHILDREN'S LITERATURE 3 cr.

Acquisition of a wide acquaintance with children's literature, old

and new. Poetry selections, annotated stories, and bibliographies
will be assembled. Ways and means to develop, stimulate, and
guide children's reading of literature presented. Principles and
techniques of successful story-telling studied and practiced.

EL 222 TEACHING OF READING 3 cr.

Systematic coverage of teaching of reading, including methods,
techniques and materials, from first through sixth grades.

EL 312 TEACHING OF ELEMENTARY SCIENCE 3 cr.

Emphasis placed upon science as it relates to child and curricu-
lum, planning for teaching science, and recent innovations in
science teaching. Course offered on the block only.

EL 313

3 cr.

TEACHING MATHEMATICS IN THE

ELEMENTARY SCHOOL
Prerequisites: MA 160 and MA 250.

Recent developments in curriculum and methods of instruction of
contemporary elementary school mathematics programs. Students
will become acquainted with books, materials and other resources
helpful to prospective teachers. Includes observations of master
teachers.

EL 314 TEACHING OF HEALTH AND 2 cr.

PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Games, stunts, rhythms, relays, tumbling, dances, and skills suit-
able for elementary school child. Teaching of health in elementary
school is emphasized, including methods, materials and lesson
planning.

EL 411 TEACHING OF SOCIAL STUDIES 3 cr.

Overview of social studies in elementary school. Includes study of
objectives, trends, areas of content, patterns and principles of
organization and techniques of teaching. Variety of learning
experiences and matherials used and evaluated.

EL 413 TEACHING LANGUAGE ARTS 3 cr.

Techniques for teaching, oral and written communication, spelling.

School of Education - 189
Elementary Education

handwriting, vocabulary development, listening, and linguistics for
Elementary Education students. Evaluates recent trends and
research.

ED 423 PROFESSIONAL PRACTICUM, 3 cr.

INCLUDING SCHOOL LAW
Series of conferences and related activities to prepare students for
actual teaching experiences. Parallels student teaching experience
in junior and senior years.

Elective Courses in Elementary Education

EL 212 TEACHING OF MUSIC IN THE 3 cr.

ELEMENTARY GRADES
Prerequisite: EL 211.

Continuation of skills and understandings as developed in El 211,
with emphasis on methods and materials for upper grades. Addi-
tional opportunities for growth in music reading and part singing
are provided. Correlation of music with other areas.

EL 214 TEACHING ART IN THE 3 cr.

ELEMENTARY GRADES
Prerequisite; EL 213.

In-depth experiences in two- or three-dimensional materials rela-
tive to art and credit for elementary school child.

EL 330 PROBLEMS IN ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 3 cr.

Prerequisite: ED 302.

For in-service teachers and those working toward permanent
certification. Formulation of solutions to problems of organization
and instruction in elementary school; in-depth study of teacher-
pupil-parent interrelationships.

EL 351

3 cr.

CREATIVE ACTIVITIES IN THE

ELEMENTARY SCHOOL
Provides student with a wide range of creative experiences in
fields of art, crafts, music, rhythmics, dramatics and games in

elementary school. Stress is placed upon need to help children in
developing their capacities for creative expression in these areas.

EL 352 DIAGNOSTIC AND REMEDIAL READING 3 cr.

Causes of reading disability; methods of diagnosis; procedures and
materials for remedial work, group and individual.

EL 353 PRE-SCHOOL EDUCATION 3 cr.

Principles and practices of guiding learning experiences of kinder-
garten student. Special attention given to observations, kinder-
garten program and its curriculum, materials, and methods of

instruction.

EL 355 GUIDANCE IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS 3 cr.

Study and discussion center about child himself — his characteris-
tics, needs, problems, materials, and relationship with others —
and around techniques and procedures for identifying, studying,
and giving help to children.

EL 451 TEACHING OF READING IN THE 3 cr.

PRIMARY GRADES
The teaching of developmental reading, consistent with child
growth, in primary grades. Methods and techniques for readiness,
word perception, comprehension, work-study skills, independent
reading in both group and individualized approaches studied.

EL 452 SOCIAL STUDIES IN THE PRIMARY GRADES 3 cr.

Prerequisite; EL 41 1.

Examination of content, objectives and resource materials for
social studies in kindergarten through third grade. Research prob-
lems examined and representative units developed.

EL 461 ORGANIZATION OF THE ELEMENTARY 3 cr.

SCHOOL AND ITS CURRICULUM
Study of organization of elementary school from standpoint of
curriculum design and development. Role of teacher as it relates
to evaluation, improvement, and development of elementary
school curriculum. Designed for those who have completed stu-
dent teaching or are postgraduates.

190 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION DEPARTMENT

EL 462 INNOVATIONS IN ELEMENTARY 3 cr.

EDUCATION
Study of innovations which influence and direct educational
objectives of modern elementary school and its organization.
Educational innovations dealing with curriculum, school organiza-
tion, and materials of instruction. Designed for those who have
completed student teaching or are postgraduates.

EL 463 WORKSHOP IN ELEMENTARY TEACHING 3 cr.

Prerequisite: At least one student teaching experience.
Designed for in-service teachers and those who are preparing to
work with elementary school children, including elementary edu-
cation majors who have had at least one student teaching experi-
ence. Course provides for investigation of subject matter, mate-
rials, methods and procedures used in modern elementary class-
room. Emphasis placed upon observation and participation in
programs currently being demonstrated in the University School.

Graduate Programs

Programs leading to the M.Ed, and Ed.D. degrees are described in the
current issue of the Graduate School Bulletin. For a limited number
of Elementary Education graduates, an internship program leading to
the Master of Education degree is offered.

GERARD C. PENTA, CHAIRPERSON: CHU, MERRYMAN,
ROTIGEL, THIBADEAU, YOUCIS

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

Professional Education Courses

FE 302 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF 3 cr.

AMERICAN EDUCATION
Promotes understanding of modern educational system through
study of historical changes in instructional processes and ideas.
Emphasis on study of educational beliefs and points of view;
fostering of critical thinking concerning role of school in our
social structure; meaning of democracy; the teacher and his
profession, and methods and objectives of school. (Required of all
students in Education.)

FE 422 SCHOOL LAW 2 cr.

Provides interpretation of school law as it pertains to needs of the
teacher.

General Electives (Open to Juniors and Seniors)

FE 454 PUBLIC SCHOOL ADMINISTRATION 3 cr.

Designed to acquaint the teacher with administration and organi-
zation of American public school. Consideration given to cultural
role of schools and decision-making in operation of schools.
Functions and methods of all professional personnel in operation
and improvement of schools also considered.

FE 455 COMPARATIVE EDUCATION 3 cr.

Comparative analysis of educational features of some Western
European, "underdeveloped" and Communist nations. Develop-
ment of insights into American educational ideas and practices.

School of Education
Foundations of Education

FE 456 ISSUES AND TRENDS IN EDUCATION 3 cr.

Examination of important current issues in American education. A
critical analysis of trends in educational innovation.

FE 457 SECONDARY SCHOOL CURRICULUM 3 cr.

Examination of social diagnosis for curriculum development, cur-
riculum principles and procedures, patterns of organization, and
curriculum issues.

FE 599

3 cr.

INTERNATIONAL EDUCATION STUDIES

PROGRAM
Study of various peoples through their cultural settings and
educational systems. On-site visitation to selected schools and
other social agencies and institutions, seminars with school offi-
cials, and directed readings. Undergraduate or graduate credit.

Sequence in Urban Education

3 cr.

FE 458 ORIENTATION TO TEACHING IN

URBAN CENTERS
Gives students understanding of children and youth in urban
centers, where specialized knowledge of learning and behavior
problems is required. Instructional personnel are experienced
teachers at elementary and secondary levels actively engaged in
urban education. Emphasis on developing understanding of special
needs of disadvantaged child and how origin of attitudes and
values affects relationship which exists between students and
teachers. Special attention given to practical application of theo-
retical information to problems of urban education. Field trips are
an essential aspect of course.

FE 440 FIELD EXPERIENCES IN URBAN CENTERS 6 cr.

Provides specialized experience for students desiring to teach in
inner-city schools. Participants should have completed student
teaching requirements at undergraduate level. Aspects to be
emphasized include physical characteristics of community, back-

ground and aspirations of children and youth and specialized
teacher competencies; classroom management, planning, instruc-
tional materials, teaching strategies, and evaluations. Students
encouraged to take FE 458 as prerequisite. Records of compre-
hensive experiences in urban areas will be taken into consideration
in making student teaching assignments. Schools selected for
student teaching experience located in Pittsburgh.

FE 482 INTERPRETING URBAN FIELD 3 cr.

EXPERIENCES
Evaluation of learning and behavior problems encountered during
student teaching experience in urban schools. Flexible approach
stressed to encourage wide range of investigation and exploration
of psychological and sociological problems as they affect educa-
tion. Supervision and guidance for investigating specific problems
provided by specialists from psychology, sociology and education
who will function as resource personnel, providing direction
enabling students to combine experiences gained by teaching in
urban schools with recent and pertinent theoretical information.

Graduate courses offered by this Department include Histori-
cal, Philosopliicai, Social and Comparative Foundations of
Education. For specific information concerning these
courses, see the current edition of the Graduate School
Bulletin.

192 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

DEPARTMENT OF LEARNING RESOURCES
AND MASS MEDIA

DANIEL V. MATTOX, JR., CHAIRPERSON: JULIETTE, KLING-
INSMITH, LAVENBURG, LESNESKIE, MaclSAAC, SARGENT

The department serves pre-service teachers and other stu-
dents who are required to complete the basic course in
Audio Visual Education, LR 301. In addition, many students
each year take such elective courses as photography, motion
picture, radio and television production.

Students may declare a Minor in Media by obtaining the
approval of their Major adviser and the chairman of the
Learning Resources Department. Eighteen semester hours of
credit from the courses described below are required for the
minor. At least one course from each of the following blocks
must be taken; A. LR 301, 303, 482, 480; B. LR 371, 471,
472, 443, 480; C. LR 444, 445, 447, 450, 480 and D. LR 358,
373, 481 and 480.

The department also offers a Master of Education in Media
degree and a Media Specialist Certificate. Refer to the
current Graduate School Catalog for details. Undergraduate
degrees in media are not required for graduate training.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

LR 301 AUDIO VISUAL EDUCATION 3 cr.

(Professional course required of all students in Education)
Prerequisite: PC 101, EPC 201 and Junior Standing
Preservice teachers gain competencies in selecting, using and
evaluating audio-visual machines and materials. Performance-based

activities in instructional design, materials production, machines
operation and related learning resources activities relevant to
prospective teaching experiences stressed.

LR 303 DESIGN AND WRITING FOR MEDIA

PRODUCTION 3cr.

Prerequisite: Junior Standing

An introduction to the design of media materials and script writing.
Styles and techniques of writing will be analyzed. Classroom
emphasis is on writing, critiques and revisions of designs and scripts.

LR 348 WRITING FOR RADIO AND TELEVISION 3 cr.

Presents theory and practice in planning, writing and producing
various types and formats of broadcast material for radio and/or
television.

LR 371 PHOTOGRAPHY 3 cr.

Introduction to photography emphasizing the potential value of
teacher-made photographic materials in teaching. Both technical
and artistic aspects of photography considered. Student must
provide 35 mm camera and exposure meter. See instructor.

LR 373 INI RODUCTION TO RADIO BROADCASTING 3 cr.

Introduction to organization and operation of a radio station.
Technical aspects of radio and programming techniques. Examina-
tion of station's relationship with educational, industrial, and
other social institutions.

LR 443 SLIDE AND FILMSTRIP PRODUCTION 3 cr.

Prerequisite: LR 371

Emphasizes techniques of color and b/w slide preparation, duplica-
tion, titling and binding. Students will participate in making of a
filmstrip through all stages from script to screen. Student must
furnish own 35 mm camera and an acceptable exposure meter.

LR 444 MOTION PICTURE PRODUCTION 3 cr.

Emphasizes possibilities for effective use of teacher-made films in
classroom. No prerequisite. Student must provide camera and
exposure meter. See instructor.

School of Education
Learning Resources

LR 445 ADVANCED MOTION PICTURE PRODUCTION 3 cr.

Prerequisite; LR 444

Emphasizes motion picture production planning. Such techniques
as directing, advanced picture and sound editing, and use of sound
recording and laboratory facilities stressed. Also, live action
cinematography, titling, animation and special effects photography
investigated.

LR 447 ANIMATION 3 cr.

Prerequisite: LR 444

Introduces animation techniques and offers practical experience in
planning and producing animated sequences. Work with filmograph,
cut-out, puppet and full eel animation. Practice in designing,
drawing, tracing, inking and painting eels, preparation of black-
boards, use of eel boards, animation camera and stand; preparation
of story boards and cue sheets: integration of visual and sound.

LR 450 ADVANCED AUDIO RECORDING TECHNIQUES 3 cr.

Theory and practice of recording sound for motion pictures, video
tapes, audio tapes, sound filmstrips, etc., the use of sound on sound
and other special recording techniques will be studied.

LR471 ADVANCED PHOTOGRAPHY I 3 cr.

Prerequisite: LR 371

Students will develop camera and print-making skills to the degree
that they can produce solon-quality photographic prints. Students
will produce high quality negatives and prints. Emphasis is on
camera and print control as well as composition and negative and
print manipulation.

LR 472 ADVANCED PHOTOGRAPHY II 3 cr.

Prerequisite: LR 371

Students pursue on an individual basis photographic competencies
which they want to develop to a high level of proficiency. Topics
include high-contrast photography, silk screen photography, tone
line bas relief, posterization, etch bleach, photo sketching, print
screening, color print and slide making, lighting techniques and flash

photography as well as topics pertinent to meeting a student's
objectives.

LR 480 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-3 cr.

Students may elect with the prior approval of the instructor
concerned and the department to do independent study which is of
an advanced nature for 1 to 3 credits each in any of the four major
areas of the departmental curriculum — photography, film making,
broadcast and production. Prerequisite is the basic course for each
of the four areas concerned.

LR 481 TELEVISION PRODUCTION 3 cr.

Develops basic skills in television production and direction. Con-
sideration of operating problems of a television studio, as well as
functions, limitations, and capabilities of television equipment and
facilities. Stress placed on educational application of television
production.

LR 482

3 cr.

PREPARATION OF INSTRUCTIONAL

MATERIALS
Provides experiences in planning and preparing commonly used
materials for classroom and TV use: graphic materials, including
layouts and lettering, mounting techniques: copying techniques,
such as Thermofax, Polaroid, photography, and Xerography; lami-
nating and color lifting.

\Ajlf

AV^

194 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

PUBLIC SCHOOL NURSING

On January 19, 1951, The Board of Presidents of the State
Colleges approved a curriculum for public school nurses
leading to the degree of Bachelor of Science in Education,
upon fulfillment of the following:

(1) Satisfactory completion of a three-year curriculum in an
approved school of nursing and registration by the State
Board of Examiners for the Registration of Nurses of
Pennsylvania.

(2) Satisfactory completion of 60 credits of additional prep-
aration, distributed as follows:

Courses Related to Public School Nursing
PN 301 Public School Nursing
PN 302 Public School Organization
PN 401 Public Health Nursing
PN 402 Nutrition and Community Health
PN 403 Family Case Work

General Education

EN 102
EN 201
HI 101
or 102
HI 104
PS 111
SO 151

Education
FE 302

English II
English III

History of Civilization I or II
History of the U. S. and Pa. II
American Politics
Principles of Sociology

History and Phil of American
Education

credits

cr.

18 credits

cr.

credits

cr.

EP 302
PC 300
LR 301
SH 354

Electives

Educational Psychology
Psychology of Adjustment
Audio-Visual Education
Audiometry for Public School Nurses

3 cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.

3 cr.

12 credits

Nurses with less than three years' preparation for registration
must pursue additional courses to meet the requirements for
the degree.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

PN 301 PUBLIC SCHOOL NURSING 2 cr.

Study of role of nurse in public schools. Offers information on
organization, development, implementation, and evaluation of
school health services. Students given opportunity for practical
experience in performing school nursing procedures and functions.
Programs, policies, and procedures presented are in conformity
with Pennsylvania School Health Law, Regulations of State
Departments of Health and Education, and standards adopted by
national health and education authorities.

PN 302 PUBLIC SCHOOL ORGANIZATION 3 cr.

Designed to acquaint student with administration and organization
of American public school. Consideration given to cultural role of
schools, to decision-making in operation of schools. Functions and
methods of all professional personnel in operation and improve-
ment of schools considered.

PN 401 PUBLIC HEALTH NURSING 6 cr.

Designed to provide understanding of principles of public health
nursing and basic public health services which come under official
jurisdiction. Traditional emerging health programs at national,

School of Education - 195
Public School Nursing
Special Education

state, and local level are explored. Emphasis placed on utilization
of public health services in school setting.

PN 402 NUTRITION AND COMMUNITY HEALTH 2 cr.

Study of nutritional problems of family members, from infant to
aged of community. Emphasis placed on reorganizing good nutri-
tional status and on ways of guiding families toward better
nutrition. School health lunch also emphasized.

PN 403 FAMILY CASE WORK 3 cr.

Course proposes that, in order to understand a child and guide his
experiences in school more intelligently, educators must have an
acquaintance with his family and home situation. This involves
recognizing parents' attitudes toward child, child's feelings toward
his parents, child's role in family, and special factors within family
life that affect his behavior and mental health. Guided experiences
in working with families and preparing case studies are provided.

SPECIAL EDUCATION AND CLINICAL SERVICES

EUGENE F. SCANLON, CHAIRPERSON: M. BAHN, BORMANN,
BRUNGARD, CHAPMAN, FELIX, FIDDLER, FLAMM, GEISEL,
MEASE. MORRIS, NEWELL, POUNDS, REBER, SHANE, VICKERS,
YAGEL

This department offers the degree of Bachelor of Science in
Education in any one of three options for students whose
major interest is work with exceptional children and/or adults.
Each of the three options follows a prescribed sequence of
courses. Students may elect to major in any one of the
following fields of exceptionality:

A. Educationof the Mentally and/or Physically Handicapped

B. Speech Pathology and Audiology

C. Rehabilitation Education

A, EDUCATION OF THE MENTALLY AND/OR
PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED

Completion of the sequence of study in the Education of the
Mentally and/or Physically Handicapped leads to Pennsylvania
Dept. of Education comprehensive certification as a teacher of
the mentally and/or physically handicapped Students will be
prepared to teach mentally retarded, physically handicapped,
emotionally and/or learning disabled, neurologically impaired.
This program also provides an opportunity for students to seek
career opportunities in the areas of welfare, mental health, and
with private agencies. Student teaching experiences are pro-
vided with the mentally retarded and one of the other
handicaps. The program also provides a foundation for
pursuing additional work at the graduate level. Further

196 - Indiana University of Pennsylvania

specialized training in mental retardation offers opportunities
for qualified persons in administration, supervision, vocational
rehabilitation and related fields.

Required Related Courses

SH 254

SE220
SE 301

SB 320

SE 362

Required Basic Courses

SE 215 Child Development

Introduction to Exceptional Children
Reading and Language Arts for Mentally
and/or Physically Handicapped
Psychology of Mentally and/or
Physically Handicapped
Methods of Teaching Reading

OR
Teaching of Reading
Health, Physical Education & Recreation
for the Exceptional

Curriculum & Methods for the Mentally
and/or Physically Handicapped
Directed Activities I
Teaching Trainable
Education of Children with Social/
Emotional Maladjustment
Education of Children with Learning
Disabled

222

411

SE 423

SE 453
SE 446
SE 465

SE 466

3 cr.

3 cr.
1 cr.
3 cr.

3 cr.

AR 330

MU 211

EL 313

Electives

3cr.

SE 216

3cr.

SE 422

SE 431

3cr.

SE 452

SE 454

3cr.

SE 460

3 cr.

Classroom Management of Language 3 cr.

Disorders

Arts & Crafts for the Mentally and/or 3 cr.

Physically Handicapped

Music for Mentally and/or 3 cr.
Physically Handicapped

Teaching Math 3 cr.

Mental Health in Schools 3 cr.

Occupational Information 3 cr.

Special Class Methods 3 cr.

Psychological Practicum 3 cr.

Directed Activities II 1 cr.
Selected Problems in Special Education 1-3 cr.

Required Basic Courses in Mental Retardation

SE215 CHILD DEVELOPMENT 3 cr.

Childhood foundations of human growth and developnnent. Re-
search from various disciplines is studied in terms of understanding
physical, mental, social and emotional factors and how these
interrelate throughout childhood development.

SE 220 INTRODUCTION TO EXCEPTIONAL CHILDREN 3 cr.

Surveys characteristics, needs, problems, and behavior patterns of
children who deviate sufficiently from "normal" to be considered
exceptional. Consideration given to those who fall intellectually
both above and below average; those who are handicapped visually,
acoustically, behaviorally, orthopedically, neurologically or in
respect to speech patterns.

School of Education - 197
Special Education

SE 301 READING AND LANGUAGE ARTS FOR THE 3 cr.

MENTALLY AND/OR PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED
Prerequisites: SE 362 or EL 222; SE 220: SE 320 and SH 254
Deals with preparation and execution of units of instruction in
language arts for mentally and physically handicapped. Emphasis on
consideration of special characteristics of those so handicapped
when language arts units of instruction are planned. Diagnostic and
clinic teaching are emphasized.

SE 320 PSYCHOLOGY OF THE MENTALLY AND/OR 3 cr.

PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED
Prerequisites: SE 220

Considers ways in which mentally and/or physically handicapped
develop, learn, and adapt to various home, school, community, and
sheltered settings. The handicapped as living and adjusting individ-
uals who respond to many kinds of personal and social situations
and cope successfully are shown. Psychological aspects of handi-
capping condition are investigated.

SE 362 METHODS OFTEACHING READING (OR EL222) 3 cr.

Objectives, background knowledge, and understandings of develop-
mental reading process, an over-view of elementary program,
pre-adolescent and adolescent and their needs in reading, finding
and providing for instructional needs, and special problems.

SE 411

3 cr

HEALTH, PHYSICAL EDUCATION AND
RECREATION FOR THE EXCEPTIONAL
Prerequisite: SE 220

Provides a thorough understanding of a program of health, physical
education and recreation as it applies to individuals with mental and
physical handicaps from preschool through adulthood. Special
attention given to needs of individuals with developmental
problems.

423 CURRICULUM AND METHODS FOR THE 3 cr.

MENTALLY AND/OR PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED
Prerequisite: Senior status and permission of Department
Considers the basic content and methods for teaching mentally

and/or physically handicapped. Emphasizes organization of curric-
ulum in fundamentals and in social and pre-vocational skills for
daily living and offers opportunities for exploring resource materials
used for instruction at elementary and secondary levels. Special
emphasis is placed on the diagnostic process and individualization of
instruction.

SE 446 TEACHING THE TRAINABLE, MENTALLY 3 cr.

RETARDED
Prerequisite: Junior and Senior majors

Provides for analysis of curriculum and program content for TMR
children and adults. Directed toward training students to teach the
trainable retarded and/or profoundly retarded in public schools,
institutional facilities, or sheltered workshops.

SE453 DIRECTED ACTIVITIES I 1-3 cr.

Prerequisite: SE 220 and by arrangement

Provides for opportunities to observe mentally and/or physically
handicapped in one or more of a variety of settings. Provides
opportunity for the student to confirm his/her interest in the field
of special education. Offered only to freshmen, first semester
sophomores, and to qualified transfer students.

SE465

3cr

EDUCATION OF THE SOCIALLY AND

EMOTIONALLY MALADJUSTED
Prerequisite: SE 215, SE 220, and SE 320

Provides for an understanding of the psychological and educational
characteristics of those who are socially and/or emotionally dis-
turbed. Special consideration is given to relationship between social
and emotional disturbance and other areas of exceptionality.

;466 EDUCATION OF CHILDREN WITH LEARNING 3 cr.

DISABILITIES
Prerequisites: SE 220, SE 215, and SE 320

Discusses theories and practices concerning rudiments of diagnosis
and remediation of learning disabilities, study of disorders of
reading, writing, listening, expressive language, and psychomotor
activities.

198 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Required Courses in Related Areas

SH 254 CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT OF LANGUAGE 3 cr.

DISORDERS
(See course description under Speech Pathology and Audiology)

AR 330 ARTS AND CRAFTS FOR THE MENTALLY 3 cr.

AND/OR PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED
(See course description in Art Dept.)

EL 313 TEACHING OF MATH

(See course description in Math Education)

Electives

SE 216

3cr.

3cr

MENTAL HEALTH IN THE SCHOOLS

(OR PC 300)
Concept of mental health developed in terms of optimal human
functioning and concentrates on positive aspects and modifications
of behavior, rather than on malfunctioning and clinical treatment of
mental and emotional disorders. The practical application of mental
health principles in school setting is emphasized.

SE 422 ORIENTATION TO REHABILITATION 3 cr.

Prerequisite; Junior and Senior majors

Principles and practices in rehabilitation, with attention to contribu-
tions of teachers, counselors, nurses, social workers, psychologists,
speech therapists, and other professional workers.

SE452 PSYCHOLOGICAL PRACTICUM 3 cr.

Prerequisite: Six hours in Psychology

Designed to provide students with experiences in working with
emotionally disturbed residents in a hospital setting. Students are
also required to attend seminars to discuss the various phases of the
training experience. Offered during the summer for a ten (10) week
session. Enrollment restricted and acceptance competitive.

SE 454 DIRECTED ACTIVITIES II 1-3 cr.

Prerequisite: Jr. & Sr. majors who qualify by virtue of academic

standing and interest.

Critical exploration of problems relating to exceptional children.

B. SPEECH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY

Completion of the sequence of studies in Speech Pathology
and Audiology leads to Pennsylvania Dept. of Education
certification as a Speech Correctionist and provides students
with the basic skills to work with individuals exhibiting
speech, hearing, or language disorders of communication.
Students will also be prepared to pursue careers as Speech
Clinicians in early childhood education programs, welfare
programs, public health facilities, and rehabilitation settings.
The University Speech and Hearing Clinic serves as a labora-
tory for required clinical practice, and a semester of student
participation in an established speech and hearing program
meets the student teaching requirement. Since in some settings
a Master's Degree is required for employment, emphasis
throughout the curriculum is placed on encouraging and
promoting students' participation in graduate programs of
Speech Pathology and Audiology.

In addition to fulfilling the General Education requirements
established by the University and the Professional Education
requirements set by the School of Education, students are
obligated to complete 40 additional credits in the specialized
field and its related areas. An option allows substitution of
Math 362, Probability and Statistics (see listing under Math
Dept.) for Ed Psy 302, Educational Tests and Measurements,
in the Professional Education sequence.

School of Education - 199
Special Education

Required Basic Courses

SH 111

SH 122

SH 222

SH 232

SH 242

SH 251

Fundamentals of Speech and Hearing 3 cr.

Phonetics 3 cr.

Introduction to Audiology 3 cr.

Speech Pathology 3 cr.

Bases of Oral Communication 3 cr.

Anatomy and Physiology of the Speech 3 cr.

and Hearing Mechanism
SH 302 Language Development 3 cr.

SH 310 Speech Clinic I 1-3 cr.

(1 recommended)
SH 311 Aural Rehabilitation 3 cr.

SH 312 Organization and Administration of 3 cr

Speech and Hearing Programs (also counts

as Methods Course in Professional Education

Requirements)
SH 320 Speech Clinic II 1-3 cr.

(3 recommended)
SH 321 Development of Language 3 cr.

Required Courses in Related Areas

SE 220 Introduction to Exceptional Children 3 cr.

SE 326 Methods of Teaching Reading or 3 cr.

EL 222 Teaching of Reading 3 cr.

Recommended Electives (one required)

SE 215 Child Development 3 cr.

EL 215 Child Development 3 cr.

PC 300 Psychology of Adjustment 3 or.

SE 320 Psychology of Mentally Retarded 3 cr.

EN 333 Trends in Linguistics 3 or.

SH 330 Speech Clinic III 1-3 cr.

Required Basic Courses in Speech Pathology
and Audiology

SH1 11 FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEECH AND HEARING 3 cr.

(Prerequisite for all other required courses in the division except
Phonetics.)

Introduction to study of physiological, acoustical, and scientific
processes involved in production and reception of speech. The
genetic development of speech sounds, and factors that hinder or
facilitate speech and language acquisition.

SH 122 PHONETICS 3 cr.

Detailed study of phonennes of American-English speech from a
physical and acoustical point of view. Development of proficiency
in use of International Phonetic Alphabet for transcription and
translation of speech sounds.

SH 222 INTRODUCTION TO AUDIOLOGY 3 cr.

The auditory function, anatomy of auditory mechanism, psycho-
physics of sound, types and causes of hearing loss, measurement of
hearing, and educational considerations for hearing handicapped
child.

SH 232 SPEECH PATHOLOGY 3 cr.

Basic orientation to speech disorders, their prevalence, symptoms,
causes and treatment. Disorders of articulation and rhythm empha-
sized, with some consideration given to voice problems, cleft palate,
cerebral palsy and defects of symbolization.

SH 242 BASES OF ORAL COMMUNICATION 3 cr.

Study of communication process with emphasis on physical

200 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

characteristics of sound production, transnriission and perception of
the sound, and the evolvement and use of symbols for meaningful
communication. The scientific principles of normal oral communica-
tion stressed, and language learning recognized as basis for oral
communication.

SH 251 ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY OF THE 3 cr.

SPEECH AND HEARING MECHANISM
Consideration of genetic development, structure, and function of
organs of speech and hearing. Anatomical systems involved in
respiration, phonation, articulation, and hearing, and relationships
between systems in production and reception of speech.

SH 302 LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 3 cr.

Study of development of an interpersonal communication system;
language as a system of symbols for communication; the structure
of the English language, mcluding phonology, syntax, and semantics
with emphasis on the generative evolvement of sentences. High-
lighting of neurological, social and psychological bases of language
development.

SH 310 SPEECH CLINIC I 1-3 cr.

Prerequisite: Approval by advisor. 1 credit recommended.

Orientation to theory and techniques of speech and hearing therapy
as applied to specific clients. Introduction to lesson planning and
writing of case histories and reports. Observation of clients and
limited participation with clients.

SH 311 AURAL REHABILITATION 3 cr.

Consideration of effects of varied degrees of hearing loss sustained
by individuals at different stages of development and study of total
education and rehabilitative procedures for hard-of-hearing child or
adult. Application of techniques of teaching the hard-of-hearing to
persons presenting language problems of other etiologies.

SH312 ORGANIZATION AND ADMINISTRATION 3 cr.

OF SPEECH AND HEARING PROGRAMS
(Meets requirement for Professional Education Course.)
Establishment and maintenance of speech and hearing programs

within various administrative organizations, particularly in the
public schools. Techniques of client identification, scheduling,
record keeping, appropriate referral, material and equipment selec-
tion, teacher and parental counseling, and the development of
coordinated professional and inter-disciplinary procedures.

SH 320 SPEECH CLINIC II 1-3 cr.

Prerequisite: SH 310. 3 credits recommended

Experience in working with individuals or groups of persons who
exhibit speech or hearing problems. Lesson planning, writing of
reports, and case histories of a detailed nature.

SH 321 DEVELOPMENT OF LANGUAGE 3 cr.

Nature of speech and language as a behavioral influence and as a
communicative code; behavior in response to language, and psycho-
logical principles involved. Normal evolvement of social, motor, and
speech skills emphasized and their interrelationships in making
satisfactory personal adjustments.

Required Courses in Related Areas

SE 220 INTRODUCTION TO EXCEPTIONAL 3 cr.

CHILDREN
(See course description under Education of the Mentally Retarded)

EL 222 TEACHING OF READING 3 cr.

(See course description under Elementary Education)
OR
SE 362 METHODS OF TEACHING READING 3 cr.

(See course description under Education of the Mentally Retarded)

Recommended Electives

SE215 CHILD DEVELOPMENT 3 cr.

(See course description under Education of the Mentally Retarded)
OR
EL 215 CHILD DEVELOPMENT 3 cr.

(See course description under Elementary Education)

School of Education - 201
Special Education

PC 300 THE PSYCHOLOGY OF ADJUSTMENT 3 cr.

(See course description under Psychology Department)

SE 320 PSYCHOLOGY OF MENTALLY RETARDED 3 cr.

(See course description under Education of the Mentally Retarded)

EN 331 TRENDS IN LINGUISTICS 3 cr.

(See course description under English Department)

SH 330 SPEECH CLINIC III 1-2-3 cr.

Experience, of an independent nature. In working with individuals
or groups of persons who exhibit speech or hearing problems.
Offered for those who specifically desire or need practicum
experience in addition to Speech Clinic II.

Dual Level Courses (open to upper level majors with
permission of instructor)

SH410 ARTICULATION 3 cr.

Comparative evaluation of traditional, sensory-motor and linguistic,
theories of speech production with major emphasis on functioning
of articulatory mechanism: etiology, symptomatology, and diagnosis
of articulatory disorders of functional, organic, or neurological
origin with appropriate methods of remediation adapted to either
group or individual use. Critical review of selected topics of
research.

SH412 CLEFT PALATE 3 cr.

Study of over-all problems associated with phenomenon of cleft lip
and palate with special emphasis in areas of speech, hearing, and
language. Included in scope will be human embryology, with
specific emphasis on oral facial development; physical remediation,
including both surgical and prosthetic repair; effects of clefts on
structure and function of speech and hearing mechanism; role of
speech correctionist on cleft palate team; evaluation and current
remedial procedures for speech, hearing, and language problems.

SH 416 STUTTERING 3 cr.

Intensive study of nature and causes of stuttering. Considerable

emphasis on diagnoses and management. Counseling and learning
theory applications as two main approaches to treatment. Consider-
ation of the person as a stutterer. Review of pertinent and recent
research topics.

SH 418 VOICE 3cr.

Advanced study of scientific principles of voice production empha-
sizing malfunctioning, structural abnormalities, deviant innervation,
and pathologies which relate to voice defects; identification,
diagnosis, and therapeutic considerations of remediation for various
voice problems and relationship between voice disorders and
disorders of personality. Special treatment given to treatment of
laryngectomized.

SH 430 LANGUAGE DISORDERS OF CHILDREN 3 cr.

A highlighting of current research regarding normal acquisition and
development of language with special consideration of factors
related to language delay. Emphasis on various approaches in
identification and differential diagnosis of language disorders and
principles and techniques of remediation, including Association
Method as developed with children labeled aphasic.

Courses for Non-Majors

SH 254 DISORDERS OF LANGUAGE ACQUISITION 3 cr.

Study of aspects of speech, language, and hearing problems
pertaining to classroom situation. Types of speech and hearing
disorders, conducting speech and language improvement lessons,
classroom aids for the speech- and hearing-defective child, and
school and community resources for these children. (Required for
majors in Special Education: Mentally Retarded, and suggested for
Elementary Education majors.)

SH 354 AUDIOMETRY FOR PUBLIC SCHOOL NURSES 3 cr.

Intensive review of physiology of hearing: etiologies and classifica-
tions of hearing loss: use of audiometric testing equipment in
schools: interpretation of audiogram: and role of nurse in public
health hearing programs.

202 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

C. REHABILITATION EDUCATION

Completion of this program leads to the Bachelor of Science in
Education with a specialization in rehabilitation. The program
is designed for students seeking career opportunities with
health and welfare agencies and institutions. Although orig-
inally identified with the needs of the war disabled, the
benefits of Rehabilitation have been extended to larger
requirements of civilian handicapped. The program also
provides a foundation for pursuing additional work at the
graduate level.

In addition to filling the General Education requirements
established by the University and the Professional Education
requirements set by the School of Education, students are
obligated to complete approximately 40 additional credits in
the specialized field and its related area, excluding Field
Training and Practicum, as follows:

Required Basic Courses

SR 220 Neurological Basis of Disability 3 cr.

(formerly Physical Basis of Disability)
Rehabilitation of the Blind and of 3 cr.

the Deaf

Psychological Basis of Disability 3 cr.

Principles and Methods of Rehabilitation 3 cr.
(formerly SR 313 — same title)
Rehabilitation Case Study and 3 cr.

Interpretation

Rehabilitation of the Post-Surgical 3 cr.

Patient

SR 311

SR 312
SR 321

SR 322

SR 411

SR 412 Occupational Aspects of Rehabilitation 3 cr.

(formerly SR 324 — Occupational Information)
SR 421 Field Training in Rehabilitation 12 cr.

(formerly SR 405 — same description)
SR 422 Rehabilitation Practicum 2 cr.

(formerly SR 406 — same description)

Required Related Courses

Child Development

Introduction to Exceptional Children

Psychology of the Mentally Retarded

Abnormal Psychology

Human Physiology

Introduction to Social Work

Probability and Statistics

Required Basic Courses in Rehabilitation

215

220

320

357

151

338

MA 362

3 cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.

i 220 NEUROLOGICAL BASIS OF DISABILITY

(Formerly Physical Basis of Disability)
Prerequisites; Human Physiology: Introduction to Exceptional
Children

Study of brain and spinal cord with emphasis on cortical and
sub-cortical mechanisms instrumental in normal motion, coordina
tion and bodily sensation, exclusive of vision and hearing. Discus
sion and demonstration of conditions of cerebral palsy, polio
myelitis, traumatic paraplegias, cerebro-vascular accident
Parkinson's disease, multiple sclerosis; and rehabilitative procedures

1311 REHABILITATION OF THE BLIND AND 3 cr

THE DEAF
Prerequisites: Neurological Basis of Disability; General Psychology
Structure and function of visual and auditory systems with emphasis

School of Education - 203
Special Education

on the importance of seeing to mobility in environment, and on
hearing to the development of human communication. Discussion of
causes of visual and auditory pathologies; braille, mobility training;
speech reading and amplification; and other procedures of rehabili-
tation.
SR312 PSYCHOLOGICAL BASIS OF DISABILITY 3 cr.

Prerequisites: SR 220, SR 31 1 , or permissron of instructor
Study of emotional and social responses which govern behavior and
relationships of handicapped individuals and rehabilitation workers
alike, with emphasis on role of disability in formation of concept of
human worth.

SR 321

3 cr.

PRINCIPLES AND METHODS OF

REHABILITATION (Formerly SR 313)
Prerequisites: SR 220, SR 31 1 , SR 31 2

Delineates the roles of members of professional disciplines of
medicine, psychology, prosthetics, orthodontics, audiology, speech
pathology, physical and occupational therapy in restoration of the
handicapped; use of diagnostic information; significance and inter-
pretation of medical examination; role of rehabilitation counselor in
the agency.

1322 REHABILITATION CASE STUDY AND 3 cr.

INTERPRETATION
Prerequisites: SR 31 1 , SR 31 2

Purpose and techniques of case history taking; meaning and
evaluation of diagnostic information; psychological evaluation in
terms of mental ability, personality, attitudes and dexterity skills;
role of disabled individual's family in planning of services, referrals,
and report writing.

Mil REHABILITATION OF THE 3 cr.

POST-SURGICAL PATIENT
Prerequisites: SR 321, SR 322

Influence of prospective surgery on human emotion and outlook;
the effect of alteration or removal of body parts on personality and
physical skills. Study of mastectomy; colostomy; laryngectomy;

limb amputation; reconstruction of facial disfigurement; cardio-
vascular disease; residual capabilities.

SR412 OCCUPATIONAL ASPECTS OF 3 cr.

REHABILITATION

(formerly SR 324 — Occupational Information)
Prerequisites: SR 322, SR 41 1 , or permission of instructor.
The realism of world of work and relationship of gainful employ-
ment to human autonomy and decision-making. Types of jobs,
levels of required skills, potent al capabilities of the handicapped
relative to specific job responsibilities; methods of assessing poten-
tial job success; sheltered workshops.

SR 421 FIELD TRAINING IN REHABILITATION 12 cr.

(formerly SR 405)
Prerequisites: SR 322, SR 411, SR 412

Emphasizes development of the student rehabilitation coordinator
by working with disabled clients in a public or private agency.
Writing and analysis of case reports, counseling of clients, under-
standing of agency responsibilities and limitations, referral, follow-
up, and final evaluation of client's ability to function with various
degrees of autonomy.

SR 422 REHABILITATION PRACTICUM 2 cr.

(formerly SR 406)
Taken concurrently with SR 421

Discussion of current topics of interest in the field, such as state and
federal legislation; new prosthetic advances, proposals of the
National Rehabilitation Association; or recent techniques in work-
ing with specific disabilities.

Required Courses in Related Areas

SE 215 CHILD DEVELOPMENT

(See course description under Education of the Mentally Retarded)

SE 220 INTRODUCTION TO EXCEPTIONAL CHILDREN

(See course description under Education of the Mentally Retarded)

204 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

SE 320 PSYCHOLOGY OF THE MENTALLY AND/OR

PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED
(See course description under Education of the Mentally Retarded)

PC 357 ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY

(See course description under Psychology Dept.)

Bl 151 HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY

(See course description in Biology Dept.)

SO 338 INTRODUCTION TO SOCIAL WORK

(See course description in Sociology Dept.)

MA 362 PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS

(See course description in Math Dept.)

COUNSELOR EDUCATION DEPARTMENT

GEORGE L. SPINELLI, CHAIRPERSON: GULP, SAYLOR, PESCI,
WASHBURN, WILSON, WORZBYT.

The courses listed below are available, as electives and as
offered, to undergraduate students in Education, in-service
teachers, and other school personnel seeking a broad under-
standing of helping roles in a school program of guidance
services. These courses are not designed for those who would
aspire to become school counselors. For more information
on counselor education programs see the current Graduate
School Bulletin.'

Recommended Electives

Certain related courses will be recommended for individual
students dependent upon interest and needs.

Courses for Non-majors

Students in other departments not intending to major in
Special Education but who wish to improve their understand-
ing of exceptionality may elect certain courses in Mental
Retardation, Speech Pathology and Audiology, and Rehabilita-
tion as indicated by (*); or other courses may be open to
non-majors by departmental permission

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

CE 251 FUNDAMENTALS OF GUIDANCE 3 cr.

This course is an elective for upper level undergraduate students in
Education and aims to provide a broad understanding of the role
of the classroom teacher in a school guidance program.

CE 252 GUIDANCE IN SCHOOL SETTINGS 3 cr.

This is a survey course in guidance designed as an elective for
in-service teachers and school personnel other than counselors.

CE 253 COUNSELING IN SCHOOL SETTINGS 3 cr.

This is an elective course designed to provide in-service teachers
and school personnel, other than counselors, a basic understanding
of the knowledge, information, and skills appropriate to coun-
seling with individuals and groups.

School of Fine Arts - 205

The School of Fine Arts which is composed of the Depart-
ments of Art and Music was established in 1966 and offers
programs leading to the degrees of Bachelor of Arts, Bachelor
of Fine Arts, Bachelor of Science in Art Education, and
Bachelor of Science in Music Education. The latter two
degrees also include certification to teach kindergarten
through twelfth grades in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.

The School of Fine Arts has three commitments: to provide
the highest quality professional education for creative and
performing artists, scholars, and teachers in the arts: to offer
all University students a program of general liberal education
which leads to an appreciation of aesthetic values; and to play
a major role in the cultural life of the University, community,
and the region through an extensive program of performances
and exhibitions.

Requirements for graduation in the School of Fine Arts are
the University requirements of a minimum of 124 semester
hours with a cumulative quality point average of 2.0 (C), the
last thirty semester hours must be taken on campus, and the
General Education requirements must be fulfilled. There are
no additional School requirements.

The School of Fine Arts

J. CHRISTOPHER BENZ, DEAN

ART AND ART EDUCATION DEPARTMENT

BENJAMIN T. MILLER, CHAIRPERSON: BALSIGER. BEN 2VI,
BURWELL, CLAY, DeFURIO, DONGILLA, DROPCHO, FREUND.
HAMILTON, INNBS, JOHNSON, LOVETTE, ROSS, RUSSELL,
SEELHORST, J. SLENKER, R. SLENKER, VISLOSKY, WERT.

The Department of Art provides both general and special
courses in art directed toward the development of the
student's creative and expressive abilities. Degrees offered are
Bachelor of Arts in either Art History or Art Studio, and the
Bachelor of Science in Art Education. The degree in Art
Education provides certification for teaching art from K
through 12 in the schools of Pennsylvania.

Each advisor within the Department of Art will be able to
notify the student of courses that are required within each
specialty, and to help the student become aware of options
that are available through electives. Through advisement, the
Department of Art helps the student to fashion the most
desirable program possible to meet the individual student's
needs.

All art majors are obligated to fulfill the University require-

206 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

B.A. ART HISTORY

B.A. ART STUDIO

Art Core

Art Core 30

Art History

Art Studio 30

General Ed.

General Ed. 52

Electives

Electives 12

124

merits for General Education. The Department of Art expects
that art majors will maintain a 2.5 average in major courses
and this will be a prerequisite to student teaching. A minor in
art is available, consisting of at least 15 credits in art courses
approved by the chairman of the Department of Art.

CURRICULA

B.S. ART EDUCATION

Art Core 30

Art Studio 9

Electives (Art Related) 6
Art Education 12

General Ed. 52

Prof. Education 23

132

Core Program

All art majors are required by the Department to complete
24—30 credits of core courses including:

AR 100 Arts of the Twentieth Century 3 cr.

AR 1 1 1 Drawing 3 cr.

AR 112 Fundamentals of Drawing and Design 3 cr.

AR 113 Design 3 cr.

AR 21 1 Painting 3 cr.

AR215 Sculpture 3 cr.

AR413 Seminar in Art 3 cr.

Students in the art history program must elect one additional
course, while those students in the art education or art studio

programs must elect three a

dditional

courses

from the

following;

AR 213

Crafts

3cr.

AR 214

Ceramics

3cr.

AR 216

Metals

3 cr.

AR 217

Printmaking

3cr.

AR 218

Graphic Design

3cr.

AR 219

Fabrics

3cr.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

Art Education Courses

AT 315 SEMINAR IN ART EDUCATION 3 cr.

A seminar to introduce the art education major to the principles and
practices of teaching visual arts K through 12. Field experiences,
pre-student teaching activities, introduction to literature, history,
and philosophies of art education emphasized. (Prerequisite to
student teaching) 3 hours lecture.

AT 316

3 cr.

ART EDUCATION MATERIALS AND

PRACTICUM
An art education studio which will utilize investigation and
exploration of typical art materials, including sources and resources
of supplies, equipment, resource personnel, and visual media for a
full range of multi-media and visual experiences. The studio
endeavors will be followed by a practicum utilizing the above
sources in teaching situations with children, youth, and adults.
(Prerequisite to student teaching) 2 hours lecture, 1 hour lab.

r317 ART EDUCATION METHODOLOGY AT THE 3 cr.

ELEMENTARY LEVEL
Examines children's artistic development, art programs, planning,
motivation, and evaluation. Weekly teaching experience is an

School of Fine Arts - 207
Art and Art Education

integral part of the course. (Prerequisite to student teaching) 2
hours lecture, 1 hour lab.

r 318 ART EDUCATION METHODOLOGY AT THE 3 or.

SECONDARY LEVEL
Relationship of art education to total secondary curriculum is
studied to determine goals of junior-senior high school art. The
adolescent and his creative products are analyzed to help prospec-
tive art teacher to identify himself with problems of students.
(Prerequisite to student teaching) 2 hours lecture, 1 hour lab.

r 330 ART FOR THE MENTALLY AND 3 cr.

PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED
The materials and processes of arts and crafts are studied for
opportunities they offer in the training, therapy, and education of
students who are mentally retarded or crippled, or need special help
for any reason. 2 hours lecture, 1 hour lab.

r 482 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-6 cr.

Professional Education Courses

ED 421 STUDENT TEACHING 6 cr.

Experience in teaching art at the elementary level; coordination and
visitation by a University faculty member with daily supervision by
a cooperating classroom teacher.

ED 441 STUDENT TEACHING 6 cr.

Experience in teaching art at the secondary level; coordination and
visitation by a University faculty member with daily supervision by
a cooperating classroom teacher.

ED 442 PROFESSIONAL PRACTICUM 2 cr.

An experience which parallels student teaching and includes such
activities as professional readings, discussions, observations and
accumulation and organization of teaching materials.

Art History Courses

AH 101 INTRODUCTION TO ART 3 cr.

Designed to introduce the student to the significance of art as
related to contemporary living and our historical heritage. 3 hours
lecture.

AH 115 ANCIENT AND MEDIEVAL ART 3 cr.

Study of art of man from Prehistoric times to the Middle Ages.
Man's artistic development is seen in light of political, social,
economic, and religious events influencing him. 3 hours lecture.

AH 116 RENAISSANCE AND BAROQUE ART 3 cr.

Study of art from the Renaissance to the Baroque in light of the
historical events which affect man's artistic impulses and develop-
ment. 3 hours lecture.

AH 219 HISTORICAL PAINTING TECHNIQUES 3 cr.

The art major is encouraged to experience a series of historical
painting techniques that have been used by artists of the past. Each
student will develop demonstration paintings based on theories and
formulas of a particular artist or culture. Experiences will include
exploration in such painting media as fresco, egg tempera, and oil. 2
hours lecture, 1 hour lab.

AH 406/506 ANCIENT MIGRATORY ART 3 cr.

A survey of art from various ancient cultures which reflect contacts
known and theoretic. Such cultures as the Celtic, Chinese, Indus
Valley, Mesopotamian, African, Oceanic, American Indian, Pre-
Columbian, and Egyptian are covered. 3 hours lecture.

AH 411 MODERN ART 3 cr.

A survey of the revolutionary movements which began about 1850
and the trends within the contemporary arts are explored. 3 hours
lecture.

AH 412 CLASSICAL ART 3 or.

Historical survey of the painting, sculpture, architecture, decorative,
and utilitarian arts of the Classical period, including the art of

208 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

pre-Greek cultures (Minoan, Mycenaen), Etruscan, and Roman, 3
hours lecture.
AH 413 SEMINAR IN ART 3 cr.

Intended to help students develop adequate vocabularies and
methods to be used in discussion and criticism of works of art. 3
hours lecture.

AH 407/507 MEDIEVAL ART 3 cr.

Art and architecture of Europe during the Middle Ages, beginning
with early Christian and Byzantine art and concluding with art of
Romanesque and Gothic periods. 3 hours lecture.

AH 408/508 ITALIAN RENAISSANCE ART 3 cr.

Covers span of Italian art from 1400's through 1650 and Mannerist
movement. Special attention paid to great masters of the period. 3
hours lecture.

AH 416: NORTHERN RENAISSANCE ART 3 cr.

Explores phenomena of art north of the Alps from 1400 to 1600,
especially as it appears in the Lowlands, as well as side explorations
into art of France, Germany Austria, and the court at Prague, 3
hours lecture.

AH 409/509 BAROQUE AND ROCOCO ART 3 cr.

A general survey of art from 1575—1775, will include architecture,
sculpture, painting, and other arts. 3 hours lecture.

AH 418 PRACTICUM IN SLIDE ROOM PROCEDURES 1 cr.

A practicum course devoted to study of slide room practices and
techniques; includes organization, cataloguing, filing, mounting and
labeling of slides. 2 hours lab

AH 419 MUSEUM INTERNSHIP 3-6 cr.

The student will work at the cooperating museum under the
supervision of the museum director. Museum techniques and
practices in an "on-the-job" training situation will be stressed.

AH 422/522 ART IN AMERICA 3 cr.

Surveys American art and its relation to the development of
American ideas and ideals. 3 hours lecture.

AH 424/524 ART OF THE EAST 3 cr.

The development of art in China India, and Japan from its
Neolithic origins to the traditions of later historical times. 3 hours
lecture.

AH 426/526 PRE-COLUMBIAN ART 3 cr.

A survey of artistic traditions of the Pacific Ocean, Pre-Columbian
of Meso-America and South America and North American cultures.
3 hours lecture.

AH 482

INDEPENDENT STUDY

1-6 cr

Art Studio Courses

AR 100 ARTS OF THE TWENTIETH CENTURY 3 cr.

Designed to expand student response to visual, aural, and kinetic art
forms of this century with special emphasis on recent decades.
Investigative experience to help individuals develop an under-
standing of how sensuous materials are transformed by the artist to
communicate ideas and feelings in movement music, sculpture,
painting, theatre, literature, and film. The course includes lecture,
studio, and field experiences. 2 hours lecture, 2 hours lab.

AR 111 DRAWING 3 cr.

A foundation course in drawing, including a study of the structure
of drawing and composition with a variety of media and subject
matter. 6 hours lab.

AR 112 FUNDAMENTALS OF DRAWING AND DESIGN 3 cr.

A course which seeks to integrate basic principles and fundamentals
of drawing and design. 6 hours lab.

AR 113 DESIGN 3 cr.

Basic elements and principles of design and color are studied.
Basically, a course in design in two dimensions. 6 hours lab.

AR 211 PAINTING 3 cr.

An introductory course in painting in which a variety of materials,
techniques, and approaches are explored. 6 hours lab.

School of Fine Arts - 209
Art and Art Education

AR213 CRAFTS 3 cr.

An introductory course in crafts which seeks to bring about an
understanding of form through involvement with wood as a material
and its related techniques. 6 hours lab.

AR 214 CERAMICS 3 cr.

A general introduction to the techniques and aesthetics of clay. The
student will work both at the wheel and with hand building
methods. 6 hours lab

AR215 SCULPTURE 3 cr.

Introductory course to sculpture with emphasis on study of form as
well as visualizing in the third dimension. 6 hours lab.

AR 216 BASIC METALS 3 cr.

Introduction to metalwork with emphasis upon creation of func-
tional and non-functional art objects. Approached from viewpoint
of beginning craftsman learning basic processes of metal fabrication.
6 hours lab.

AR217 PRINTMAKING 3 cr.

Introduction to basic techniques of production of fine prints

including, work in relief, intaglio, lithograph, and serigraph proc-
esses. 6 hours lab.

AR218 GRAPHIC DESIGN 3 cr.

Students explore various techniques and how they can be translated
into commercial art work, package design, trademark, and other
design problems. Lettering is stressed, both instant type and hand
lettering. 6 hours lab.

AR 219 FABRICS 3 cr.

Provides student with introductory working knowledge in design
and execution of projects in non 4/harness loom weaving, macrame,
stitchery, and related fabric areas. Other fabric techniques available
for students to explore as desired. 6 hours lab.

AR311 PAINTING 3 cr.

Prerequisite: AR 211.
Student given opportunity for continued growth in his creative and

expressive ability through painting. 6 hours lab.

AR312 CERAMICS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: AR 214.

Student concentrates in an area of his choice. Introduction given to
kiln techniques and methods of glaze testing. 6 hours lab.

AR313 SCULPTURE 3 cr.

Prerequisite 215.

Emphasizes the additive or constructed approach to sculptural
concepts. Student becomes involved with welding, plastics, metal,
plaster, and related materials. 6 hours lab.

AR 314 THEATRE ARTS 3 cr.

Exploration of traditional and experimental design for theatre and
theatre-related experiences. Theory and practice in design, construc-
tion, painting, and lighting. 6 hours lab.

AR315 PRINTMAKING 3 cr.

Prerequisite: Art 217.

The student will concentrate on two of the basic printmaking
processes, and will be introduced to new techniques in his chosen
area of concentration. 6 hours lab.

AR316 METALS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: AR 216.

Additional jewelry making and metalworking processes employing
lapidary art, beginning metalsmithing (raising), elementary casting,
and enameling on metal. 6 hours lab.

AR 321 DRAWING 3 cr.

Prerequisite: AR 111 & 112

An intermediate course in drawing, designed to meet problems of
student who has some background in the field. Problems of
composition, two and three dimensional relationships, and surface
are on an individual basis. 6 hours lab.

AR451 ADVANCED CRAFTS 3 cr.

Designed for student to explore crafts area in depth. The design and
construction of functional objects will be undertaken, with empha-

270 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

sis on innovation with wood forms and its related techniques. 6
hours lab.
AR 452 ADVANCED CERAMICS 3 cr.

Continued exploration of the field of ceramic production, along
with kiln firing and glaze formulation. 6 hours lab.

AR 453 ADVANCED SCULPTURE 3 cr.

Gives student opportunity to pursue independent study in sculp-
ture. Materials and processes will be of tiis choosing and the work
related to his own concepts, with the hope that these concepts will
be broadened. 6 hours lab.

AR 454 ADVANCED PAINTING 3 cr.

Individual experimentation and exploration by the painter, investi-
gation of the various technical approaches. 6 hours lab.

AR 455 ADVANCED GRAPHIC DESIGN 3 cr.

Stresses advanced techniques in layout and illustration. The student
explores ideas, such as invention of trademarks and how products
are created. Layouts are analyzed as to their quality. Package design
is studied. (Prerequisite AR 218) 6 hours lab.

AR 457 ADVANCED PRINTMAKING 3 cr.

Student elects to study one of printmaking processes in greater
depth and works toward development of own techniques, working
processes, and ideas. 6 hours lab.

AR 459 ADVANCED FABRICS 3 cr.

Provides student with a working knowledge in design and execution
of projects in weaving macrame, and related areas. Other fabric
techniques will be available for the students to explore as desired. 6
hours lab.

AR 460 ADVANCED METALS 3 cr.

Design and processes associated with art of metal are given greater
concentration. The developing craftsman encouraged to investigate
in depth, one or more of the metal arts as an extension of the basic
courses. 6 hours lab.

AR 482 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-6 cr.

Service Courses

HE 213 PRINCIPLES OF DESIGN 2 cr.

Principles of design and color are studied and applied to a crafted
object. Major emphasis on aesthetic quality inherent in designing
with materials. 2 hour lab.

EL 213 ART FOR ELEMENTARY GRADES 2 cr.

Course basic to creative use of art materials and an understanding of
development of capacities of children through art. 1 hour lecture, 1
hour lab.

EL 214 TEACHING ART IN ELEMENTARY GRADES 3 cr.

Prerequisite; EL 213

Students offered in-depth experiences in two and three-dimensional
materials relative to art for elementary school child.

School of Fine Arts -211
Music and Music Education

MUSIC AND MUSIC EDUCATION DEPARTMENT

RICHARD S. KNAB, CHAIRPERSON: BACHMANIM, BECKER,
BERNAT, BIRD, BORST, CHA, DeCESARE, DiCICCO, DIETZ, FRY,
GODT, GOLZ, HULBERT, INTILI, JOHNSON, KENNEY, LLOYD,
LUCHSINGER, McNAUGHTON, MALITSKY, OLMSTEAD, PERKINS,
D. PERLONGO, S. PERLONGO, SARTORI, STAPLES, TETI,
THORELL, VOUKLIZAS, WEBER, WILDEBOOR.

The Department of Music has a three-fold mission: (1)

Professional preparation of music educators and performers,

(2) general education for the University, and (3) programs of

music for the community. Degrees offered include the

Bachelor of Arts in Music, the Bachelor of Fine Arts in Music,

and the Bachelor of Science in Education with a major in

Music.

Admission to the Music Department requires satisfactory

completion of an audition in addition to the University's

general requirements. Detailed information will be sent to the

applicant upon request.

A student wishing to minor in music must elect a minimum of

15 credits in music courses as approved by the Department

Chairperson.

CURRICULA

The program leading to the Bachelor of Arts in music has been
designed to give the Liberal Arts student a considerable, but
not necessarily a professional experience in music. The student
will expect to gain a broad understanding of the culture in
which he lives, and the function of music in that culture The

student seeking this degree has the choice of two concentra-
tions: Music History and Literature and Music Theory and
Composition.

The program leading to the Bachelor of Fine Arts in Music
(equivalent to the Bachelor of Music Degree) is a flexible
program with a major in one of 18 areas of performance. The
graduate of this program will be prepared to audition for
membership in a professional music organization.
The program leading to the Bachelor of Science in Education
with a music major leads to certification to teach in the
schools of Pennsylvania.

Core Program

Requirements for ALL music majors are:

MU 115, 116, 215, 216 Theory I through IV 12 cr.

MU 111, 112 Sight Singing I and 11 4 cr.

MU 113, 114 Ear Training I and II 2 cr.

MU 220, 221 Music Literature I and II 4 cr.

MU 301, 302 Music History I and II 6 cr.

Special Requirements

1. Each student must declare a primary performing medium.
Those who elect voice as their primary instrument normally
elect piano as a secondary instrument; those who elect
piano as their primary instrument normally elect voice as
their secondary instrument. Performance juries are held at
the end of each semester. Students are expected to
complete the requirements for their performing area and
level. Piano proficiency is required in all degree programs.

272 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

2. Ensemble participation is required each semester in the
student's primary performing medium.

3. Students must attend (1) all Department and Area recitals,
and (2) ten campus recitals and concerts each semester.

B.A. IN MUSIC

In addition to the Core Program, requirements for the
Bachelor of Arts in Music include 22 additional credits in
music, of which 16 credits must be in the concentration
selected, as follows:

Music Theory and Composition
or

Music History and Literature 16 cr.

Music Electives 6 cr.

B.F.A. IN MUSIC (BACHELOR OF MUSIC)

In addition to the Core Program, requirements for the
Bachelor of Fine Arts in Music, which is a degree in
performance, are 44 more credits in the following:

Applied Music

MU 217, 218 - Keyboard Harmony I and II

Upper Division Music Electives

Junior and senior Recitals required in the primary

instrument

B.S. IN MUSIC EDUCATION

Requirements for the Bachelor of Science in Music Education
are as follows:

Music Education 36 hrs.

Class Brass I 1

Class Percussion I 1

Class Strings I 1

Class Woodwinds I 1

Class (or private) piano I and II 2 or 4

Class Voice I and 1 1 2

Fundamentals of Conducting 2

Applied Instruction (major instrument) 14

Music Electives 10 or 12

Choral Conducting

Instrumental Conducting

French Diction

German Diction

Italian Diction

Class Brass II

Class Percussion II

Class Strings 1 1

Class Woodwinds 1 1

Music Education Electives

Music History Elective

Music Theory Electives

Additional Applied Instruction

Ensembles

Professional Education 27 hrs.

Educational Psychology 3

Audio-Visual Education 3

History and Phil, of American Education 3

Elementary Methods 2

School of Fine Arts - 213
Music and Music Education

Secondary Methods
Professional Practicum
Student Teaching

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

2
2

Service Courses

EL 211 MUSIC FOR THE ELEMENTARY GRADES 2 cr.

Geared for elementary education students. Includes basic ideas for
understanding, development, and confidence for future classroom
teachers and their pupils in areas of music education.

EL212

3 cr.

TEACHING OF MUSIC IN THE

ELEMENTARY GRADES
Prerequisite: EL 211.

Continuation of skills and understandings as developed in EL 211,
with emphasis on methods and materials for upper grades. Addi-
tional opportunities for growth in music reading and part singing are
provided. Correlation of music with other areas.

MU 101 INTRODUCTION TO MUSIC 3 cr.

Course presumes no technical background, but does utilize the
varied musical experiences of each individual to help him extend his
interest as far as possible. Attendance at various concerts of college
organizations, cultural life events, and visiting artist concerts are
required; to augment listening experiences of student.

MU 102 MUSIC FOR THE NON-MAJOR 3 cr.

Prerequisite: MU 101 or permission of instructor.
A sequel to MU 101 . Course content will vary to cover a wide range
of musical interests.

Music Theory and Composition

MU 111 SIGHT SINGING I 2 cr.

Designed to develop student's skill at interpreting written music
by use of his own voice.

MU112 SIGHT SINGING II 2 cr.

Prerequisite: MU 111 .
Continuing development of skills in areas of Sight Singing I.

MU 113 EAR TRAINING I 1 cr.

Develops dictation skills and notation in following areas: primary

harmonies in all inversions, and melodic dictation with Implied

and actual harmonies.
MU114 EAR TRAINING II 1 cr.

Prerequisite: MU 113.

Continuing development of dictational and notational skills of Ear

Training I.

MU 115 THEORY I 3 cr.

MU 116 THEORY II 3 cr.

MU 215 THEORY III 3 cr.

(Three consecutive semesters.)

Study of compositional devices of 18th and 19th centuries.
Emphasis upon melodic, harmonic, rhythmic, and formal struc-
tures, with occasional reference to contrapuntal implications.

MU 216 THEORY IV 3 cr.

Prerequisites: MU 115, 116,215.

Study of compositional devices of latter half of 19th century and
first half of 20th century.

MU 217 KEYBOARD HARMONY I 1 cr.

Prerequisite: Nominal facility at keyboard.

Designed to develop keyboard skills in student, so he may realize
and produce in sound basic harmonic progressions.

MU 218 KEYBOARD HARMONY II 1 cr.

Prerequisite: MU 217.

Continuation of Keyboard Harmony I, involving chromatic har-
mony and more complex progressions.

MU 304 FORM AND ANALYSIS I 2 cr.

Prerequisite: MU 216.
Thorough study of smaller forms of music.

214 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

MU 305 FORM AND ANALYSIS II 2 cr.

Prerequisite: MU 304.
Thorough study of larger forms of music.

MU 306 COUNTERPOINT I 2 cr.

Prerequisite: MU 216.

After study and analysis of style of 16th Century contrapuntal
writing, student will do original writing using techniques and
devices of period. As time permits, same approach will be made to
explore style of 17th and 18th Century composers.

MU 307 COUNTERPOINT II 2 cr.

Prerequisite: MU 306.

Continuation of study, analysis, and restricted writing of 17th and
18th Century composers. Consideration given to free contrapuntal
techniques used by later composers.

MU 308 FUGUE AND CANON 2 cr.

Prerequisite: MU 306.

Application of contrapuntal techniques within these two specific
forms through analysis, assigned exercises, and creative writing.

MU 309 ORCHESTRATION I 2 cr.

Prerequisite: MU 216.

All instruments of orchestra are studied from viewpoint of their
contribution to total sound of ensemble. Ranges and timbres are
considered, as well as actual arranging of selected music.

MU 310 ORCHESTRATION II

Prerequisite MU 309.
A continuation of Orchestration I.

2cr.

3 cr.

MU315 THEORY V

Prerequisite: MU 216.

Many of harmonic idioms of past half century are considered, such
as: comparative analysis of dissonance: polytonality: polyrhythms;
atonalism and 12-ton system; and microtonalism. Original writing
in these styles required.

MU411 COMPOSITION I 2 cr.

Prerequisite: MU 216.

Instruction in Composition I is, of necessity, highly individualized.
Compositional devices studied through analysis of works by major
composers. Students write original works.

MU 412 COMPOSITION II 2 cr.

Prerequisite: MU 41 1.

Continuation of Composition I. Outstanding works will be pro-
grammed by University organizations.

Music History and Literature

MU 220 MUSIC LITERATURE I 2 cr.

Major works studied and analyzed as to form, style, and historical
placement.

MU 221 MUSIC LITERATURE II

Continuation of Music Literature I.

2cr.

MU 301 HISTORY OF MUSIC I 3 cr.

Study of development of music, from ancient Greek and Roman
cultures through Baroque period. Although approach is historical
one, considerable analytic listening is required.

MU 302 HISTORY OF MUSIC II 3 cr.

Starting in 18th Century, with Haydn and Mozart, History of
Music II is study of the development of music to present.
Analytic listening required through all available sources.

MU 316, 317 LITERATUREOFTHEMAJORI.il 2cr. each

Utterea as independent Study. See MU 482.

MU 320 MUSIC OF THE ANCIENT WORLD 3 cr.

Prerequisites: MU 316, 317.
Concentrated study of music from early Greeks up to Middle

School of Fine Arts - 215
Music and Music Education

MU 321 MUSIC OF THE MIDDLE AGES 3 cr.

Prerequisites: MU 316, 317.

Starting with the Jongleurs, Troubadors, and Trouveres of Earlv
Middle Ages, course deals with literature of music through English
and Burgundian Schools at close of the Middle Ages.

MU 322 RENAISSANCE MUSIC 3 cr.

Prerequisites: MU 316, 317.

Beginning with Ockeghem and ending with Palestrina and his
contemporaries, music literature of this age is sarefully and
thoroughly studied.

MU 323 THE BAROQUE ERA 3 cr.

Prerequisites: MU 301, 302.

Extends from Monteverdi through Bach and Handel, and considers
vocal and instrumental forms, styles, and practices of era.

MU 324 EIGHTEENTH CENTURY MUSIC 3 cr.

Prerequisites: MU 301, 302.

Although Mozart and Haydn comprise greater portion of 18th
Century music. Rococo Period involves D. Scarlatti and C.P.E.
Bach as well.

MU 325 THE EARLY ROMANTIC PERIOD 3 cr.

Prerequisites: MU 301, 302.

Beethoven, Schubert, Rossini, Weber, Mendelssohn, Berlioz, Schu-
mann, and Chopin are major composers to be studied in Early
Romantic Period.

MU 326 THE LATE ROMANTIC PERIOD 3 cr.

Prerequisites: MU 301, 302.

Wagner, Verdi, Glinka, Bruckner, Meyerbeer, Liszt, Gounod,
Brahms, Offenbach. Smetana, J. Strauss, Grieg, Bizet, Moussorg-
sky, Saint-Saens, Tschaikowsky, Massenet, Franck, Borodin,
Rimski-Korsakoff, Wolf, R. Strauss, Mahler, Faure, Puccini,
Dvorak, Mac Dowell, and Elgar are major composers of this study.

MU 353

MU 354

FRENCH DICTION
GERMAN DICTION

2cr.
2cr.
3cr.

MU351

ITALIAN/ENGLISH DICTION

2cr.

MU 420 CONTEMPORARY MUSIC

Prerequisites: MU 301, 302.

Beginning with Debussy, Ravel and other impressionists, touching
on Schoenberg, Stravinsky, Webern, Honneger, Milhaud, et. al.
Contemporary Music ends with today and tomorrow. Various
trends, styles, techniques are noted: judgments are attempted on
more experimental forms; limited predictions of trends are
ventured.

MU 421 AMERICAN MUSIC 3 cr.

Prerequisites: MU 301, 302.

A study of history and literature of music in America from 1600
to present day.

Music Education

MU 311 FUNDAMENTALS OF CONDUCTING 2 cr.

Emphasis placed on fundamental physical skills of conducting
process; various beat patterns are mastered, and elementary score
reading and interpretation considered.

MU 312 CHORAL CONDUCTING 2 cr.

Prerequisite: MU 311.

Provides opportunity for student to apply his basic conducting
techniques to choral music. Each student conducts rest of class in
many of standard choral works of the literature. Includes survey
of suitable literature, organizational problems, voice testing,
rehearsal techniques, program building, interpretation, and diction.

MU 313 INSTRUMENTAL CONDUCTING 2 cr.

Prerequisite: MU 31 1.

Provides student opportunity to apply his basic conducting skills
to various instrumental ensembles. Includes survey of suitable
literature, organizational problems, audition procedures, rehearsal
techniques, program building, and interpretation.

216 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

MU 331 ELEMENTARY METHODS 2 cr.

Includes analytical study of texts, recordings, equipment, instru-
ments, and other materials suitable to musical development of
elementary pupils; proper treatment of child voice; selection, use,
and teaching of rote songs; rhythmic activities and development;
music reading; part singing; planning and organization, guided
observations: and evaluation techniques.

MU 333 SECONDARY METHODS 2 cr.

Includes General Music Class, choral organizations, changing voice,
techniques of instruction, including team teaching and program-
med learning, high school theory courses, high school music
literature courses, scheduling, administrative problems, curriculum
development, evaluation of materials and equipment, evaluative
techniques, and guided observation.

MU 334 INSTRUMENTAL METHODS 2 cr.

Treats understandings, techniques, equipment, and materials neces-
sary to develop an effective instrumental music program in public
schools. Demonstrations and laboratory v\/ork designed to give
student competencies needed to meet successfully various teaching
situations in instrumental music from grades through high school.
Guided observations required.

MU 401 CHORAL SCORE READING 2 cr.

Prerequisites: MU 216, 312.

MU 402 INSTRUMENTAL SCORE READING 2 cr.

Prerequisites: MU 216, 313.

MU 405 PIANO PEDAGOGY 2 cr.

Prerequisites: Junior Standing in Piano, and a piano major or
minor.

Survey of current and significant past developments in teaching of
piano, both privately and in small and large classes. The various
piano methods are analyzed, compared, criticized, and adapted to
each individual's use.

MU 406 VOICE PEDAGOGY 2 cr.

Prerequisites: A voice major or minor, and permission of the
instructor.

Survey of current and past developments in teaching of voice,
both privately and in small and large classes. The various vocal
methods are analyzed, compared, criticized, and adapted to each
individual's use.

MU 407 MASTER CLASS IN ORGAN 2 cr.

Prerequisites: For organ majors only, with instructor's permission.
From time to time the organ instructor will accept from four to
eight organ majors for this course. Every student observes every
other student's instruction, and various techniques of teaching
organ are demonstrated.

MU 408 MARCHING BAND TECHNIQUES 2 cr.

Considers building a band show; alignment of ranks and files;
development of a standard pace of 6 to 5 and 8 to 5; selection of
music; instrumentation; techniques of developing morale; and
fundamentals of uniform design.

ED 421 STUDENT TEACHING 6 cr.

Experience in teaching music at the elementary level; coordination
and visitation by a University faculty member with daily supervision
by a cooperating classroom teacher.

ED 441 STUDENT TEACHING 6 cr.

Experience in teaching music at the secondary level; coordination
and visitation by a University faculty member with daily supervision
by a cooperating classroom teacher.

ED 442 PROFESSIONAL PRACTICUM 2 cr.

An experience which parallels the student teaching and which
includes such activities as professional readings, discussions, observa-
tions and the accumulation and organization of teaching materials.

MU 482 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-6 cr.

Opportunity to pursue special interests beyond the scope of regular

School of Fine Arts -217
Music and Music Education

class offerings. Permission of instructor and approval of department
cfiairperson are required.

Class Instruction

The following courses are designed to acquaint the student
with basic skills in each particular area.

MU 151
MU 152
MU 153
MU 154
MU 155
MU 156
MU 157
MU 158
MU 159
MU 160
MU 161
MU 162
MU 353
MU 354

Class Voice I
Class Voice II
Class Piano I
Class Piano II
Class Strings I
Class Strings II
Class Percussion I
Class Percussion II
Class Brass I
Class Brass II
Class Woodwinds I
Class Woodwinds 1 1
French Diction
German Diction

2 cr.
2 cr.

APPLIED MUSIC
Private Instruction

Private instruction is available in the following performance
areas;

Piano Violin String Bass Oboe Tuba Baritone Horn

Organ Viola Flute Bassoon Percussion Saxophone

Voice Cello Clarinet Trumpet Trombone French Horn

Ensembles

Each ensemble is elected for one credit.

MU 120 Brass Ensemble

MU 121 Chamber Ensembles

MU 122 University Chorale

MU 123 Symphony Band

MU 124 Glee Club

MU 125 Marching Band

MU 126 Music Theater

MU 129 University Symphony

Orchestra
MU 130 String Ensemble
MU 131 University Wind

Ensemble
MU 132 Women's Chorus
MU 133 Woodwind Ensemble

MU 127 Percussion Ensemble MU 134 Oratorio Chorus
MU 128 University Chamber
Orchestra

218 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Graduate School

JOSEPH M. GALLANAR, DEAN

Indiana University of Pennsylvania offers programs leading to
graduate degrees. The primary purposes of the graduate
programs are to encourage excellence in scholarship, to
provide for depth in the student's special field, and to
stimulate enthusiasm for continued cultural and professional
growth.

Graduate credit is issued to students who have been admit-
ted to the Graduate School and who are registered in
graduate courses (those numbered 500 or above).

The graduate programs and courses are listed in the Graduate
School Bulletin, which may be obtained from the Dean of
the Graduate School.

School of Health Services -219

The School of Health Services

JOHN CHELLMAN, DEAN

The School of Health Services provides an opportunity to
educate personnel needed in various health disciplines. The
School offers professional curricula leading to appropriate
baccalaureate degrees for men and women in health and
physical education; respiratory therapy; medical technology;
nursing; and safety management. Indiana University of Penn-
sylvania is affiliated with approved schools and hospitals for
specialized training in all programs of the allied health
professions and nursing.

At present, the School of Health Services includes five
departments:

1. Allied Health Professions

2. Athletic

3. Health and Physical Education

4. Nursing

5. Safety Sciences

In addition, the School of Health Services offers advisement
for an academic concentration in Hospital and Health Care
Administration.

ACADEMIC CONCENTRATION IN HOSPITAL
AND HEALTH CARE ADMINISTRATION

Hospital and Health Care Administration Today

There are over four million individuals involved in providing
health services to the American public. Approximately half of
these are employed by hospitals.

Hospital administrators are in demand in a number of
organizations including the following: general hospitals,
extended-care facilities, health maintenance organizations,
nursing homes, psychiatric hospitals, rehabilitation institu-

220 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

tions, group practice plans, outpatient clinics, welfare depart-
ments, private insurance programs. Blue Cross and Blue Shield
Plans, hospital facility planning agencies, comprehensive health
planning agencies, health departments, federal health agencies,
health and hospital associations, graduate educational pro-
grams and research institutes.

Graduate Programs

Today, thirty-eight universities in the United States, Canada
and Puerto Rico offer graduate degrees in health and hospi-
tal administration. A baccalaureate degree from an accredited
college or university is the primary prerequisite for admis-
sion. Graduate programs leading to a master's degree in
health and hospital administration consist of one to two
years of full-time academic study and may include a period
of up to one year of administrative residency in a hospital or
other health-related organization under the preceptorship of
an administrator. Courses in hospital administration remain
the foundation of the curricula.

Programs may be found in separate university departments
or in such professional schools as medicine, public health, or
business.

Undergraduate Preparation

Although entrance requirements for graduate study vary,
most institutions prefer that the undergraduate program be a
liberal curriculum for the first two years; that the student
select a major curriculum which offers the highest degree of
motivation; and to include courses in accounting, biology.

business administration, economics, psychology, sociology,
statistics, college algebra, and calculus. It is with this general
concept of the curriculum that such students should be
processed through their school, department, and major pro-
gram. As their particular academic interests and abilities
develop during the junior and senior years in regard to
graduate studies in hospital and health care administration,
specific advisement as to the admission criteria for any of
the thirty-eight institutions offering graduate work will be
available through the office of the Dean, School of Health
Services. Bulletins, admission requirements, costs, financial
aid, and general information regarding institutional curricular
emphases and sources of career information are available.
There need be no change in the student's school, department
or major curriculum designation. Students interested in this
concentration should inform their adviser in order that
proper courses may be scheduled.

School of Health Services -221
Allied Health Professions

ALLIED HEALTH PROFESSIONS DEPARTMENT

ALLAN T. ANDREW. CHAIRPERSON

RESPIRATORY THERAPY

Respiratory Therapists assist physicians in the care of patients
who have respiratory system problems or illness that relates to
breathing. Their assistance includes administering gaseous
drugs and executing therapeutic procedures. Included are the
operation and maintenance of specialized equipment.

The program leads to the degree. Bachelor of Science in
Respiratory Therapy. Presented jointly by Indiana University
of Pennsylvania and the Western Pennsylvania Hospital (Pitts-
burgh), the program offers intensive theoretical and applied
knowledge to produce highly-skilled graduates who are pre-
pared to enter the profession as therapists or instructors.

Two academic years of University studies, followed by two
academic years of hospital studies and clinical practice
constitute the program. Beginning with the freshman class of
'76, students must maintain a QPA of 2.0 in Natural Sciences
and Mathematics to qualify for admission into the clinical
years in Respiratory Therapy. While at the University, students
are required to complete the following courses or approved
substitutes, which give a total of 64 credits:

Biology

Bl 105 Cell Biology 4 cr.

Bl 241 General Microbiology 3 cr.

Bl 151 Physiology 3cr.

Chemistry
CH 101-102

Health and Physi
'HP

HP 221
Humanities

AR 101

EN 103

MU 101

101, 102

&201

Or ROTC Option

Social Sciences

Other

302

301

MA 101

BM 201

151

In addition to

junior

and senii

Chemistry I and II for
Health Professions
cal Education
Two activity courses
Human Anatomy

Introduction to Art

or
Introduction to Theater

or
Introduction to Music

English I, II, & III
Approved Elective

Approved Electives

Ed. Psychology

or
A-V Education
Fundamentals of Math
Personnel Management
Medical Physics Lecture
Medical Physics Lab
clinical practice each semester
or years and research projects

8cr.

cr.

or.

cr.

12 cr.

3cr.

1 cr.
during the
during the

222 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

senior year, students, while at the hospital, study the
following subjects:

RT 327 Pharnnacology

RT 328 Intro to Respiratory Therapy

RT 329 & 334 Respiratory Therapy Equipment I

and II
RT 330 Cardiopulmonary Evaluation

RT 335 Nursing Arts

RT 336 Cardiopulmonary Evaluation

RT 427 Special Topics in Respiratory

Therapy
RT 428 Ethics and Administration

RT 429 Respiratory Facilities Design

and Function
RT 434 Respiratory Therapy Seminar

RT 436 Respiratory Therapy Teaching

RT 326, 333, Respiratory Therapy Clinical
426, 433 Practice

Sixty-two credits are awarded for the clinical studies.

MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY

Medical Technologists are highly-skilled members of the
medical care team. They perform a wide range of tests and
studies, whose results aid physicians in diagnosis and treat-
ment. The program of studies presented jointly by Indiana
University and approved hospitals prepares students to enter
the profession.

cr.

Upon completion of the four-year program, the degree of
Bachelor of Science in Medical Technology is granted. The
first three years are devoted to University studies. The
University-wide General Education obligations may be varied
by election of three credits in Humanities and 12 credits in
Social Science.

Required are at least 16 credits in Biology, 24 credits in
Chemistry, a course in Mathematics, and two semesters of
Physics, as follows:
Mathematics

MA 001 Elementary Functions or 3 cr.

higher level substitute
Chemistry

CH 111-112

CH 231-232

CH 323

CH 351

Biology
Bl 105
Bl 120
Bl 361
Biology Electives

Physics

PY 111-112
PY 121-122

NOTE: Biology courses frequently elected:

Bl 281 Parasitology 3 cr.

General Chemistry 1

and

8 cr.

Organic Chemistry 1

and

Bar.

Analytical Methods

4 cr.

Biochemistry

4 cr.

Cell Biology

4cr.

Animal Biology

5cr.

Microbiology
i/es

3cr.
4 cr.

Physics 1 and II

6cr.

Physics 1 and II Laboratory

2 cr.

School of Health Services - 223
Allied Health Professions

1 381

Mycology

3cr.

1 352

Comparative Animal Physiology

3cr.

1 285

Biotechniques

3cr.

1 263

Genetics

3 or.

1 441

General Physiology

3cr.

Clinical Chemistry and

Toxicology
Blood Bank

Following the three academic years of University work, each
student devotes 12 months to studies at an approved hospital
School of Medical Technology to which she/he gains admission
on a competitive basis. Indiana maintains short- and long-term
affiliations with selected hospital schools. The Latrobe Area
Hospital School of Medical Technology provides its program
only in conjunction with Indiana.

The Department provides student counseling and maintains
liaison with hospital schools. However, since not all students
are equally successful in academic studies and since the
hospital schools select and admit the students to their
programs using various criteria, Indiana cannot guarantee
admission to hospital school studies (also known as the
clinical year).

Thirty-two semester hours of credit are earned at the
hospital School of Medical Technology. In addition to
integrated clinical practice, the following subjects are typi-
cally studied;

Urinalysis Histology

Hematology and Coagulation Cytology
Radio-Isotopes Bacteriology

Parasitology and Mycology

Serology

Virology

Completion of college and clinical training is followed by an
examination conducted by the Registry of Medical Technol-
ogy of the American Society of Clinical Pathologists (ASCP).
Successful passage of this examination certifies a student as
an M.T. (Medical Technologist), signifying that she/he is a
professionally qualified laboratory technologist.

224 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

ATHLETIC DEPARTMENT

HERMAN L. SLEDZIK, DIRECTOR: BECK, BETTS, BLACKSMITH,
CAMPISANO, CELTIMIEKS, DAVIS, GODLASKY, HORNFECK,
JOHNSON, LETSO, LISCINSKY, MILL, MOORE, NEAL, PANAIA,
SLONIGER, SUTTON

RUTH PODBIELSKI, ASSOCIATE DIRECTOR: BARTHELEMY,
ELTZ, KORAB, NESBITT.

DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND
PHYSICAL EDUCATION

D. SHELBY BRIGHTWELL, CHAIRPERSON; AIERSTOCK,
BARTHELEMY, BECK, BLACKSMITH, CELTNIEKS, DAKAK,
DAVIS, DICKIE, ELTZ, GODLASKY, HORNFECK, JOHNSON,
KAYLOR, KORAB, LEPLEY, LISCINSKY, LOMMOCK, LUCAS,
MC CAULIFF, MILEFF, MILL, MOORE, NEAL, NESBITT,
PODBIELSKI, SLEDZIK, SLONIGER, SUTTON, TUCKER

The Department of Health and Physical Education provides
ne following services in the University program: (1) instruc-
tion in health and various physical activities is provided thus
serving part of the University's General Education requirement
and leadership in a wide-ranging recreational program is
supplied; (2) the degree of Bachelor of Science in Education is
offered with a major in Health and Physical Education; and (3)
Certification in Education for Safe Living is made available.

CURRICULA

Required Program

University students not in the ROTC program are required to

complete two credits of physical education and two credits in
HP 101, Personal and Community Health. Any two activity
courses offered for General Education physical education
credit may be elected to fulfill the physical education
requirement. (Veterans are given four credits toward the above
requirement. Verification of service must be established.) All
such courses are coeducational. In addition, a few select
courses for men and women are offered.

The requirement may be altered after consultation with the
Chairperson of the Health and Physical Education Depart-
ment, who will act upon the recommendation of the family
physician and/or University physician and the Dean, School
of Health Services.

Regulation uniforms are required for most curricular activities
and may be purchased at Zink Hall and the Memorial Field
House.

B.S. in Education (Health and Physical Education)

Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Science in Educa-
tion with a major in Health and Physical Education include the
University's General Education requirement. Professional Edu-
cation requirements, and the Health and Physical Education
core requirement (36 credits). Upon completion of the degree
program, the student is qualified for a Pennsylvania Provisional
College Certificate in Health and Physical Education, issued by
the Pennsylvania Department of Education in Harrisburg,
Pennsylvania. This certificate is valid for teaching health and
physical education in grades K through 12 in the public schools

School of Health Services - 225
Health and Physical Education

of Pennsylvania. Major students may utilize free eiectives to
specialize in the areas of elementary, secondary, adaptives,
recreation, health, dance, or athletic coaching.

Candidates for the degree program in Health and Physical
Education must demonstrate acceptable cognitive and psycho-
motor qualifications, as well as desirable character and per-
sonality traits. The professional program seeks to foster those
qualities of individual character and competence that are
inherent in personal and professional maturity. These compe-
tencies are evaluated at the end of the sophomore year. The
student is either granted Advanced Standing in the Department
or restricted in his scheduling of advanced courses for not less
than one probationary semester. Continuance in the major
program is based upon the attainment of Department Advanced
Standing.

GENERAL EDUCATION - See catalog under General
Education

PROFESSIONAL THEORY - Major students in Health and
Physical Education must earn credits (26) in the following
courses: HP 142; HP 221; HP 326; HP 342; HP 344; HP 345;
HP 404; HP 441; HP 442.

PROFESSIONAL TECHNIOUES - Students are required ten
(10) credits from among the following courses: HP 200 — 208;
HP 300 - 307; HP 263 or HP 264 or HP 265. (Two laboratory
hours and one lecture hour per week) One-half (.5) credit
courses meet for one-half of the semester only.

PROFESSIONAL EDUCATION - The following are required:

EP 302; FE 302; HP 318; HP 321; HP 341; HP 346; ED 421;
ED 441; ED 442.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

Meeting the General Education Requirement

HP 101 PERSONAL AND COMMUNITY HEALTH 2 cr.

Understanding scientific approach to personal health and develop-
ment of desirable attitudes and practices in all areas of personal
health constitute major part of the course. Cause, prevention, and
control of various diseases are also considered. (2 lecture hrs.l

Co-Educational General Education Activity Courses

Unless otherwise noted, the following courses provide
opportunities for the learning of basic fundamentals and
techniques of the activities. Specific courses may be offered
in the fall, spring, or both semesters. (Two lab hours per week.)

HP 110 BEGINNING SWIMMING 1 cr.

HP 111 ARCHERY - DANCE 1 cr.

HP 112 ARCHERY - FENCING 1 cr.

HP 113 ARCHERY/INTERMEDIATE SWIMMING 1 cr.

HP 114 BADMINTON - FENCING 1 cr.

HP 115 BADMINTON - INTERMEDIATE SWIMMING 1 cr.

-HP 116 BADMINTON - VOLLEYBALL 1 cr.

HP 117 FITNESS - INTERMEDIATE SWIMMING 1 cr.

HP 118 FITNESS - VOLLEYBALL 1 cr.

HP 119 GOLF -BOWLING 1 cr.

HP 120 TENNIS - INTERMEDIATE SWIMMING 1 cr.

HP 121 INTERMEDIATE SWIMMING - VOLLEYBALL 1 cr.

HP 122 CONTEMPORARY (MODERN) DANCE 1 cr.

HP 123 FOLK AND SQUARE DANCE 1 cr.

HP 124 TUMBLING 1 cr.

226 - Indiana University of Pennsylvania

HP 125 HORSEBACK RIDING 1 cr.

HP 126 RESISTIVE EXERCISES 1 cr.

HP 127 FENCING 1 cr.

HP 128 GOLF 1 cr.

HP 129 BADMINTON/TENNIS 1 cr.

HP 134 BOWLING 1 cr.

HP 137 GYMNASTICS 1 cr.

HP 138 FIELD HOCKEY/BASKETBALL 1 cr,

HP 144 RHYTHMS AND MOVEMENT (Music majors only) 1 cr.

HP 145 TENNIS 1 cr.

HP 146 TENNIS/FENCING 1 cr.

•HP 150 ADAPTED PHYSICAL ACTIVITY I 1 cr.

•HP151 ADAPTED PHYSICAL ACTIVITY II 1 cr.

HP 171 WRESTLING/SOCCER 1 cr.

HP 172 BASKETBALL/SOFTBALL 1 cr.

•HP 260 SENIOR LIFESAVING (Prerequisite: advanced 1 cr.

swimmer)

•HP 261 WATER SAFETY INSTRUCTOR (Prerequisite; HP 260) 1 cr.

•HP 262 SCUBA (Prerequisite: HP 260) 1 cr.

•HP 266 BASIC SMALL CRAFT (Prerequisite: intermediate 1 cr.
swimmer)

•All students who are unable to complete the two-credit activity
requirement must register tor this course to obtain special class
assignment or waiver of all or partial credit requirement. Such activity
programs are designed for specific individuals who are medically
restricted from participation in regular activities. Each program will be
both therapeutic and recreational and subject to the approval of the
student's personal physician.

•These courses are also Included in the annual Aquatic School offered
each summer. They require the prerequisite courses listed beside them.

Health and Physical Education Majors

HP 142 FOUNDATIONS OF HEALTH, PHYSICAL 3 cr.

EDUCATION, AND RECREATION
Scientific principles, philosophical considerations, and career oppor-
tunities in professions of health, physical education, and recreation.
(3 lecture hrs.)

HP 200 FUNDAMENTALS OF PHYSICAL ACTIVITY 1 cr.

Indentification of problem areas in basic neuromuscular activities
with subsequent prescriptive programs on an individual basis:
presentation of circuit and interval training programs: weight
training, and isometrics.

HP 201 ARCHERY/BADMINTON/BOWLING 1 cr.

Skill progressions and analyses, in combination with opportunity to
progress individually in skill competency in each activity. Methods
and materials emphasized.

HP 202 BASEBALL .5 cr.

Basic skills, position play and team participation in baseball.
Baseball theory and strategy.

HP 203 BASKETBALL .5 cr.

Team tactics, drill patterns, conditioning programs, and teaching/
coaching methods.

HP 204 FIELD HOCKEY .5 cr.

Skill progressions and analyses, in combination with opportunity to
progress indivudally in skill competency. Methods and materials
emphasized.

HP 205 RHYTHMS AND MOVEMENT 1 cr.

Development of basic movement techniques through rhythmic
experiences, knowledge of music notation and terminology, and
methods in creative presentation.

HP 206 SOFTBALL .5cr.

Skill progressions and analyses, in combination with opportunity to

School of Health Services - 227
Health and Physical Education

progress individually in skill competency. Methods and materials
emphasized.

HP 207 TENNIS .5cr.

Skill progressions and analyses, in combination with opportunity to
progress individually in skill competency. Methods and materials
emphasized.

HP 208 SOCCER .5cr.

Team tactics, drill patterns, teaching and coaching techniques.

HP 221 HUMAN STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION 3 cr.

Anatomical organization of human body, surveyed in sufficient
depth to prepare students for physiology, kinesiology, and adaptive
physical education. (3 lecture hrs.)

HP 263 AQUATICS I 1 cr.

Basic performance techniques in swimming strokes, taught with
special emphasis on teaching methodology.

HP 264 AQUATICS II 1 cr.

Swimming and rescue skills necessary to complete American Red
Cross Senior Lifesaving Course. Emphasis placed upon a broad range
of other aquatic experiences and teaching strategies.

HP 265 AQUATICS 111 1 cr.

Advanced swimming skills and techniques.

HP 300 FOLK AND SQUARE DANCE .5 cr.

Skill progressions and analyses, in combination with opportunity to
progress individually in skill competency in each activity. The role
of folk and square dance in the physical education programs of all
levels considered. Emphasis on methods and materials.

HP 301 MODERN DANCE .5 cr.

Prerequisite: HP 205, Rhythms and Movement

Basic course in the dance, introducing student to experiences in
development of dance as creative art and an educational medium.

HP 302 GYMNASTICS 1 cr.

Conditioning exercises, participation in all phases of gymnastics.

including tumbling, and the coaching of the sport.

HP 303 FOOTBALL .5 cr.

Fundamentals of position play, patterns of offense and defense,
individual skills, and team organization in football.

HP 304 GOLF .5 cr.

Skill progressions and analyses, in combination with opportunity to
progress individually in skill competency. Methods and materials
emphasized.

HP 305 TRACK AND FIELD .5 cr.

Basic movement patterns of running, jumping, and throwing; various
training programs of track and field; rules and regulations. The
students' abilities and skills are developed in order that they may be
better able to teach and/or coach track and field.

HP 306 VOLLEYBALL .5 cr.

Skill progressions and analyses, in combination with opportunity to
progress individually in skill competency. Methods and materials
emphasized.

HP 307 WRESTLING .5 cr.

Basic skills, moves and holds used in college and high school
wrestling.

HP 311 ADVANCED FIELD HOCKEY/VOLLEYBALL 2 cr.

Prerequisite: HP 204, 306

Advanced techniques and game strategy, with opportunities for
individual skill progression. Methods and materials are presented
from aspect of coaching responsibilities in these activities. (1 lecture
& 2 laboratory hrs.)

HP 312 ADVANCED BASKETBALL/SOFTBALL 2 cr.

Prerequisite: HP 203, 206

228 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

HP 314 ADVANCED MODERN DANCE 2 cr.

Prerequisite: Previous dance course or department acceptance of
experience.

Advanced techniques of performance and choreography. Theory
and composition form an integral part of course content. (1 lecture
& 2 laboratory hrs.)

HP 316 VOLLEYBALL OFFICIATING 1 cr.

Prerequisite: HP 306

Officiating techniques and responsibilities in volleyball. Oppor-
tunities for officiating experience and qualification for professional
ratings. (1 lecture & 2 laboratory hours)

HP 317 BASKETBALL OFFICIATING 1 cr.

Prerequisite: HP 203

Officiating techniques and responsibilities in basketball. Oppor-
tunities for officiating experience and qualification for professional
ratings. (1 lecture & 2 laboratory hours)

HP 318 ACTIVITY INTERNSHIP I 1 cr.

Students teach as assistants to a faculty member in two different
activities in physical education (general education). Emphasis on
unit development, class management, leadership skills, and evalua-
tion. (1 lecture & 2 laboratory hrs.)

HP 319 ACTIVITY INTERNSHIP II 1-3 cr.

Prerequisites: HP 318, Advanced Standing, Department Approval
Students may request a teaching/supervisory assignment in specific
professional areas such as adaptives, recreation, dance, elementary,
secondary, and coaching. Assignments must be approved by
department chairperson. (1 lecture & 2 laboratory hrs. — 1 & 2 cr.;
3 lecture hrs. — 3 cr.)

HP 321 METHODS IN ELEMENTARY PHYSICAL 3 cr.

EDUCATION
Study and application of theories of movement, self-testing activi-
ties, rhythms, relays, games, gymnastics suitable for elementary
school child. Observation, materials and methods of teaching and
opportunities for intern teaching provided. (3 lecture hrs.)

HP 326 HEALTH SCIENCE INSTRUCTION 3 cr.

Health curriculum — K — 12, Methods, and Media of Instruction in
Health Science. (3 lecture hrs.)

HP 333 PSYCHOLOGY OF SPORT 2 cr.

The goals of athletics in schools and communities; principles and
responsibilities of the coach; current problems. (2 lecture hrs.)

HP 334 SPORTS OFFICIATING 1 cr.

Techniques of officiating and rules interpretation. Practice in actual
officiating required in several varsity sports. (1 lecture & 2
laboratory hrs.)

HP 336

2cr

ORGANIZATION AND ADMINISTRATION

OF RECREATION
History, theory, and philosophy of recreation; importance of play in
modern world, trends in recreation, problems encountered in
organizing community school programs and principles of leadership.
(2 lecture hrs.)

HP 341 EVALUATION IN HEALTH AND 3 cr.

PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Evaluation theory, instructional objectives, and cognitive test
construction; technical and practical consideration in testing, and
interpretation of test results. (3 lecture hrs.)

HP 342 BIOMECHANICS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: HP 221

Structural considerations of human movement and analyses of
motor performances. (3 lecture hrs.)

HP 343 PHYSIOLOGY OF EXERCISE 2 cr.

Prerequisite: HP 221

Physiological effects of exercise on humans. Major factors of diet,
conditioning, physical fitness, maximum performance level, and
fatigue are considered. (2 lecture hrs.)

HP 344 ADAPTED PHYSICAL EDUCATION

Prerequisite: HP 342

3cr.

School of Health Services - 229
Health and Physical Education

Recognition of structural deviations, corrective exercises, and
physical education programs for a wide range of handicaps. (2
lecture hrs.)

HP 345 BASIC SPORTS MEDICINE 2 cr.

Prerequisite: HP 221

Prevention and care of accidents in sports activities. Significance of
medical examination, conditioning exercise and sound health
practices discussed. Laboratory work includes taping, bandaging, use
of physiotherapy equipment, massage and supervised training room
experience. (2 lecture hrs.)

HP 346 EMERGENCY HEALTH CARE 1 cr.

American Red Cross Standard, Advanced and Instructor's certifica-
tion, and Multi-media Instructor's certification awarded upon
successful completion of this course. (2 lecture hrs.)

HP 349 DANCE REPERTOIRE I 1 cr.

Prerequisite; Department consent

Designed to permit students to be exposed to wide range of dance
repertoire, original choreography and technique. (1 lecture & 2
laboratory hrs.)

HP 350 DANCE REPERTOIRE II 1 cr.

Prerequisite: HP 349

Designed to permit students to explore dance repertoire, choreog-
raphy, and technique beyond HP 349. II lecture & 2 laboratory
hrs.)

HP 404 SCHOOL HEALTH PROGRAMS 3 cr.

Organization of school health programs, relationships, and utiliza-
tion of community resources. (3 lecture hrs.)

HP 405

2cr.

ADMINISTRATION AND TECHNIQUES

OF CAMPING
The growth and significance of camp movement, and understanding
of camping techniques and various types of camp programs
considered. Attention given to all camp activity areas. Study of
outdoor education also. (2 lecture hrs.)

HP 407 ADVANCED SYNCHRONIZED SWIMMING 2 cr.

Prerequisite: Department Consent

Attention given to types of synchronized swimming and accompani-
ment, composition of performance routes and methods of training
swimmers for synchronized swimming. (1 lecture & 2 laboratory
hrs.)

HP 408 GUIDED RESEARCH PROBLEM 2 cr.

Selection and research of a problem pertinent to student interests
and those of the professions of Health, Physical Education, and
Recreation. Classes held on an individual and/or seminar basis.
(Independent Study)

HP 432 ORGANIZATION AND ADMINISTRATION 2 cr.

OF INTRAMURALS AND INTERSCHOLASTICS
History, theory, philosophy, and principles of intramural and
interscholastic athletic programs. (2 lecture hrs.)

HP 433 APPLICATION OF THEORY TO MOTOR 2 cr.

LEARNING
Identification of aspects of motor learning and its similarity and
difference to cognitive and affective learned behavior. Characteris-
tics of children and adolescents. Special emphasis given to the
principles of psychomotor learning. (2 lecture hrs.)

HP 434 ADVANCED SOCCER WORKSHOP 1 cr.

Prerequisite: HP 208, or department acceptance of experience
Principles of attack and defense and their application in group and
team play. The study of team play will be carried out, in the main,
using small sided games. Those participating will be able to observe,
teach, evaluate, and be evaluated. (1 lecture & 2 laboratory hrs.)

HP 441

3cr

PSYCHOSOCIAL IMPLICATIONS FOR

HEALTH, PHYSICAL EDUCATION,

AND RECREATION
A study of variables that influence human performance with
emphasis on psychological and sociological research. (3 lecture hrs.)

230 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

HP 442 SEMINAR IN HEALTH, PHYSICAL 3 cr.

EDUCATION, AND RECREATION
Theory and philosophy of Health, Physical Education, and Recrea-
tion, current issues and problems; Innovative and creative programs,
(3 lecture hrs.)

Certification in Education for Safe Living

A student must complete twelve (12) credits in Safety
Education in order to meet state certification. The only
course that is required is HP 252, while the remaining nine
(9) credits can be selected from the following courses. A
student must include Education for Safe Living on the
application for teaching certification prior to graduation. For
students who have already graduated, contact the office of
the Dean, School of Health Services, for correct procedure.

HP 251 INTRODUCTION TO SAFETY EDUCATION 3 cr.

Recognition of unsafe conditions, practices, and the methods by
which they may be eliminated or curtailed. Overall view of the
safety problems in the home, school, highway, public places, and
work environment. (3 lecture hrs.)

HP 252 DRIVER EDUCATION 3 cr.

Student should have driving ability above the average, evidence of
holding a driver's license, plus at least two years of driving
experience without having a major accident for which the driver is
responsible. Combination of class instruction in traffic safety and
driver training in actual behind-the-wheel practice in a dual control
car. It prepares the student to teach driver education in high school.
Three hours lecture.

HP 253

METHODS AND MATERIALS IN SAFETY
EDUCATION IN THE SECONDARY SCHOOLS
Prerequisites: HP 251 and/or HP 252

3 cr.

Emphasizes the various subjects and school activities in secondary
schools as well as treating it as a separate subject. (3 lecture hrs.)

HP 254 ORGANIZATION AND ADMINISTRATION 3 cr.

OF SAFETY EDUCATION
Prerequisites: HP 251 and/or HP 252

Emphasizes the basic principles of organizing, administering and
supervising safety education procedure in the public schools at all
grade levels; encouraging student activities in the school and
community. 13 lecture hrs.)

HP 255 PSYCHOLOGY OF ACCIDENT PREVENTION 3 cr.

Application of the principles of psychology to the development of
safe behavior in the school, home, community, highway, and
industry. The cause of accidents in relation to attitudes, habits, and
behavior. (3 lecture hrs.)

Required in Elementary Education

EL 314 METHODS IN ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 2 cr.

HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Includes games, rhythms, movement education, tumbling, folk and
square dancing and other skills suitable for elementary school
child. The teaching of health in elementary school emphasized.
Methods, materials and lesson planning are a part of the course.

Required in Music Education

HP 144 RHYTHM & MOVEMENT (Music Major) 1 cr.

AQUATICS SCHOOL COURSE OFFERINGS

Each summer the Department offers the annual Aquatic
School for ten (10) consecutive days. Students must be 17
years of age or older and possess the necessary aquatic

School of Health Services - 231
Health and Physical Education

prerequisites. A fee will be charged which will include room,
three meals a day, use of eqLiipment, accident insurance,
transportation to and from th(! lake and special oik? night
programs. Certifications will be granted by the American Red
Cross, National YMCA, Professional Association of Diving
Instructors, and the American Heart Association upon comple-
tion of courses. All courses may be taken for college credit, if
the student is eligible and pays the additional tuition fee. For
more information, contact the Aquatic Director. 'These
courses are also offered during the school year.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS, AQUATICS SCHOOL

•HP 260 SENIOR LIFESAVING 1 cr.

Prerequisite; Advanced Swimmer

Emphasizes swimming and rescue skills necessary to complete
American Red Cross Senior Lifesaving Course. Certificates awarded
upon successful completion of course. (2 laboratory hrs.)

•HP 261 WATER SAFETY INSTRUCTOR 1 cr.

Prerequisite: HP 260 or other proof of validated Senior Livesaving
Certificate

Emphasizes teaching aspect of skills, techniques and attitudes
necessary in all areas of swimming. Students successfully completing
course are qualified to hold such positions as water front directors,
aquatic directors, and other similar positions. (2 laboratory hrs.)

•HP 262 SCUBA DIVING 1 cr.

Prerequisite: HP 260

Designed to teach necessary skills and proper use of equipment for
underwater swimming. Tanks, regulators, weights, and special
equipment furnished. Student must purchase a mask, fins, and

snorkle (approximately S15.00I. Includes theory as well as practical
work. (2 laboratory hrs.)

•HP 266 BASIC SMALLCRAFT 1 cr.

Prerequisite: Intermediate Swimming Ability

Designed to introduce the use of the canoe, paddle board, and
sailboat. Emphasis is placed on development of boating skills, safety
rescue, and survival procedures. Red Cross smallcraft certification is
granted upon successful completion of the course (2 laboratory
hrs.)

HP 267 BASIC SYNCHRONIZED SWIMMING 1 cr.

Prerequisite: Intermediate Swimming Ability

Activity course designed to assist students in the development of
beginning synchronized swimming skills. YMCA certification is
granted upon successful completion of course requirements. (2
laboratory hrs.)

HP 270 INSTRUCTOR OF HANDICAPPED SWIMMING 1 cr.

Prerequisite: HP 261

Concerned with the learning of skills used to teach swimming to
exceptional children. All handicaps are considered. This course is
important not only in physical education but also for the mentally
retarded, rehabilitation, education, for agency personnel, post
graduate swimming education, also for YMCA's Boys Clubs,
Community Programs, Private Clubs, and Industrial Programs. The
Red Cross certification Instructor of Swimming for the Handi-
capped IS granted upon successful completion of the course. (2
laboratory hrs.)

HP 271 INSTRUCTOR OF SCUBA DIVING 1 cr.

Prerequisite: HP 262

Prepares instructors to teach skin and scuba diving. Emphasis is
placed on teaching methods, use and mechanics of equipment,
safety, diving physics and physiology and advanced diving skills.
Instructor of Scuba Diving certificate granted by the Professional
Association of Diving Instructors upon successful completion of the
course. (2 laboratory hrs.)

232 - Indiana University of Pennsylvania

HP 272 INSTRUCTOR OF CANOEING 1 cr.

Prerequisite: HP 266

Concerned with learning of skills pertinent to teaching canoeing to
beginners. All aspects of canoeing including paddling, repair of
equipment, white water canoeing, safety, survival and teaching
techniques are presented. The Red Cross certification. Canoeing
Instructor is granted upon successful completion of the course. (2
laboratory hrs.)

HP 273 INSTRUCTOR OF SAILING 1 cr.

Prerequisite; HP 266

Concerned with learning of skills pertinent to teaching beginning
sailing. All aspects of sailing are considered including the elements
of sailing, repair of equipment, racing, safety and techniques of
teaching. (2 laboratory hrs.)

HP 274 INSTRUCTOR OF INFANTS AND 1 cr.

PRESCHOOLERS IN SWIMMING
Prerequisite: HP 261, Instructor's Consent

Methods course for preparation of swimming instructors in the
knowledge and skills of teaching young children to swim. YMCA
certifications' Instructor of the Very Young granted upon successful
completion of course requirements. (2 lab hrs.)

HP 275 LIFEGUARDING 1 cr.

Prerequisite: HP 260; Instructor's Consent

A course designed for professional lifeguards which includes
lifeguarding techniques for pools, fresh and saltwater beaches. Red
Cross certification (Pittsburgh Division) granted upon satisfactory
completion of course requirements. (2 laboratory hrs.)

HP 276 COACHING SWIMMING, DIVING, AND 1 cr.

WATER POLO
Prerequisite: HP 261 ; HP 265

A lecture-discussion methods course designed to prepare Physical
Education majors for coaching of swimming, diving, and water polo.
Emphasis is placed on training methods, officiating, nutrition,
scientific principles, and meet and game strategy. (2 laboratory hrs.)

HP 277 ADVANCED SYNCHRONIZED SWIMMING 2 cr.

Prerequisite: HP 267

Designed to go beyond the activity nature of Basic Synchronized
Swimming (HP 267). Students are involved in set design, costumes,
selection of music, making props, selecting themes, and organizing a
program. (1 lecture & 2 laboratory hrs.)

HP 279

2cr

SWIMMING POOL MAINTENANCE

AND CHEMISTRY
Prerequisite: HP 264

A lecture-discussion course designed to teach fundamental water
chemistry, filtration, treatment of water problems, winterization of
outdoor pools and pool management. Emphasis is placed on water
testing and analyzation of chemicals and bacteria. (2 lecture hrs.)

■HP 346 EMERGENCY HEALTH CARE 1 cr.

American Red Cross Standard, Advanced and Instructor's Certifica-
tion, and Multi-media Instructor's certification awarded upon
successful completion of this course. (2 lecture hrs.)

HP 447

1 cr

CARDIAC-PULMONARY RESUSCITATION

(CPR) INSTRUCTOR
Prerequisite: Basic CPR Certification

Study of methods and skills necessary to certify instructors of
cardiopulmonary resusitation and multimedia first aid. Successful
completion of requirements leads to certification by the American
Heart Association and the American Red Cross. (1 lecture hr. and 1
laboratory hr.)

School of Health Services
Nursing

NURSING DEPARTMENT

MARY C. KATZBECK, CHAIRPERSON; ARENZ, BELLAK, BISS,
BLACK, CUNNINGHAM, HART, HOLT, KRESAK, MURRAY, NEW
CAMP, SILLAMAN, SPRENKEL, SUHRIE, THISTLETHWAITE,
WRIGHT

The School of Health Services offers a curriculum leading to
the degree Bachelor of Science in Nursing. Students are
admitted to the nursing major as freshmen. Upon completion
of the program, the graduate is prepared to write the
examination for Pennsylvania licensure as a registered nurse.

The nursing curriculum has as its primary goal the develop-
ment of competent practitioners of professional nursing who
are liberally educated, clinically proficient, and aware of
their social responsibilities as members of the health profes-
sions. The program is designed to provide a broad back-
ground in general education, coupled with the specialized
knowledge and skills required for clinical competency. Addi-
tionally, the curriculum prepares the nurse to practice within
the professional code of nursing ethics, to function effec-
tively as a member of the health-care team, and to utilize
scientific principles in planning and implementing health
care. The objectives ot the nursing program emphasize
learning of concepts of health and illness, and the provision
of health care in various settings withm the community.

The first three semesters are devoted mainly to general
education and courses considered essential to the nursing
major. The first clinical nursing courses begin in the fourth

semester. The courses outlined elsewhere in the Bui
mandatory in English, Humanities, Health and Physical
tion (or ROTO, and Mathematics are in addition
following:

Social Sciences
PC 101
PC 354

Natural Sciences
CH 101 102
Bi 103-104

letin as
Educa-
to the

General Psychology
Developmental Psychology
S. S. electives

Chemistry I and II
General Biology I and II

BI 105

PY 151
BI 150
BI 241
BI 151
Other Requirements

FN 212 Nutrition

Cell Biology and
Medical Physics

Vertebrate Anatomy

Microbiology

Human Physiology

cr.

3 cr.

Clinical experiences in patient care are provided in acute care
centers and other area health agencies throughout the last five
semesters. Men and women are eligible to enroll in the nursing
program.

Registered Nurse students are enrolled in the basic baccalau-
reate program in nursing. They will have a genuine upper
division major in Nursing, and will fulfill all degree require-
ments set by the University and the Nursing Department. The

234 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Registered Nurse student may be awarded advanced standing,
based on prior work completed at an accredited college or
university and on exemption tests at a given point in the
curriculum.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

General education and science courses listed for freshmen
and sophomore years are considered prerequisites for Nursing
courses. Student must achieve Advanced Standing before
enrolling for major nursing courses in the fifth semester.

NU 280 NURSING CORE I 3 cr.

Basic concepts of health and disease, implications for care of
patients with problems common to maintenance of health.

NU 285 NURSING I 3 cr.

Theory and skills necessary for nursing intervention: diagnostic
techniques, assessment: includes clinical practice.

NU 302 NURSING II 4 cr.

Concepts of health, introduction to illness and health problems,
study of patients in hospital and various other settings: emphasis
on medical and surgical aspects of nursing.

NU 303

4 cr.

CLINICAL PRACTICE IN

MEDICAL-SURGICAL NURSING
Guided experience in care of medical-surgical patients in hospital
and clinics: identification of patient's health needs, development
and implementation of nursing care plan.

NU 304 NURSING III 4 cr.

The human reproductive cycle from conception to menopause in
females, and through adolescence in children: normal biophysical
and psychosocial growth and development, common abnormalities.

NU 305 CLINICAL PRACTICE IN MATERNAL-CHILD 4 cr.

NURSING
Guided clinical practice in obstetric and pediatric nursing: exposure
to the family in home, clinic, hospital, plus other health care
settings.

NU 321 JUNIOR SEMINAR I 1 cr.

Organizational relationships: management of clinical unit: team
method. Utilized with Nursing II for student-conducted patient care
presentations.

NU 322 NURSING CORE II 3 cr.

Basic pathophysiological concepts of health and disease: broad
theoretical foundation for the nursing process. Community and
mental health concepts are incorporated.

NU 323 NURSING CORE III 3 cr.

Continuation of concepts of pathophysiology introduced in Nursing
Core II. Community and mental health concepts are incorporated.

NU 324 JUNIOR SEMINAR II 3 cr.

Survey of teaching-learning process as related to clinical nursing,
study of provision of health teaching to community groups.

NU 402 NURSING IV 3 cr.

Concepts of emotional health and illness, psychopathology, thera-
peutic intervention.

NU 40

3 cr.

CLINICAL PRACTICE IN

PSYCHIATRIC NURSING
Guided experience in care of patients with psychiatric illnesses in
home, clinic, hospital and community agencies.

NU 404 NURSING V 3 cr.

Advanced theory in medical and surgical nursing, critical care

nursing.
NU 405 NURSING VI 3 cr.

Study of multiple health problems, public health facilities, health

care on a community level.

School of Health Services - 235
Nursing
Safety Sciences

NU 406 CLINICAL PRACTICE IN 3cr.

COMMUNITY NURSING
Guided clinical experience in caring for patients, particularly in
home, clinic or other public health facility.

NU 424 CLINICAL PRACTICE IN ADVANCED 3 cr.

MEDICAL-SURGICAL NURSING
Guided clinical practice in coronary and intensive care, surgical
nursing, team leadership.

NU 425 SEMINAR IN NURSING 3 cr.

Study of trends in nursing practice, survey of nursing profession,
pre-professional adjustments, philosophy of nursing.

NU 426,427 INDEPENDENT STUDY Varied credits

Internships, individual projects, faculty-supervised study focused
on individual student interest.

NU 430 RESEARCH IN NURSING 3 cr.

Research methodology, development of a research study related to
clinical nursing, writing research paper.

SAFETY SCIENCES DEPARTMENT

ROBERT LAUDA, CHAIRPERSON: LEE, McCLAV

The department offers the degree of Bachelor of Science in
Safety Management with a specialization in occupational
safety and health.

CURRICULA

B. S. in Safety Management

The degree in Safety Management qualifies the student for
professional, administrative, managerial, and supervisory posi-
tions in industry, manufacturing, insurance, transportation,
utility, government, contract construction, trade service
industry and many others. There is an acute need in
Pennsylvania and in the nation for the university educated
occupational safety and health professional. The curriculum
includes a major of 36 credits in Safety Sciences and 18
credits in Business Management. In addition, a number of
elective courses are available in the major and minor fields
that will enable the student to strengthen his primary
interest areas.

REQUIRED UNDER GENERAL EDUCATION - In meeting
the University's General Education requirement, the Safety
Sciences major must include:

CH 101 and 102 Chem for Health and

Home Ec. Majors
PC 101 General Psychology

SO 151 Principles of Sociology

8 cr.

3 cr.
3 cr.

236 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Bl 151

MA Oil and 362

PY 111 and 112

Human Physiology
Elementary Functions
Probability and Statistics
Physics I and 1 1

3 cr.
6 cr.

8 cr.

SAFETY SCIENCES MAJOR - The 36 credits required in
Safety Sciences must be achieved by completing the follow-
ing courses: SA 101, 111, 211, 301, 302, 303, 311, 345,
412, 445, and 450.

BUSINESS MANAGEMENT - The following courses are
required in the Business Management specialty:

BU 101 Bus Org and Mgt 3 cr.

BM 201 Personnel Management 3 cr.

BU 321 Bus Communications 3 cr.

BU 339 Bus Data Processing 3 cr.

BM 383 Principles of Insurance II 3 cr.

BM 480 Practices and Proc of Collective 3 cr.

Bargaining

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

SA 101 INTRODUCTION TO OCCUPATIONAL 3 cr.

SAFETY AND HEALTH MANAGEMENT
Covers theory and history of industrial hazard control, effects of
hazards and failures on organizational control and productivity,
safety and health legislation, accident causation, organization and
administration of safety and health programs, aspects of recogniz-
ing, evaluating, and understanding control of safety and health

hazards, acquiring hazard data, hazard analytical tools, communi-
cation techniques in safety and health management, and the role
of interfacing management systems in hazard control.

SA 111 & 211

3 cr. each

INDUSTRIAL SAFETY

ENGINEERING I & II
Prerequisite: SA 101.

Stresses understanding complexity of industrial hazard control
problem by thoroughly examining elements of safety and health
enumerated in OSHAct promulgated standards. Emphasis given to
plant layout and design, materials handling, machine guarding,
walking and working surfaces, hazardous materials and combusti-
ble liquids, industrial sanitation and environmental controls, com-
pressed-gases and cryogenics, electrical and static electricity haz-
ards, boilers and unfired pressure vessels, protective equipment,
and construction safety.

^ 301 NATURE AND EFFECTS OF 3 cr.

OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH HAZARDS
Prerequisites: SA 101, CH 101, CH 102, SC 105 (Physics for
Health Services Majors).

Provides understanding of primary health hazards found in indus-
try and their effects on human body. Students learn to recognize
hazards involved with air contaminants, noise, heat, radiation,
chemicals on the skin, and other stresses. Emphasis placed on
study of occupational disease, industrial toxicology, and use of
threshold limit values.

1,302 MEASUREMENT AND EVALUATION OF 3 cr.

OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH HAZARDS
Prerequisite: SA 301.

A lecture/laboratory course which provides basic understanding of
techniques used in measuring and evaluating the magnitude of
health hazards in industry. Laboratory sessions provide experience
in air sampling, noise measurement, heat measurement, particle
size analysis, chemical analysis, and evaluation of industrial venti-
lation systems.

School of Health Services - 237
Safety Sciences

SA 303 CONTROL OF OCCUPATIONAL 3 cr.

HEALTH HAZARDS
Prerequisites: SA 301, SA 302.

Study of engineering, administrative, and personal protective
equipment methods of reducing or eliminating hazards to the
health of industrial worker. Topics covered include: industrial
ventilation, noise control, heat control, radiation control, personal
protective equipment, and industrial health program.

SA 311 INDUSTRIAL FIRE PROTECTION 3 cr.

Prerequisites: CH 101, CH 102, SC 105 (Physics for Health
Services Majors), SA 101, SA 211.

Introduces fundamental concepts in protection of industrial
workers and property from fire and explosion. Fire chemistry,
control of ignition sources in industry, and properties of combus-
tible materials discussed. Fire detection and extinguishment
covered along with building construction for fire prevention, fire
codes, and related topics.

SA 345 SYSTEMS SAFETY ANALYSIS 3 cr

Prerequisites: SA 1 1 1 , SA 21 1 .

Takes the approach of systems analysis in accident prevention
economics of system safety, information acquisition, analytical
approaches, systems safety methodology, human factors engineer
ing, mathematics of systems analysis (including statistical methods
boolean algebra, and testing and reliability), comparison of various
analytical methods in the engineering design, inductive and deduc
tive analytical techniques: PRELIMINARY HAZARD ANALYSIS
TASK ANALYSIS, FAILURE MODE AND EFFECT ANALYSIS
FAULT TREE ANALYSIS, and exercises in the application oi
FAULT TREE ANALYSIS to hardware and man/machine sys-
tems. Practical analysis work is accomplished in laboratory ses
sions.

SA 370 FLEET SAFETY 3 cr.

Includes topics Involved with the development and operation of
motor fleet safety programs: driver selection and training, accident

investigation and record keeping, equipment safety features, preven-
tive maintenance and driver incentive programs.

SA412 MEASURING SAFETY AND 3 cr.

HEALTH PROGRAM EFFECTIVENESS
Prerequisite: MA 362, Senior standing.

Teaches reasons and importance for evaluating safety and health
innovations on organization performance, devising measuring sys-.
terns capable of extracting accurate, meaningful data, methods of
collecting, codifying, and processing accident-injury information,
and utilization of data retrieval systems.

SA 445 PRODUCT SAFETY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: SA 345.

Traces flow of applicable legislation dealing with consumerism and
product safety. Corporate liability for product safety emphasized
through case studies. Student familiarized with evolving role of
Consumer Product Safety Commission. Corporate management of
product development and safety detailed with emphasis on sys-
tems safety analysis, standards and product testing.

SA 450 INTERNSHIP 6 cr.

Prerequisite: 24 hours of SA courses.

All Safety Management majors required to take and pass this
course. It will be conducted away from the University at various
industrial enterprises. Students are required to provide their own
transportation. Intended to allow the student to apply hazard
assessment and safety management practices to actual industrial
situations while at same time being exposed to complexities of
industrial environment. The student will spend 12 hours per week
at an industrial location and 2 hours of classroom instruction
weekly where his field assignments will be designated, his prob-
lems will be discussed, and his progress will be evaluated.

School of Home Economics - 239

The School of Home Economics

KATHLEEN JONES, DEAN

At Indiana University of Pennsylvania, Home Economics is
the ongoing investigation of human interaction with the near
environment as it contributes to one's aesthetic, physical,
economic and social-psychological well-being.

The School of Home Economics emphasizes family relations
and human development, resource management and con-
sumer economics, food and nutrition, clothing and textiles,
housing and interior design in its study of the near environ-
ment. Research from all disciplines is utilized.

The objectives of the School of Home Economics at Indiana
University of Pennsylvania are: to guide students in the
development of competencies and skills necessary for profes-
sions in home economics and related fields; to provide
students with a foundation for advanced study in home
economics and related fields; to assist in preparing students
to lead useful lives as individuals, family members, and
citizens.

Curricula in the School contribute to the development of
professional competencies which enable graduates to enter a
diversity of careers in education, business, industry and
community services. The School is composed of three
departments: Home Economics Education, Food and Nutri-
tion and Consumer Services.

The School of Home Economics has been granted full
accreditation status by the American Home Economics Asso-
ciation.

Minors

A minor consisting of 15 to 21 credits in a subject-matter area
of home economics can be arranged for students enrolled in
other schools of the university.

UNIVERSITY GENERAL EDUCATION
REQUIREMENTS

Students enrolled in the School of Home Economics must
meet the University requirements in General Education. The
School requires that the Natural Sciences requirement be
met by the following:

CH 101-102 Chem for Home Economics
and Health Professions
Mathematics (see major Department requirement)
*BI 151 Human Physiology

*BI 241 Microbiology

8 cr.

3 cr.
3 cr.

•Students electing the Textiles, Clothing, Interior Design concentration
in the Consumer Services Department may replace Biology 151 and 241
with a Humanities elective. Biology 151 is not required for Food
Service Management majors.

240 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

In meeting the Social Science requirements, all students in
the School must take Psychology 101, General Psychology.
Students in the Nutrition Education Option and Home
Economics Education Department must elect History 104,
History of the United States and Pennsylvania II. All stu-
dents in the School are encouraged to elect general educa-
tion courses in art, sociology, economics and anthropology.

HOME ECONOMICS EDUCATION DEPARTMENT

ALMA KAZMER, CHAIRPERSON: ANDERSON, BELL, BROWN-
ING, FERNANDEZ, GALLATI, HOVIS, NELSON, RUPERT

If you enjoy working with people of various age levels and
incomes, a number of opportunities await you in Home
Economics Education.

SCHOOL OF HOME ECONOMICS
REQUIREMENTS

In addition to the University requirements, each student is
required to pass one course offered by the departments in
the School he/she is not enrolled in at the time of gradua-
tion. Accepted courses are:

Home Economics Education

HO 218 Child Development
HO 319 Family Relations

Food and Nutrition Department
FN 111 Introduction to Foods
FN 212 Nutrition
FN 351 Nutrition Education
FN 214 Food and Man

Consumer Services

CS 113 Management and Equipment

CS 315 Consumer Economics & Family Finance

cr.

The program of studies leads to a Bachelor of Science in
Education with a Home Economics major and meets certifi-
cation requirements for teaching home economics at all
levels (K— Adults) in the schools of Pennsylvania.

Upon completion of the program, students have the credit
hours necessary for teaching in government sponsored Day
Care and Head Start Programs. Students may also receive the
Nursery-Kindergarten Certificate issued by the Bureau of
Private Academic Schools.

This program also prepares one for varied types of employ-
ment related to improving family life such as home econo-
mists with: state extension services, utility companies, social
service organizations and government agencies.

In addition to University and School requirements, the
student is required to complete the following home eco-
nomics content and professional education courses.

School of Home Economics — 241
Home Economics Education

Home Economics Content Requirements

CS 112 Clothing Construction and Fitting

or
CS 114 Advanced Clothing Construction

CS 113 Managennent and Equipment

CS 214 Apparel Structure and Design

CS 216 Clothing and Man

CS 217 Interior Design

CS 314 Textiles

CS 315 Consumer Economics and

Family Finance
CS 414 Home Management

FN 111 Introduction to Foods

FN 211 Advanced Foods

FN 212 Nutrition

HE 213 Principles of Design (See Special

Courses in Art Department)
HO 218 Child Development

HO 319 Family Relations

HO 412 Nursery School

Elective in any Home Economics area

Professional Education Requirements

HO 250

HO 350

EP 302
LR 301

Introduction to Teaching Vocational
Home Economics Education
Methods of Teaching and School Law
in Vocational Home Economics Educati
Educational Psychology
Audio-Visual Education

3 cr.

3 cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.

3 cr.
3 cr.
3cr.
3 cr.
2cr.

3 cr.
3 cr.
3cr.
3 cr.

3 cr.
3 cr.

FE 302 History and Philosophy of 3 cr.

American Education
ED 431 Student Teaching (for Home Economics) 8 cr.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

(Courses are 3 hours lecture per week unless noted otherwise)

HO 218 CHILD DEVELOPMENT 3 cr.

Prerequisite; PC 101

Focuses on normal development and behavior of children. Survey
made of physical, emotional, social and intellectual development of
children from conception through early adolescence. Pertinent child
development research analyzed.

HO 250 INTRODUCTION TO TEACHING VOCATIONAL 3 cr.

HOME ECONOMICS EDUCATION
Focuses on role of home economics teacher through: study of
students, families, schools and communities; planned observations
of students; selection, use and evaluation of techniques and
materials; lesson planning; mini-teaching experiences and self-
evaluation relative to desired teacher competencies.

HO 319 FAMILY RELATIONS 3 cr.

Prerequisites: PC 101, HO 218 (Major)

Focuses on preparation for marriage and principles of human
relations basic to marital adjustment. Influence of community and
family experiences on personal development and adjustment
emphasized.

HO 350

3cr

METHODS OF TEACHING AND SCHOOL LAW

IN VOCATIONAL HOME ECONOMICS

EDUCATION
Prerequisites: EP 302, HO 250

Orientation to classroom teaching through planned activities in
which students utilize and evaluate varied methods, techniques and

242 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

resources. Emphasis on basic principles of school law and vocational
legislation relating to home economics education.

HO 363 THE FAMILY AND THE COMMUNITY 3 cr.

Study of community contributions and problems that affect family
and contributions of family to community. Investigation of group
dynamics, communication media and other resources aid under-
standing of human behaviors, field work is integral part.

HO 412 NURSERY SCHOOL 3 cr.

Prerequisites: EP 302, HO 218 or equivalent. (Non majors admitted
by permission of department chairman)

Techniques for planning and managing a group of pre-school
children. Participation as teacher assistant provides experience in
applying principles of child guidance and development needed by
teachers in public pre-school centers or secondary school child
development laboratories. (Two hours lecture and six hours labora-
tory per week for one quarter)

HO 421 PRESCHOOL EDUCATION 3 cr.

AGES 2-5 YEARS
Prerequisite: HO 218

Observations and experiences with children are used as basis for
understanding guidance procedures appropriate to pre-school chil-
dren. Program evaluation, curriculum and administration empha-
sized.

HO 422 EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION 3 cr.

Prerequisite: HO 218

Current educational theories and research reviewed in terms of
implication for pre-school and their effect on material, equipment
and activity selection.

HO 423 MARRIAGE AND FAMILY RELATIONS 3 cr.

Emphasis placed on understanding varying family life styles, basics
of marriage and changing family roles. Course is based on the
disciplines of sociology and psychology as they apply to individuals
and families. Effective problem-solving, decision-making and identi-
fication of potential problems in marriage are emphasized.

HO 424 THE FAMILY 3 cr.

Prerequisite: HO 319

Concentrated study of selected areas of family life, with emphasis
on dynamics of family interaction and interpersonal relationships.

HO 425 STUDY TOUR IN FAMILY LIFE 2-6 cr.

Option: Family Life

Opportunity to observe family social structure and values in relation
to cultural background and economic conditions. Culture, class,
ethnic variations in family/kinship systems examined.

Option: Child Development

Opportunity to observe developing child in family life/education

relative to cultural background and economic conditions.

HO 451 WORKSHOP IN HOME ECONOMICS 3 cr.

EDUCATION
Prerequisite: HO 250

Identification and evaluation of current trends and issues in home
economics.

HO 453 INNOVATIVE TEACHING 1-3 cr.

Prerequisite: HO 250

Investigation and evaluation of innovative curriculum materials,
resources and techniques.

HO 454 HOME ECONOMICS EDUCATION FOR ADULTS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: HO 250

Focuses on: background and philosophy of adult education; types
of home economics programs and methods of implementation;
characteristics of adult learners; observation and teaching partici-
pation in adult programs.

ED 431 STUDENT TEACHING (HOME ECONOMICS) 8 cr.

Prerequisite: HO 350

Supervised teaching experience provides opportunities to guide
public school students in the learning process. Self evaluation of
personal and professional growth emphasized. Attendance at Satur-
day seminars required. Meets for one quarter.

School of Home Economics - 243
Consumer Services

•HO 471V CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT IN HOME 3 cr.

ECONOMICS EDUCATION
Prerequisite: HO 250

Various tasks and processes of curriculum development reviewed
and analyzed. Emphasis on realistic decision making and innovative
procedures in developing home economics curriculum.

•HO 472V EVALUATION IN HOME ECONOMICS 3 cr.

Nature and scope of evaluation in contemporary home economics
programs emphasizing use and construction of variety of tests and
devices designed to measure comprehensive home economics educa-
tional objectives.

•Dual level courses

CONSUMER SERVICES DEPARTMENT

SANDRA LYNN, CHAIRPERSON; CRAMER, HANDRAHAN,
SCHMITT, SHARMA, SLACK, STREIFTHAU, VIGGIANO, WOOD

The Consumer Services Department offers the degree of
Bachelor of Science in Home Economics with two options:
Business and Community Service. Both options prepare men
and women for positions where consumer concerns are of
primary importance. Graduates are employed by retailing
establishments, manufacturing companies, utility companies,
extension, social and governmental agencies.
Subject matter courses offered by the department include
those in the areas of textiles, clothing, housing, interior
design, household equipment, consumer and family econom-
ics, and home management. These courses plus selected
electives from other departments in the University may be
utilized for specific programs to meet the particular career
goals of individual students.

Students are encouraged to develop their individual potential
through the application of knowledge gained in the class-
room to job situations and departmental, campus, and
community activities. Some students elect the Field Experi-
ence course which gives them the opportunity to apply their
academic knowledge in an internship or job situation. Stu-
dents may elect a study tour to gain an understanding of
business procedures and/or consumer problems in various
areas of the world. The faculty work closely with students in
planning and integrating their academic program with mean-
ingful experiences outside the classroom.
Course requirements for the degree include 52 credits in

244 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

General Education, required by the University, 36 credits in
Home Economics courses, 18 credits in a concentration of
courses outside the School of Home Economics related to
the student's career goal, and 18 credits in supporting
electives.

Department Requirements

In addition to meeting the University and School require-
ments, all students in the Department must take the follow-
ing:

CS 113 Management and Equipment 3 cr.

CS 315 Family Finance & Consumer Economics 3 cr.
CS 421 Consumer Services Practicum 3 cr.

HE 213 Principles of Design 2 cr.

(See under Special Courses in
Art Department)

Department Elective

CS 451 Field Experience (Internship) 1-12 cr.

HOME ECONOMICS IN BUSINESS OPTIOIM

Students selecting this option may concentrate their home
economics courses in the areas of (1) textiles, clothing,
interior design, or (2) foods, nutrition, and equipment, or
(3) they may choose a variety of courses from all subject
matter areas of home economics. Graduates may be em-
ployed by business organizations producing or selling foods,
clothing, textiles, home furnishings or related products, or
by a department store or utility company.

Textiles, Clothing, Interior Design Concentration

Required:

CS 1 1 2 Fundamentals of Clothing Construction

CS 114

Advanced Clothing Construction

3 cr.

CS 216

Clothing and Man

3 cr.

CS 217

Interior Design

3cr.

CS 314

Textiles

3cr.

CS 318

Fashion Analysis

3cr.

inimum of 6 Credits From the Following:

CS 214

Apparel Structure and Design

3cr.

CS 312

Housing and Man

3cr.

CS 354

Special Problems

3cr.

CS 356

Historic Costume

3cr.

CS 357

Interior Design Studio

3cr.

CS 362

Historic Interiors

3cr.

CS 413

Problems in Consumer Economics

3cr.

CS 416

Problems in Family Finance

3cr.

CS 417

Tailoring

3cr.

CS 433

Study Tour

1-6 cr.

Foods, Nutrition, Equipment Concentration

Required:

FN 211 Advanced Foods 3 cr.

FN 212 Nutrition 3 cr.

FN 357 Special Problems in Foods 3 cr.

FN 362 Experimental Foods 3 cr.

Minimum of 9 Credits From the Following:

FN 214 Man and Food 3 cr.

School of Home Economics - 245
Consumer Services

FN 313 Quantity Food Production and Service

CS 354 Special Problems

FN 355 Diet Therapy

FN 443 Study Tour (Foods)

CS 217 Interior Design

CS 312 Housing and IVIan

Outside Concentration

A minimum of 18 credits is required from the followi
approved Business substitutes:

BU 101 Business Organization and Mgt.
"BE 111 Foundations of Math

BM 201 Personnel Management

BU 221 Intro to Accounting

BU 233 Marketing

BU 251 Intermediate Accounting

BU 321 Business Communications

BU 331 Consumer Behavior

BU 332 Retail Management

BU 333 Principles of Selling

BU 339 Business Data Processing

BM 434 Advertising

Additional Requirements:
"EC 121 Principles of Econ I
EC 122 Principles of Econ II

"May be taken as a General Education requirement.

4 cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.

ng, or

cr.

HOME ECONOMICS IN COMMUNITY SERVICES
OPTION

Courses from all subject matter areas of home economics are
included in this option. Electives may be concentrated in
particular home economics areas. A concentration of courses
is elected in a field of study outside home economics, such
as sociology. Graduates may be employed by the Extension
service or by various governmental and welfare agencies.
Required:

FN 212 Nutrition 3 cr.

CS 112 Clothing Construction and Fitting
or

CS 114 Advanced Clothing and Construction 3 cr.

CS 216 Clothing and Man 3 cr.

CS 312 Housing and Man 3 cr.

CS 314 Textiles 3 cr.

CS 414 Home Management 3 cr.

HO 319 Family Relations 3 cr.

A minimum of 18 credits beyond General Education courses
are to be selected in a field of concentration such as
Sociology and/or Psychology. Suggested courses are:

SO 231 Cont. Social Problems

SO 332 Racial and Cult. Minor

SO 333 Juvenile Delinquency

SO 335 Social Stratification

SO 336 Soc. of Family

SO 338 Intro to Social Work

3 cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.
3 cr.

246 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

SO 339

The Community

3 cr

AN 211

Cultural Anthro.

3 cr

AN 319

Soc. Structure and Function

3cr

PC 300

Psy. of Adjust.

3 cr

PC 351

Intro to Psy. Meas.

3 cr

PC 354

Developmental Psy.

3cr

PC 356

Personality

3cr

PC 357

Abnormal Psy.

3 cr

PC 358

Social Psy.

3 cr

PC 361

Motivation

3cr

PC 373

Adolescent Psy.

3cr

PC 374

Psy. of Adulthood & Old Age

3 cr

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

CS 112

3 cr.

FUNDAMENTALS OF

CLOTHING CONSTRUCTION
Prerequisite: Beginner.

Principles and techniques involved in fundamental clothing con-
struction and fitting are analyzed. Directed laboratory experiences
provide opportunity to solve individual problems in garment
structure through application of principles. For students with no
sewing experience. One hour lecture, 3 hours lab,

CS113 MANAGEMENT AND EQUIPMENT 3 cr.

Problems of consumer concerned with selection, use, and care of
equipment for the home are investigated. Management and deci-
sion making processes relative to administration of a home are
studied. Two 1-hour lectures, one 2-hour lab.

CS114 ADVANCED CLOTHING CONSTRUCTION 3 cr.

Prerequisite: Experience
In-depth study of principles of advanced clothing construction and

fitting are applied and analyzed through couture design. One hour
lecture, 3 hours lab.

CS 214 APPAREL STRUCTURE AND DESIGN 3 cr.

Prerequisite: CS 1 1 2 or CS 1 1 4 or exemption exam.
Garment design achieved by use of flat pattern techniques. An
understanding is developed of the interrelationship of garment
design, fabric, fit, and construction processes. One hour lecture, 3
hours lab.

CS216 CLOTHING AND MAN 3 cr.

Prerequisite: PC 101

Interaction of the aesthetic, cultural, social-psychological, eco-
nomic, managerial, and physical factors in determining the meaning
and use of clothing for the individual and society. Three lecture
hours.

CS217 INTERIOR DESIGN 3 cr.

Prerequisite: HE 213 or equivalent.

Emphasis upon development of knowledgeable consumers in the
selection and design of a home, its furnishings, and its total
environment. Two 1-hour lectures, one 2-hour lab.

CS 312 HOUSING AND MAN 3 cr.

Managerial, sociological, economic, and aesthetic aspects of hous-
ing man are investigated as well as a consideration of the
environment of the home as part of the community. Three hours
lecture. Fall semester only.

CS314 TEXTILES 3 cr.

Prerequisite: Chemistry 102.

Interpretation of basic textile knowledge with emphasis on fiber,
yarn, fabric structures and fabric finishes. Discussions include
importance of factors related to consumer information, protec-
tion, and satisfaction. Two 1-hour lectures, one 2-hour lab.

CS 315

3 cr.

FAMILY FINANCE AND
CONSUMER ECONOMICS
Economic, sociological, and psychological principles are applied to

School of Home Economics - 247
Consumer Services

family money management problems. Sources of consumer aid
and protection are investigated. Three lecture fiours.

CS 318 FASHION ANALYSIS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: CS 216.

A study of fashion as a social force and its economic impact; an
investigation of aspects of fashion merchandise used by various
groups of consumers for apparel and for furnishing the home.
Three lecture hours. Fall semester only.

CS354 SPECIAL PROBLEMS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: Departmental permission.

Particular consumer considerations are independently investigated in
the area of housing, equipment, interior design, clothing, textiles, or
in the management of resources. Students meet with a faculty
member at least 15 hours.

CS 356 HISTORIC COSTUME 3 cr.

Chronological study of historic costume from ancient times to the
present day, emphasizing style details as well as social, economic,
political, religious, and aesthetic influences on design of clothing
worn. Three lecture hours. Fall semester only, odd year.

CS 357 INTERIOR DESIGN STUDIO 3 cr.

Prerequisite: CS 217.

Creative solutions to problems in interior environments empha-
sized. Field trips to museums, furniture factories, stores and
private residences included. One hour lecture, 4 laboratory hours.
Spring semester only.

CS 362 HISTORIC INTERIORS 3 cr.

Chronological study from ancient times to the present of the
dominant influences and characteristics of historical interiors,
furniture and ornamental design. Emphasis placed upon style detail
and its relationship to social, economic, political, religious and
aesthetic influence; and to the contemporary scene. Three lecture
hours. Spring semester only, odd year.

CS413 PROBLEMS IN CONSUMER ECONOMICS 3 cr.

Prerequisite: CS 315 or Economics.

Problems in consumer expenditures studied with emphasis given to
affects of current economic and social forces. Governmental and
private agencies which aid the consumer are reviewed. Individual
investigations required. Three lecture hours. Fall semester only.

CS414 HOME MANAGEMENT 3 cr.

Management as a system, decision-making and utilization of
resources as they relate to various family situations are studied. The
importance of recognizing group as well as individual needs is
stressed. Laboratory fee. Two one-hour lectures, one two-hour lab.

CS416 PROBLEMS IN FAMILY FINANCE 3 cr.

Prerequisite: CS 315.

More advanced problems in personal and family finance are
studied. Three lecture hours. Spring semester only.

CS417 TAILORING 3 cr.

Prerequisite: CS 112 or CS 114.

Various tailoring methods are studied and applied in the selection,
fitting and construction of a tailored garment. Consumer problems
in the selection of ready-to-wear apparel are investigated. Fall
semester only. One hour lecture; 3 hours lab.

CS 421 CONSUMER SERVICES PRACTICUM 3 cr.

Applies knowledge gained in Home Economics and supporting
courses to individual vocational goals. Stress is placed upon
independent research, analytical thinking and communication
skills.

CS 433 STUDY TOUR 1-6 cr.

Opportunity is provided to visit business establishments and
cultural centers concerned with household equipment, furnishings,
textiles, clothing, and housing abroad or in America. Museums,
factories, designer's showrooms, distribution centers, stores, cul-
tural events and seminars are included. Upper standing level.

248 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

CS451 FIELD EXPERIENCE 1-12cr.

Prerequisites: Approval of instructor and department chairperson;
upper level standing.

Field experience related to the student's major area of study with
objectives supervised experience, and evaluation. Course may be
repeated up to a total of 12 hours.

FOOD AND NUTRITION DEPARTMENT

ALLEN M. WOODS, CHAIRPERSON: BERTHY, CESSNA,
DAHLHEIMER, GRESSLEY, SIMKINS, STAHLMAN, STEINER

Interesting work, good salaries and opportunity for advance-
ment in positions that give meaning, satisfaction and a
purpose in life await young men and women who prepare
for careers in the growing fields of dietetics, food service
management, and educational food services.

Courses offered by the Food and Nutrition Department are
planned to train the student as a professional to meet the
challenge of this growing industry, which includes not only
the commercial food service and hospitality facets of the
industry, but hospital and educational segments as well.

The prime requisites for success in the field of foods and
nutrition are an interest in people, an artistic appreciation of
quality food, a realization of the need for good nutrition,
and a knowledge of sound business principles.

This department offers the following three options:
Nutrition Education Option

Graduates are prepared to manage the school food service
programs; to provide meals with optimum nourishment to
school children, to the elderly, to child care centers, or to any
of the many nutrition feeding programs and to render
professional service to teachers concerning the teaching of
nutrition. This program meets Pennsylvania Department of
Education certification requirements for a Nutrition Program
Specialist (Education Specialist I).

School of Home Economics — 249
Food and Nutrition

Requirements for the American Dietetic Association intern-
ship can also be met by taking additional elective courses.

Dietetic Option

This program prepares the student to enter management in the
dietary department in hospitals, business and institutional
establishments. Requirements for an American Dietetic Associ-
ation internship are met. The goal of students in this option
should be an internship and American Dietetic Association
registration.

Food Service Management Option

This program is planned to prepare graduates for manage-
ment positions with establishments providing food service to
the general public. Graduates have competencies in the areas
of nutrition and food management as well as in business.

In addition to University and School requirements the
following courses are required.

Food and Nutrition — All Options

FN 111 Introduction to Foods

FN 21 1 Advanced Foods

FN 313 Quantity Food Production and Service

FN 356 Food Service Personnel and

Administration
FN 358 Food Service Equipment and Layout
FN 359 Quantity Food Purchasing
FN 362 Experimental Foods
FN 364 Methods of Teaching
BU 221 Intro to Accounting

Nutrition Education and Dietetics

Bl 151 Human Physiology

EP 302 Educational Psychology

FN 212 Nutrition

FN 402 Nutrition and Community Health

Nutrition Education

ED 433 School Law

LR 301
FE 302

FN 408
FN 321

Audio Visual Education

History and Philosophy of American

Education

School Foodservice Management

Professional Employment Practicum

3cr.

CO 200

3cr.

BU 101

4cr.

BU 235

3cr.

BU 233

BM480

3cr.

FN 351

3cr.

FN 404

3cr.

FN 406

3cr.

Dietetics

CO 200 Intro to Computers

CH 355 Biochemistry and Nutrition

FN 355 Nutrition In Disease

Food Service Management

Intro to Computers

Business Organization and Management

Business Law I

Marketing

The Practices and Processes of

Collective Bargaining

Nutrition Education

Hospitality Management Seminar

Catering Management

cr.

250 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

y FN 111 INTRODUCTION TO FOODS 3 cr.

Basic principles of food preparation, including use of equipment,
menu planning, marketing and table service for family meals. Two
hours lecture and 2 hours of laboratory work and/or demonstration
per week.

FN 211 ADVANCED FOODS 3 cr.

Prerequisites: FN 1 1 1 , CH 102 or concurrently.
An in-depth study of food preparation, including food preserva-
tion, protein, carbohydrate and fat cookery. Two hours lecture
and 3 hours laboratory per week.

FN 212 NUTRITION 3 cr.

Prerequisites: CH 102, Bl 151 or concurrently.
Sources and functions of nutrients and interdependence of dietary
essentials and nutritive value of an optimum diet are studied.
Attention given to varied conditions in human life. Three lecture
hours per week.

FN 214 MAN AND FOOD 3 cr.

Prerequisites: PC 201 or SO 151 or AN 110.

Exploration of the economic, biological, psychological, social and
aesthetic significance of food for individuals, families and society.
Especially recommended for non-majors but is offered as an
elective for majors in the School of Home Economics. Three
lecture hours per week.

FN 313

4cr

QUANTITY FOOD PRODUCTION AND

SERVICE
Prerequisites: FN 21 1 and 212.

A basic course in quantity food production with experience in
planning purchasing, preparing and serving nutritionally adequate
meals. Requirements of National School Lunch program emphasized
in satellite and on-premise feeding.

FN 321 PROFESSIONAL EMPLOYMENT PRACTICUM 0 cr.

Prerequisites: FN 313 plus 60 credits.

Junior or sophomore summer is used for an employment experi-
ence in an approved food service facility. Students seek their own
position. Assistance and guidance given by department chairman.

FN 351 NUTRITION EDUCATION 3 cr.

Study of the functional knowledge of nutritional concepts directed
toward improved food habits and nutritional health. Three lecture
hours per week.

FN 355 NUTRITION IN DISEASE 3 cr.

Prerequisites: FN 212, CH 102; Bl 151.

Modification of normal adequate diet to meet nutritional needs in
pathological conditions requiring special dietary treatment.
Advanced nutrition study. Three lecture hours per week. Fall
semester.

FN 356 FOOD SERVICE ADMINISTRATION 3 cr.

Prerequisites: PC 201, FN 313, 201 and BE 360.
Organization and administration of food service business, including
personnel policies, work simplification, cost controls, supervision
and sanitation.

FN 357 SPECIAL PROBLEMS IN FOODS 3 cr.

Prerequisites: FN 211.

Individual problems in foods investigated with emphasis on identi-
fied weaknesses in student's knowledge of food. Four hours per
week.

FN 358 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT AND LAYOUT 3 cr.

Prerequisite: FN 313.

Selection and layout of food service equipment in relation to
production, work flow and efficient management. Field trips permit
investigation of a variety of layouts. Three hours per week. Fall
semester.

School of Home Economics — 251
Food and Nutrition

FN 359 QUANTITY FOOD PURCHASING 3 cr.

Prerequisites: FN 313 or concurrently.

Course includes sources, standards of quality, grades, methods of
purcfiase and storage of various foods. Ennphasis is given to the
development of purchasing policies and procedures. Spring semester.

FN 362 EXPERIMENTAL FOODS 3 cr.

Prerequisites: FN 211, 212 and CH 102.

Study of foods based on scientific methods wherein physical and
chemical principles are observed. Professional demonstration tech-
niques are included. Four hours per week.

FN 364 METHODS OF TEACHING 3 cr.

Current teaching techniques and resource materials in nutrition
education emphasized. Both classroom teaching and on-the-job
training programs are included. Three lecture hours per week.

FN 401 FOOD MANAGEMENT COST CONTROLS 3 cr.

Food, beverage and labor cost controls for restaurants, school
lunch programs and health care feeding facilities are studied
including relationships between budgetary information and mana-
gerial decision making In large food service operations.

FN 402 NUTRITION AND COMMUNITY HEALTH 3 cr.

Prerequisite: FN 212.

Nutritional implications of both good and poor nutrition for all
age groups in home and community situations are studied. Cor-
rective and preventive measures emphasized. Spring semester.

FN 404 HOSPITALITY MANAGEMENT SEMINAR 3 cr.

Psychological and sociological aspects of serving public are con-
sidered along with current management techniques to provide
student with a professional and technological insight of this
rapidly growing industry.

FN 406 CATERING MANAGEMENT 3 cr.

Profitable organization, preparation, and service of catered food
both on and off the premises is main focus of course.

3cr.

FN 408 SCHOOL FOODSERVICE MANAGEMENT

Prerequisites: FN 313, 358, 364

Includes the state and federal history of school foodservice,
legislation affecting the program, funding, government donated
commodities, federal inspection, and application and claim forms.
Field trips for observation and participation in school foodservice
operations at approved centers will be arranged.

FN 433 EDUCATION STUDY TOUR IN FOODS 2-6 cr.

Comprehensive program of directed activities permits first hand
knowledge of growing, processing, marketing and preparation of
foods. The historical and cultural aspects of food are studied. Visits
to food markets, catering schools, research centers, famous restau-
rants, etc., are included.

Addendum: White uniforms including white shoes are required for all
lab courses where food is prepared. Students must meet the profes-
sional dress requirements of the department.

MILITARY SCIENCE

LTC ANTHONY F. LENZl, CHAIRPERSON: MAJ THOMAS L.
KISTNER, CPT DAVID L. REIMOLD, CPT EDWARD O. WALSH,
MSG RAYMOND C. BROADBENT, MSG OLNEY A. KNUDTSON,
SSG DELMOS P. PHILLIPS, SSG RONALD R. BEDNARSKI, SSG
MARTIN J. PALGUT

Indiana University of Pennsylvania is authorized a Senior
Reserve Officers' Training Corps (ROTO unit. The ROTC
program offers to both men and women the opportunity to
learn and practice leadership and managerial techniques that
will prove beneficial in all life's future endeavors; to obtain
credits which count toward graduation; and to those who
choose to complete the total program, a commission as a
second lieutenant in the US Army.

Regular ROTC classes for two semesters satisfy the mandatory
University requirement for taking Health and Physical Educa-
tion classes.

ENROLLMENT

The program is broken into two phases: the Basic Course
(freshman and sophomore years) and the Advanced Course
(junior and senior years). Enrollment in any of the freshman
or sophomore level ROTC courses (MS 101, MS 102, MS 203,
MS 204 or MS 996 through MS 999) in no way obligates or
commits the student to any military service or any further
ROTC courses. These courses are offered on the same basis as
other academic courses at lUP with the privilege of with-
drawina at anv time.

Military Science - 253

REQUIREMENTS FOR ENROLLMENT

The general requirements for enrollment m ROTC are that the
student be accepted by the University as a regular enrolled
student, be a citizen of the United States, physically qualified,
not less than 14 years of age, but 27 or less at anticipated
graduation date. Veterans and junior ROTC graduates may
receive exemptions from the Basic ROTC Course as approved
by the PMS. For continuation in the ROTC during the junior
and senior years, the student must have a 2.0 grade point
average in his academic area, successfully completed require-
ments for the Basic ROTC Course, pass a physical examina-
tion, and be accepted by the Professor of Military Science
(PMS). Advanced Course students must agree in writing to
complete the junior and senior years since they will receive
SI 00 a month subsistence during these school years.

WHAT ROTC OFFERS

Equipment, ROTC textbooks and uniforms are issued without
cost to enrolled students.

Students formally enrolled in the Advanced Course (MS 305,
MS 306, MS 407 and MS 408) are paid a subsistence allowance
(currently $100 a month) during the school year.

Training in leadership and managerial techniques with oppor-
tunities to develop these techniques with practical experiences.

Training in other practical skills such as scuba diving,
adventure training, rappelling, marksmanship and orienteering.

Opportunities to examine the military profession in detail.
This includes the Regular Army, National Guard, and Army
Reserve.

If students so desire and are accepted into the Advanced
Course, they will receive commissions as Second Lieutenants
upon graduation from the University.

MILITARY SCIENCE CURRICULUM

REGULAR BASIC COURSE - The first two years of military
science provide a background of the historical role of military
forces as well as current national military objectives. In
addition, basic leadership is developed and certain skills are
taught such as adventure training, survival training, map
reading, scuba diving, rappelling and marksmanship.

MS 101 WORLD MILITARY HISTORY 2 cr.

A study of the relationship and impact of warfare and military
forces on the development of the world. This includes the
interaction of military forces on the social, economical, and
technological development of the world as well as a study of
strategy, tactics and personalities involved in the major wars. Also,
see Leadership Laboratory.

MS 102 AMERICAN MILITARY HISTORY 2 or.

Study of the evolution of American military institutions and
policies and their relationship to society from colonial times to
present. Included will be studies of the major wars, their strategy
and their impact as well as the personalities involved. Also, see
Leadership Laboratory.

254 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

3 203 FUNDAMENTALS OF TACTICAL OPERATIONS 2 cr.

AND TERRAIN ANALYSIS AND MILITARY

TOPOGRAPHY
Organization, techniques, resources and capabilities involved in
conducting small unit tactical operations. Emphasis is on leadership,
organization, and management techniques needed to cause a group
of people to accomplish specific objectives. The use of military
maps to determine topographic features, conduct land navigation
and perform terrain analysis will be covered. Also, see Leadership
Laboratory.

3 204 NATIONAL SECURITY AND FUNDAMENTALS 2 cr.

OF MILITARY TOPOGRAPHY
Study of national security concepts, policies and the national
decision making process with emphasis on national resources,
national will, and economic factors. Included will be a study of
nuclear and conventional response options. Fundamentals of mili-
tary topography will complete the semester. Also, see Leadership
Laboratory.

OPTIONAL BASIC COURSE - Designed for freshman and
sophomore students who find that their academic load is too
heavy for them to take the regular Basic Course but still desire
to participate in the ROTC program. This option enables the
student to enroll in only one class per week in ROTC. Only
the Leadership Laboratory class is taken. (Contents of this
class is listed below.) Completion of optional Basic Course in
freshman and sophomore years will qualify the student to
enroll in the Advanced Course should he desire to do so.
Academic credit toward graduation is not granted, nor is the
University requirement for Health and Physical Education
satisfied by taking this option as it is for the regular Basic

Course. Course identification for freshmen and sophomores is
MS 996, MS 997 and MS 998, MS 999, respectively.

ADVANCED COURSE - The last two years constitute the
Advanced Course of instruction for both men and women who
desire a commission as a Second Lieutenant in the Army of
the United States. (Either the Army Reserve, National Guard
or, for selected students, the Regular Army). This phase is
composed of studies in advanced leadership and management,
tactics, military law, psychological, physiological and social
factors which affect human behavior and modern instructional
and training techniques. Practical application is the rule and
students have the opportunity to practice and polish their
skills. Participation in the Advanced Course will earn the
student approximately $2,400 between $100 a month subsis-
tence and pay for summer camp ($1,800 is not taxable).

MS 305

3 cr.

FUNDAMENTALS OF LEADERSHIP AND

MODERN LEARNING/TEACHING

RELATIONSHIP
Study in practical application of principles of Leadership/
Management as applied in classroom and field to include case
studies in psychological, physiological, and sociological factors
which affect human behavior; individual and group solution of
leadership problems common to small units. Also, see Leadership
Laboratory.

S 306 STUDY OF ADVANCE LEADER; PLANNING 3 cr.

AND EXECUTION OF MODERN COMBAT
OPERATIONS

Analysis of leader's role in directing and coordinating efforts of
individuals and small units in execution of offensive and defensive

Military Science - 255

tactical missions, to include command and control systems, the
military team, and intelligence gathering. Also, see Leadership
Laboratory.

MS 407 MANAGEMENT OF THE MILITARY COMPLEX 3 cr.

TO INCLUDE FUNDAMENTALS OF MILITARY
AND INTERNATIONAL LAW
Study of the various managerial elements needed to effectively
control a military organization and their techniques used to
accomplish these functions. Studies in military law and international
law prepares the students for his legal responsibilities.

MS 408 SEMINAR IN MILITARY ANALYSIS 3 cr.

AND MANAGEMENT
Contemporary analysis of use of military in world affairs to
include importance of strategic mobility and neutralization of
insurgent movements. Selected management problems and situa-
tions will be presented as they relate to military justice, adminis-
tration, and obligation and responsibilities of an officer. Also, see
Leadership Laboratory.

LEADERSHIP LABORATORY (one afternoon per week) 0 cr.

A practical experience designed for the attainment and application
of leadership principles. Concurrently scheduled in conjunction
with all Military Science courses, it provides for articulation of
students from the basic experience and development of the
individual to the application of responsibilities and professional
experience in a meaningful environment.

SUMMER CAMP 0 cr.

Students attend a six-week summer camp upon completion of the
first year of the Advanced Course. Time at camp is devoted to
practical application of principles and theories taught during the
preceding school years. While at camp, each student receives
lodging, subsistence, uniforms, medical care, reimbursement for
travel and pay in amount of one-half the pay of a second
lieutenant per month.

0-<:i>J-

256 - Indiana University of Pennsylvania

BOARD OF STATE COLLEGE

AND UNIVERSITY DIRECTORS

ARTHUR B. SINKLER, CHAIRMAN Lancaster

MRS. PATRICIA M. COGHLAN Beaver Falls

EDWARD L. DARDANELL Monroeville

ANDREW N. FARNESE, ESQ Philadelphia

LAURENCE FENNINGER JR Riegelsville

MISS REBECCA F. GROSS Lock Haven

JO HAYS State College

MRS. CARYL M. KLINE Pittsburgh

PERCY D. MITCHELL Williamsport

IRVING O. MURPHY, ESQ Erie

BERNARD F. SCHERER Greensburg

JUDGE HARVEY N. SCHMIDT Philadelphia

CHARLES S. STONE Philadelphia

DR. JOHN B. VELTRI Pittsburgh

lUP BOARD OF TRUSTEES

SENATOR PATRICK J. STAPLETON, President Indiana

PATRICK F. MCCARTHY, Vice President Punxsutawney

FRANK GORELL, SR., Secretary Indiana

A. J. DEREUME, Treasurer Punxsutawney

THOMAS R. BRULE Indiana

MIRIAM K. LUDWIG North Braddock

JUDITH G. MILADIN Providence, R. I.

DONALD W. MINTEER Worthington

E. JAMES TRIMARCHI Indiana

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Texts

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "Undergraduate catalog"

See other formats